JP5855289B2 - Communication system, base station and mobile terminal - Google Patents

Communication system, base station and mobile terminal Download PDF

Info

Publication number
JP5855289B2
JP5855289B2 JP2015010358A JP2015010358A JP5855289B2 JP 5855289 B2 JP5855289 B2 JP 5855289B2 JP 2015010358 A JP2015010358 A JP 2015010358A JP 2015010358 A JP2015010358 A JP 2015010358A JP 5855289 B2 JP5855289 B2 JP 5855289B2
Authority
JP
Japan
Prior art keywords
mbms
mobile terminal
mbsfn
cell
paging
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Active
Application number
JP2015010358A
Other languages
Japanese (ja)
Other versions
JP2015073336A (en
Inventor
前田 美保
美保 前田
望月 満
満 望月
靖 岩根
靖 岩根
大我 三枝
大我 三枝
Original Assignee
三菱電機株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority to JP2007324525 priority Critical
Priority to JP2007324525 priority
Application filed by 三菱電機株式会社 filed Critical 三菱電機株式会社
Priority to JP2015010358A priority patent/JP5855289B2/en
Publication of JP2015073336A publication Critical patent/JP2015073336A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of JP5855289B2 publication Critical patent/JP5855289B2/en
Application status is Active legal-status Critical
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L65/00Network arrangements or protocols for real-time communications
    • H04L65/40Services or applications
    • H04L65/4069Services related to one way streaming
    • H04L65/4076Multicast or broadcast
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0003Two-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0005Time-frequency
    • H04L5/0007Time-frequency the frequencies being orthogonal, e.g. OFDM(A), DMT
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0053Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management, e.g. wireless traffic scheduling or selection or allocation of wireless resources
    • H04W72/005Resource management for broadcast services
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management, e.g. wireless traffic scheduling or selection or allocation of wireless resources
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation where an allocation plan is defined based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0466Wireless resource allocation where an allocation plan is defined based on the type of the allocated resource the resource being a scrambling code
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
    • H04W68/12Inter-network notification

Description

  The present invention relates to a mobile communication system in which a base station performs radio communication with a plurality of mobile terminals, and in particular, mobile communication capable of providing a broadcast type multimedia service (MBMS: Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service) to mobile terminals. It is about the system.

  Among the communication systems called the third generation, the W-CDMA (Wideband Code division Multiple Access) system has been commercialized in Japan since 2001. In addition, by adding a packet transmission channel (HS-DSCH: High Speed-Downlink Shared Channel) to the downlink (dedicated data channel, dedicated control channel), the speed of data transmission using the downlink is further increased. Realized HSDPA (High Speed Down Link Packet Access) service has been started. Furthermore, the HSUPA (High Speed Up Link Packet Access) method is also standardized in order to further increase the speed of data transmission in the uplink direction. W-CDMA is a communication method defined by 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project), which is a standardization organization for mobile communication systems, and standardized release 7 editions are compiled.

  In 3GPP, as a communication method different from W-CDMA, “Long Term Evolution LTE” is used for the radio section, and “System Architecture Evolution” (System Architecture Evolution) is used for the entire system configuration including the core network. A new communication method called “Evolution SAE” is being studied. In LTE, the access scheme, radio channel configuration and protocol are completely different from those of the current W-CDMA (HSDPA / HSUPA). For example, W-CDMA uses code division multiple access (W-CDMA), whereas LTE uses OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) in the downlink direction and SC-FDMA (Single in the uplink direction). Career Frequency Division Multiple Access) is used. The bandwidth is selectable for each base station within 1.4 / 3/5/10/15/20 MHz in LTE, whereas W-CDMA is 5 MHz. Also, LTE does not include circuit switching as in W-CDMA, and is only a packet communication system.

  LTE is defined as an independent radio access network different from the W-CDMA network because the communication system is configured using a new core network different from the W-CDMA core network (GPRS). Therefore, in order to distinguish from a W-CDMA communication system, in an LTE communication system, a base station (Base station) that communicates with a mobile terminal (UE: User Equipment) is an eNB (E-UTRAN NodeB), and a plurality of base stations. A base station controller (Radio Network Controller) that exchanges control data and user data with each other is called an EPC (Evolved Packet Core) (sometimes called an aGW: Access Gateway). In the LTE communication system, a unicast service and an E-MBMS service (Evolved Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service) are provided. The E-MBMS service is a broadcast-type multimedia service and may be simply referred to as MBMS. Mass broadcast contents such as news, weather forecasts, and mobile broadcasts are transmitted to a plurality of mobile terminals. This is also called a point-to-multipoint service.

  Non-Patent Document 1 describes the current decisions regarding the overall architecture of the LTE system in 3GPP. The overall architecture (Chapter 4 of Non-Patent Document 1) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration of an LTE communication system. In FIG. 1, a control protocol (for example, RRC (Radio Resource Management)) and a user plane (for example, PDCP: Packet Data Convergence Protocol, RLC: Radio Link Control, MAC: Medium Access Control, PHY: Physical layer) for the mobile terminal 101 are based. If terminated at station 102, Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRAN) is composed of one or more base stations 102. The base station 102 performs scheduling (Scheduling) and transmission of a paging signal (also referred to as a paging message or paging message) notified from the MME 103 (Mobility Management Entity). Base stations 102 are connected to each other via an X2 interface. The base station 102 is connected to the EPC (Evolved Packet Core) via the S1 interface. More specifically, the base station 102 is connected to the MME 103 (Mobility Management Entity) via the S1_MME interface, and is connected to the S-GW 104 (Serving Gateway) via the S1_U interface. The The MME 103 distributes the paging signal to a plurality or a single base station 102. Further, the MME 103 performs mobility control (Mobility control) in an idle state. The S-GW 104 transmits / receives user data to / from one or a plurality of base stations 102.

  Non-Patent Document 1 (Chapter 5) describes the current decisions regarding the frame configuration in the LTE system in 3GPP. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of a radio frame used in the LTE communication system. In FIG. 2, one radio frame is 10 ms. The radio frame is divided into 10 equally sized sub-frames. The subframe is divided into two equally sized slots. A downlink synchronization channel (SCH) is included in the first (# 0) and sixth (# 5) subframes for each frame. The synchronization signal includes a first synchronization channel (Primary Synchronization Channel: P-SCH) and a second synchronization channel (Secondary Synchronization Channel: S-SCH). Channels other than MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) and channels other than MBSFN are multiplexed on a subframe basis. Hereinafter, a subframe for MBSFN transmission is referred to as an MBSFN sub-frame. Non-Patent Document 2 describes a signaling example at the time of MBSFN subframe allocation. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the MBSFN frame. In FIG. 3, an MBSFN subframe is allocated for each MBSFN frame (MBSFN frame). A set of MBSFN frames (MBSFN frame Cluster) is scheduled. A repetition period (Repetition Period) of a set of MBSFN frames is assigned.

  Non-Patent Document 1 describes the current decisions regarding the channel configuration in the LTE system in 3GPP. A physical channel (Chapter 5 of Non-Patent Document 1) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating physical channels used in the LTE communication system. In FIG. 4, a physical broadcast channel 401 (Physical Broadcast channel: PBCH) is a downlink channel transmitted from the base station 102 to the mobile terminal 101. A BCH transport block is mapped to four subframes in a 40 ms interval. There is no obvious signaling of 40ms timing. A physical control format indicator channel 402 (Physical Control format indicator channel: PCFICH) is transmitted from the base station 102 to the mobile terminal 101. PCFICH notifies base station 102 to mobile terminal 101 about the number of OFDM symbols used for PDCCHs. PCFICH is transmitted for each subframe. A physical downlink control channel 403 (Physical downlink control channel: PDCCH) is a downlink channel transmitted from the base station 102 to the mobile terminal 101. The PDCCH includes resource allocation, HARQ information related to DL-SCH (a downlink shared channel that is one of the transport channels shown in FIG. 5), and PCH (paging that is one of the transport channels shown in FIG. 5). Channel). The PDCCH carries an Uplink Scheduling Grant. The PDCCH carries ACK / Nack that is a response signal for uplink transmission. A physical downlink shared channel 404 (PDSCH) is a downlink channel transmitted from the base station 102 to the mobile terminal 101. On the PDSCH, a DL-SCH (downlink shared channel) that is a transport channel is mapped. A physical multicast channel 405 (Physical multicast channel: PMCH) is a downlink channel transmitted from the base station 102 to the mobile terminal 101. PMCH is mapped with MCH (multicast channel) which is a transport channel.

  A physical uplink control channel 406 (Physical Uplink control channel: PUCCH) is an uplink channel transmitted from the mobile terminal 101 to the base station 102. The PUCCH carries ACK / Nack which is a response signal (response) to downlink transmission. PUCCH carries a CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) report. CQI is quality information indicating the quality of received data or channel quality. A physical uplink shared channel 407 (Physical Uplink shared channel: PUSCH) is an uplink channel transmitted from the mobile terminal 101 to the base station 102. PUSCH is mapped with UL-SCH (uplink shared channel which is one of the transport channels shown in FIG. 5). A physical HARQ indicator channel 408 (Physical Hybrid ARQ indicator channel: PHICH) is a downlink channel transmitted from the base station 102 to the mobile terminal 101. The PHICH carries ACK / Nack that is a response to uplink transmission. A physical random access channel 409 (Physical random access channel: PRACH) is an uplink channel transmitted from the mobile terminal 101 to the base station 102. The PRACH carries a random access preamble.

  A transport channel (Chapter 5 of Non-Patent Document 1) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a transport channel used in an LTE communication system. FIG. 5A shows mapping between the downlink transport channel and the downlink physical channel. FIG. 5B shows mapping between the uplink transport channel and the uplink physical channel. For the downlink transport channel, a broadcast channel (BCH) is broadcast to the entire base station (cell). BCH is mapped to the physical broadcast channel (PBCH). Retransmission control using HARQ (Hybrid ARQ) is applied to the downlink shared channel (DL-SCH). Broadcasting to the entire base station (cell) is possible. Supports dynamic or semi-static resource allocation. Quasi-static resource allocation is also called Persistent Scheduling. In order to reduce power consumption of the mobile terminal, DRX (Discontinuous reception) of the mobile terminal is supported. DL-SCH is mapped to a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH). A paging channel (PCH) supports DRX of the mobile terminal in order to enable low power consumption of the mobile terminal. Notification to the entire base station (cell) is required. It is mapped to a physical resource such as a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) that can be dynamically used for traffic, or a physical resource such as a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) of another control channel. A multicast channel (Multicast channel: MCH) is used for broadcast to the entire base station (cell). Supports SFN combining of MBMS services (MTCH and MCCH) in multi-cell transmission. Supports quasi-static resource allocation. MCH is mapped to PMCH.

  Retransmission control by HARQ (Hybrid ARQ) is applied to an uplink shared channel (Uplink Shared channel: UL-SCH). Supports dynamic or semi-static resource allocation. UL-SCH is mapped to a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH). The random access channel (RACH) shown in FIG. 5B is limited to control information. There is a risk of collision. The RACH is mapped to a physical random access channel (PRACH). HARQ will be described.

  HARQ is a technique for improving the communication quality of a transmission path by combining automatic repeat request and error correction (forward error correction). There is also an advantage that error correction functions effectively by retransmission even for a transmission path in which communication quality changes. In particular, further quality improvement can be obtained by combining the reception result of the initial transmission and the reception result of the retransmission upon retransmission. An example of the retransmission method will be described. When the reception data cannot be decoded correctly on the receiving side (when a CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check error occurs (CRC = NG)), “Nack” is transmitted from the receiving side to the transmitting side. The transmission side that has received “Nack” retransmits the data. When the reception data can be correctly decoded on the reception side (when no CRC error occurs (CRC = OK)), “Ack” is transmitted from the reception side to the transmission side. The transmitting side that has received “Ack” transmits the next data. An example of the HARQ method is “Chase Combining”. Chase combining is a method in which the same data sequence is transmitted for initial transmission and retransmission, and the gain is improved by combining the initial transmission data sequence and the retransmission data sequence in retransmission. The idea is that even if there is an error in the initial transmission data, it is partially accurate, and it is possible to transmit data with higher accuracy by combining the initial transmission data and the retransmission data of the correct part. Based on. Another example of the HARQ scheme is IR (Incremental Redundancy). IR is to increase the redundancy. By transmitting parity bits in retransmission, the redundancy is increased in combination with the initial transmission, and the quality is improved by the error correction function.

  The logical channel (Chapter 6 of Non-Patent Document 1) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating logical channels used in the LTE communication system. FIG. 6A shows mapping between the downlink logical channel and the downlink transport channel. FIG. 6B shows mapping between the uplink logical channel and the uplink transport channel. The broadcast control channel (BCCH) is a downlink channel for broadcast system control information. The BCCH that is a logical channel is mapped to a broadcast channel (BCH) that is a transport channel or a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH). A paging control channel (Paging control channel: PCCH) is a downlink channel for transmitting a paging signal. PCCH is used when the network does not know the cell location of the mobile terminal. The PCCH that is a logical channel is mapped to a paging channel (PCH) that is a transport channel. The common control channel (CCCH) is a channel for transmission control information between the mobile terminal and the base station. CCCH is used when the mobile terminal does not have an RRC connection with the network. Whether the CCCH is provided downstream is not determined at this time. In the uplink direction, the CCCH is mapped to an uplink shared channel (UL-SCH) that is a transport channel.

  A multicast control channel (MCCH) is a downlink channel for one-to-many transmission. This is a channel used for transmission of MBMS control information for one or several MTCHs from the network to the mobile terminal. MCCH is a channel used only for a mobile terminal receiving MBMS. MCCH is mapped to a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) or multicast channel (MCH) which is a transport channel. The dedicated control channel (Dedicated control channel: DCCH) is a channel for transmitting dedicated control information between the mobile terminal and the network. The DCCH is mapped to the uplink shared channel (UL-SCH) in the uplink, and is mapped to the downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) in the downlink. The dedicated traffic channel (Dedicate Traffic channel: DTCH) is a channel for one-to-one communication to individual mobile terminals for transmitting user information. DTCH exists for both uplink and downlink. The DTCH is mapped to the uplink shared channel (UL-SCH) in the uplink, and is mapped to the downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) in the downlink. A multicast traffic channel (Multicast Traffic channel: MTCH) is a downlink channel for transmitting traffic data from a network to a mobile terminal. MTCH is a channel used only for a mobile terminal that is receiving MBMS. MTCH is mapped to a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) or a multicast channel (MCH).

  Non-Patent Document 1 describes the current decisions regarding the E-MBMS service in 3GPP. The definition of words related to E-MBMS (Chapter 15 of Non-Patent Document 1) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the relationship between the MBSFN synchronization area and the MBSFN area. In FIG. 7, an MBSFN synchronization area 701 (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network Synchronization Area) is an area of a network in which all base stations can synchronize and execute MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service Single Frequency Network) transmission. That is. The MBSFN synchronization area includes one or more MBSFN areas (MBSFN Areas) 702. In one frequency layer, a base station can belong to only one MBSFN synchronization area. The MBSFN area 702 (MBSFN Area) includes a group of base stations (cells) included in the MBSFN synchronization area of the network. A base station (cell) in the MBSFN synchronization area may constitute a plurality of MBSFN areas.

  The logical structure (Logical Architecture) of E-MBMS will be described with reference to FIG. 8 (Chapter 15 of Non-Patent Document 1). FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a logical structure (Logical Architecture) of E-MBMS. In FIG. 8, a multicell / multicast coordination entity 801 (Multi-cell / multicast Coordination Entity: MCE) is a logical entity. The MCE 801 allocates radio resources to all base stations in the MBSFN area in order to perform multi-cell MBMS transmission. In addition to time and / or frequency radio resource allocation, the MCE 801 makes decisions about radio structure details (eg, modulation scheme, code, etc.). The E-MBMS gateway 802 (MBMS GW) is a logical entity. The E-MBMS gateway 802 is located between the eBMSC and the base station, and the main function is to transmit / broadcast the MBMS service to each base station using the SYNC protocol. The M3 interface is a control plane interface between the MCE 801 and the E-MBMS gateway 802. The M2 interface is a control interface between the MCE 801 and the eNB 102. The M1 interface is a user data interface (User Plane Interface) between the E-MBMS gateway 802 and the eNB 102.

  The architecture (Architecture) of E-MBMS (Chapter 15 of Non-Patent Document 1) will be described. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the architecture (Architecture) of E-MBMS. Two E-MBMS architectures are considered as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B. The MBMS cell will be described (Non-Patent Document 115). The LTE system includes an MBMS dedicated cell (base station) (MBMS-dedicated cell) and an MBMS / unicast-mixed cell (MBMS / Unicast-mixed cell) capable of executing both MBMS and unicast services. The MBMS dedicated cell will be described. The characteristics when the MBMS dedicated cell belongs to the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission will be described below. Hereinafter, the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer is also referred to as the MBMS dedicated cell frequency layer. Both the downlink logical channels MTCH (multicast traffic channel) and MCCH (multicast control channel) are mapped to the downlink transport channel MCH (multicast channel) or DL-SCH (downlink shared channel) in one-to-many transmission. The There is no uplink in the MBMS dedicated cell. Also, unicast data cannot be transmitted / received within the MBMS dedicated cell. Also, no counting mechanism is set. It is undecided whether to provide paging signals (Paging messages) in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission.

  Next, the MBMS / unicast mixed cell will be described. The characteristics when the MBMS / unicast mixed cell does not belong to the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission will be described below. A frequency layer other than the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer is referred to as a “unicast / mixed frequency layer”. Both MTCH and MCCH, which are downlink logical channels, are mapped to MCH or DL-SCH, which is a downlink logical channel, in one-to-many transmission. In an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, both unicast data and MBMS data can be transmitted.

  MBMS transmission (Chapter 15 of Non-Patent Document 1) will be described. MBMS transmission in the LTE system supports single-cell transmission (SC transmission) and multi-cell transmission (MC transmission). Single cell transmission does not support SFN (Single Frequency Network) operation. Multi-cell transmission supports SFN operation. MBMS transmission is synchronized in an MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) area. SFN combining (Combining) of MBMS services (MTCH and MCCH) in multi-cell transmission is supported. MTCH and MCCH are mapped to MCH by one-to-many transmission. Scheduling is performed by the MCE.

  A multicast control channel (MCCH) structure (Structure) will be described (Chapter 15 of Non-Patent Document). A broadcast control channel (BCCH), which is a downlink logical channel, indicates scheduling of one or two primary multicast control channels (Primary MCCH: P-MCCH). The P-MCCH for single cell transmission is mapped to DL-SCH (downlink shared channel). Further, the P-MCCH for multi-cell transmission is mapped to MCH (multicast channel). When the secondary multicast control channel (Secondary MCCH: S-MCCH) is mapped on the MCH, the primary multicast control channel (P-MCCH) can be used to indicate the address of the secondary multicast control channel (S-MCCH). The broadcast control channel (BCCH) indicates a resource of the primary multicast control channel (P-MCCH), but does not indicate an available service.

  Non-Patent Document 1 (Chapter 10) describes the current decisions regarding paging in 3GPP. The paging group uses the L1 / L2 signaling channel (PDCCH). A clear identifier (UE-ID) of the mobile terminal can be confirmed on the paging channel (PCH).

3GPP TS36.300 V8.2.0 3GPP R1-072963 3GPP R1-080073 3GPP R2-080463 3GPP R2-0775570 3GPP TS36.211 V8.4.0 3GPP TS36.331 V8.3.0 3GPP TS36.306 V8.2.0

  Problems to be solved by the invention will be described. In Non-Patent Document 1, it is not determined whether a paging signal exists in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. Therefore, the notification method of the paging signal to the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission and the mobile communication system have not been determined. It is an object of the present invention to disclose a paging signal notification method and a mobile communication system for a mobile terminal receiving an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission.

  Further, when a paging signal is transmitted in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, the mobile terminal that has received the paging signal needs to respond. However, there is no uplink in the MBMS dedicated cell. Therefore, the mobile terminal needs to transmit a response to the paging signal to the unicast cell or the MBMS / unicast mixed cell. An object of the present invention is to disclose a method for transmitting a response to a paging signal to a unicast cell or an MBMS / unicast mixed cell by a mobile terminal that has received the paging signal, and a mobile communication system therefor.

  Also, the details of the paging message notification method have not been established even in a mobile terminal that is in an idle state at a frequency (unicast / mixed frequency layer) that is not a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. Non-Patent Document 1 discloses that PCH is mapped to PDSCH or PDCCH. Further, Non-Patent Document 1 discloses that the paging group uses the L1 / L2 signaling channel (PDCCH), and that a clear identifier (UE-ID) of the mobile terminal can be found on the PCH. On the other hand, there is no disclosure of how mobile terminals are divided into paging groups and how PCHs are notified. Also, there is no disclosure of how the mobile terminal performs intermittent reception in a standby state. It is an object of the present invention to disclose details of a method of notifying a paging signal to a mobile terminal waiting in a unicast / mixed frequency layer and a mobile communication system therefor.

  Non-Patent Document 1 discloses the existence of a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission and the presence and characteristics of an MBMS dedicated cell. On the other hand, there is no disclosure of a method for moving a mobile terminal to a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission or a method for selecting a desired service. Furthermore, the existence of a plurality of MBSFN areas is discussed in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, but there is no disclosure of a method for multiplexing MBSFN areas. An object of the present invention is to disclose a method for multiplexing MBSFN areas. It is another object of the present invention to disclose a method for selecting a desired service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission according to a multiplexing method, and a mobile communication system therefor.

  Non-Patent Document 1 discloses the existence of a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission and the presence and characteristics of an MBMS dedicated cell. On the other hand, there is no disclosure of a method for moving a mobile terminal to a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission or a method for selecting a desired service. Furthermore, the existence of a plurality of MBSFN areas is discussed in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, but there is no disclosure of a method for multiplexing MBSFN areas. An object of the present invention is to disclose a method for multiplexing MBSFN areas. It is another object of the present invention to disclose a method for selecting a desired service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission according to a multiplexing method, and a mobile communication system therefor.

  Further, there is no uplink in the MBMS dedicated base station. When the mobile terminal moves and the base station that can receive the downlink (downlink signal, downlink radio wave) changes, and / or the best base station (cell with maximum received power) in the downlink that can be received (cell) There is no means to notify the MBMS dedicated base station from the mobile terminal even if the change occurs. Therefore, in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission configured by the MBMS dedicated base station, there is a problem that the mobility management of the mobile terminal is not possible with the current configuration and communication method of the mobile communication system. It is an object of the present invention to disclose a communication method capable of managing mobility of a mobile terminal even in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS configured by an MBMS dedicated base station, and a mobile communication system therefor.

  Further, in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, the mobile terminal needs to perform measurement at a constant period. The cycle is instructed by the upper layer. In the measurement, the mobile station moves and the base station that can receive the downlink (downlink signal, downlink radio wave) has changed, and the best base station (cell) in the downlink that can be received (maximum received power, etc.) This operation is also necessary for the mobile terminal to recognize the change. Therefore, if the mobile terminal does not perform measurement, mobility management as a mobile communication system becomes impossible. On the other hand, the base station constituting the MBSFN synchronization area (MBSFN Synchronization Area) in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer and the base station constituting the unicast / mixed frequency layer are asynchronous. Therefore, in the present mobile communication system configuration and communication method, since the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer performs the unicast / mixed frequency layer measurement, the MBMS reception is interrupted. The problem that it ends up occurs. In the present invention, a mobile terminal that is receiving an MBMS service in an MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer can perform a unicast / mixed frequency layer measurement without interrupting the reception of the MBMS service, and An object is to disclose a mobile communication system for that purpose.

  Non-Patent Document 1 discloses the existence of a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission and the presence and characteristics of an MBMS dedicated cell. On the other hand, there is no disclosure of a method for moving a mobile terminal to a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission or a method for selecting a desired service. It is an object of the present invention to disclose a method for selecting a desired service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission and a mobile communication system therefor.

  Further, from Chapter 15 of Non-Patent Document 1, it can be understood that the MBSFN area is composed of cell groups in the MBSFN synchronization area adjusted to realize MBSFN transmission. Therefore, if the MBSFN areas are different, MBSFN transmission may not be realized. Therefore, the following problems occur. In the unicast / mixed frequency layer, when a mobile terminal receiving an MBMS service transmitted in multicell from an MBMS dedicated cell or a unicast / MBMS mixed cell performs handover, the following problems occur. The unicast / MBMS mixed cell of the handover source (current serving cell) and the unicast / MBMS mixed cell of the handover destination (base station (new serving cell) to be newly selected as the serving cell) do not belong to the same MBSFN area. Think about the case. If the MBSFN area is different, the receivable MBMS service contents may be different. Therefore, there is a problem that MBMS service reception is interrupted due to handover.

  The communication system according to the present invention is a single communication system using an OFDM scheme as a downlink access scheme from a base station to a mobile terminal and using an SC-FDMA scheme as an uplink access scheme from the mobile terminal to the base station. A plurality of MBSFN areas in which MBMS is provided with a frequency of 1 are set, and base stations belonging to the plurality of MBSFN areas transmit MBSFN area IDs of the plurality of MBSFN areas on the BCCH, and the mobile terminal uses a plurality of BCCHs. The MBSFN area ID of each MBSFN area is received.

  A base station according to the present invention belongs to a plurality of MBSFN areas each provided with MBMS at a single frequency in a base station used in a communication system providing MBMS, and sets MBSFN area IDs of the plurality of MBSFN areas to BCCH. To send in.

  The mobile terminal according to the present invention is a mobile terminal used in a communication system that provides MBMS, and a plurality of MBSFNs are transmitted using BCCHs transmitted from base stations belonging to a plurality of MBSFN areas each provided with MBMS at a single frequency. The MBSFN area ID of each area is received.

  According to the communication system, the base station, and the mobile terminal according to the present invention, two or more MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service Single Frequency Network) areas where MBMS (Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service) is provided at a single frequency are set. In the communication system, an MBSFN area multiplexing method can be established.

It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the communication system of a LTE system. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the communication system of a LTE system. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of a radio frame used in an LTE communication system. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) frame. It is explanatory drawing explaining the physical channel used with the communication system of a LTE system. It is explanatory drawing explaining the transport channel used with the communication system of a LTE system. It is explanatory drawing explaining the logical channel used with the communication system of a LTE system. It is explanatory drawing explaining the relationship between a MBSFN synchronous area and a MBSFN area. It is explanatory drawing explaining the logical structure (Logical Architecture) of E-MBMS. It is explanatory drawing explaining the architecture (Architecture) of E-MBMS. 1 is a block diagram showing an overall configuration of a mobile communication system according to the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a mobile terminal. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a base station. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of MME (Mobility Management Entity). It is a block diagram which shows the structure of MCE (Multi-cell / multicast Coordination Entity). It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a MBMS gateway. 4 is a flowchart illustrating an outline of processing from when a mobile terminal starts to use MBMS until the end of use in an LTE communication system. It is a flowchart explaining the cell selection by the side of a unicast. It is a flowchart which shows a MBMS search process. It is a flowchart which shows a MBMS service selection process. It is a flowchart which shows a MBMS side reception condition notification process. It is a flowchart explaining a unicast side measurement process. It is a flowchart explaining the intermittent reception process at the time of MBMS reception. It is a flowchart which shows a MTCH reception process and a MBMS reception end process. It is a flowchart which shows a unicast side intermittent reception process and a MBMS reception completion process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the some MBSFN area which comprises an MBSFN synchronous area. It is a conceptual diagram of the mapping to the physical channel of the MBSFN synchronization area when the MBSFN area is time division multiplexed. It is a conceptual diagram of mapping to the physical channel of the MBSFN synchronization area when the MBSFN area is code division multiplexed. It is explanatory drawing which shows several MBSFN area which comprises an MBSFN synchronous area, Comprising: It is explanatory drawing which shows the MBSFN area which covers several MBSFN area. Explanatory drawing which shows the mapping to the physical channel of the MBSFN synchronous area when the covered MBSFN area and the covered MBSFN area are time division multiplexed, and the multiplexing method between the covered MBSFN areas is code division multiplexing. It is. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the intermittent reception period when the transmission of MBMS data to a mobile terminal is stopped, and the reception operation | movement of MBMS data in a mobile terminal stops, and the intermittent reception period which is a period which performs intermittent reception. It is explanatory drawing explaining the detail of a tracking area list. It is an example of a channel structure which maps the paging signal in an MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the method of mapping a paging signal to the physical area | region where the paging signal on a physical multicast channel (PMCH) is carried. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the method of mapping a paging signal to the physical area | region where the paging signal on a physical multicast channel (PMCH) is carried. Explanatory drawing which shows the mapping to the physical channel of the MBSFN synchronous area when the covered MBSFN area and the covered MBSFN area are time division multiplexed, and the multiplexing method between the covered MBSFN areas is code division multiplexing. It is. It is explanatory drawing which shows the method of mapping the signal related to a paging to a multicast control channel in order to transmit control information to the MBSFN area containing a some MBSFN area. It is a flowchart which shows the process which measures the quality of the multicast control channel in reception. It is a table | surface which shows the concept of the capability of a mobile terminal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the physical multicast channel provided for every MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the physical multicast channel provided for every MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of PMCH provided for every MBSFN area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the physical channel only for paging transmitted in multicell within an MBSFN area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a MBSFN sub-frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the method of mapping a paging signal to a paging exclusive channel (DPCH). It is explanatory drawing which shows the method of mapping a paging signal to a paging exclusive channel (DPCH). It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the physical channel (main PMCH) transmitted by multicell within a MBSFN synchronous area. It is explanatory drawing shown about the structure of the radio | wireless frame with which main PMCH is transmitted. It is explanatory drawing shown about the structure of the radio | wireless frame by which main PMCH is transmitted within the same sub-frame as the synchronization channel SCH. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of main PMCH which provided the area | region for paging signals. It is explanatory drawing which shows the method of transmitting a paging signal to the one part cell in a MBSFN area or a MBSFN synchronous area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the code for the padding for every cell provided with the cell which does not transmit a paging signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the method of using the code for paging transmission cell identification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mapping method in the case of putting MBMS relevant information and a paging signal on a multicast control channel (MCCH) as an information element. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mapping method in the case of multiplexing the logical channel PCCH with the logical channels MTCH and MCCH, and mounting on the transport channel MCH. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a mapping method when the logical channel PCCH is placed on the transport channel PCH, the logical channels MTCH and MCCH are multiplexed and placed on the transport channel MCH, and the PCH and MCH are multiplexed and placed on the physical multicast channel. is there. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mapping method in the case where a paging signal is put on the transport channel PCH on the logical channel PCCH, the logical channels MTCH and MCCH are multiplexed and put on the transport channel MCH, and the PCH is put on the physical channel dedicated to paging. . It is explanatory drawing which shows the mapping method at the time of providing main PMCH as a physical channel common to a MBSFN synchronous area. It is a flowchart which shows a unicast side measurement process. It is a flowchart which shows a MTCH reception process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of PMCH for every MBSFN area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of PMCH for every MBSFN area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the intermittent reception period when the transmission of MBMS data to a mobile terminal is stopped, and the reception operation | movement of MBMS data in a mobile terminal stops, and the intermittent reception period which is a period which performs intermittent reception. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of PMCH for every MBSFN area. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an MBMS search method described in a twelfth embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of main PMCH in a MBSFN synchronous area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of main PMCH of a MBSFN synchronous area. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an MBMS search method described in a twelfth embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of PMCH for every MBSFN area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of PMCH for every MBSFN area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of PMCH for every MBSFN area. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of discontinuous reception information. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of discontinuous reception information. It is explanatory drawing of the subject of this invention. It is a sequence diagram in the case of performing derivation | leading-out of the notification of the allocation information of a MBSFN sub-frame, and the paging signal mapped. It is a figure explaining the MBSFN sub-frame structure for every MBSFN area in each cell when a DRX period is also taken into consideration. 218 is a flowchart illustrating MBMS reception time missing reception preparation processing in the fifteenth embodiment. 29 is a flowchart for describing intermittent reception processing during MBMS reception in the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating details of a tracking area list in the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating details of a tracking area list in the sixteenth embodiment. It is a figure explaining that the arbitrary MBMS dedicated cell in one MBSFN area was made into the tracking area. 38 is a diagram for explaining details of a tracking area list in the seventeenth embodiment. It is a figure explaining that the tracking area is comprised by arbitrary MBMS dedicated cells in a plurality of MBSFN areas. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting regarding MBMS which can be received, MBMS search, and a MBMS service selection process. It is a table | surface explaining the matching of a service number and service content. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting regarding MBMS which can be received, MBMS search, and a MBMS service selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the process in which the mobile terminal which has received the MBMS service transmitted multicell from the unicast / MBMS mixed cell performs a handover. It is a flowchart which shows the process in which the mobile terminal which has received the MBMS service transmitted multicell from the unicast / MBMS mixed cell performs a handover. It is a flowchart which shows the process in which the mobile terminal which has received the MBMS service transmitted multicell from the unicast / MBMS mixed cell performs a handover. It is a flowchart which shows the process in which the mobile terminal which has received the MBMS service transmitted multicell from the unicast / MBMS mixed cell performs a handover. It is a flowchart which shows the process in which the mobile terminal which has received the MBMS service transmitted multicell from the unicast / MBMS mixed cell performs a handover. It is explanatory drawing which shows the concept which multiplexes an MBSFN sub-frame in an MBSFN area. It is explanatory drawing explaining the subject of this invention. It is a sequence diagram in the case of determining the sub-frame in the radio | wireless frame of the paging occasion to which a paging signal is mapped. It is a sequence diagram in the case of determining the sub-frame in the radio | wireless frame of the paging occasion to which a paging signal is mapped. It is a correspondence table of the number of subframes excluding the subframe and the MBSFN subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion. It is a correspondence table of subframes and MBSFN subframe numbers in a radio frame of paging occasion. FIG. 38 is a sequence diagram in the case of determining a subframe in a radio frame for paging occasion used in Modification 5 of Embodiment 23. It is a figure explaining the case where two TA (MBMS) (TA (MBMS) # 1, TA (MBMS) # 2) is comprised in one MBSFN area. It is a figure explaining mapping a paging signal by TDM for every TA (MBMS). It is a figure explaining the structure which provided the channel for exclusive use of the paging signal and PMCH in the same MBSFN sub-frame. It is a figure explaining the method of mapping paging information to the physical area of each physical channel. It is a figure explaining the system band of each cell in a MBSFN area. It is a figure explaining the method of alert | reporting a system zone | band from each cell to the subordinate mobile terminal.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the overall configuration of the mobile communication system according to the present invention. In FIG. 10, the mobile terminal 101 transmits and receives control data (C-plane) and user data (U-plane) to and from the base station 102. The base station 102 is a unicast cell 102-1 that handles only unicast transmission / reception, a mixed cell 102-2 that handles transmission / reception of unicast and MBMS services (MTCH and MCCH), and an MBMS dedicated cell 101- that handles only transmission / reception of MBMS services. It is classified into 3. The unicast cell 102-1 that handles unicast transmission / reception and the MBMS / unicast mixed cell (mixed cell, mixed cell) 102-2 are connected by the MME 103 and the interface S1_MME. Furthermore, the unicast cell 102-1 and the mixed cell 102-2 that handle unicast transmission / reception are connected to the S-GW 104 via an interface S1_U for transmission / reception of unicast user data. The MME 103 is connected to a PDNGW (Packet Data Network Gateway) 902 through an interface S11. The MCE 801 allocates radio resources to all base stations 102 in the MBSFN area in order to perform multi-cell (MC) transmission. For example, there is an MBSFN area # 1 composed of one or a plurality of MBMS / unicast mixed cells 102-2 and a MBSFN area # 2 composed of one or a plurality of MBMS dedicated cells 101-3. Think. The MBMS / unicast mixed cell 102-2 is connected to the MCE 801-1 that allocates radio resources for all base stations in the MBSFN area # 1 through the interface M2. The MBMS dedicated cell 102-3 is connected by an interface M2 to the MCE 801-2 that allocates radio resources for all base stations in the MBSFN area # 2.

  The MBMS GW 802 can be classified into MBMS CP 802-1 that handles control data and MBMS UP 802-2 that handles user data. The MBMS / unicast mixed cell 102-2 and the MBMS dedicated cell 102-3 are connected to the MBMS CP 802-1 at the interface M1 for transmission / reception of MBMS-related control data. The MBMS / unicast mixed cell 102-2 and the MBMS dedicated cell 102-3 are connected to the MBMS UP 802-2 at the interface M1_U for transmission / reception of MBMS-related user data. The MCE 801 is connected to the MBMS CP 802-1 at the interface M3 for transmission / reception of MBMS-related control data. The MBMS UP 802-2 is connected to the eBMSC 901 through the interface SGimb. The MBMS GW 802 is connected to the eBMSC 901 through the interface SGmb. The eBMSC 901 is connected to a content provider. The eBMSC 901 is connected to the PDN GW 902 through an interface SGi. The MCE 801 is connected to the MME 103 via an MME-MCE interface (IF) which is a new interface.

  FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the mobile terminal 101 used in the present invention. In FIG. 11, the transmission processing of the mobile terminal 101 is executed as follows. First, control data from the protocol processing unit 1101 and user data from the application unit 1102 are stored in the transmission data buffer unit 1103. Data stored in the transmission data buffer unit 1103 is transferred to the encoder unit 1104 and subjected to encoding processing such as error correction. There may be data that is directly output from the transmission data buffer unit 1103 to the modulation unit 1105 without being encoded. The data encoded by the encoder unit 1104 is subjected to modulation processing by the modulation unit 1105. The modulated data is converted into a baseband signal, and then output to the frequency conversion unit 1106 where it is converted into a radio transmission frequency. Thereafter, a transmission signal is transmitted from the antenna 1107 to the base station 102. In addition, the reception process of the mobile terminal 101 is executed as follows. A radio signal from the base station 102 is received by the antenna 1107. The received signal is converted from a radio reception frequency to a baseband signal by the frequency converter 1106, and demodulated by the demodulator 1108. The demodulated data is transferred to the decoder unit 1109 and subjected to decoding processing such as error correction. Of the decoded data, control data is passed to the protocol processing unit 1101, and user data is passed to the application unit 1102. A series of processing of the mobile terminal is controlled by the control unit 1110. Therefore, although the control part 1110 is abbreviate | omitted in drawing, it is connected with each part (1101-1109).

  FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the base station 102. The transmission process of the base station 102 is executed as follows. The EPC communication unit 1201 transmits and receives data between the base station 102 and the EPC (MME 103 and S-GW 104). The other base station communication unit 1202 transmits / receives data to / from other base stations. The EPC communication unit 1201 and the other base station communication unit 1202 exchange information with the protocol processing unit 1203, respectively. Control data from the protocol processing unit 1203 and user data and control data from the EPC communication unit 1201 and the other base station communication unit 1202 are stored in the transmission data buffer unit 1204. Data stored in the transmission data buffer unit 1204 is transferred to the encoder unit 1205 and subjected to encoding processing such as error correction. There may exist data that is directly output from the transmission data buffer unit 1204 to the modulation unit 1206 without being encoded. The encoded data is subjected to modulation processing by the modulation unit 1206. The modulated data is converted into a baseband signal, and then output to the frequency conversion unit 1207 to be converted into a radio transmission frequency. Thereafter, a transmission signal is transmitted from the antenna 1208 to one or a plurality of mobile terminals 101. Further, the reception process of the base station 102 is executed as follows. Radio signals from one or a plurality of mobile terminals 101 are received by the antenna 1208. The received signal is converted from a radio reception frequency to a baseband signal by the frequency converter 1207, and demodulated by the demodulator 1209. The demodulated data is transferred to the decoder unit 1210 and subjected to decoding processing such as error correction. Of the decoded data, the control data is passed to the protocol processing unit 1203 or the EPC communication unit 1201 and the other base station communication unit 1202, and the user data is passed to the EPC communication unit 1201 and the other base station communication unit 1202. A series of processing of the base station 102 is controlled by the control unit 1211. Therefore, the control unit 1211 is connected to each unit (1201 to 1210), which is omitted in the drawing.

  FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of an MME (Mobility Management Entity). A PDN GW communication unit 1301 transmits and receives data between the MME 103 and the PDN GW 902. The base station communication unit 1302 transmits and receives data between the MME 103 and the base station 102 using the S1_MME interface. When the data received from the PDN GW 902 is user data, the user data is passed from the PDN GW communication unit 1301 to the base station communication unit 1302 via the user plane processing unit 1303 and transmitted to one or a plurality of base stations 102. The When the data received from the base station 102 is user data, the user data is transferred from the base station communication unit 1302 to the PDN GW communication unit 1301 via the user plane processing unit 1303 and transmitted to the PDN GW 902.

  The MCE communication unit 1304 transmits and receives data between the MME 103 and the MCE 801 using the MME-MCE IF. When the data received from the PDN GW 902 is control data, the control data is transferred from the PDN GW communication unit 1301 to the control plane control unit 1305. When the data received from the base station 102 is control data, the control data is transferred from the base station communication unit 1302 to the control plane control unit 1305. The control data received from the MCE 801 is transferred from the MCE communication unit 1304 to the control plane control unit 1305. The result of the processing in the control plane control unit 1305 is transmitted to the PDN GW 902 via the PDN GW communication unit 1301, transmitted to one or a plurality of base stations 102 via the S1_MME interface via the base station communication unit 1302, and MCE. The data is transmitted to one or a plurality of MCEs 801 by the MME-MCE IF via the communication unit 1304. The control plane control unit 1305 includes a NAS security unit 1305-1, an SAE bearer control unit 1305-2, an idle state mobility management unit 1305-3, and the like, and performs overall processing for the control plane. The NAS security unit 1305-1 performs security of a NAS (Non-Access Stratum) message. The SAE bearer control unit 1305-2 manages the SAE (System Architecture Evolution) bearer. The idle state mobility management unit 1305-3 manages mobility in a standby state (LTE-IDLE state, also simply referred to as idle), generates and controls a paging signal in the standby state, and one or a plurality of mobile terminals 101 being served thereby Add, delete, update, search, tracking area list (TA List) management, etc. The MME initiates a paging protocol by sending a paging message to a cell belonging to a tracking area (tracking area: TA) in which the UE is registered. A series of processing of the MME 103 is controlled by the control unit 1306. Therefore, the control unit 1306 is connected to each unit (1301 to 1305), which is omitted in the drawing.

  FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing a configuration of MCE (Multi-cell / multicast Coordination Entity). The MBMS GW communication unit 1401 transmits and receives control data between the MCE 801 and the MBMS GW 802 using the M3 interface. A base station communication unit 1402 transmits and receives control data between the MCE 801 and the base station 102 using the M2 interface. The MME communication unit 1403 transmits and receives control data between the MCE 801 and the MME 103 by the MME-MCE IF. The MC transmission scheduler unit 1404 includes control data from the MBMS GW 802 passed through the MBMS GW communication unit 1401 and base stations in an MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) area passed through the base station communication unit 1402 The control data from 102 and the control data from the MME 103 passed via the MME communication unit 1403 are used to schedule multi-cell transmission of one or more MBSFN areas managed by itself. Examples of scheduling include base station radio resources (time, frequency, etc.), radio structure (modulation scheme, code, etc.), and the like. The scheduling result of multi-cell transmission is passed to the base station communication unit 1402 and transmitted to one or a plurality of base stations 102 in the MBSFN area. A series of processing of the MCE 801 is controlled by the control unit 1405. Therefore, the control unit 1405 is connected to each unit (1401 to 1404), which is omitted in the drawing.

  FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the MBMS gateway. In FIG. 15, an eBMSC communication unit 1501 of the MBMS GW 802 transmits and receives data (user data and control data) between the MBMS GW 802 and the eBMSC 901. The MCE communication unit 1502 transmits and receives control data using the M3 interface between the MBMS GW 802 and the MCE 801. Control data received from the eBMSC 901 is transmitted to the MBMS CP unit 1503 via the eBMSC communication unit 1501, and after being processed by the MBMS CP unit 1503, is transmitted to one or a plurality of MCEs 801 via the MCE communication unit 1502. The control data received from the MCE 801 is transferred to the MBMS CP unit 1503 via the MCE communication unit 1502, and after being processed by the MBMS CP unit 1503, transmitted to the eBMSC 901 and / or the MCE 801 via the eBMSC communication unit 1501. The base station communication unit 1504 transmits user data (also referred to as traffic data) using the M1_U interface to the MBMS GW 802 and one or a plurality of base stations. User data received from the eBMSC 901 is transmitted to the MBMS UP unit 1505 via the eBMSC communication unit 1501, and after being processed by the MBMS UP unit 1505, transmitted to one or a plurality of base stations 102 via the base station communication unit 1504. The The MBMS CP unit 1503 and the MBMS UP unit 1505 are connected. A series of processing of the MBMS GW 802 is controlled by the control unit 1506. Therefore, the control unit 1506 is connected to each unit (1501 to 1506) although not shown in the drawing.

  Next, FIG. 16 shows an example of the flow of processing as a mobile communication system according to the present invention. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an outline of processing from the start of use of MBMS to the end of use by the mobile terminal in the LTE communication system. In step ST1601 of FIG. 16, the mobile terminal performs cell selection of the serving cell in the MBMS / unicast mixed cell. Hereinafter, the processing of step 1601 is referred to as “unicast side cell selection”. In step ST1601-1, the network side performs a “notice about receivable MBMS” process for the mobile terminal. Specifically, the mobile terminal is notified from the network side that there is an MBMS service that is currently available and information about the frequency (a list of frequencies). Since the mobile terminal can know that there is an available MBMS service and its frequency by the processing of ST1601-1, it is not necessary to search for a receivable frequency in a brute force manner. This has the effect of shortening the control delay until the mobile terminal receives a service from a frequency other than the current frequency.

  In step ST1602, the mobile terminal performs an MBMS transmission dedicated cell search process based on the information notified from the network side in step ST1601. Specific examples of the search process include timing synchronization (synchronization based on radio frame timing), system bandwidth, number of transmission antennas, MBSFN area identifier (ID) (also referred to as MBSFN area number), MCCH (multicast control channel). System information such as related information is acquired. Hereinafter, the processing in step 1602 is referred to as “MBMS search”. In Step ST1603, the mobile terminal receives information for receiving the MBMS service (MCCH and MTCH) in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell from the network side. Hereinafter, the processing in step 1603 is referred to as “MBMS Area information acquisition”. In step ST1604, the user (mobile terminal) selects the MBMS service desired by the user using the information for receiving the MBMS service received from the network side in step ST1603. Hereinafter, the processing in step 1604 is referred to as “MBMS service selection”.

  As described above, in the LTE communication system, only a downlink for transmitting broadcast data provided by the MBMS service to a mobile terminal is provided, and a simple system configuration is realized by omitting the uplink. It is considered to provide a cell dedicated to transmission. Steps 1601-1 to ST1604 in the above description disclosed a method until the MBMS service by the MBMS transmission dedicated cell is selected. By the series of processes described above, the mobile terminal can receive a desired MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell.

  In step ST1605, the mobile terminal makes preparations for intermittently receiving MBMS data from the MBMS transmission dedicated cell using the information for receiving the MBMS service received from the network side in step ST1603. Hereinafter, the processing in step 1605 is referred to as “preparation for intermittent reception during MBMS reception”. In Step ST1606, the mobile terminal performs “MBMS side reception status notification” processing for notifying the network side of the MBMS reception status in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell. Since the MBMS transmission dedicated cell is not provided with an uplink, a mobile terminal receiving MBMS data in the MBMS dedicated cell cannot perform location registration on the network side. In this case, since the network side cannot identify the cell in which the mobile terminal exists, it is difficult to send a paging signal when an incoming call directed to the mobile terminal occurs. By this step ST1606, the network side can know that the mobile terminal is receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell and can track the mobile terminal. When an incoming call occurs for a mobile terminal that is using the service, the paging information is transferred to the MBMS transmission dedicated cell via the MME 103 and the MCE 801-1 to notify the mobile terminal that is using the MBMS service that the individual incoming call has occurred. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to solve the problem related to paging for the mobile terminal that is using the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell.

  In Step ST1607, the mobile terminal performs measurement (measurement) processing including electrolytic strength measurement and cell selection of the unicast cell (FIG. 10 102-1) or / and the MBMS / unicast mixed cell (FIG. 10 102-2). . This process is referred to as “Unicast side measurement”. In step ST1607, even if the mobile terminal is receiving MBMS data in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell, the mobile terminal can measure the unicast cell (FIG. 10 102-1) or the MBMS / unicast mixed cell (FIG. 10 102-2). Processing such as selection and location registration can be performed. By performing this measurement process, the mobile terminal using the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell selects and updates the unicast cell or MBMS / unicast mixed cell to be transmitted, so that the uplink It is possible to secure mobility in an MBMS dedicated cell that does not exist. For this reason, a mobile terminal using an MBMS service in an MBMS dedicated cell can reliably perform a process related to mobility such as location registration via, for example, a unicast cell or an MBMS / unicast mixed cell. The network side can send a paging signal to the mobile terminal using the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell. Further, the mobile terminal establishes downlink synchronization through measurement with a unicast / mixed frequency layer according to a measurement cycle. Thereby, even in the case where the mobile terminal transmits a response to the paging signal via the MBMS / unicast mixed cell in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell without uplink, which is the subject of the present invention, the control delay is reduced. can do.

  In Step ST1608, the mobile terminal performs intermittent reception to receive a paging signal. More specifically, when an individual incoming call addressed to the mobile terminal occurs, the network side receives the MBMS service from the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer configured by the MBMS transmission dedicated cell. The paging signal is transmitted through the downlink of the MBMS transmission dedicated cell. In steps ST1605 to ST1608, it becomes possible to notify paging to the mobile terminal that uses the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell, which is the subject of the present invention.

  The mobile terminal that has not received the paging signal in the “intermittent reception during MBMS reception” in step ST1608 receives the MBMS traffic data transmitted from the MBMS transmission dedicated cell via the multicast traffic channel (MTCH) in step ST1609. . Hereinafter, the process of step ST1608 is referred to as “MTCH reception”. The mobile terminal performing “MTCH reception” moves to step ST1607 at the timing of “Unicast side measurement”. Alternatively, the mobile terminal performing “MTCH reception” moves to step ST1602, or step ST1604, or step ST1612 when the reception sensitivity deteriorates. On the other hand, in step ST1610, the mobile terminal that has received the paging signal in the “intermittent reception during MBMS reception” in step ST1608 determines the frequency in the unicast / mixed frequency layer from the frequency in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer (f (MBMS)). The frequency is changed to (f (Unicast)), and control data is transmitted and received. Hereinafter, the process of step ST1610 is referred to as “Unicast side intermittent reception”. As a result, the mobile terminal can transmit uplink data such as a response to the paging signal to the network side via the unicast cell or the mixed cell. In Step ST1611, Step ST1612, the mobile terminal notifies the network side that the reception of MBMS data in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer (MBMS transmission dedicated cell) is terminated. Through step ST1611, the network side can know that the mobile terminal has finished using the MBMS service. A paging signal may be transmitted via a unicast cell or a mixed cell to a mobile terminal that has finished using the MBMS service by the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, so that the network side performs paging via the downlink of the MBMS transmission cell. The process of notifying the signal can be stopped, and the radio resources of the MBMS transmission dedicated cell are effectively used.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the present embodiment, a detailed specific example of the processing flow of the mobile communication system described in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart for explaining cell selection on the unicast side. In step ST1701, a unicast cell, MBMS / unicast mixed cell (also simply referred to as a mixed cell) is a first synchronization channel (P-SCH) and a second synchronization channel (Secondary Synchronization Channel: S-SCH) and a reference signal (also referred to as reference symbol: Reference Symbol: RS) are broadcast to the mobile terminals being served thereby. In Step ST1702, the mobile terminal receives P-SCH, S-SCH, and RS from the base station (unicast cell or / and mixed cell). In Step ST1703, the mobile terminal performs an initial cell search operation using the received P-SCH, S-SCH, and RS. Details of the cell search operation currently being discussed in 3GPP will be described. As a first step, the mobile terminal performs blind detection of a first synchronization channel (P-SCH) in which three types of defined sequences exist as a mobile communication system. The P-SCH is mapped to the center 72 subcarriers of the system bandwidth as a frequency and first (# 0) and sixth (# 5) for each radio frame in terms of time. Therefore, the mobile terminal that has detected the P-SCH blindly can detect the 5 ms timing and know the cell group (1 to 3 groups corresponding to the previous P-SCH 3-week sequence). As a second stage, the mobile terminal performs blind detection on the second synchronization channel (S-SCH). The mapping position of S-SCH is the same as that of P-SCH. A mobile terminal that blindly detects S-SCH can detect 10 ms timing detection (frame synchronization) and a cell identifier (Cell ID).

  In step ST1704, the mobile terminal performs cell selection. Cell selection is a process of selecting one base station that satisfies a condition that can be a serving base station (cell) by using a measurement result obtained by the mobile terminal measuring downlink reception sensitivities from a plurality of base stations. Specific examples of conditions that can serve as a serving base station include those having the best reception sensitivity among downlink reception sensitivities from a plurality of base stations, or base stations that have exceeded the minimum threshold of reception sensitivity of the serving base station. It is done. Examples of values actually measured by the mobile terminal include reference symbol received power (RSRP) and E-UTRA carrier received signal strength indicator (RSSI). A serving base station is a base station that is responsible for scheduling of the mobile terminal. Even a base station other than the serving base station of the mobile terminal can be a serving base station for other mobile terminals. That is, all base stations of a unicast cell or a mixed MBMS / unicast cell have a scheduling function and can serve as a serving base station for any mobile terminal. In Step ST1705, the unicast cell and the MBMS / unicast mixed cell transmit broadcast information using a broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is one of logical channels. Specific examples of the broadcast information include a measurement cycle, an intermittent reception cycle, tracking area information (TA information), and the like. The measurement cycle is a cycle notified from the network side to a mobile terminal being served by the network, and the mobile terminal measures the electric field strength and the like according to this cycle. The intermittent reception period is a period for periodically monitoring the paging signal so that the mobile terminal receives the paging signal in the idle state. TA information is information relating to a “Tracking Area”. The MME starts a paging process by sending a paging message to each eNB belonging to the tracking area in which the UE is registered (TS36.300 19.2.2.1). In Step ST1706, the mobile terminal receives a measurement period, an intermittent reception period, TA information, and the like from the serving base station via the BCCH.

  In Step ST1707, the unicast cell and the MBMS / unicast mixed cell use BCCH to the mobile terminal, the frequency of the MBMS service that can be used, that is, the frequency of the receivable MBSFN synchronization area (MBSFN Synchronization Area) (f (Referred to as “MBMS”). In the W-CDMA communication system, there is a parameter called preferred frequency information (PL information). The PL information is mapped to the multicast control channel (MCCH), which is a logical channel, on the network side, and is notified to the mobile terminals being served thereby. However, in the LTE system, it is planned to provide a unicast cell that does not provide an MBMS service. In such a unicast cell, a method of broadcasting f (MBMS) using MCCH, which is an MBMS channel, is adopted. There is a problem that you can not.

  In Step ST1708, the mobile terminal receives f (MBMS) transmitted from the serving base station using BCCH. When the mobile terminal receives f (MBMS), it is not necessary for the mobile terminal to comprehensively search for frequencies that may have a service other than the current frequency. This has the effect of shortening the control delay until the mobile terminal receives a service from a frequency other than the current frequency. Step ST1707 and step ST1708 are detailed specific examples of the “notification regarding receivable MBMS” described in the first embodiment. Here, if f (MBMS) is determined to be static (Static) or quasi-static (Semi-Static) as the mobile communication system, the mobile terminal does not broadcast f (MBMS) from the base station. It is possible to obtain an effect that the control delay until the service is received from a frequency other than the current frequency is shortened. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to report f (MBMS), the effect of effective use of radio resources can also be obtained.

  On the other hand, in step ST1707 and step ST1708, in addition to f (MBMS), the system bandwidth and the number of transmission antennas in each f (MBMS) can be reported from the base station using BCCH. As a result, in step ST1708, the mobile terminal receives f (MBMS) transmitted from the serving base station using BCCH, thereby enabling system information (system bandwidth, transmission antenna) in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that the control delay can be shortened. Because it is necessary to receive BCCH from the serving base station in the unicast / frequency layer in order to receive f (MBMS), even if the information (system bandwidth, number of transmission antennas) increases, the processing of the mobile terminal The time should not be so long. On the other hand, in order to acquire the system information of the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer after moving to the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer, it is necessary to receive the BCCH in the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer. Since decoding processing is necessary, a control delay occurs.

  In Step ST1709, the mobile terminal includes the TA information of the serving base station received in Step ST1706 in the current tracking area list (TA List) stored in the protocol processing unit 1101 or the control unit 1110. Check. If included, the process proceeds to step ST1720 in FIG. If not included, step ST1710 is executed. In Step ST1710, the mobile terminal transmits an “Attach Request” to the serving base station and notifies it. As information included in the “attach request”, an identifier of a mobile terminal (IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) or S-TMSI (S-Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity, S-TMSI) is simply referred to as Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity (TMSI). The serving base station that has received the “attach request” in step ST1711 sends the “attach request” to the MME (Mobility Management Entity) or HSS in step ST1712. In step ST1713, the MME receives an “attach request.” The idle state mobility management unit 1305-3 of the MME manages the tracking area list of each mobile terminal. MME is managing the mobile terminal It is confirmed whether or not the serving base station of the mobile terminal is included in the tracking area list, and if it is included, the process proceeds to step ST1716 of Fig. 18. Otherwise, step ST1715 is executed. Then, the idle state mobility management unit 1305-3 of the MME performs a process of adding (or updating) the TA information of the serving base station of the mobile terminal to the tracking area list managed by the mobile terminal in Step ST1716. The MME notifies the serving base station of “Attach Accept.” Information included in the “Attach Accept” includes a tracking area list, an identifier (S-TMSI, etc.) given to the mobile terminal, and the like. “Attach Accept” at ST1717 Received serving base station, the "attach accept" in step ST1718 notifies to the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal, in step ST1719 receives the "attach accept".

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the MBMS search process. Steps 1720 to 1725 in FIG. 18 are specific processing of “MBMS search” described in the first embodiment. In Step ST1720, the mobile terminal confirms whether or not the frequency of the MBSFN synchronization area that can be received in Step ST1708 (or the frequency of the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission) has been received. That is, it is confirmed whether at least one f (MBMS) has been received. If it does not exist (no f (MBMS)), the process is terminated. If it exists (has f (MBMS)), step ST1721 is executed. In Step ST1721, the mobile terminal confirms whether or not the user intends to receive the MBMS service at f (MBMS). As a specific example of the confirmation, when the user has an intention to receive the MBMS service, an instruction is sent to the mobile terminal using the user interface, and the mobile terminal stores the user's intention in the protocol processing unit 1101. In step ST1721, the mobile terminal confirms whether or not it intends to receive the MBMS service stored in the protocol processing unit 1101. If there is no intention to receive the MBMS service, the process of step ST1721 is repeated. As a method of repeating, a method in which the mobile terminal performs the determination in step ST1721 at a constant period, or a method in which step ST1721 or step ST1720 is performed when there is a notification of change of intention to receive the MBMS service from the user through the user interface. and so on. If there is an intention to receive the MBMS service, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST1722. In Step ST1722, the mobile terminal changes the set frequency of the frequency conversion unit 1107 (synthesizer), and starts the MBMS search operation by changing the center frequency to f (MBMS). Changing the set frequency of the frequency conversion unit 1107 and changing the center frequency is referred to as re-tune. In Step ST1723, the MBMS dedicated cell is served by the first synchronization channel (Primary Synchronization Signal: P-SCH), the second synchronization channel (Secondary Synchronization Signal: S-SCH), the reference signal (RS (MBMS)), and the BCCH. Informs the mobile terminal. In Step ST1724, the mobile terminal receives P-SCH, S-SCH, RS (MBMS), and BCCH (broadcast control channel) from the MBMS dedicated cell.

  In step ST1725, the mobile terminal performs an MBMS search operation. At that time, the mobile terminal measures the reception quality using the reference signal (RS). A search operation in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission currently being discussed in 3GPP will be described. A sequence used exclusively in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission is added to the P-SCH. Additional dedicated sequences shall be defined statically. As a first step, the mobile terminal blind-detects the P-SCH with an additional dedicated sequence. The P-SCH is mapped to the center 72 subcarriers of the system bandwidth in terms of frequency, and to the first (# 0) and sixth (# 5) in terms of time for each radio frame. Therefore, the mobile terminal that has detected P-SCH blindly can detect the timing for 5 ms. In addition, P-SCH is transmitted in multicell. As a second stage, the mobile terminal performs blind detection on the S-SCH. The mapping position of S-SCH is the same as that of P-SCH. A mobile terminal that blindly detects S-SCH can detect 10 ms timing detection (frame synchronization) and the MBSFN area ID. S-SCH is transmitted in multicell. The BCCH is received using the scrambling code associated with the MBSFN area ID obtained in the second stage. The mobile terminal can obtain MCCH (multicast control channel) scheduling by decoding BCCH. This decoding process uses a scrambling code associated with the MBSFN area ID. BCCH is transmitted in multicell. In the present invention, it is assumed that the system bandwidth in f (MBMS) and the number of transmission antennas in f (MBMS) can be obtained by further decoding BCCH. Here, if the system bandwidth and the number of transmission antennas in f (MBMS) as a mobile communication system are determined to be static (Static) or quasi-static (Semi-Static), the base station uses f (MBMS). There is no need to report the system bandwidth or / and the number of transmission antennas, and the effect of effective use of radio resources can be obtained. Further, since it is not necessary to decode and change the parameters (system bandwidth or / and the number of transmission antennas in f (MBMS)), it is possible to obtain the effects of reducing the power consumption of the mobile terminal and reducing the control delay.

  In the present invention, the MCCH scheduling is further considered. In the current 3GPP standard, an MBSFN synchronization area (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network Synchronization Area f (MBMS)) can support one or more MBSFN areas (MBSFN Areas) (see FIG. 7). . On the other hand, it is not determined how to multiplex a plurality of MBSFN areas with f (MBMS), which is a single frequency (Single Frequency). Here, the “MBMS search” process will be described for each multiplexing method so that the present invention can be applied even when the multiplexing method of the MBSFN area is different.

  First, a case where the MBSFN area is time division multiplexed (TDM) will be described. FIG. 25 shows a conceptual diagram of the geographical location of the base station when a plurality of MBSFN areas exist. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing a plurality of MBSFN areas constituting the MBSFN synchronization area. In FIG. 25, there are three areas, MBSFN area 1, MBSFN area 2, and MBSFN area 3, in one MBSFN synchronization area. A specific example of scheduling of MCCH in BCCH obtained in step ST1725 is not discussed in detail in the current 3GPP. In order to disclose a method for selecting a desired service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, which is a subject of the present invention, and a mobile communication system therefor, in the BCCH when MBSFN areas are time-division multiplexed A specific example of MCCH scheduling will be described. FIG. 26 is a conceptual diagram of mapping of the MBSFN synchronization area to the physical channel when the MBSFN area is time-division multiplexed.

  FIG. 26 shows a concept in which channels to a plurality of MBMFN areas are time-division multiplexed in one MBSFN synchronization area. Since each MBFSN area included in one MBSFN synchronization area is temporally synchronized, the P-SCH (first synchronization channel) is an MBMS dedicated cell in the MBSFN area 1, an MBMS dedicated cell in the MBSFN area 2, and an MBSFN. The MBMS dedicated cell in area 3 is also transmitted at the same timing. If an additional dedicated sequence is used, the P-SCH sequences in all MBSFN areas are the same. Therefore, the same information is transmitted at the same timing in the MBSFN synchronization area using P-SCH. Further, as described above, it is considered that the MBSFN area ID is transmitted by S-SCH (second synchronization channel). In that case, different information for each MBSFN area is transmitted on the S-SCH at the same timing in the MBSFN synchronization area. In this case, the same information is transmitted at the same timing from all the MBMS dedicated cells in each MBSFN area. The mobile communication system multiplies the scrambling code associated with the MBSFN area ID when performing transmission using BCCH. This scrambling code is notified to the mobile terminal using S-SCH (second synchronization channel). Therefore, different information for each MBSFN area is transmitted at the same timing in the MBSFN synchronization area using BCCH. On the other hand, the content of BCCH is the same in all MBMS dedicated base stations in the MBSFN area. The mobile terminal can obtain MCCH scheduling by decoding BCCH.

  In the current 3GPP communication system, as described in Non-Patent Document 2, allocation of MBSFN subframes in an MBMS / unicast mixed cell is being studied. Since there is no unicast subframe in the MBMS dedicated cell provided in the LTE communication system, all are MBSFN subframes. However, it is important to match the configurations of the MBMS / unicast mixed cell and the MBMS dedicated cell as much as possible. Therefore, after following the concept of “MBSFN frame cluster” (MBSFN frame cluster) disclosed in Non-Patent Document 2, a method for scheduling an MBMS dedicated cell is disclosed. Furthermore, MCCH scheduling in the MBSFN subframe is also described. In FIG. 26, a cycle in which the MBSFN frame cluster is repeated is referred to as an MBSFN frame cluster repetition period. In addition, the cycle in which the MCCH is transmitted is defined as an MCCH repetition period (MCCH Repetiton Period). A case where the MBSFN frame cluster is smaller than the MCCH repetition period will be described.

  In FIG. 26, it is assumed that MCCH scheduling is notified of the starting point value of the time to which the MCCH is mapped and the MCCH repetition period. More specifically, a radio frame is used to specify the MCCH repetition period. SFN (System Frame Number) is used to specify the starting point value. A non-radio frame may be used to specify the MCCH repetition period. Specific examples include subframes. Other than SFN may be used to specify the starting point value. Specific examples include an offset value from some reference value. When MCCH is mapped to some subframes in a radio frame, SFN and subframe number may be notified as a starting point. A specific calculation formula for obtaining the starting point value is represented by: starting point value = (first SFN number to which MCCH is mapped) mod (MCCH repetition period). In FIG. 26, the MCCH starting point value 1 of the MBSFN area 1 is 1 mod 7 = 1 or 8 mod 7 = 1... The MCCH scheduling parameter of the MBSFN area 1 is the MCCH repetition period 1 “7”, and the starting point value 1 “1”. The MCCH starting point value 2 of the MBSFN area 2 is 4 mod 7 = 4..., And the MCCH scheduling parameters of the MBSFN area 2 are the MCCH repetition period 2 “7” and the starting point value 2 “4”. The MCCH starting point value 3 in the MBSFN area 3 is 6 mod 7 = 6..., And the MCCH scheduling parameters in the MBSFN area 3 are the MCCH repetition period 3 “7” and the offset value 3 “6”. If the SFN at this time is mapped to the BCCH, it is broadcast for each radio frame, and is effective when receiving the MCCH from the MCCH starting point value.

  That is, data transmitted from the base station belonging to the MBSFN area 1 is as follows. The additional dedicated sequence P-SCH (first synchronization channel), S-SCH1 (second synchronization channel) mapped with MBSFN area ID1, etc., MCCH starting point value 1 “1”, MCCH repetition period 1 “ 7 ”and the like are mapped and BCCH1 to which scrambling code 1 is applied, MCCH1 and MTCH1 of MBSFN area 1 are transmitted. Since 3 from the base station belonging to the MBSFN area 1 are time-division multiplexed, MCCH 2 and 3 and MTCH 2 and 3 from the base stations belonging to the MBSFN area 2 and 3 are stopped during the transmission period of the MBSFN area 1 ( DTX: Discontinuous transmission. A scrambling code 1 may be applied to MCCH1 and MTCH2. By applying scrambling codes to MCCH1 and MTCH1, it is possible to obtain an effect that the processing for MBSFN area specific data (BCCH, MCCH, MTCH) is unified. On the other hand, MCCH and MTCH are time division multiplexed (TDM), so that it is not necessary to apply a scrambling code specific to the MBSFN area. By not applying scrambling codes to MCCH1 and MTCH1, it is possible to reduce the load of encoding processing on the base station side and decoding processing on the mobile terminal side and to reduce delay until data reception.

  The data transmitted from the base stations belonging to the MBSFN area 2 as in the MBSFN area 1 are as follows. The additional dedicated sequences P-SCH (first synchronization channel), S-SCH2 (second synchronization channel) to which MBSFN area ID2 and the like are mapped, MCCH starting point value 2 “4”, MCCH repetition period 2 “ 7 ”and the like, and BCCH2 to which scrambling code 2 is applied and MCCH2 and MTCH2 of the base station belonging to MBSFN area 2 are transmitted. During this period, MCCHs 1 and 3 and MTCHs 1 and 3 of the base stations belonging to the MBSFN areas 1 and 3 are suspended (DTX). The data transmitted from the base stations belonging to the MBSFN area 3 as in the MBSFN area 1 are as follows. The additional dedicated sequences P-SCH (first synchronization channel), S-SCH3 (second synchronization channel) to which MBSFN area ID3, etc. are mapped, MCCH starting point value 3 “6”, MCCH repetition period 3 “ 7 ”and the like are mapped and BCCH3 to which scrambling code 3 is applied, MCCH3 and MTCH3 of MBSFN area 3 are transmitted. During this period, MCCHs 1 and 2 and MTCHs 1 and 2 of the base stations belonging to MBSFN areas 1 and 2 are suspended (DTX). Although FIG. 26 shows an example in which MCCH and MTCH are time-divided in units of radio frames for convenience, even if the multiplexing method of MCCH and MTCH is a different method, the unit of time-division multiplexing is not in units of radio frames. Even so, the present invention is applicable. Further, if the MCCH repetition period is determined to be static (Static) or quasi-static (Semi-Static) as a mobile communication system, there is no need to report the MCCH repetition period from the base station. Since the information to be notified is reduced, the effect of effective use of radio resources can be obtained.

  Next, a case where the MBSFN area is code division multiplexed (CDM) will be described. The conceptual diagram of the location of the base station when there are a plurality of MBSFN areas is the same as in the case of time division multiplexing (TDM). FIG. 27 is a conceptual diagram of mapping of MBSFN synchronization areas to physical channels when MBSFN areas are code division multiplexed. In FIG. 27, it is assumed that MBMS services (MCCH, MTCH) are continuously transmitted in each MBSFN area. In such a case, the MBSFN frame cluster may not be defined. A case where the MBSFN frame cluster is smaller than the MCCH repetition period will be described. Since specific examples of P-SCH (first synchronization channel), S-SCH (second synchronization channel), and BCCH are the same as those in the case of time division multiplexing (TDM), description thereof is omitted. In the present invention, it is considered that the MCCH scheduling is notified of the starting point value of the time to which the MCCH is mapped and the MCCH repetition period. More specifically, the number of radio frames is used to specify the MCCH repetition period. SFN (System Frame Number) is used to specify the starting point value. A non-radio frame may be used to specify the MCCH repetition period. Specific examples include subframes. Other than SFN may be used to specify the starting point value. Specific examples include an offset value from some reference value. When MCCH is mapped to some subframes in a radio frame, SFN and subframe number may be notified as a starting point. A specific calculation formula for obtaining the starting point value is represented by: starting point value = (first SFN number to which MCCH is mapped) mod (MCCH repetition period). In FIG. 27, the MCCH starting point value of the MBSFN area 1 is 1 mod 3 = 1, 4 mod 3 = 1..., And the MCCH scheduling parameters of the MBSFN area 1 are the MCCH repetition period 1 “3” and the starting point value “3”. 1 ". The MCCH starting point value of the MBSFN area 2 is 1 mod 2 = 1, 3 mod 2 = 1..., And the MCCH scheduling parameters of the MBSFN area 1 are the MCCH repetition period 2 “2” and the starting point value “1”. The MCCH starting point value of the MBSFN area 3 is 2 mod 4 = 2..., And the MCCH scheduling parameters of the MBSFN area 3 are the MCCH repetition period 3 “4” and the starting point value “2”.

  That is, data transmitted from the base station belonging to the MBSFN area 1 is as follows. P-SCH (first synchronization channel) which is a frequency layer-dedicated sequence dedicated to MBMS transmission (the above-mentioned additional dedicated sequence), S-SCH1 (second synchronization channel) to which MBSFN area ID1 and the like are mapped, MCCH starting point Value 1 “1”, MCCH repetition period 1 “3”, etc. are mapped, and BCCH1 to which scrambling code 1 is applied, and MCCH1 and MTCH1 of the base station belonging to MBSFN area 1 to which scrambling code 1 is applied are transmitted. The The data transmitted from the base stations belonging to the MBSFN area 2 as in the MBSFN area 1 are as follows. P-SCH (first synchronization channel) that is a frequency layer-dedicated sequence dedicated for MBMS transmission, S-SCH2 (second synchronization channel) to which MBSFN area ID2 and the like are mapped, MCCH starting point value 2 “1”, MCCH The repetition period 2 “2” or the like is mapped, and BCCH2 to which scrambling code 2 is applied, and MCCH2 and MTCH2 of the base station belonging to MBSFN area 2 to which scrambling code 2 is applied are transmitted. The data transmitted from the base stations belonging to the MBSFN area 3 as in the MBSFN area 1 are as follows. P-SCH (first synchronization channel), which is a frequency layer-dedicated sequence dedicated to MBMS transmission, S-SCH3 (second synchronization channel) mapped with MBSFN area ID3, etc., MCCH starting point value 3 “2”, MCCH The repetition period 3 “4” or the like is mapped, and BCCH3 to which scrambling code 3 is applied, and MCCH3 and MTCH3 of the base station belonging to MBSFN area 3 to which scrambling code 3 is applied are transmitted.

  Although FIG. 27 shows an example in which MCCH and MTCH are time-divided in units of radio frames for convenience, even if the multiplexing method of MCCH and MTCH is another method, the unit of time-division multiplexing is not in units of radio frames. Even if it exists, this invention is applicable. Further, if the MCCH repetition period is determined to be static (Static) or quasi-static (Semi-Static) as a mobile communication system, there is no need to report the MCCH repetition period from the base station. Since the information to be notified is reduced, the effect of effective use of radio resources can be obtained. When the MBSFN area is code division multiplexed (CDM), it is possible to set different repetition periods for each MBSFN area, compared with the case where the MBSFN area is time division multiplexed (TDM), and the MBMS service has a high degree of freedom. There is an effect that scheduling becomes possible. Furthermore, by using code division multiplexing, even if MTCH and MCCH from a plurality of MBSFN areas overlap at the same time in the mobile terminal, it can be separated (because it can be separated by a scrambling code). Therefore, since it becomes possible to transmit MTCH and MCCH from the MBSFN area 1-3 at the same time as the mobile communication system, it is possible to obtain an effect of expanding the frequency and time radio resources allocated to one MBSFN area. I can do it.

  Next, in the current 3GPP discussion, it is considered to provide an MBSFN area that covers a plurality of MBSFN areas. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing a plurality of MBSFN areas constituting an MBSFN synchronization area, and is an explanatory diagram showing an MBSFN area covering a plurality of MBSFN areas. In FIG. 28, MBSFN areas 1 to 4 exist in one MBSFN synchronization area. Among them, MBSFN area 4 covers MBSFN areas 1 to 3. Although it is discussed that the MBSFN area 4 is accessed via the covered MBSFN areas 1 to 3, details are not yet determined. Therefore, an access method to an MBSFN area that covers a plurality of MBSFN areas will be described below.

  As described above, since the MBSFN area multiplexing method has not been determined in detail at present, first, the MBSFN area 4 and the MBSFN areas 1 to 3 covered by the MBSFN area 1 are time-division multiplexed, and A case where the covered MBSFN areas 1 to 3 are code division multiplexed will be described. A specific example of step ST1725 (see FIG. 18) in the case where the geographical location is the MBSFN area as shown in FIG. As a first step, the mobile terminal performs blind detection of the P-SCH (first synchronization channel) in the dedicated sequence. A mobile terminal that has blind-detected P-SCH can detect timing for 5 ms. P-SCH is multi-cell transmission. Base stations located in the MBSFN synchronization area are synchronized for multi-cell transmission. Therefore, multi-cell transmission of P-SCH is targeted for base stations included in the synchronization area. As a second stage, the mobile terminal performs blind detection of S-SCH (second synchronization channel). A mobile terminal that blindly detects S-SCH can detect 10 ms timing detection (frame synchronization) and the MBSFN area ID. S-SCH is multi-cell transmission. The MBSFN area ID at this time is the covered MBSFN area ID. That is, each covered MBSFN area ID (any of MBSFN areas 1 to 3) where the mobile terminal is located. Therefore, S-SCH multi-cell transmission is targeted for base stations included in each covered MBSFN area. The mobile terminal receives BCCH (broadcast control channel) using the scrambling code associated with the MBSFN area ID obtained in the second stage. By decoding BCCH, MCCH (multicast control channel) scheduling can be obtained. BCCH is multi-cell transmission. Since the scrambling code obtained in the second stage is used, the BCCH becomes the BCCH from the covered MBSFN area. Therefore, multi-cell transmission of BCCH is targeted for base stations included in each covered MBSFN area. The mobile terminal can obtain MCCH scheduling, system bandwidth in f (MBMS), the number of transmission antennas, and the like by decoding BCCH.

  Here, MCCH scheduling will be further examined. In FIG. 29, the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) and the covered MBSFN areas (MBSFN areas 1 to 3) are time division multiplexed, and the multiplexing method between the covered MBSFN areas is code division multiplexing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mapping to the physical channel of the MBSFN synchronous area in a case. Since the MBSFN synchronization area is synchronized in time, the P-SCH (first synchronization channel) is transmitted to the MBMS dedicated cells in the MBSFN areas 1 to 3 at the same timing. Further, if the sequence dedicated to the frequency layer dedicated to the MBMS transmission (the additional dedicated sequence) is used, the sequences of P-SCHs (second synchronization channels) in all MBSFN areas are the same. Therefore, the same information is transmitted at the same timing in the MBSFN synchronization area for the P-SCH. As described above, it is considered that the MBSFN area ID is transmitted by S-SCH (second synchronization channel). Therefore, in this case, S-SCH is transmitted with different information for each MBSFN area at the same timing in the MBSFN synchronization area. In this case, the same information is transmitted at the same timing from all the MBMS dedicated cells in each MBSFN area. At this time, it is assumed that there is no S-SCH specific to the covering MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4). S-SCH uses the same radio resources in terms of frequency and time in the MBSFN synchronization area. Since the S-SCH is used for searching for the MBSFN area ID associated with each MBSFN area scrambling code, the S-SCH cannot be subjected to the scrambling code of each MBSFN area. The transmission of the covered MBSFN area S-SCH means that a plurality of MBSFN areas overlap as geographical locations, but in the overlapping MBSFN areas (for example, MBSFN areas 1 and 4), S- Only one type of SCH needs to be transmitted. Thereby, it can prevent that S-SCH from a mutual MBSFN area becomes interference. The mobile communication system transmits a BCCH to which a scrambling code associated with an MBSFN area ID notified by S-SCH is applied. Therefore, in this case, the BCCH is transmitted with different information for each covered MBSFN area at the same timing in the MBSFN synchronization area. The contents of BCCH are the same in all MBMS dedicated base stations in the MBSFN area. The mobile terminal can obtain MCCH scheduling by decoding BCCH. The current 3GPP does not discuss specific examples of MCCH scheduling. The present invention shows a specific example of MCCH scheduling.

In FIG. 29, MCCH scheduling when the MBSFN frame cluster is larger than the MCCH repetition period will be described together. Two stages are considered for MCCH scheduling in the covered MBSFN area. In the following description, for convenience, a case will be described in which the mobile terminal is located in the MBSFN area 1 as the MBSFN area covered and the MBSFN area 4 exists as the covered MBSFN area. As a first step, MCCH scheduling of MBSFN area 1 is notified on BCCH of MBSFN area 1. The present invention shows a specific example of MCCH scheduling. In the present invention, it is considered to notify the starting point value of the time when MCCH is mapped, the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period, and the number of MCCH transmissions within the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period as MCCH scheduling. More specifically, the number of radio frames is used for the repetition period of the MBSFN frame cluster. More specifically, SFN (System Frame Number) is used to specify the starting point value. A specific example of the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period other than the radio frame may be a subframe. Other than SFN may be used to specify the starting point value. Specific examples include an offset value from some reference value. When MCCH is mapped to some subframes in a radio frame, SFN and subframe number may be notified as a starting point. As a specific calculation formula for obtaining the starting point value, starting point value = (first SFN number to which MCCH is mapped) mod (MBSFN FRAME Cluster Repetition Period) can be considered. More specifically, the number of MCCH transmissions in the MBSFN frame cluster (hereinafter referred to as N MCCH ) is used as the number of MCCH transmissions in the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period. A concrete computation expression for calculating the N MCCH is expressed by N MCCH = MBSFN frame cluster / MCCH repetition period (MCCH Repetition Period). In FIG. 29, the MCCH offset value 1 of the MBSFN area 1 is 1 mod 10 = 1. The MCCH starting point value 2 of the MBSFN area 2 is 1 mod 10 = 1. The MCCH starting point value 4 of the MBSFN area 4 is 7 mod 10 = 7. Next, N MCCH 1 of MBSFN area 1 is 6/2 = 3. Also, N MCCH 2 of MBSFN area 2 is 6/3 = 2. N MCCH 4 in the MBSFN area 4 is 4/2 = 2. Therefore, the MCCH scheduling parameters of MBSFN area 1 are MBSFN frame cluster repetition period 1 “10”, starting point value 1 “1”, and N MCCH 1 “3”. At this time, instead of notifying N MCCH 1 as a parameter, MBSFN frame cluster 1 and MCCH repetition period 1 may be notified.

As a second step, the MCCH scheduling of the MBSFN area 4 is notified on the MCCH of the MBSFN area 1. A specific example of MCCH scheduling is the MBSFN of the MBSFN area covered in addition to the parameters of the MBSFN area 4 (MBSFN frame cluster repetition period 4 “10”, state point 4 “7”, N MCCH 4 “2”). The area ID (MBSFN area 4) is notified. As the MCCH scheduling of the MBSFN area 4, a single-stage case may be considered. That is, the MCCH scheduling of the MBSFN area 4 is also notified by the BCCH of the MBSFN area 1. As a result, the mobile terminal that receives the service in the MBSFN area 4 does not need to receive and decode the MCCH in the MBSFN area 1, so that the control delay can be reduced. As the MCCH scheduling, the above-mentioned starting point, MBSFN frame cluster repetition period, and N MCCH (MBSFN frame cluster and MCCH repetition period may be used) are used. It can also be used when there are multiple MCCHs in a cluster.

That is, data transmitted from the base station belonging to the MBSFN area 1 is as follows. P-SCH (first synchronization channel) that is a frequency layer-dedicated sequence dedicated to MBMS transmission, S-SCH1 (second synchronization channel) to which MBSFN area ID1 and the like are mapped, MCCH starting point value 1 “1”, MBSFN Frame cluster repetition period 1 “10”, N MCCH 1 “3”, and the like are mapped, and BCCH 1 to which scrambling code 1 is applied, MCCH 1 and MTCH 1 of MBSFN area 1 to which scrambling code 1 is applied are transmitted. In MCCH1, the MBSFN area ID (MBSFN area 4) of the MBSFN area 4 and the MCCH scheduling of the MBSFN area 4, the MCCH starting point value 4 “7”, the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period 4 “10”, and the N MCCH 4 “2” Is sent. The data transmitted from the base stations belonging to the MBSFN area 2 as in the MBSFN area 1 are as follows. S-SCH2, which is a sequence dedicated to the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, S-SCH2 to which MBSFN area ID2 and the like are mapped, MCCH starting point value 2 “1”, MBSFN frame cluster repetition period 2 “10”, N MCCH 2 “2” or the like is mapped and BCCH2 to which scrambling code 2 is applied and MCCH2 and MTCH2 of MBSFN area 2 to which scrambling code 2 is applied are transmitted. In MCCH2, the MBSFN area ID (MBSFN area 4) of the MBSFN area 4 and the MCCH scheduling of the MBSFN area 4, the MCCH offset value 4 “7”, the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period 4 “10”, and the N MCCH 4 “2” are transmitted. Is done.

  As data transmitted from the MBSFN area 4, there is no transmission of P-SCH and S-SCH as described above. Further, if there is no need to notify more than the information transmitted on the BCCH of the MBSFN area (MBSFN areas 1 to 3) covered as the system information of the MBSFN area 4, transmission of BCCH from the MBSFN area 4 is omitted. I can do it. Thereby, the effect of effective utilization of radio resources can be obtained. MCCH4 and MTCH4 of MBSFN area 4 to which no scrambling code is applied are transmitted.

  FIG. 29 shows an example in which MCCH and MTCH are time-divided in units of radio frames for convenience. However, even if the multiplexing method of MCCH and MTCH is different, the unit of time-division multiplexing is not in units of radio frames. Even if it exists, this invention is applicable. A multiplexing method in which the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) and the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN areas 1 to 3) are time division multiplexed, and the covered MBSFN areas are code division multiplexed. Uses code division multiplexing as a multiplexing method for MBSFN areas 1 to 3 in which geographical locations are separated. Thereby, the advantage of effective use of frequency and time radio resources can be obtained. In code division multiplexing, each MBSFN area is separated only by a scrambling code assigned to each MBSFN area, so that there is a possibility that data between the MBSFN areas interfere with each other. However, in this multiplexing method, there is an effect that interference by transmission data is less likely to occur even if code division multiplexing is used in multiplexing of MBSFN areas 1 to 3 where geographical locations are separated. Time division multiplexing is used for multiplexing the MBSFN area 4 and the MBMSFN areas 1 to 3 whose geographical locations are not separated. Thereby, since it is not geographically separated, the multiplexing method of the MBSFN area 4 and the MBSFN areas 1 to 3 that are more likely to cause interference can be changed to a multiplexing method that hardly causes interference. With this multiplexing method, it is possible to obtain an effect that radio resources can be effectively used while suppressing interference between the MBSFN areas. Furthermore, P-SCH, S-SCH, and BCCH can be reduced by not performing MBMS search in the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4). Thereby, the effect that the radio | wireless resource of the MBSFN area 4 can be used effectively can be acquired.

  Next, when the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) and the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN areas 1 to 3) are time division multiplexed, the multiplexing method between the covered MBSFN areas is also time division multiplexed. A specific example will be described. The conceptual diagram of the location of the base station when there are multiple MBSFN areas is covered by time-division multiplexing the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) and the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN areas 1 to 3). The multiplexing method between the MBSFN areas is the same as in the case of code division multiplexing. Since P-SCH, S-SCH, and BCCH are the same as those described above, description thereof is omitted. A specific example of MCCH scheduling will be described mainly with respect to different parts, which is almost the same as in the above case. As a first step, MCCH scheduling of MBSFN area 1 is notified on BCCH of MBSFN area 1. The present invention shows a specific example of MCCH scheduling. In the present invention, it is considered that the MCCH scheduling is notified of the starting point value of the time to which the MCCH is mapped and the MCCH repetition period. The number of radio frames is used to specify the MCCH repetition period. More specifically, SFN (System Frame Number) is used to specify the starting point value. A specific example of the MCCH repetition period other than the number of radio frames may be a subframe. Other than SFN may be used to specify the starting point value. Specific examples include an offset value from some reference value. When MCCH is mapped to some subframes in a radio frame, SFN and subframe number may be notified as a starting point. A specific calculation formula for obtaining the starting point value is starting point value = (first SFN number to which MCCH is mapped) mod (MCCH repetition period). As a second step, the MCCH scheduling of the MBSFN area 4 is notified on the MCCH of the MBSFN area 1. A specific example of the MCCH scheduling is to notify the MBSFN area ID (MBSFN area 4) of the MBSFN area covered in addition to the parameters of the MBSFN area 4 similar to the MBSFN area 1 described above. A description of the parameters of the MBSFN area 4 is omitted.

  Next, the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) and the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN areas 1 to 3) are code division multiplexed, and the multiplexing method between the covered MBSFN areas is also code division multiplexed. A specific example in the case will be described. The conceptual diagram of the location of the base station when there are multiple MBSFN areas is covered by time-division multiplexing the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) and the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN areas 1 to 3). The multiplexing method between the MBSFN areas is the same as in the case of code division multiplexing. Since P-SCH, S-SCH, and BCCH are the same as those described above, description thereof is omitted. A specific example of MCCH scheduling will be described mainly with respect to different parts, which is almost the same as in the above case. As a first step, MCCH scheduling of MBSFN area 1 is notified on BCCH of MBSFN area 1. The present invention shows a specific example of MCCH scheduling. In the present invention, it is considered to notify the starting point value of MCCH mapping time and the MCCH repetition period as MCCH scheduling. The number of radio frames is used to specify the MCCH repetition period. More specifically, SFN (System Frame Number) is used to specify the starting point value. Other than the number of radio frames may be used to specify the MCCH repetition period. Specific examples include subframes. Other than SFN may be used to specify the starting point value. Specific examples include an offset value from some reference value. When MCCH is mapped to some subframes in a radio frame, SFN and subframe number may be notified as a starting point. A specific calculation formula for obtaining the starting point value is starting point value = (first SFN number to which MCCH is mapped) mod (MCCH repetition period). As a second step, the MCCH scheduling of the MBSFN area 4 is notified on the MCCH of the MBSFN area 1. As a specific example of MCCH scheduling, the MBSFN area ID (MBSFN area 4) of the covered MBSFN area is notified in addition to the parameters of the MBSFN area 4 like the MBSFN area 1 described above. A description of the parameters of the MBSFN area 4 is omitted. The scrambling code used in the MBSFN area 4 is determined based on the MBSFN area ID (MBSFN area 4) notified on the MCCH1 of the MBSFN area 1.

  Next, the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) and the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN areas 1 to 3) are code division multiplexed, and the multiplexing method between the covered MBSFN areas is time division multiplexing. A specific example in the case will be described. The conceptual diagram of the location of the base station when there are multiple MBSFN areas is covered by time-division multiplexing the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) and the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN areas 1 to 3). The multiplexing method between the MBSFN areas is the same as in the case of code division multiplexing. Since P-SCH, S-SCH, and BCCH are the same as those described above, description thereof is omitted. A specific example of MCCH scheduling will be described mainly with respect to different parts, which is almost the same as in the above case. As a first step, MCCH scheduling of MBSFN area 1 is notified on BCCH of MBSFN area 1. The present invention shows a specific example of MCCH scheduling. In the present invention, it is considered that the MCCH scheduling is notified of the starting point value of the time to which the MCCH is mapped and the MCCH repetition period. The number of radio frames is used to specify the MCCH repetition period. More specifically, SFN (System Frame Number) is used to specify the starting point value. Other than the number of radio frames may be used to specify the MCCH repetition period. Specific examples include subframes. Other than SFN may be used to specify the starting point value. Specific examples include an offset value from some reference value. When MCCH is mapped to some subframes in a radio frame, SFN and subframe number may be notified as a starting point. A specific calculation formula for obtaining the starting point value is starting point value = (first SFN number to which MCCH is mapped) mod (MCCH repetition period). As a second step, the MCCH scheduling of the MBSFN area 4 is notified on the MCCH of the MBSFN area 1. As a specific example of MCCH scheduling, a specific example of MCCH scheduling notifies the MBSFN area 4 parameters of a standing point, an MCCH repetition period, and an MBSFN area ID (MBSFN area 4) of the covered MBSFN area.

  The MCCH starting point may be an MCH starting point or a PMCH starting point in MCCH scheduling in all the multiplexing methods of the MBSFN area described above. In the case of the MCH starting point, the parameter MCCH repetition period in MCCH scheduling is the MCH repetition period. At that time, if MCCH is always mapped in each MCH, MCH repetition period = MCCH repetition period. On the other hand, when the MCCH is not necessarily mapped in each MCH, the MCCH repetition period may be included as a parameter together with the MCH repetition period. In the case of the PMCH starting point, the parameter MCCH repetition period in MCCH scheduling is the PMCH repetition period. At that time, when MCCH is always mapped in each PMCH, PMCH repetition period = MCCH repetition period. On the other hand, when the MCCH is not necessarily mapped in each PMCH, the MCCH repetition period may be included as a parameter together with the PMCH repetition period.

  Next, in 3GPP, discussions are progressing in a direction in which single cell transmission is supported in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. As a support method thereof, a method of realizing single cell transmission in an MBSFN area having a single cell configuration has been discussed. However, there is no discussion about a specific implementation method. In order to disclose a method for selecting a desired service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, which is a subject of the present invention, and a mobile communication system therefor, a specific example of a method for supporting single cell transmission will be described. The specific implementation example in the case where there is an MBSFN area that covers a plurality of MBSFN areas has been described above. In the above method, the covered MBSFN areas (MBSFN Area1 to 3) are replaced with cells that perform single-cell transmission, and the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN Area4) is subjected to multi-cell transmission. By replacing with, single cell transmission can be realized in an MBSFN area having a single cell configuration.

  Next, “MBMS area information acquisition” described in Embodiment 1 will be described more specifically using steps ST1726 and 1727 in FIG. 18 and steps ST1728 and 1729 in FIG. The MCCH (multicast control channel) in each MBSFN area considers multi-cell transmission. Therefore, in step ST1726, the MCE transmits the contents of the MCCH and the assignment of radio resources for transmitting the MCCH to the base station in the MBSFN area. In Step ST1727, each MBMS dedicated base station receives the contents of the MCCH and assignment of radio resources for transmitting the MCCH from the MCE. In step ST1728, each base station transmits multi-cell control information such as MBMS area information, discontinuous reception (DRX) information, and the number of paging groups K using MCCH according to radio resources allocated from the MCE. In Step ST1729, the mobile terminal receives MCCH from each base station in the MBSFN area. MCCH reception uses the scheduling of MCCH received from the network side in step ST1725.

  A specific example of the reception method will be described. As a representative, a case will be described in which a plurality of base stations are arranged as shown in FIG. 25 and each MBSFN area is time-division multiplexed as shown in FIG. A case where the mobile terminal is located under the MBSFN area 1 will be described. By decoding BCCH1 (broadcast control channel) in MBSFN area 1, the mobile terminal receives MCCH1 scheduling parameters of starting point value 1 “1” and MCCH repetition period 1 (MCCH Repetiton Period) “7”. If SFN (System Frame Number) is mapped to BCCH, the mobile terminal can know the SFN number by decoding BCCH. The mobile terminal can obtain the SFN number to which the MCCH is mapped by the following formula. SFN = MCCH repetition period 1 × α + starting point value 1 (α is a positive integer). The mobile terminal can receive MCCH1 by receiving and decoding the radio resource of the SFN number to which MCCH1 is mapped. Control information for MBMS service transmitted in multicell from MBSFN area 1 is mapped to MCCH1. Specific examples of the control information include MBMS area information, DRX information, MBMS reception time missing reception parameters, and the like.

  A specific example of MBMS area information will be described with reference to FIG. As the MBMS area information, the frame configuration of each area (MBSFN frame cluster, MBSFN subframe, etc.), service content, MTCH modulation information, and the like can be considered. As the MBSFN frame cluster 1, the number of frames in the set of frames allocated to the MBSFN area 1 within the 1 MBSFN frame cluster repetition period is notified. As MBSFN subframe 1, a subframe number in which MBMS data (MTCH or / and MCCH) is actually mapped in one radio frame in MBSFN frame cluster 1 is notified. In providing an MBMS service using an MBMS dedicated base station, unlike an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, it is not necessary to share radio resources with unicast data. Therefore, MBMS data can be mapped to all subframes in one radio frame (except for the P-SCH, S-SCH, and BCCH mapping portions). When mapping MBMS data to all subframes, it is not necessary to notify the parameters of the MBSFN subframe from the network side to the mobile terminal side. Thereby, effective utilization of radio resources can be achieved. Alternatively, when MBMS data is statically transmitted from an MBMS dedicated cell as a wireless communication system, it is possible to transmit a large amount of MBMS data by mapping the MBMS data to all subframes. Since it is not necessary to notify the parameter of the MBSFN subframe, it is possible to further effectively use radio resources. As the service content, the service content performed in the MBMS area 1 is notified. When a plurality of services (movies and sports broadcasts, etc.) are performed in the MBSFN area 1, a plurality of service contents and their multiple parameters are notified.

  FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a relationship between a DRX period in which transmission of MBMS data to a mobile terminal is stopped and reception of MBMS data at the mobile terminal is stopped, and a DRX period in which the DRX period is repeated. . Specific examples of DRX (Discontinuous reception) information will be described with reference to FIG. In order to notify a mobile terminal that uses an MBMS service in an MBMS transmission dedicated cell, which is an object of the present invention, a mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service in an MBMS transmission dedicated cell is a unicast cell or It is necessary to perform location registration or the like on the network through a mixed MBMS / unicast cell. For this purpose, measurement and location registration (cell re-selection of a serving base station) of a unicast cell or a mixed MBMS / unicast cell is required. Thereby, the effect that it becomes possible to ensure the mobility in a MBMS exclusive cell without an uplink via a unicast / mixed cell can be acquired. For this reason, it is possible to receive a paging signal even in a mobile terminal receiving an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. Therefore, even for a mobile terminal that is receiving an MBMS service in an MBMS transmission dedicated cell, it is necessary to measure a unicast cell and an MBMS / unicast mixed cell at a fixed period. In the conventional method (3GPP W-CDMA), the measurement period is an integral multiple of the intermittent reception period and is notified to the mobile terminal from the network side in the upper layer.

  Here, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell applies the measurement in the measurement cycle notified from the upper layer of the unicast cell and the MBMS / unicast mixed cell by applying the conventional method. If so, the base station constituting the MBMSFN synchronization area of the MBMSFN dedicated frequency cell and the base station constituting the unicast / mixed frequency layer are not synchronized (asynchronous) with each other. Therefore, there is a problem that the MBMS reception must be interrupted in order to perform the above.

  Therefore, in the present invention, as a solution to the above problem, one DRX period is provided in the MBSFN synchronization area (see FIG. 30). In the first embodiment, the DRX period is a period in which transmission of MBMS data from the network side to the mobile terminal is stopped for the MBMS service in all MBSFN areas in the MBSFN synchronization area, that is, when viewed from the mobile terminal side, the MBMS data It means a period when no reception is performed. The mobile terminal using the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer uses the MBMS service by performing measurement of the unicast cell and the MBMS / unicast mixed cell during the DRX period in which MBMS data is not transmitted from the network side. The effect of eliminating the need to interrupt is obtained. Further, by providing the DRX period in the MBSFN synchronization area, the mobile terminal can simultaneously receive MBMS data from the MBSFN area in the MBSFN synchronization area without adding any control.

  Next, the DRX cycle shown in FIG. 30 will be described. The DRX cycle is a cycle in which the DRX period described above is repeated. In the conventional method, the measurement cycle is set (notified) from the network side to the mobile terminal. If this method is followed also in LTE, if a mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer performs measurement in the unicast / mixed frequency layer in the DRX period, the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency is used. It is necessary to notify the control device (base station, MME, PDNGW, etc.) on the unicast cell, MBMS / unicast mixed cell side through any route of the DRX cycle and DRX period information of the layer. Furthermore, since the base stations constituting the unicast / mixed frequency layer are basically configured asynchronously, the DRX cycle and DRX period of the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer are set to each unicast cell or each MBMS / unicast. It becomes necessary to notify the mixed cell. This method complicates the mobile communication system and is not preferable. Therefore, the present invention discloses the following method.

  The DRX period in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer includes at least one measurement cycle in the unicast / mixed frequency layer. Thereby, no matter what measurement cycle is notified (set) to the mobile terminal in the unicast cell, MBMS / unicast mixed cell, in the DRX period provided in the DRX cycle in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, If measurement of the unicast / mixed frequency layer is performed, the measurement cycle notified from the network side can be satisfied. By adopting this method, the MBMS transmission dedicated cell is controlled from the MBMS transmission dedicated cell control device (base station, MCE, MBMS gateway, eBNSC, etc.) to the unicast cell, MBMS / unicast mixed cell control device. There is no need to notify the DRX cycle or DRX period. Therefore, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the MBSFN transmission dedicated frequency layer interrupts the reception of the MBMS service while preventing the mobile communication system from becoming complicated, that is, avoiding additional signaling on the radio interface or in the network. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that the measurement can be executed in the measurement cycle notified (set) by the unicast cell or the MBMS / unicast mixed cell to the mobile terminal.

  The DRX cycle in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell is the minimum value of the measurement cycle that can be taken by the unicast cell or the unicast / mixed frequency cell or a divisor of the minimum value. A measurement cycle that can be set for a mobile terminal that is receiving an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission in a unicast cell or a mixed MBMS / unicast cell is a measurement cycle that can be taken in the unicast / mixed frequency layer. If they are different, the DRX cycle is approximately the measurement cycle that can be set for the mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, or the minimum value of the measurement cycle, or the minimum value of the measurement cycle. It is a number. Thereby, no matter what measurement cycle is notified (set) to the mobile terminal in the unicast cell, MBMS / unicast mixed cell, in the DRX period provided in the DRX cycle in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, If measurement of the unicast / mixed frequency layer is performed, the measurement cycle notified from the network side can be satisfied. By adopting this method, the MBMS transmission dedicated cell is controlled from the MBMS transmission dedicated cell control device (base station, MCE, MBMS gateway, eBNSC, etc.) to the unicast cell, MBMS / unicast mixed cell control device. There is no need to notify the DRX cycle or DRX period. Therefore, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the MBSFN transmission dedicated frequency layer interrupts the reception of the MBMS service while preventing the mobile communication system from becoming complicated, that is, avoiding additional signaling on the radio interface or in the network. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that the measurement can be executed in the measurement cycle notified (set) by the unicast cell or the MBMS / unicast mixed cell to the mobile terminal. Also, broadcast information may be acquired from the serving cell of the unicast / mixed frequency layer in the DRX period, and for example, it is possible to cope with a case where the broadcast information in the serving cell is modified. The above-described method for determining the DRX period in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission and the method for determining the DRX cycle in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission can also be used in the following embodiments.

  A specific parameter example of the DRX information will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, DRX information parameters may include a DRX period, a DRX cycle, and a starting point value (DRX). Specifically, the number of radio frames is used to specify the DRX period and the DRX cycle. In FIG. 30, the DRX period is “4” radio frames (a period between SFN4 and SFN7). The DRX cycle is “7” radio frames (periods from SFN4 to SFN10). Further, SFN is used to specify the starting point value (DRX) at which the DRX period starts. Specific examples of the DRX period and DRX cycle other than the number of radio frames may include subframes. Other than SFN may be used to specify the starting point value. Specific examples include an offset value from some reference value. When MCCH is mapped to some subframes in a radio frame, SFN and subframe number may be notified as a starting point. A specific calculation formula for obtaining the starting point value (DRX) is the starting point value (DRX) = (first SFN number at which the DRX period starts) mod (DRX cycle). In FIG. 30, the starting point value (DRX) is 4 mod 7 = 4 or 11 mod 7 = 4. Here, an example is shown in which SFN is used to specify the starting point value (DRX). Here, an example in which one DRX period is provided in the MBSFN synchronization area has been described. Therefore, the starting point value (DRX) is also common to the base stations in the MBSFN synchronization area. Consider a case where SFN is used as a starting point value (DRX). Assume that the same number is transmitted from the base station in the MBSFN synchronization area at the same timing. In the above, an example has been described in which DRX information is mapped to MCCH and notified from a base station in MBSFN Area to a mobile terminal. Similarly, the same effect can be obtained by mapping DRX information to BCCH and notifying a mobile terminal from a base station in the MBSFN area. Furthermore, the same effect can be obtained by mapping DRX information to BCCH and notifying the mobile terminal from the serving base station. Furthermore, the same effect can be obtained even if the DRX information is determined to be static or semi-static. This eliminates the need for notification, so that the effect of effective use of radio resources can also be obtained.

A specific example of the MBMS reception time missing reception parameter will be further described. As described above, Non-Patent Document 1 discloses that the paging group is notified by the L1 / L2 signaling channel (PDCCH). Whether or not the L1 / L2 signaling channel exists in the radio resource transmitted from the MBMS dedicated cell has not yet been determined. In this embodiment, it is assumed that there is no L1 / L2 signaling channel in radio resources transmitted from an MBMS dedicated cell. However, it is preferable that the paging notification methods for the unicast cell, MBMS / unicast mixed cell, and MBMS transmission dedicated cell existing in the same mobile communication system called LTE be unified as much as possible. This is because the unification of the mobile communication system can be avoided by unifying. In the following description, the number of paging groups (hereinafter referred to as K MBMS ) is considered as a parameter for reception of missing MBMS reception time. Next, a case where a plurality of base stations are arranged as shown in FIG. 25 and each MBSFN area is code division multiplexed as shown in FIG. 27 will be described. In this case, the DRX information is the same as that in the case of the time division multiplexing, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, “MBMS service selection” described in the first embodiment will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. In step ST1730, the mobile terminal confirms the service content included in the MBMS area information in order to know whether the user-desired service is being performed in the corresponding MBMS area. That is, it is determined whether there is a desired service. When a user-desired service is performed in the MBSFN area, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST1731. If the service desired by the user is not provided, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST1733. In Step ST1731, the mobile terminal receives a reference signal (RS) using radio resources in the MBSFN area and measures received power (RSRP). It is determined whether or not the received power is equal to or greater than a threshold value determined statically or semi-statically. If the threshold value is equal to or greater than the threshold value, it indicates that the sensitivity is satisfactory for receiving the MBMS service, and if the threshold value is less than the threshold value, it indicates that the sensitivity is not sufficient for receiving the MBMS service. If it is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the process proceeds to step ST1732, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value, the process proceeds to step ST1733. In Step ST1732, the mobile terminal acquires a frequency f (MBMS) dedicated to MBMS transmission and an MBSFN area ID for the user to receive a desired MBMS service. On the other hand, in step ST1733, the mobile terminal determines whether there is another MBMS area that can be received within the same frequency (f (MBMS)). This step ST1733 is particularly effective when there is an MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) that is covered as shown in FIG. If there is another MBMS area that can be received within the same frequency (f (MBMS)), the process returns to step ST1730 and is repeated. When it does not exist, it transfers to step ST1734. In step 1734, the mobile terminal determines whether another frequency exists in the frequency list of the receivable MBSFN synchronization area received in step ST1708. If it exists, the process returns to step ST1722, and the process is repeated by switching the synthesizer to a new frequency (f2 (MBMS)). If not, the process returns to step ST1720 and repeats the process. Further, instead of receiving the reference signal in step 1731 and measuring the received power, it is also possible to actually receive and decode the MBMS service (MTCH or / and MCCH) in the MBSFN area. In this case, the user himself / herself can determine whether or not the reception sensitivity is acceptable by listening or viewing the decoded data. If permitted, the process proceeds to step ST1732, and if not permitted, the process proceeds to step ST1733. Since there are individual differences in permissible reception sensitivity for each user, an effect of becoming a mobile terminal more suitable for the user can be obtained.

Step 1735 in FIG. 19 is a process indicating “MBMS reception time missing reception preparation” described in the first embodiment. In Step ST1735, the mobile terminal performs MBMS reception time missing reception preparation using the MBMS reception time missing reception parameter received in Step ST1729. Specifically, the paging group of its own mobile terminal is calculated using paging group number K MBMS received in step ST1729. The mobile terminal identification ID (UE-ID, IMSI) is used to calculate the paging group. The paging group is represented by IMSI mod K MBMS .

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart for explaining the MBMS-side reception status notification process. This process will be described more specifically with respect to “MBMS side reception status notification” described in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. In FIG. 20, in step ST1736, the mobile terminal changes the set frequency of frequency conversion section 1107, and changes the center frequency to the frequency of the unicast / mixed frequency layer (hereinafter referred to as f (unicast)). Move to the unicast / mixed frequency layer. In Step ST1737, the mobile terminal transmits an uplink scheduling request (UL Scheduling Request) to the serving cell. In Step ST1738, the serving cell receives the uplink scheduling request from the mobile terminal. In Step ST1739, the serving cell performs uplink scheduling (UL Scheduling) to allocate uplink radio resources to the mobile terminal. In Step ST1740, the serving cell transmits uplink radio resource allocation (also referred to as UL allocation or Grant) to the mobile terminal, which is a result of the uplink scheduling in Step ST1739, to the mobile terminal. In Step ST1741, the mobile terminal receives UL allocation from the serving cell (that is, receives uplink radio resource allocation). In Step ST1742, the mobile terminal transmits an “MBMS side reception status notification” to the serving cell according to the UL allocation received in Step ST1741. Examples of parameters included in the “MBMS side reception status notification” include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), MBMS service reception frequency (f (MBMS)), MBSFN Area number (ID). )and so on.

  Also, the “MBMS reception status notification” in step ST 1742 may be notified in the same manner as the “attach request” shown in ST 1710 or as a kind. Alternatively, “MBMS reception status notification” may be notified in the same manner as “tracking area update (TAU)” or as a kind. In this case, the notification parameters include the identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) of the mobile terminal, the frequency (f (MBMS)) for receiving the MBMS service, the MBSFN Area number (ID), and the like. This makes it possible for the network side to obtain the MBMS reception status of the mobile terminal in the MBMS dedicated cell without adding a new message. Therefore, an effect that the complexity of the mobile communication system can be avoided can be obtained. In addition, information indicating “MBMS reception status notification” may be added to “tracking area update”. As a specific method, “MBMS reception status notification” may be added to the TAU type information. The type information may be indicated by a numerical value. A 1-bit indicator may be provided on the TAU request message to indicate whether it is for “MBMS reception status notification”. Information indicating “MBMS reception status notification” may be included in the “attach request” message. As a specific method, “MBMS reception status notification” may be added to the type information of the attach request. The type information may be indicated by a numerical value. A 1-bit indicator may be provided on the attach request message indicating whether or not it is for “MBMS reception status notification”. This makes it possible to distinguish the conventional “tracking area update” from the “tracking area update” used to notify the “MBMS reception status”. Further, it is possible to distinguish from the conventional “attach request” and “attach request” used to notify the “MBMS reception status”. Thereby, the effect of preventing the control delay of the mobile communication system can be obtained.

  In Step ST1743, the serving cell performs reception processing for receiving various parameters transmitted from the mobile terminal by the "MBMS side reception status notification" processing in Step ST1742. In step ST1743, the network side receives the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission without adding an uplink to the MBMS dedicated cell, that is, without increasing the complexity as a mobile communication system. You can know that it is. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to change from the configuration in which the network side notifies the normal paging signal to the MBMS reception time missing reception configuration. In step ST1744, the serving cell transmits, to the MME, the parameter transmitted in the “MBMS side reception status notification” performed by the mobile terminal in step ST1742. In Step ST1745, the MME receives this.

  In Step ST1746, the MME determines a tracking area (hereinafter referred to as TA (MBMS)) that is receiving the MBMS service at the frequency dedicated to MBMS transmission of the mobile terminal. When determining the tracking area, the MME determines based on the MBMS side reception status notification (MBMS side reception status parameters, f (MBMS) and MBSFN area number) notified from the mobile terminal via the serving cell in step ST 1742. In step ST1747, the tracking area list of the mobile terminal is updated. In Step ST1747, the TA list including TA (unicast) and / or TA (MBMS) is managed (saved, added, updated, deleted). TA (unicast) is the tracking area of the mobile terminal in the unicast / mixed frequency layer. FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram illustrating details of the tracking area list. Hereinafter, a specific example of tracking area list management will be described with reference to FIG. The tracking area list is managed for each mobile terminal as shown in FIG. In the example of FIG. 31A, TAs of UE # 1 are TA (unicast) # 1 and TA (unicast) # 2, and TAs of UE # 2 are TA (unicast) # 1 and TA (MBMS) # 1. It is. Further, the MME also manages base stations included in each tracking area (TA (unicast)). This will be described with reference to FIG. TA (unicast) # 1 includes MBMS / unicast mixed cells having cell IDs 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. Also, TA (unicast) # 2 includes MBMS / unicast mixed cells with cell IDs 23, 24, and 25. Next, description will be made with reference to FIG. TA (MBMS) # 1 corresponds to an MBSFN area ID in which the mobile terminal receives an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. That is, in the present invention, in step ST 1742, the parameter is transmitted from the mobile terminal by “MBMS side reception status notification”, and in step ST 1745, the MME uses the parameter f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID to perform TA. (MBMS) will be determined.

  Details of the management of the TA list in step ST1747 will be described. The MME searches for the TA (MBMS) number managed in the MME based on the f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID received in step ST1745 (for example, using FIG. 31 (c)). Next, it is determined whether or not TA (MBMS) found as a result of the search exists in the TA list of the mobile terminal. If it exists, the current TA list is saved. If not, the TA (MBMS) is added to the TA list of the mobile terminal. The MME may manage (or register) a multi-tracking area (Multi-TA). The MME may manage TA (MBMS) and TA (Unicast) as a multitracking area. The MME may separately manage a TA (MBMS) and TA (Unicast), or a tracking area list for TA (MBMS) and a tracking area list for TA (Unicast). In Step ST1748, the MME transmits a response signal Ack indicating that the MBMS side reception status notification has been received to the serving cell. It is conceivable to include the TA list of the mobile terminal in this response signal. One or a plurality of tracking areas (Multi-TA) may be included in one TA list. Further, TA (MBMS) and TA (Unicast) may be included in one TA list. Also, a TA list for TA (MBMS) and a TA list for TA (Unicast) may exist separately.

  In Step ST1749, the serving cell receives an MBck side reception status notification Ack from the MME, and transmits an MBMS side reception status notification Ack to the mobile terminal in Step ST1750. In Step ST1751, the mobile terminal receives an Ack of MBMS side reception status notification from the serving cell. In Step ST1752, the mobile terminal changes the set frequency of the frequency conversion section 1107 and moves to the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission by changing the center frequency to the frequency of the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission (f (MBMS)). .

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the unicast-side measurement process. Hereinafter, “Unicast side measurement” described in the first embodiment will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. In Step ST1753, the mobile terminal determines whether the DRX period start timing of the MBMS service has arrived using the DRX information received in Step ST1729 of FIG. As a specific example, the first SFN number at which the DRX period starts is obtained using the DRX cycle and the starting point value (DRX) of the parameter example received in step ST1729, and the SFN mapped to BCCH (broadcast control channel) or the like. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not it is the DRX period start timing. A specific calculation example is SFN = DRX cycle × α + starting point value (DRX) α: a positive integer. When it is not a start timing, it transfers to step ST1772. When it is a start timing, it transfers to step ST1754. A mobile terminal judges whether it is the measurement period in the MBMS / unicast mixed cell received in step ST1705 in step ST1754. When it is not a measurement cycle, it transfers to step ST1772. When it is a measurement cycle, it transfers to step ST1755. In Step ST1755, the mobile terminal changes the set frequency of the frequency conversion unit 1107 (synthesizer) and changes the center frequency to f (Unicast) to receive the downlink signal of the MBMS / unicast mixed cell. In Step ST1756, the mobile terminal performs measurement on the unicast side (unicast cell or / and MBMS / unicast mixed cell). As values actually measured by the mobile terminal, RSRP, RSSI, etc. of the serving cell and the neighboring cells are conceivable. The information on neighboring cells may be broadcast from the serving cell as neighboring cell information (list).

  In Step ST1757, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the serving cell re-selection is necessary as a result of the measurement in Step ST1756. As a specific example of the determination, there may be a case where the measurement result of one cell among the neighboring cells exceeds the measurement result of the serving cell. If reselection is not necessary, the process proceeds to step ST1771. If reselection is necessary, steps ST1758 and 1759 are executed. A base station (new serving cell) newly selected as a serving cell in step 1758 is subordinate to the measurement period, intermittent reception period, and tracking area information (TA information) in BCCH (broadcast control channel) as in step ST1705. Informs the mobile terminal. In Step ST1759, the mobile terminal receives the BCCH from the new serving cell and decodes it, thereby receiving the measurement period, intermittent reception period, and TA information. In Step ST1760, the mobile terminal includes the TA information of the serving base station received in Step ST1759 in the current tracking area list (TA List) stored in the protocol processing unit 1101 or the control unit 1110. Check. If included, the process proceeds to step ST1771. If not included, step ST1761 is executed. The description from step ST1761 to step ST1770 is the same as the description from step ST1710 to step ST1719, and will be omitted. In Step ST1771, the mobile terminal moves to the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission by changing the set frequency of the frequency conversion unit 1107 and changing the center frequency to f (MBMS).

  Through the “unicast side measurement” process from step ST1753 to step ST1771, the mobile terminal can receive the unicast cell and / or the mixed MBMS / unicast cell even when receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer. Measurement is possible. As a result, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer can secure mobility in the unicast cell and / or the MBMS / unicast mixed cell. Thereby, the effect that it becomes possible to ensure the mobility in the MBMS dedicated cell without an uplink via a MBMS / unicast mixed cell can be acquired. For this reason, it is possible to receive a paging signal even in a mobile terminal receiving an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. In addition, even in a mobile terminal that is receiving a service in the MBSFN transmission-dedicated frequency layer, downlink synchronization establishment through measurement with a unicast cell or MBMS / unicast mixed cell is performed according to a measurement cycle. As a result, the mobile terminal that has received the paging signal in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission without uplink, which is the subject of the present invention, transmits a response to the paging signal in the unicast cell or the MBMS / unicast mixed cell. Even in this case, it is possible to obtain an effect that can be realized with less control delay.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the intermittent reception processing at the time of MBMS reception. FIG. 22 is a more specific description of “intermittent reception at the time of MBMS reception” described in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. . In Step ST1772 of FIG. 21, the mobile terminal determines whether it is the MCCH reception timing of the MBSFN area number being received, based on the MCCH scheduling information of the MBMS area information. That is, the mobile terminal determines whether it is the MCCH reception timing using the MCCH (multicast control channel) scheduling received in step ST1725. Specifically, the MCCH repetition period of the parameter example received in step ST1725, the leading SFN number to which the MCCH is mapped is obtained using the starting point value, and the MCCH is mapped based on the SFN mapped to the BCCH or the like. It is determined whether or not it is the head SFN number to which the MCCH is mapped by determining whether or not it is the head. When it is not the head timing to which MCCH is mapped, it transfers to step ST1753. When it is the head timing to which MCCH is mapped, it transfers to step ST1773. In addition, step ST1772 may be determined for each MCCH repetition period 1 in FIG. 26, for example.

  Here, in step ST1772, the MCCH reception timing (the first SFN number to which the MCCH is mapped) and the intermittent reception cycle at the time of MBMS reception may be different. By making it separate, it becomes possible to set the intermittent reception cycle at the time of MBMS reception to “long” or “short” according to the network conditions, etc., and it is possible to construct a mobile communication system with a higher degree of freedom. Become. The intermittent reception period at the time of MBMS reception may be mapped from the serving cell to BCCH in step ST1707 and notified to the mobile terminal, or may be mapped from the MBMS dedicated cell to BCCH and notified to the mobile terminal in step ST1723. . Further, in step ST1728, the MBMS dedicated cell may be mapped to MCCH and notified to the mobile terminal. Specifically, in step ST1772, it is determined whether it is the intermittent reception timing at the time of MBMS reception. If it is the intermittent reception timing, the process proceeds to step 1784. If it is not intermittent reception timing, it is determined whether it is MCCH reception timing, and if it is MCCH reception timing, it will transfer to step ST1788. If it is not the reception timing of MCCH, it will transfer to step ST1753 of FIG.

  When paging occurs in the mobile terminal in step ST1773, in step ST1774, the MME tracks the tracking area of the mobile terminal based on the identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) of the mobile terminal that is the destination of paging. (TA) Check the list. In Step ST1775, the MME determines whether TA (MBMS) is included in the tracking area list of the mobile terminal. As a specific example, the tracking area list of the mobile terminal is searched based on the UE-ID in the list as shown in FIG. When the mobile terminal is UE # 1 (UE-ID # 1) in FIG. 31A, it is determined that TA (MBMS) is not included. On the other hand, when the mobile terminal is UE # 2 (UE-ID # 2) in FIG. 31A, it is determined that TA (MBMS) is included because TA (MBMS) # 1 is included. To do. When TA (MBMS) is not included, it transfers to step ST1814. If TA (MBMS) is included, the process proceeds to step ST1776. In Step ST1776, the MME transmits a paging request to the MCE. That is, the MME 103 in FIG. 10 transmits a paging request to the MCE 801 using the MME-MCE interface. As MCEs that transmit a paging request from the MME, all MCEs that manage base stations that are geographically overlapped with the base stations managed by the MME can be considered.

Specific examples of parameters in the paging request include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), TA (MBMS) numbers, and the like. At this time, instead of the TA (MBMS) number, both f (MBMS) and the MBSFN area ID, or only the MBSFN area ID may be used. In step ST1777, the MCE receives the paging request. Among the MCEs that have received the paging request in step ST1778, the MCE that is notified as a parameter in the paging request and that controls the MBSFN area ID associated with the TA (MBMS) number prepares for paging transmission. On the other hand, the MCE that does not control the MBSFN area ID associated with the TA (MBMS) number does not prepare for paging transmission. As a specific example of paging transmission preparation, the paging group of the mobile terminal is calculated using the paging group number K MBMS of the own base station (own MBSFN area) and the received paging request. In the calculation, the same formula as that used on the mobile terminal side is used (Paging group = IMSI mod K MBMS ). As described above, the method of managing the association between the TA (MBMS) number (MBSFN area) and the MCE on the MCE side that has received the paging request is the relationship between the MBSFN area ID and the MCE that controls the MBS service ID. Since it can be performed only within the architecture, that is, it can be performed independently of the MME, it is possible to obtain an effect that a mobile communication system with a high degree of freedom can be constructed.

  Further, the MME manages the MBSFN area ID related to the TA (MBMS) number as shown in FIG. 31 (c), and further, as shown in FIG. 31 (d), the MBSFN area ID and the MCE that controls the MBSFN area ID. Consider the case of managing numbers. In this case, in step ST1776, the MME transmits a paging request only to the MCE that manages the MBSFN area ID related to the TA (MBMS) number. As a specific example of the parameter in the paging request at that time, an identifier of the mobile terminal can be considered. The MCE that has received the paging request in Step ST1778 prepares for paging transmission as described above. As described above, in the method of managing the relationship between the MBSFN area ID and the MCE that controls the ID within the MME (FIG. 31D), the number of MCEs that notify the paging request from the MME decreases, so that the resource is effective. The effect that can be utilized is obtained. Further, since the amount of information to be notified is reduced, it is possible to obtain an effect that resources can be effectively used.

  Further, the MME manages the MBSFN area ID related to the TA (MBMS) number as shown in FIG. 31 (c), and further, as shown in FIG. 31 (e), the MBMS included in the MBSFN area ID and the MBSFN area ID. Consider a case where the cell ID of a dedicated cell and / or MBMS / unicast mixed cell is managed. In this case, in Step ST1776, the MME transmits a paging request to the cell included in the MBSFN area ID managed by the MME, not the MCE. A new interface is provided between the MME and each MBMS dedicated cell. Using the new interface, the MME transmits the paging request to each MBMS dedicated cell included in the MBSFN area ID. As a specific example of the parameter in the paging request at that time, an identifier of the mobile terminal can be considered. As described above, the method for managing the relationship between the MBSFN area ID and the cell included in the MBSFN area ID in the MME (FIG. 31 (e)) does not require the MCE to perform processing related to paging signal transmission of the mobile terminal. Get better. This eliminates the need for adding a function to the MCE, so that the effect of avoiding the complexity of the MCE can be obtained. In addition, the effect of reducing the processing load of the MCE can be obtained.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a channel configuration example for mapping a paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer. FIG. 32A is a diagram showing a configuration including MBMS related information and a paging signal on a PMCH (Physical multicast channel). MBMS-related information is carried on the logical channels MTCH and MCCH for MBMS. The MBMS-related information and the paging signal may exist as information elements in the MTCH and MCCH, respectively, or the physical area (resource) to which each is mapped may be time-division multiplexed. All cells in a certain MBSFN area periodically perform multi-cell transmission of MCCH in the MBSFN area in the PMCH corresponding to the MBSFN area. On the other hand, a mobile terminal that is receiving or intending to receive an MBMS service transmitted in a multi-cell manner from a cell in the MBSFN area periodically receives the MCCH, and receives the contents of the MBMS service, the frame configuration, etc. The MBMS service can be received.

  By including a paging signal in the MCCH, it is possible to receive paging information when a mobile terminal receiving or trying to receive the MBMS service receives the MCCH. This eliminates the need for the mobile terminal to separately receive paging at a timing other than receiving the MCCH, and thus enables paging to be received without interrupting reception of the MBMS service. Further, the DRX operation (reception operation is stopped) can be performed during the time when the MCCH is not received and the time when the MBMS service is not received, and the power consumption of the mobile terminal can be reduced. Also, the MCCH and the PCCH carrying the paging signal may be configured in the same MBSFN subframe, or the MBSFN subframe carrying the MCCH and the MBSFN subframe carrying the paging signal may be temporally adjacent to each other. You can leave it. With this configuration, it is possible to continuously receive a paging signal when a mobile terminal that is receiving or intending to receive an MBMS service receives an MCCH. This eliminates the need for the mobile terminal to receive for paging at timings other than receiving successive MBSFN subframes carrying MCCH and paging signals, and therefore receives the paging signal without interrupting reception of the MBMS service. It becomes possible. Further, the DRX operation can be performed during the time when the MCCH and the paging signal are not received and during the time when the MBMS service is not received, thereby reducing the power consumption of the mobile terminal.

  FIG. 32B discloses a configuration in which an indicator indicating whether MBMS control information has been changed and an indicator indicating whether a paging signal has been transmitted are provided. In FIG. 32 (b), an indicator 1 is an indicator indicating whether or not a paging signal is transmitted, and is a paging signal presence / absence indicator. The indicator 2 is an indicator that indicates whether the MBMS control information has been changed, and is an MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator. The physical area to which the indicator is mapped may be provided in the MBSFN subframe in which the PMCH is transmitted, or may be provided in the physical area temporally adjacent to the MBSFN subframe in which the PMCH is transmitted. By doing so, the mobile terminal can receive and decode the MCCH or paging signal on the PMCH immediately after receiving the indicator. Specifically, for example, 1-bit information is used as an indicator. Each indicator is multiplied by a spreading code unique to the MBSFN area and is mapped to a predetermined physical area. As another method, for example, each indicator may be composed of a sequence specific to the MBSFN area and mapped to a predetermined physical area. When the mobile terminal receives an incoming call, for example, the paging signal presence / absence indicator is set to “1”, and when there is no incoming call, the paging signal presence / absence indicator is set to “0”. Also, for example, when the MBMS control information on the MCCH is changed due to a change in the content of the MBMS service transmitted in the MBSFN area, for example, the change presence / absence indicator of the MBMS related information is set to “1”. . A cycle (MBMS modification period) in which MBMS related information including one or more MBMS control information and an MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator can be changed is determined, and an MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator “1” is determined within the cycle. Is sent repeatedly. The MBMS modification period, start timing (SFN, starting point), etc. may be determined in advance, or may be notified by broadcast information from a serving cell in a unicast service or from an MBMS dedicated cell. If there is no further change in the MBMS related information after the MBMS change period has elapsed, for example, the change presence / absence indicator of the MBMS related information is set to “0”. The mobile terminal receives an indicator in the MCCH of the desired MBSFN area, performs despreading, etc., and determines whether the indicator is 1 or 0, so that whether the MBMS-related information existing in the MCCH has changed or not It is possible to determine whether a paging signal exists.

  By providing the indicator in this manner, when there is no change in the MBMS control information or when there is no paging signal, the mobile terminal does not need to receive or / and decode the entire PMCH information. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal. By determining a cycle in which MBMS related information can be changed and transmitting the same MBMS control information at least once within the one cycle period, the mobile terminal transmits the same MBMS control information at least once. Since reception is possible, the reception error rate of MBMS control information can be reduced, and therefore the reception quality of the MBMS service can be improved. The physical area to which the MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator indicating whether the MBMS control information has been changed may be the first MBSFN subframe of one or more MBSFN subframes to which the MBMS control information is mapped. Further, it may be the first OFDM symbol of the first MBSFN subframe. Accordingly, the mobile terminal can determine whether the MBMS control information has changed by receiving the first OFDM symbol.

  Further, a physical area to which a paging signal presence / absence indicator indicating whether or not a paging signal is present may be used as the first MBSFN subframe of one or a plurality of MBSFN subframes to which the paging signal is mapped. Further, it may be the first OFDM symbol of the first MBSFN subframe. As a result, the mobile terminal can determine whether a paging signal exists by receiving the first OFDM symbol. By mapping each indicator to the physical area as described above, when there is no MBMS control signal change, when there is no paging information, it is not necessary to receive or / and decode each subsequent OFDM symbol. It is possible to reduce received power. In addition, since it can be determined early with the first MBSFN subframe or the first OFDM symbol, the MBMS control information can be received immediately or the paging signal can be received immediately. Control delay can be reduced.

  As an indicator, the MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator and the paging signal presence / absence indicator may be mapped to the same physical area, or may be mapped to different physical areas. When mapping to the same physical area, an OR operation of each indicator may be taken. As a result, the mobile terminal needs only one indicator to receive, so the effect of simplifying the receiving circuit configuration can be obtained. When mapping to different physical areas, the mobile terminal only needs to receive necessary indicators, and does not need to receive other indicators. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal and further reduce the reception delay of necessary information. For example, a mobile terminal that has received an MBMS service but is set not to receive a paging signal need only receive an MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator, eliminating the need to receive a paging signal presence / absence indicator. Can do. If the MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator and the paging signal presence / absence indicator are mapped to different physical areas, the reception timing of MCCH (first SFN number to which MCCH is mapped) or the MBMS-related change presence / absence indicator in step ST1772 When the repetition period and the paging signal presence / absence indicator repetition period are set to different values, only the MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator repetition period is received or / and decoded and received during the MCCH reception timing or MBMS related change presence / absence indicator repetition period. In the signal presence / absence indicator repetition period, only the paging signal presence / absence indicator can be received or / and decoded. As a result, the processing time of the mobile terminal can be shortened, and the effect that the power consumption can be reduced can be obtained.

  The repetition period of each indicator may be the same or different. The repetition period of each indicator may be the same as or different from the repetition period of MCCH. For example, the repetition cycle of the MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator is the same as the MCCH repetition cycle, and the paging signal presence / absence indicator repetition cycle is n times the MCCH repetition cycle (n is an integer of 2 or more). . By doing so, it becomes possible to set the intermittent reception cycle at the time of MBMS reception to “long” or “short” according to the network conditions and the like, and it becomes possible to construct a mobile communication system with a higher degree of freedom. . The repetition period of the indicator is a paging signal presence / absence indicator repetition period (Repetition period) and an MBMS-related change presence / absence indicator repetition period (Repetition period), respectively. The start timing (SFN, starting point) of the MBSFN subframe in which the indicator exists, the subframe number, the repetition period of each indicator, etc. may be notified by the broadcast information of the serving cell of the unicast service, or the broadcast of the MBMS dedicated cell It may be notified by information or may be determined in advance. In this case, the mobile terminal performs step ST1772, or step ST1788, or step ST1789 for each MBMS-related change presence / absence indicator repetition period. The channel dedicated to the MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator may be, for example, a MICH (MBMS Indicating CHannel), and a paging signal presence / absence indicator may be configured in the MICH. The MICH repetition period is referred to as a “MICH repetition period”. The repetition period of the paging signal presence / absence indicator may be the same as or different from the MICH repetition period. The notification of the indicator can be performed by the same method as described above. In this case, the mobile terminal performs step ST1772 or step ST1784 for each paging signal presence / absence indicator repetition period. Thereby, the time when each indicator is transmitted is not limited to the time when MCCH is transmitted, and the system can be designed flexibly.

  When the paging signal is included in the PMCH, there is a problem that it takes too much time to detect the paging signal addressed to the own mobile terminal when the number of mobile terminals that have received calls becomes enormous. Further, there arises a problem that an area for mapping paging signals of all mobile terminals that have received incoming calls cannot be secured in a predetermined physical area carrying a paging signal. In order to solve these problems, a paging grouping method is disclosed. FIG. 32C shows a paging grouping method. All mobile terminals are divided into K groups, and a paging signal presence / absence indicator is provided for each group. The physical area for paging signal presence / absence indicator in MCCH is divided into K pieces, and the paging signal presence / absence indicator of each group is mapped to each of the divided physical areas. Here, K can take from 1 to the value of the total number of mobile terminals. When an incoming call is received at a certain mobile terminal, the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs is set to “1”. When all mobile terminals belonging to a certain group do not receive an incoming call, the paging signal presence / absence indicator of that group is set to “0”. The paging signal presence / absence indicator may be subjected to repetition or the like in order to satisfy a desired reception error rate at the mobile terminal. The physical area to which the paging signal is mapped is also divided into K pieces so as to correspond to the K groups. The paging signal may be an identifier (identification number, identification code) for each mobile terminal. One physical area divided into K is a physical area in which paging signal data required by one mobile terminal is accommodated by adding the number of mobile terminals in the group. The number of mobile terminals in a group may be the same for all groups, or may be different for each group.

  For example, the number of mobile terminals in the group may be an average value of the number of mobile terminals that simultaneously receive incoming calls. Alternatively, the number of mobile terminals that can be allocated to one OFDM symbol in the entire frequency band may be used, and each OFDM symbol may be associated with each group. When an incoming call arrives at a certain mobile terminal, the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs is set to “1” and mapped to the paging signal presence / absence indicator physical area corresponding to the group. At the same time, the paging signal for the mobile terminal that has received the incoming call is mapped to the physical area of the paging signal corresponding to the group to which the mobile terminal belongs. The mapping of the paging signal to the physical area is performed by multiplying each mobile terminal by an identification code unique to the mobile terminal. The paging signal may be an identifier for each mobile terminal. In this case, the control for multiplying the mobile terminal specific identification code can be omitted. The mobile terminal receives the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs, and determines whether an incoming call has been made to the group to which the mobile terminal belongs. When it is determined that the incoming call is received, the physical area to which the paging signal associated with the group to which the mobile terminal belongs is received and decoded. After decoding, blind detection is performed by performing a correlation operation with an identification code unique to the mobile terminal, and it is possible to determine that there is an incoming call to the mobile terminal by specifying a paging signal for the mobile terminal. Become. If no paging signal for the mobile terminal is detected, it is determined that there is no incoming call to the mobile terminal.

  By grouping the mobile terminals into K groups, the mobile terminal does not need to receive the entire paging signal area, and only receives the necessary area, that is, only the physical area to which the group to which the mobile terminal belongs corresponds. As a result, the paging signal detection time at the mobile terminal can be shortened, and further, the reception power of the mobile terminal can be reduced because it is not necessary to receive the corresponding physical area of the group to which the mobile terminal does not belong. Furthermore, by using a paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to each group, a paging signal presence / absence indicator can be provided with few physical resources even when there are a large number of mobile terminals. Furthermore, the mobile terminal only needs to receive the paging signal area as needed, and it is possible to reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal, and when it is not necessary to receive the paging signal, the mobile terminal immediately moves to the next operation. Therefore, the control delay can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, one physical area divided into K pieces for mapping the paging signal is obtained by adding the physical area in which the paging signal data required by one mobile terminal is accommodated by the number of mobile terminals in the group. It was in the physical area. However, when the number of mobile terminals increases, the required physical area increases, and the overhead for transmitting the MBMS service increases, so the transmission speed of MBMS service data decreases. In order to prevent this, the paging signal for the mobile terminal is multiplied by an identification code unique to the mobile terminal for each mobile terminal. As a result, the mobile terminal can perform blind detection (Blind Detection) using the identification code unique to the mobile terminal to determine whether the information is addressed to the mobile terminal itself. There is no need to fix the area in advance. Therefore, a physical area for paging signals for all mobile terminals is not required, and it is sufficient if there is an area for the number of mobile terminals that are expected to actually receive incoming calls. As an example, there is a method in which the number of mobile terminals in the group is an average value of the number of mobile terminals that receive incoming calls simultaneously. This method makes it possible to effectively use limited physical resources. In addition, by using the above method, even when the number of mobile terminals receiving more than expected is increased, it becomes possible to transmit a paging signal to a new incoming mobile terminal on the next PMCH, etc. It becomes possible to respond flexibly by scheduling at the base station.

  When the total number of mobile terminals is small, only the paging signal presence / absence indicator may be transmitted with the value of K as the total number of mobile terminals. In this case, it is not necessary to secure a paging-related physical area, and it is sufficient to secure physical areas for paging signal presence / absence indicators for the number of all mobile terminals. For this reason, the efficiency of radio resources can be improved. In this case, a physical area for a paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to each mobile terminal exists. For this reason, in the mobile terminal, it is possible to determine the presence / absence of an incoming call without receiving the paging signal area only by receiving and decoding the physical area for the paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to the mobile terminal. The control delay in the paging operation can be reduced.

  FIG. 33 shows an example of a method for mapping a paging signal to a physical area carrying a paging signal on the PMCH. Of the mobile terminals belonging to the paging group n (indicated by A in FIG. 33), the paging signal is mapped to the physical area for the group n for the mobile terminals n1, n2, etc. that are receiving calls. The base station multiplies the paging signal of each mobile terminal by an identification code (number, sequence) unique to the mobile terminal (process 1), adds a CRC (process 2), and processes such as encoding and rate matching (process 3). )I do. When the paging signal is an identifier for each mobile terminal, the control for multiplying the mobile terminal specific identification code can be omitted. The result of the series of processes is assigned to information element units corresponding to the size of the physical area to be mapped (process 4), and connected to each mobile terminal that has received an incoming call. The concatenated result is subjected to scrambling processing, modulation processing, and the like using a scrambling code specific to the MBSFN area (processing 5). The modulation process may be specific to the MBSFN area. The result of performing these processes is mapped to the physical area corresponding to the paging group n (process 6). At this time, the base station sets “1” to the paging signal presence / absence indicator (indicator 1) of the paging group n and maps it to the physical area of the paging group n of the paging signal presence / absence indicator. The physical area corresponding to the paging group n may be determined in advance, or may be notified as broadcast information from the unicast serving cell or the MBMS dedicated cell. The mobile terminal receives the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the paging group to which the mobile terminal belongs. If “1”, the mobile terminal receives the paging signal physical area corresponding to the paging group. The paging signal physical area is received, demodulated, descrambled by an MBSFN area specific scrambling code, and the result is divided into information element units. By performing a process such as decoding for each divided information element unit and performing a correlation operation using an identification number unique to the mobile terminal, the paging signal for the mobile terminal is blind-detected. If the correlation calculation result is greater than a certain threshold, it is determined that there is paging for the mobile terminal, and a paging incoming operation is started by a paging signal. If it is less than a certain threshold value, it is determined that there is no paging for the own terminal, and the process shifts to reception of MBMS related information, or shifts to DRX operation if there is no need to receive MBMS related information. Which group the own mobile terminal belongs to may be derived by a predetermined calculation method, or may be notified from a higher layer as a broadcast information from a serving cell or MBMS dedicated cell of unicast service.

  In the above example, allocation is made in units of control information elements corresponding to the size of the physical area to which the paging signal is mapped. By allocating in units of transport blocks, physical resources to be allocated can be increased / decreased depending on the amount of information, so that flexible allocation to physical areas becomes possible.

  Further, in the above example, the processing 1 was performed by multiplying the paging signal of each mobile terminal by the identification code unique to the mobile terminal, but as another processing method, the paging signal of each mobile terminal and the identification specific to the mobile terminal You may make it add a number. In this case, the mobile terminal receives the paging signal physical area, performs demodulation, descrambling with the MBSFN area-specific scrambling code, divides the result into information element units, decodes each divided information element unit, etc. Perform the process. A paging signal for the mobile terminal is detected based on whether or not an identification number unique to the mobile terminal exists in the information after processing such as decoding.

  Further, when mapping the paging signal to the PMCH, a unique identifier (ID) may be multiplied for each information type in order to distinguish it from other information such as MCCH and MTCH. Unlike the unicast communication, the unique identifier for each information type is used in an MBSFN subframe transmitted in multicell, and therefore, the same identifier needs to be transmitted from a plurality of cells performing multicell transmission. For example, a unique identifier is used for each same information type for each MBSFN area. As a specific example, an MBMS dedicated cell multiplies a paging signal by an identifier for a paging signal and transmits it using the PMCH. A mobile terminal that needs to receive a paging signal among the mobile terminals being served by the MBMS dedicated cell performs blind detection using an identifier for the paging signal. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that the mobile terminal can receive necessary information when necessary. This can achieve the effect of reducing the power consumption of the mobile terminal. Further, it is possible to obtain the effect of preventing the control delay of the mobile terminal. The identifier for each information type may be determined in advance or may be notified by the notification information of the serving cell. Moreover, you may alert | report from a MBMS dedicated cell. Furthermore, if the paging signal is multiplied or added with an identifier unique to the mobile terminal, blind detection can be performed for each mobile terminal. Therefore, it is necessary to fix the physical area to which the paging signal is mapped in advance. As a result, flexible mapping is possible, and the use efficiency of physical resources is improved.

  FIG. 34 shows another example of a method for mapping a paging signal to a physical area carrying a paging signal on the PMCH. 34, the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 33 denote the same or corresponding processes. Of the mobile terminals belonging to the paging group n, the paging signal is mapped to the physical area for the group n for the mobile terminals n1, n2, etc. that are receiving calls. The base station adds CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) to the paging signal of each mobile terminal (processing 2), and performs processing such as encoding and rate matching (processing 3). The results of these processes are multiplied by an identification code (number) unique to the mobile terminal (process 7). The orthogonality is obtained between the mobile terminals by using an identification code unique to the mobile terminal as a spreading code having orthogonality. The base station multiplexes the result of multiplying the spreading code for each mobile terminal that is receiving an incoming call (process 8). The multiplexed result is subjected to scrambling processing, modulation processing, and the like using a scrambling code unique to the MBSFN area (processing 5). The modulation process may be specific to the MBSFN area. The result of performing these processes is mapped to the physical area corresponding to the paging group n (process 6). At this time, the base station sets “1” to the paging signal presence / absence indicator (indicator 1) of the paging group n and maps it to the physical area of the paging group n of the paging signal presence / absence indicator. The physical area corresponding to the paging group n may be determined in advance, or may be notified as broadcast information from the unicast-side serving cell or the MBMS dedicated cell.

  The mobile terminal receives the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the paging group to which the mobile terminal belongs. If “1”, the mobile terminal receives the paging signal physical area corresponding to the paging group. The paging signal physical area is received, demodulated, and descrambled by a scrambling code unique to the MBSFN area. By performing a correlation operation on the result using an identification number unique to the mobile terminal, a paging signal for the mobile terminal is blind-detected. When the correlation calculation result is larger than a certain threshold value, it is determined that there is paging for the mobile terminal, and the paging incoming operation is started by the paging signal after decoding. If it is less than a certain threshold value, it is determined that there is no paging for the terminal itself, and the process shifts to reception of MBMS related information, or shifts to DRX operation if there is no need to receive MBMS related information. Which group the own mobile terminal belongs to may be derived by a predetermined calculation method, or may be notified from a higher layer as a broadcast information from a serving cell or MBMS dedicated cell of unicast service. Note that the paging signal described in FIGS. 33 and 34 may be a transport channel to which the paging signal is mapped. This can be applied to the following embodiments. Any information that carries a paging signal, which is paging-related information required when the mobile terminal receives paging, may be used.

  Several methods for mapping the paging signal to the area carrying the paging signal of the PMCH have been disclosed, but the mapping to the area carrying the paging signal may be any predetermined area or localized (frequency It may be mapped to a physical area continuous on the axis) or may be mapped to a distributed (physical area distributed on the frequency axis).

  In the above example, the paging signal is multiplied by an identification number or spreading code unique to the mobile terminal. By adopting such a configuration, when the information amount of the paging signal is the same in each mobile terminal, the size of the area in units of information elements to be allocated by making the processing such as encoding and rate matching the same between the mobile terminals. Can be made the same. Therefore, since the size of the information element unit area for blind detection in the mobile terminal is limited to one, the number of blind detections can be reduced, and the detection time can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that the circuit configuration of the mobile terminal, power consumption, and control delay can be reduced.

  As described above, the mobile terminal receives the entire paging signal area by multiplying the paging signal by the identification number or spreading code unique to the mobile terminal and mapping it to the area where the paging signal of PMCH is carried for each paging group. This eliminates the need to receive only the necessary area, that is, only the physical area to which the group to which the mobile terminal belongs corresponds, so that the paging signal detection time at the mobile terminal can be shortened, and further the group to which the mobile terminal does not belong Therefore, the received power of the mobile terminal can be reduced. Furthermore, a paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to each group can be used, and even when there are a large number of mobile terminals, the paging signal presence / absence indicator can be provided with few physical resources. Furthermore, the mobile terminal only needs to receive the paging signal area as needed, and it is possible to reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal, and when it is not necessary to receive the paging signal, the mobile terminal immediately moves to the next operation. Therefore, the control delay can be reduced. Furthermore, since the mobile terminal can blindly detect whether the information is addressed to the mobile terminal by using an identification code or a spreading code unique to the mobile terminal, a physical area for mapping a paging signal for each mobile terminal Since there is no need to have a fixed paging signal area for all mobile terminals, there is no need for a physical area for paging signals for all mobile terminals, and there is only an area for the number of mobile terminals that are expected to actually receive calls. It is possible to effectively use physical resources. Furthermore, even if the number of mobile terminals that receive more than expected is increased, a paging signal to a new incoming mobile terminal can be transmitted on the PMCH carrying the next MCCH. It is possible to respond flexibly by scheduling.

  In the above example, the base station multiplies the paging signal by the identification number unique to the mobile terminal. However, it is also possible to use a method of multiplying CRC instead of a paging signal by an identification number unique to the mobile terminal. The method of multiplying the CRC by the identification number unique to the mobile terminal is effective when the information amount of the paging signal of each mobile terminal is different. By adopting the method of putting a paging signal on the PMCH disclosed above, the mobile communication system can transmit the paging signal of all the mobile terminals that are receiving or trying to receive the MBMS service from the MBMS dedicated cell. This enables the mobile terminal to receive a paging signal from the MBMS dedicated cell.

  Hereinafter, the channel configuration for mapping the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 (c) and 33. In Step ST1779, the MCE schedules the paging signal of the mobile terminal. Specifically, it is determined to which number of information elements mapped to the physical area assigned to the paging group number of the mobile terminal calculated in step ST1778 is assigned the mobile terminal identifier. By performing this scheduling in the MCE, the identifier of the mobile terminal is transmitted from the same physical resource of the base station included in the MBSFN area. Thereby, the mobile terminal can receive the paging signal which received the benefit of SFN gain by receiving PMCH currently transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN area. In Step ST1780, the MCE transmits a paging request for the mobile terminal to the base station in the MBSFN area. The MCE transmits a paging request for the mobile terminal to the base station included in the TA (MBMS). The MCE transmits a paging request for the mobile terminal to the MBMS dedicated cell included in the TA (MBMS). Specific examples of parameters included in the paging request include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), and paging signal scheduling results (specifically, SFN and MBSFN subframes) performed in step ST1779. Number, information element number) and the like. In step ST1781, each base station in the MBSFN area receives a paging request from the MCE.

  Instead of providing the MME-MCE IF between the MME 103 and the MCE 801 shown in FIG. 10, an MME-MBMS GW interface may be provided between the MME 103 and the MBMS GW 802 (more specifically, MBMS CP 802-1). Even if the processing contents of MCE from step ST1776 to step ST1780 are performed by the MBMS GW, the same effect as the present invention can be obtained.

In Step ST1782, each base station in the MBSFN area calculates the mobile terminal paging group. As a specific example of the calculation method, the paging group of the mobile terminal is calculated using the paging group number K MBMS of the own base station (own MBSFN area) and the received paging request. In the calculation, the same formula as that used on the mobile terminal side is used (paging group = IMSI mod K MBMS ). If the paging group of the mobile terminal is also notified in step ST1780, step ST1782 can be omitted. Thereby, effects, such as reduction of the control load of each base station in the MBSFN area, can be obtained. On the other hand, in the method of calculating the paging group in each base station in the MBSFN area in step ST1782 without notifying the paging group of the mobile terminal in step ST1780, notification information from the MCE to each base station in the MBSFN area Can be reduced, and the effect of effective use of resources can be obtained. Each base station in the MBSFN area in Step ST1783 uses the identifier of the mobile terminal received in Step ST1781, the scheduling result of the paging signal, the paging group of the mobile terminal calculated in Step ST1782, and the like. The PMCH carrying the above is transmitted. Specifically, the corresponding UE-ID is mapped to the designated information element number of the corresponding group of the paging-related PMCH, and the indicator indicating whether there is a paging-related change in the corresponding group is set to “changed” . In this case, the above-described method can be used as a mapping method to a paging-related area in the PMCH, a specific mapping method to a physical channel, and the like.

  In Step ST1784, the mobile terminal receives a paging-related change presence / absence indicator corresponding to the paging group calculated in Step ST1735 of the own mobile terminal in the PMCH. In Step ST1785, the mobile terminal determines whether there is a change in the paging-related change presence / absence indicator. When there is no change, it transfers to step ST1788. If there is a change, the process proceeds to step ST1786. In Step ST1786, the mobile terminal continues to receive and decode the physical area to which the paging related information of the own paging group is mapped. At that time, blind detection is performed by performing a correlation calculation with an identification code unique to the mobile terminal. In step ST1787, the mobile terminal determines whether the identifier of the mobile terminal has been detected in the blind detection performed in step ST1786. When not detected, it transfers to step ST1788. If detected, the process proceeds to step ST1814. The contents described in step ST1773 to step ST1787 are specific examples of the “MBMS reception time missing reception configuration” described in the first embodiment. Accordingly, it is possible to disclose a paging signal notification method and a mobile communication system therefor for a mobile terminal receiving an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, which is a subject of the present invention. Also, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission has an effect that the paging signal can be received.

  Next, “MTCH reception” described in Embodiment 1 with reference to FIG. 17 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 22 and FIG. In Step ST1788, the mobile terminal determines whether the MBMS service in the MBSFN area is being continuously received. When not continuously receiving, it moves to step ST1792. If continuous reception is in progress, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST1789. In Step ST1789, the mobile terminal receives an MBMS-related change presence / absence indicator in the PMCH. In Step ST1790, the mobile terminal determines whether there is a change in the MBMS-related change presence / absence indicator. When there is no change, it transfers to step ST1791. If there is a change, the process proceeds to step ST1792. In Step ST1791, the mobile terminal does not change the MCCH at the reception timing of this MCCH, and therefore does not perform MBMS-related reception or / and decoding in the MCCH. The mobile terminal receives and decodes the MTCH without updating the control information (MCCH). In Step ST1792, the mobile terminal performs MBMS-related reception and decoding in the MCCH, and updates the control information. In Step ST1793, the mobile terminal receives and decodes the MTCH according to the control information received in Step ST1792.

  In Step ST1794 of FIG. 23, the mobile terminal measures the reception quality of the MBMS service being received. The mobile terminal receives the reference signal (RS) with the radio resource in the MBSFN area and measures the received power (RSRP). It is determined whether or not the received power is equal to or greater than a threshold value determined statically or semi-statically. If the threshold value is equal to or greater than the threshold value, it indicates that the sensitivity is satisfactory for receiving the MBMS service, and if the threshold value is less than the threshold value, it indicates that the sensitivity is not sufficient for receiving the MBMS service. If it is equal to or greater than the threshold, the process proceeds to step ST1795, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold, the process proceeds to step ST1796. Further, instead of receiving the reference signal in step 1794 and measuring the received power, it is also possible to actually receive and decode the MBMS service (MTCH or / and MCCH) in the MBSFN area. In that case, the user himself / herself can determine whether or not the reception sensitivity is acceptable by listening or viewing the decoded data. If allowed, the process proceeds to step ST1795, and if not permitted, the process proceeds to step ST1796. Since there are individual differences in permissible reception sensitivity for each user, an effect of becoming a mobile terminal more suitable for the user can be obtained. In step ST1795, the mobile terminal confirms the user's intention. If the user wants to continue receiving the currently received MBMS service, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST1753. If the user wants to finish receiving the currently received MBMS service, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST1798. In Step ST1796, the mobile terminal determines whether there is another MBMS area that can be received within the same frequency (f (MBMS)). This step ST1796 is particularly effective when there is an MBSFN area to be covered. When it exists, it returns to step ST1730 and repeats a process. If not, the process proceeds to step ST1797.

  However, if another receivable MBMS area desired by the user is not found after that, the process of “MBMS reception end A” after step ST1798 is performed. Thereby, the network side can know that the said mobile terminal complete | finishes reception of the MBMS service in the frequency layer only for MBMS transmission. Accordingly, the configuration in which the network side notifies the paging signal to the mobile terminal in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission can be stopped. As a result, it becomes possible to cancel the paging signal to the mobile terminal from the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission that is not received by the mobile terminal as a mobile communication system, and there is an effect of effective use of radio resources. . In step 1797, the mobile terminal determines whether another frequency exists in the frequency list of the receivable MBSFN synchronization area received in step ST1708. If it exists, the process returns to step ST1722, and the process is repeated by switching the synthesizer to a new frequency (f2 (MBMS)). If not, the process proceeds to step ST1798.

  Next, “MBMS reception end A” described in the first embodiment will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. In Step ST1798, the mobile terminal moves to the MBMS / unicast mixed cell by changing the set frequency of the frequency conversion unit 1107 and changing the center frequency to f (unicast). The description of step ST1799 to step ST1803 is the same as the description of step ST1737 to step ST1741 and will be omitted. In Step ST1804, the mobile terminal transmits “MBMS reception end” to the serving cell according to the UL (Uplink) allocation received in Step ST1803. Examples of parameters included in “end of MBMS reception” include an identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) of a mobile terminal, a frequency (f (MBMS)) at which MBMS service reception ends, and an MBSFN area number (ID). and so on.

  Further, “end of MBMS reception” in step ST1804 may be notified in the same manner as “attach request” shown in ST1710 or as a kind. Alternatively, “MBMS reception end” may be notified in the same manner as “Tracking Area Update (TAU)” or as a kind. In this case, the notification parameters include the identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) of the mobile terminal, the frequency (f (MBMS)) for terminating the reception of the MBMS service, the MBSFN Area number (ID), and the like. is there. Thereby, the network side can know that the mobile terminal ends the reception of MBMS in the MBMS dedicated cell without adding a new message. Therefore, an effect that the complexity of the mobile communication system can be avoided can be obtained.

  In addition, information indicating “MBMS reception end” may be added to “tracking area update”. As a specific method, “MBMS reception end” may be added to the TAU Type information. Type information may be indicated by a numerical value. A 1-bit indicator may be provided on the TAU request message to indicate whether or not “MBMS reception is complete”. Information indicating “MBMS reception end” may be added to the “attach request” message. As a specific method, “MBMS reception end” may be added to the type information of the attach request. Type information may be indicated by a numerical value. A 1-bit indicator may be provided on the attach request message to indicate whether or not “MBMS reception is completed”. This makes it possible to distinguish between the conventional “tracking area update” and “tracking area update” used to notify “end of MBMS reception”. Further, it is possible to distinguish from the conventional “attach request” and “attach request” used for notifying “end of MBMS reception”. Thereby, the effect of preventing the control delay of the mobile communication system can be obtained.

  In step ST1805, the serving cell receives the MBMS reception end from the mobile terminal. In step ST1805, the network side can know that the mobile terminal ends the reception of the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated for MBMS transmission without adding an uplink to the MBMS dedicated cell. As a result, there is an effect that the network side can be changed from the MBMS reception time missing reception configuration to a configuration for notifying a normal paging signal. In step ST1806, the serving cell transmits an MBMS reception end to the MME. In Step ST1807, the MME receives the MBMS reception end from the serving cell.

  In Step ST1808, the MME searches for a TA (MBMS) for terminating the MBMS reception of the mobile terminal. An example of the relationship between the parameters included in the end of MBMS reception and TA (MBMS) is the same as that in step ST1747, and a description thereof will be omitted. In step ST1809, TA (MBMS) obtained as a result of the search in step ST1808 is deleted from the tracking area list of the mobile terminal. In step ST1810, when the MME receives the signal notifying completion of MBMS reception transmitted via the serving cell, the MME transmits Ack as a response signal to the serving cell. As an example of parameters included in the response signal Ack, a tracking area list of the mobile terminal can be considered. In step ST1811, the serving cell receives the response signal Ack transmitted from the MME. In step ST1812, the serving cell transmits the received response signal Ack to the mobile terminal. In Step ST1813, the mobile terminal receives the response signal Ack from the MME transmitted via the serving cell.

  Next, “unicast side intermittent reception” described in the first embodiment will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. In Step ST1814, the MME confirms the tracking area list of the mobile terminal based on the identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) of the mobile terminal where paging has occurred. TA (Unicast) is searched in the tracking area list of the mobile terminal. As a specific example, the tracking area list of the mobile terminal is searched based on the UE-ID in the list as shown in FIG. When the mobile terminal is UE # 1 in FIG. 31A, TA (Unicast) includes # 1 and # 2. Next, the MME searches for the identifier (cell ID) of the base station included in TA (Unicast) in the list as shown in FIG. When the mobile terminal is UE # 1 in FIG. 31A, the cell IDs included in the tracking area list of the mobile terminal are cell IDs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 23, 24, 25. It becomes. The MME transmits a paging request to a base station (including a serving cell) included in the tracking area list of the mobile terminal. Specific examples of parameters in the paging request include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.). In step ST1815, the base station (including the serving cell) included in the tracking area list (TA (Unicast)) of the mobile terminal receives the paging request.

  Here, the problem of the present invention will be described. Even in a mobile terminal in an idle state in an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, details of a notification method for a paging message have not been established. Non-Patent Document 1 discloses that PCH is mapped to PDSCH or PDCCH. Non-Patent Document 1 discloses that the paging group uses the L1 / L2 signaling channel (PDCCH), and the clear identifier (UE-ID) of the mobile terminal can be found on the PCH. On the other hand, there is no disclosure of how mobile terminals are divided into paging groups and how PCHs are notified for each paging group. There is also no disclosure of how the mobile terminal performs intermittent reception in a standby state. It is an object of the present invention to disclose details of a method of notifying a paging signal to a mobile terminal in a standby state in a unicast and / or mixed frequency layer, and a mobile communication system therefor.

Therefore, a specific example of a paging signal notification method will be disclosed. Mobile terminals are divided into paging groups. In the conventional technique (W-CDMA system), the number of S-CCPCH (Secondary Common Control CHannel) to which PCH is mapped (number of channelization codes) is defined as the number of groups. However, since the LTE system is not a code division multiplexing (CDM) system, the concept of the number of channelization codes cannot be adapted. In Non-Patent Document 1 in the current 3GPP, it is disclosed that the paging group uses the L1 / L2 signaling channel (PDCCH), and the clear identifier (UE-ID) of the mobile terminal can be found on the PCH. Has been. However, no specific examples are disclosed. Calculation expression for determining a paging group and K Unicast the (IMSI mod K Unicast) is the number of paging groups in an MBMS / Unicast-mixed cell. As a specific example of the value of K, the L1 / L2 signaling channel (PDCCH) is mapped to each subframe. There are 10 subframes in one radio frame. Therefore, the number of paging groups is 10. That is, the paging group can identify which subframe in the radio frame is mapped with the paging information of the group to which it belongs. Next, to which radio frame the paging information of the group to which the user belongs is mapped, this can follow the conventional technique (W-CDMA). A specific calculation formula is “Paging Occasion = (IMSI div K) mod (intermittent reception period in unicast / mixed frequency layer) + n × (intermittent reception period in unicast / mixed frequency layer) n = 0, 1, 2,.・ ・ Maximum value of SFN ”. Also, a specific calculation formula is “Paging Occasion = (IMSI div K Unicast ) mod (intermittent reception period in unicast / mixed frequency layer) + n × (intermittent reception period in unicast / mixed frequency layer) n: 0, 1 2..., But Paging Occation ≦ maximum value of SFN. Here, SFN is an integer from 0 to the maximum value of SFN.

  Next, in the current 3GPP, Non-Patent Document 1 discloses that a clear identifier (UE-ID) of a mobile terminal can be found on the PCH. However, there is no disclosure about specific examples. As a specific example of the mapping method of specific paging information to the PCH, the PCH is configured with identification information of the mobile terminal, or is configured to be correlated by applying the identification information of the mobile terminal. . The PCH is mapped in units of CCE on the L1 / L2 signaling channel. Also, it is assumed that the PCH includes allocation of downlink radio resources of the control channel that the mobile terminal should receive next. As a result, there is no need for downlink assignment again, and the effect that the control delay can be reduced can be obtained. Moreover, it is good also as a method which does not send the allocation of the downlink radio | wireless resource of the control channel which a mobile terminal should receive next by PCH. As this method, a paging indicator is put on the L1 / L2 signaling channel and transmitted, and the mobile terminal which has received the paging indicator addressed to itself transmits the uplink RACH to request the base station for radio assignment. You can think about how to keep it. PCH including a clear identifier (UE-ID) of the mobile terminal may be transmitted on the PDSCH. In this case, PDSCH radio resource allocation information to which the PCH to be received by the mobile terminal is mapped is mapped as a paging indicator on the L1 / L2 signaling channel. If the correlation is obtained by applying the identification information of the mobile terminal to the paging indicator, the mobile terminal can determine whether the paging indicator is addressed to itself. The mobile terminal that has received the paging indicator addressed to itself receives the identification information included in the PCH on the PDSCH based on the allocation information, and confirms whether or not the mobile terminal is the self mobile terminal. By adopting such a method, it is possible to reliably detect whether the paging signal is addressed to the own mobile terminal, and it is possible to eliminate an erroneous reception operation.

  In step ST1816, the base station (including the serving cell) included in the tracking area list (TA (Unicast)) of the mobile terminal prepares for unicast-side intermittent reception. Specifically, the paging group and the paging occasion are calculated from the identifier of the mobile terminal received in step ST1815. Specific examples of the calculation formula are as described above. In step ST1817, the base station (including the serving cell) included in the tracking area list (TA (Unicast)) of the mobile terminal stores the paging information of the mobile terminal according to the paging group and paging occurrence calculated in step ST1816. To map. At this time, any CCE is acceptable as long as it is a CCE in the L1 / L2 signaling channel in the subframe indicated by the paging group in the radio frame indicated by the Paging Occlusion. Or it maps to CCE where allocation to PCH was decided. When the allocation of the PCH is determined, the number of times that the mobile terminal performs blind detection is reduced, so that an effect that the control delay is reduced can be obtained. In Step ST1818, the base station (including the serving cell) included in the TA list (TA (Unicast)) of the mobile terminal transmits the PCH.

  In Step ST1819, the mobile terminal moves to the unicast / mixed frequency layer by changing the set frequency of the frequency converting unit 1107 and changing the center frequency to f (unicast). In Step ST1820, the mobile terminal prepares for unicast side intermittent reception. Specifically, the paging group and the paging occasion are calculated from the identifier of the own mobile terminal. The calculation formula is the same as that described above on the network side. In Step ST1821, the mobile terminal performs blind detection of the PCH on the L1 / L2 signaling channel according to the paging group calculated in Step ST1820 and the Paging Occlusion. For blind detection, the identifier of the mobile terminal is used. The correlation value is obtained by multiplying the identifier of the mobile terminal by the CCE unit of the PCH. If the correlation value is greater than or equal to the threshold value, it is determined that there is paging to the mobile terminal. In Step ST1822, the mobile terminal decodes the PCH and obtains downlink assignment for the next control channel. Control information is received according to the allocation.

  Next, in the current 3GPP, in a mixed cell, it is determined that in the MBSFN frame (subframe), except for the first 1-2 OFDM symbols in subframe units, it should not be used for unicast transmission. In other words, resources other than the first 1-2 OFDM symbols are dedicated to MBMS transmission. This is because the MBSFN frame is not assigned to subframes # 0 and # 5 and is a subframe to which the SCH is mapped. Here, the following problems occur. If the calculation formula of the paging group and the paging occasion is used, the paging signal may be generated every radio frame and every subframe. Since PCH uses an L1 / L2 signaling channel, it can be mapped even in an MBSFN frame. On the other hand, in the MBSFN frame, when the downlink radio resource of the next control information is allocated in the PCH, the downlink radio resource on the same subframe is dedicated to MBMS transmission, so the control information is allocated in the same subframe. The problem of not being able to do occurs. As a solution, the downlink radio resource allocation of the next control information in the PCH is a radio frame other than the subsequent MBSFN frame. Another solution is to assign the paging signal to one or more subframes excluding the MBSFN subframe. For example, the number of paging groups is made equal to or less than the number of subframes excluding the MBSFN subframe in the radio frame. This eliminates the need to assign a paging signal to the MBSFN subframe. As a specific example, the number of paging groups is 2, and the paging group calculation formula is “IMSI mod 2” as follows. As a specific group assignment example, if paging group = 0, subframe # 0 is assigned. If paging group = 1, subframe # 5 is allocated. As a result, it is possible to notify paging information only in subframes (# 0, # 5) to which no MBSFN frame is assigned, so that the next control information can be assigned in the same subframe as the paging signal. Can solve the problem of not.

Further, as another solution, a method of not transmitting the downlink radio resource allocation of the control channel to be received next by the mobile terminal in PCH. In this method, a paging indicator is put on the L1 / L2 signaling channel and transmitted, and the mobile terminal that has received the paging indicator addressed to itself transmits the uplink RACH to request the base station for radio assignment. To. In this way, since it is not necessary to put radio allocation information on the PDSCH for communication after paging, it is possible to transmit / receive a paging signal without any problem even if an MBSFN subframe exists. In this case, the mobile terminal identification information is applied so that the correlation can be obtained so that the mobile terminal can be specified only by the paging indicator. In the MBSFN subframe, a paging indicator may be placed in the area allocated for unicast, the first 1 or 2 OFDM symbol area. Similarly, in this case, the mobile terminal identification information is applied so that the correlation can be obtained so that the mobile terminal can be identified only by the paging indicator. The mobile terminal side receives a radio frame or subframe carrying the paging indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs, derived from the mobile terminal's unique identification number, and performs blind detection using the mobile terminal's unique identification number. You can do it.
As specific paging group and paging occasion calculation formulas, the following formulas can be applied as described above.
IMSI mod K, K is the number of paging groups in a mixed MBMS / unicast cell.
Paging Occasion = (IMSI div K) mod (intermittent reception period in unicast / mixed frequency layer) + n × (intermittent reception period in unicast / mixed frequency layer) n: 0, 1, 2,... ≦ Maximum value of SFN. Where SFN is an integer from 0 to the maximum value of SFN.
By adopting such a method, even in the case of an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, a paging signal (paging indicator) can be transmitted in an arbitrary radio frame or subframe regardless of the presence or absence of the MBSFN subframe. It becomes possible.

  FIG. 24 shows the processing details of MBMS reception end B. In FIG. 24, step ST1823 to step ST1837 are the same as step ST1799 to step ST1813, and thus the description thereof is omitted. The difference is that “response to Paging” is included in step ST1828. By this MBMS reception end B processing, the network side can know that the mobile terminal ends the reception of the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer without adding an uplink to the MBMS dedicated cell. . As a result, there is an effect that the network side can be changed from the MBMS reception time missing reception configuration to a configuration for notifying a normal paging signal.

  Further, “end of MBMS reception” in step ST1828 may be notified in the same manner as “attach request” shown in ST1710 or as a kind. Alternatively, “MBMS reception end” may be notified in the same manner as “Tracking Area Update (TAU)” or as a kind. In this case, the notification parameters include the mobile terminal identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), the MBMS service reception frequency (f (MBMS)), the MBSFN Area number (ID), and the paging as described above. To respond to Thereby, the network side can know that the mobile terminal ends the reception of MBMS in the MBMS dedicated cell without adding a new message. Therefore, an effect that the complexity of the mobile communication system can be avoided can be obtained. In addition, information indicating “MBMS reception end” may be added to “tracking area update”. As a specific method, “MBMS reception end” may be added to the TAU Type information. Type information may be indicated by a numerical value. A 1-bit indicator may be provided on the TAU request message to indicate whether or not “MBMS reception is complete”. Information indicating “MBMS reception end” may be added to the “attach request” message. As a specific method, “MBMS reception end” may be added to the type information of the attach request. Type information may be indicated by a numerical value. A 1-bit indicator may be provided on the attach request message to indicate whether or not “MBMS reception is completed”.

  This makes it possible to distinguish between the conventional “tracking area update” and “tracking area update” used to notify “end of MBMS reception”. Further, it is possible to distinguish from the conventional “attach request” and “attach request” used for notifying “end of MBMS reception”. Thereby, the effect of preventing the control delay of the mobile communication system can be obtained. Further, “end of MBMS reception + response to paging” in step ST1828 may be notified in the same manner as the “attach request” shown in ST1710 or as a kind. Alternatively, “end of MBMS reception + response to paging” may be notified in the same manner as “tracking area update (TAU)” or as a kind. In this case, the notification parameters include the identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) of the mobile terminal, the frequency (f (MBMS)) for terminating the reception of the MBMS service, the MBSFN Area number (ID), and the like. is there. Thereby, the network side can know that the mobile terminal ends the reception of MBMS in the MBMS dedicated cell without adding a new message. Therefore, an effect that the complexity of the mobile communication system can be avoided can be obtained.

  In addition, information indicating that “MBMS reception end + paging response” may be added to “tracking area update”. As a specific method, “MBMS reception end + response to paging” may be added to the TAU Type information. Type information may be indicated by a numerical value. A 1-bit indicator may be provided on the TAU request message to indicate whether or not “MBMS reception end + paging response”. Information indicating that “MBMS reception end + response to paging” may be added to the “attach request” message. As a specific method, “MBMS reception end + paging response” may be added to the type information of the attach request. Type information may be indicated by a numerical value. A 1-bit indicator may be provided on the attach request message to indicate whether or not it is for “MBMS reception end + response to paging”. This makes it possible to distinguish between the conventional “tracking area update” and “tracking area update” used to notify “MBMS reception end + paging response”. In addition, it is possible to distinguish from the conventional “attach request” and “attach request” used to notify “end of MBMS reception + response to paging”. Thereby, the effect of preventing the control delay of the mobile communication system can be obtained.

  In the above, the identifier of the mobile terminal may include the following. As the mobile communication system, the mobile terminal identifier used in the unicast / mixed frequency layer and the mobile terminal identifier used in the MBSFN transmission dedicated frequency layer may exist as the mobile terminal identifier. As specific examples of mobile terminal identifiers used in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, conventional UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, mobile terminal identifiers assigned to each cell, and the like are conceivable. As a specific example of the identifier of the mobile terminal used in the MBSFN transmission-dedicated frequency layer, an identifier that is commonly assigned in base stations that perform multi-cell transmission can be considered. As a specific example, the identifier of the mobile terminal for the mobile terminal used (or commonly assigned) in the TA (MBMS) newly disclosed in the present invention, in the MBSFN area where the mobile terminal receives the MBMS service Used in (or assigned in common) for the mobile terminal, used in the MBSFN synchronization area (or assigned in common), and the like.

  The following effects can be obtained by newly providing the identifier of the mobile terminal used in the MBSFN transmission dedicated frequency layer. When the identifier of the mobile terminal allocated for each conventional cell is used, since the identifier for the mobile terminal may be different for each cell, it is impossible to perform multi-cell transmission of information using the identifier. Therefore, the information using the mobile terminal identifier assigned to each cell cannot be combined with SFN. In addition, when conventional IMSI and UE-ID are used, multi-cell transmission is possible, but there is a problem in terms of effective use of radio resources because the amount of IMSI and UE-ID information increases. IMSI and UE-ID are statically determined values for the mobile terminal, and there is no opportunity for change. Therefore, the heavy use of IMSI and UE-ID in the wireless section increases the chance of eavesdropping, which is a security issue.

  Since the identifier is used in the TA (MBMS) or in the MBSFN area, it is not an identifier that is statically given to the mobile terminal like IMSI, but when the TA (MBMS) is changed The value to be changed to Even if there is an opportunity for eavesdropping, there is an opportunity to change the identifier, which is strong in terms of security. Therefore, by using the identifier of the mobile terminal used in the MBSFN transmission-dedicated frequency layer, the information using the identifier (information may be multiplied by the identifier) while solving the security problem and the problem of the radio resource. Multi-cell transmission is possible. As a result, it becomes possible to SFN combine information using the identifier of the mobile terminal used in the MBSFN transmission dedicated frequency layer in the mobile terminal, and the effect of reducing the reception error of the information in the mobile terminal can be obtained. . This leads to effects such as prevention of control delay of the entire mobile communication system and effective utilization of radio resources.

  A specific example of the operation is shown below. In Step ST1742, the mobile terminal transmits “MBMS side reception status notification” to the serving cell. Examples of parameters included in the “MBMS side reception status notification” include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), MBMS service reception frequency (f (MBMS)), MBSFN Area number (ID). ) Etc. are considered. In Step ST1746, the MME determines a tracking area (hereinafter referred to as TA (MBMS)) that is receiving the MBMS service at the frequency dedicated to MBMS transmission of the mobile terminal. At that time, the identifier of the mobile terminal used in the MBSFN area by using the unique identifier of the mobile terminal and the MBSFN area ID obtained by the MME in the “MBMS side reception status notification” (may be an identification code) Is derived. Alternatively, the MME derives an identifier (which may be an identification code) of the mobile terminal used in the TA (MBMS) using the unique identifier of the mobile terminal and the MBSFN area ID. The identifier of the mobile terminal may be assigned to a plurality of mobile terminals (identifier for a group of mobile terminals) or an identifier unique to the mobile terminal. The MCE or the MBMS GW may perform the derivation of the identifier of the mobile terminal instead of the MME.

  The identifier is transmitted from the MME to the mobile terminal via the serving cell, and further transmitted from the MME to the MCE. For example, transmission from the MME via the serving cell may be performed in ST1748 to ST1750. What is necessary is just to transmit not only by this step but by an individual signal (DCCH, DTCH, etc.). The MME may notify the paging request transmitted to the MCE, for example, the identifier of the mobile terminal used in the TA (MBMS) or the identifier of the mobile terminal used in the MBSFN area in ST1776. What is necessary is just to transmit with the paging request of ST1780 from the MCE to the MBMS dedicated cell. In step ST1783, each base station in the MBSFN area maps the identifier of the mobile terminal used in the MBSFN area of the corresponding mobile terminal or the identifier of the mobile terminal used in TA (MBMS) to the PMCH. In step ST1786, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the identifier of the mobile terminal itself is included in the received and decoded result (whether or not it is detected). Similarly, the identifier of the mobile terminal used in the MBSFN transmission dedicated frequency layer may be used in step ST1710 to step ST1719, step ST1761 to step ST1770, step ST1804 to step 1813, step ST1814 to step ST1815, and step ST1828 to step ST1837. .

  Further, not only in the present embodiment, but also in the case of multi-cell (MC) transmission for each MBSFN area, the mobile terminal identifier used in the unicast / mixed frequency layer and the MBSFN transmission dedicated frequency as the mobile communication system as the mobile communication system. A method in which an identifier of a mobile terminal used in a layer exists can be used. That is, not limited to this embodiment, when multi-cell transmission is performed for each MBSFN area, the identifier of the mobile terminal for the mobile terminal used in TA (MBMS) (or commonly assigned), the mobile terminal is MBMS The identification for the mobile terminal used in the MBSFN area that receives the service (or assigned in common) can be used for the information (may be multiplied by the information). As a result, the information can be SFN-combined at the mobile terminal, and the effect of reducing the reception error of the information at the mobile terminal can be obtained. This leads to effects such as prevention of control delay of the entire mobile communication system and effective utilization of radio resources. In addition, introduction of multi-cell transmission is also being studied in the unicast / mixed frequency layer. In that case, information such as an identifier for the mobile terminal that is used (or commonly assigned) in the MBSFN area where the mobile terminal receives the MBMS service is used as an identifier of the mobile terminal (may be used by multiplying the information). I can do it. As a result, the information can be SFN-combined at the mobile terminal, and the effect of reducing the reception error of the information at the mobile terminal can be obtained. This leads to effects such as prevention of control delay of the entire mobile communication system and effective utilization of radio resources.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission is configured by the MBMS dedicated cell has been described. Even if the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission is configured by an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, the second embodiment can be applied. In addition to the first embodiment, the third, fourth, fifth, and sixth embodiments described below are also applicable even if the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer is configured with an MBMS / unicast mixed cell.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
In the current 3GPP discussion, the existence of an MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service Single Frequency Network) area that covers a plurality of MBSFN areas is discussed. A conceptual diagram of the geographical location of the base station when there is an MBSFN area covering a plurality of MBSFN areas is shown in FIG. There are four MBSFN areas 1 to 4 in one MBSFN synchronization area. The MBSFN area 4 covers the MBSFN areas 1 to 3. The content currently being discussed in 3GPP for MBSFN area 4 is that access to the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) is performed via the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN areas 1 to 3). That is, it is not determined whether the MCCH (multicast control channel) is provided in the MBSFN area 4 covering the MBSFN areas 1 to 3. In the case where the MCCH exists on the MBSFN area 4 side, the specific detailed operation has been described in the second embodiment. In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which there is no MCCH on the MBSFN area side to be covered. A conceptual diagram is shown in FIG. In the description, the description will focus on parts different from FIG. 29 referred to in the description of the second embodiment. Portions that are not particularly described are the same as in the second embodiment.

  First, as the first difference between FIG. 35 and FIG. 29, since MCCH does not exist on the MBSFN area 4 side shown in FIG. 28, the method of notifying control information (MCCH) is different from the second embodiment. As an MCCH mapping method for the MBSFN area 4, first, a method of securing the MBSFN areas 1 and 4 in the PMCH (PMCH1) of the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 1) can be considered.

  A conceptual diagram is shown in FIG. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a method for mapping a paging-related signal in a PMCH (PMCH1) to which a multicast control channel (MCCH1) is mapped in order to transmit control information to an MBSFN area including a plurality of MBSFN areas. . FIG. 36 (a) shows the configuration of a physical MCH (PMCH) provided with paging-related areas for MBSFN areas 1 and 4. It is assumed that MBMS-related information of MBSFN areas 1 and 4 and paging-related information of MBSFN areas 1 and 4 are included on the PMCH (PMCH1). The MBMS-related information and paging signal in each MBSFN area may exist as information elements in the MTCH and MCCH, respectively, or the physical area (resource) to which each is mapped may be time-division multiplexed. . FIG. 36 (b) shows a configuration in which MBSFN area 1 and 4 separate indicators indicating whether MCCH contents have been changed are provided in physical MCH (PMCH) in which MBSFN areas 1 and 4 are provided with paging areas. In FIG. 36 (b), as indicators, a paging signal presence / absence indicator (indicator 1) indicating the presence / absence of paging in MBSFN areas 1 and 4 and an MBMS-related change presence / absence indicator indicating whether MBMS-related information in MBSFN areas 1 and 4 has been changed are displayed. A case of having (indicator 2) will be described. FIG. 36 (c) describes the configuration when the paging-related change presence / absence indicator (indicator 1) is divided into K groups. If the method of securing the MBSFN areas 1 and 4 in the PMCH (PMCH1) of the MBSFN area (MBSFN area 1) covered in this way is used, the scheduling of MCCH1 to be notified on BCCH1 (broadcast control channel) is MBSFN. It is possible to obtain an effect that only the one for area 1 is required. The details of the MCCH scheduling method are the same as in Embodiment 2, and will not be described.

  An MCCH scheduling method will be described. In addition to the scheduling of MCCH1 notified by BCCH1, the starting point of the physical area on which MCCH4 is carried may be notified. Alternatively, scheduling notified by BCCH1 may be scheduling of PMCH1.

  The second difference is that there is no MCCH on the overlying MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) side, and therefore a method of notifying the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the MBSFN area 4 is a method for notifying the paging signal. Is different. The difference in the method for notifying the paging signal will be described. First, a method in which the network side notifies all the MBSFN areas 1 to 3 covered by the MBSFN area 4 as a notification range of the paging signal to the mobile terminal can be considered. In this case, it is possible to realize the case where there is no MCCH in the MBSFN area 4 without adding any additional control to the specific method described in the second embodiment. This is an effective method in terms of avoiding complexity as a mobile communication system.

  Next, a method is conceivable in which the network side notifies the covered MBSFN area (any of MBSFN areas 1 to 3) where the mobile terminal is located as a notification range of the paging signal to the mobile terminal. A specific operation will be described focusing on differences from the second embodiment. The “MBMS side reception status notification” will be described. In Step ST1742 of FIG. 20, the mobile terminal transmits an “MBMS side reception status notification” to the serving cell according to the UL (Uplink) allocation received in Step ST1741. Examples of parameters included in the “MBMS side reception status notification” include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), MBMS service reception frequency (f (MBMS)), MBSFN area number (ID )and so on. Here, the MBSFN area ID to be notified is not the MBSFN area ID (MBSFN area 4) that actually receives the MBMS service (MTCH) but the covered MBSFN area ID where the mobile terminal is located. In other words, the MBSFN area ID mapped to the S-SCH (second synchronization channel) received during the MBSFN search is notified. Thereby, the network side can know the covered MBSFN area where the mobile terminal is actually located. Further, as a process of the mobile terminal, step ST3101 in FIG. 38 is performed before the process in step ST1794 in FIG.

  In step ST3101 of FIG. 38, the mobile terminal measures the reception quality of the MCCH being received. The mobile terminal receives the reference signal (RS) with the radio resource in the MBSFN area and measures the received power (RSRP). It is determined whether or not the received power is equal to or greater than a threshold value determined statically or semi-statically. If the threshold value is equal to or greater than the threshold value, it indicates that the sensitivity is sufficient for receiving the MCCH, and if the threshold value is less than the threshold value, it indicates that the sensitivity sufficient for receiving the MCCH is not satisfied. If it is equal to or greater than the threshold, the process proceeds to step ST1794, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold, the process proceeds to step ST1724. Thereby, the mobile terminal grasps the mobility between the covered MBSFN areas to which the MCCH is mapped. Thus, the following points are effective compared to the method of notifying the paging signal from all the MBSFN areas 1 to 3 covered by the MBSFN area 4. As a mobile communication system, a paging signal is transmitted from a base station other than a base station that can be received geographically by the mobile terminal (for example, when the mobile terminal is located in MBSFN area 1, MBSFN areas 2 and 3). This eliminates the need to do so, and is effective in terms of effective use of radio resources. Also in the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment, there are mobile terminal identifiers used in the unicast / mixed frequency layer and mobile terminal identifiers used in the MBSFN transmission dedicated frequency layer in the mobile communication system as in the mobile communication system. Method can be used.

According to the third embodiment, even when there is no MCCH in an MBSFN area including a plurality of MBSFN areas, a paging signal is notified to the mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell, which is the subject of the present invention. There is an effect that can be. In addition, a method for selecting a desired service in an MBMS transmission dedicated cell, which is an object of the present invention, can be disclosed, whereby a mobile terminal receives the desired service in an MBMS transmission dedicated cell without an uplink. There is an effect that can be done.

Embodiment 4 FIG.
The methods described in the first to third embodiments are paging signal notification methods when the paging reception capability (capability) of a mobile terminal receiving an MBMS service in an MBMS transmission dedicated cell is low. Next, a paging signal notification method in the case where there are a mobile terminal having a high paging reception capability (high capability terminal) and a mobile terminal having a low paging reception capability (low capability terminal) will be described. As a specific example of the “low-capacity terminal” described in the following description, there is a mobile terminal having one receiver. Alternatively, the mobile terminal has one central frequency that can be determined by changing the set frequency of the frequency conversion unit 1107. Alternatively, it is a mobile terminal that cannot perform intermittent reception of the MBMS / unicast mixed cell when receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell.

  A specific example of the “high-capacity terminal” is a mobile terminal provided with a plurality of (for example, two) receivers of the mobile terminal. Alternatively, the mobile terminal has a plurality of center frequencies that can be determined by changing the set frequency of the frequency conversion unit 1107. Alternatively, the mobile terminal can perform intermittent reception in the MBMS / unicast mixed cell even when the MBMS service is being received in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell. FIG. 38 is a table showing the concept of mobile terminal capabilities. The mobile terminal's capability is notified from the mobile terminal to the serving base station in step ST1710, and in step ST1712, the serving base station notifies the MME. Thereby, the network side can recognize the paging reception capability of the mobile terminal. Therefore, it is possible to switch the paging method to the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission depending on the paging reception capability of the mobile terminal.

  A specific operation example will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. The high-capacity terminal performs an MBMS / unicast mixed cell reception operation and an MBMS transmission dedicated cell reception operation in parallel. Specific examples of the reception operation of the MBMS transmission dedicated cell include step ST1601-1, step ST1602, step ST1603, step ST1604, and step ST1609. Detailed operations in each step are the same as those in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted. The low-capacity terminal performs the operation described in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment. By this method, while establishing a paging signal notification method for a low capability terminal receiving an MBMS service in an MBMS transmission dedicated cell, a paging signal for a high capability terminal receiving an MBMS service in an MBMS transmission dedicated cell is established. The notification method can be configured to notify a normal paging signal. Thereby, it is possible to simplify the processing in the mobile terminal and the processing as the mobile communication system when the high-capacity terminal receives the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. The simplification of the process can achieve the effect of reducing the power consumption of the mobile terminal. In addition, since it is not necessary for the mobile communication system to transmit a paging signal from a base station in the MBSFN area to a high-capacity terminal, an effect of effective use of radio resources can be obtained.

  Furthermore, even in the case of a high-capacity terminal, the embodiment is performed at the user's intention to prevent an increase in power consumption by performing the reception operation of the MBMS / unicast mixed cell and the reception operation of the MBMS transmission dedicated cell in parallel 1. The operation described in the second and third embodiments is performed. Thereby, even if it is a high capability terminal, it becomes unnecessary to perform reception operation | movement in parallel and the effect of preventing the increase in the power consumption of a mobile terminal can be acquired. The intention of this user is notified from the mobile terminal to the network side in step ST1710 as in the mobile terminal paging reception capability, and the processing is the same as that of the second embodiment as a mobile communication system including the mobile terminal.

  Next, a modified example will be described. Non-Patent Document 8 discloses a release indicator as one parameter of the capability of a mobile terminal. However, Non-Patent Document 8 does not describe differences in operation of the mobile communication system due to differences in release indicators. In this modification, according to the capability of the mobile terminal, specifically, according to the release indicator that is one parameter of the capability of the mobile terminal, the mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell A method for switching a method of notifying a paging signal to a terminal is disclosed. Also, the mobile terminal uses a paging signal reception method during reception of the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell in accordance with the capability of the own mobile terminal, specifically, in accordance with the corresponding release. Since the notification method of the paging signal is switched according to the release of the mobile terminal, it becomes necessary to share the capability information of the mobile terminal on the mobile terminal, the serving base station, and the network side. Therefore, here, the mobile terminal's capability (Capability) is notified from the mobile terminal to the serving base station, and the serving base station notifies the MME. As a specific example, the capability (Capability) of the mobile terminal is notified from the mobile terminal to the serving base station in Step ST1710, and is notified from the serving base station to the MME in Step ST1712. Thereby, the network side can recognize the paging reception capability of the mobile terminal. Therefore, it is possible to switch the paging method to the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission depending on the paging reception capability of the mobile terminal.

A specific example of the notification method of the paging signal to be switched will be disclosed. As an example of one switching, (1) the paging signal is notified from the MBMS dedicated cell to the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service from the MBMS dedicated cell by the method shown in the first to third embodiments. (2) The paging signal is notified from the unicast cell or the mixed MBMS / unicast cell to the mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service from the MBMS dedicated cell by a normal method. As another example of switching, (1) a method of notifying a paging signal to a mobile terminal that is receiving an MBMS service from an MBMS dedicated cell, a paging signal is sent from the MBMS dedicated cell by the method shown in the first to third embodiments. Notify (2) Paging is not notified to the mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service from the MBMS dedicated cell. A specific example of switching the paging signal notification method according to the release indicator will be disclosed.
There may be a case where it is determined whether or not the mobile terminal can receive a paging signal from the MBMS dedicated cell according to the corresponding release. For example, a Release 8 compatible mobile terminal cannot receive a paging signal from an MBMS dedicated cell, while a Release 9 compatible mobile terminal can receive a paging signal from an MBMS dedicated cell.

  As a correspondence example, (1) for a release-compatible mobile terminal that can receive a paging signal from an MBMS dedicated cell, when the mobile terminal is receiving an MBMS service from the MBMS dedicated cell, the paging signal to the mobile terminal is The notification method notifies the paging signal from the MBMS dedicated cell by the method shown in the first to third embodiments. (2) For the mobile terminal corresponding to the release that cannot receive the paging signal from the MBMS dedicated cell, the mobile terminal When the MBMS service is being received from the MBMS dedicated cell, the paging signal is notified from the unicast cell or the MBMS / unicast mixed cell by the usual method for notifying the mobile terminal of the paging signal. As another switching example, (1) when the mobile terminal is receiving the MBMS service from the MBMS dedicated cell to the release-compatible mobile terminal that can receive the paging signal from the MBMS dedicated cell, the mobile terminal The paging signal is notified from the MBMS dedicated cell by the method described in the first to third embodiments. (2) For the release-compatible mobile terminal that cannot receive the paging signal from the MBMS dedicated cell. When the mobile terminal is receiving the MBMS service from the MBMS dedicated cell, it does not notify the paging signal to the mobile terminal.

  According to the first modification, it is possible to switch the operation of the mobile communication system using conventional parameters without increasing the parameters notified from the mobile terminal to the network side. Thereby, the effect of effective utilization of radio resources can be obtained. Further, as a mobile communication system, it is not necessary to transmit a paging signal from the MBMS dedicated cell to a mobile terminal that cannot receive the paging signal from the MBMS dedicated cell, so that an effect of effective use of radio resources can be obtained. it can. This can also provide the effect of reducing the load on the network side.

  Next, another modification will be described as Modification 2. Non-Patent Document 8 discloses MBMS related parameters as one parameter of the capability of a mobile terminal. However, Non-Patent Document 8 does not disclose the contents of MBMS related parameters at all. In this modification, according to the capability of the mobile terminal, specifically, according to the MBMS related parameter which is one parameter of the capability of the mobile terminal, the mobile terminal is receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell. A method for switching a method of notifying a paging signal to a mobile terminal is disclosed. In addition, the mobile terminal uses a paging signal reception method during reception of the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell in accordance with the capability of the own mobile terminal, specifically in accordance with the MBMS related parameters. Since the notification method of the paging signal is switched according to the release of the mobile terminal, it becomes necessary to share the capability information of the mobile terminal on the mobile terminal, the serving base station, and the network side. Therefore, here, the mobile terminal's capability (Capability) is notified from the mobile terminal to the serving base station, and the serving base station notifies the MME. As a specific example, the capability (Capability) of the mobile terminal is notified from the mobile terminal to the serving base station in Step ST1710, and is notified from the serving base station to the MME in Step ST1712. Thereby, the network side can recognize the paging reception capability of the mobile terminal. Therefore, it is possible to switch the paging method to the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission depending on the paging reception capability of the mobile terminal. Since a specific example of the notification method of the paging signal to be switched is the same as that of the first modification, description thereof is omitted. A specific example of MBMS-related parameters and a specific example of switching a paging signal notification method according to the parameters will be disclosed.

  An example parameter is disclosed. In the MBMS related parameters, parameters of “low-capacity terminal (or one receiver)” and “high-capacity terminal (or two receivers)” are provided. When the mobile terminal is receiving the MBMS service from the MBMS dedicated cell, the paging signal notification method to the mobile terminal is notified from the MBMS dedicated cell by the method shown in the first to third embodiments ( 2) When the mobile terminal is receiving an MBMS service from the MBMS dedicated cell to a high-capacity terminal, the paging signal is reported to the mobile terminal in a normal manner using a unicast cell or MBMS / unicast. As another switching example, (1) the mobile terminal sends an MBMS service from the MBMS dedicated cell to the high capability terminal. When a mobile station is receiving a paging signal from a unicast cell or a mixed MBMS / unicast cell, the paging signal is reported to the mobile terminal in the usual manner. When the mobile terminal is receiving the MBMS service from the MBMS dedicated cell, the mobile terminal does not notify the paging signal to the mobile terminal.Another parameter example is disclosed. In the MBMS related parameter, “paging signal from the MBMS dedicated cell is indicated. The parameters “can be received” and “cannot receive paging signal from MBMS dedicated cell” are provided.

  As a corresponding example, (1) when a mobile terminal that can receive a paging signal from an MBMS dedicated cell is receiving an MBMS service from the MBMS dedicated cell, a method for notifying the mobile terminal of a paging signal is provided. The paging signal is notified from the MBMS dedicated cell by the method described in the first to third embodiments. (2) For the mobile terminal that cannot receive the paging signal from the MBMS dedicated cell, the mobile terminal receives the MBMS from the MBMS dedicated cell. When the service is being received, the paging signal is notified from the unicast cell or the MBMS / unicast mixed cell by a normal method for notifying the mobile terminal of the paging signal. As another switching example, (1) when a mobile terminal that can receive a paging signal from an MBMS dedicated cell is receiving an MBMS service from the MBMS dedicated cell, the paging signal to the mobile terminal (2) For a mobile terminal that cannot receive a paging signal from the MBMS dedicated cell, the mobile terminal is dedicated to MBMS. When the MBMS service is being received from the cell, the paging signal is not notified to the mobile terminal.

  According to Modification 2, it is possible to switch the operation of the mobile communication system using conventional parameters without increasing the parameters notified from the mobile terminal to the network side. Thereby, the effect of effective utilization of radio resources can be obtained. Also, as a mobile communication system, a paging signal is transmitted from the MBMS dedicated cell to a mobile terminal that cannot receive a paging signal from the MBMS dedicated cell or a mobile terminal that does not need to receive a paging signal from the MBMS dedicated cell. Since it becomes unnecessary, the effect of effective use of radio resources can be obtained. This can also provide the effect of reducing the load on the network side.

Embodiment 5 FIG.
The method described in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment is a method for notifying a paging signal to a mobile terminal that receives an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. In the fifth embodiment, “no paging is received” can be selected by the user's intention while receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. A specific operation example when “do not receive paging” is selected by the user's intention will be described with reference to FIGS. The mobile terminal that has selected “do not receive paging” at the user's will notifies “not receive paging” in step ST1603, specifically, the MBMS side reception status notification in step ST1742.

  Further, the “MBMS reception status notification” in step ST1742 may be notified in the same manner as the “attach request” shown in ST1710 or as a kind. Alternatively, “MBMS reception status notification” may be notified in the same manner as “tracking area update (TAU)” or as a kind. In this case, the notification parameters are the mobile terminal identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), the frequency (f (MBMS) to end reception of the MBMS service), the MBSFN Area number (ID), and the paging as described above May not be received. Thereby, the network side can know that the mobile terminal ends the reception of MBMS in the MBMS dedicated cell without adding a new message. Therefore, an effect that the complexity of the mobile communication system can be avoided can be obtained. In addition, information indicating “MBMS reception status notification” may be added to “tracking area update”. As a specific method, “MBMS reception status notification” may be added to the TAU Type information. Type information may be indicated by a numerical value. A 1-bit indicator may be provided on the TAU request message to indicate whether or not it is for “MBMS reception status notification”.

  Information indicating “MBMS reception status notification” may be added to the “attach request” message. As a specific method, “MBMS reception status notification” may be added to the type information of the attach request. Type information may be indicated by a numerical value. A 1-bit indicator indicating whether or not “MBMS reception status notification” is used may be provided on the attach request message. This makes it possible to distinguish between the conventional “tracking area update” and “tracking area update” used to notify “MBMS reception status notification”. In addition, it is possible to distinguish from the conventional “attach request” and “attach request” used to notify “MBMS reception status notification”. Thereby, the effect of preventing the control delay of the mobile communication system can be obtained. Also, “MBMS reception status notification + no paging received” in step ST1828 may be notified in the same manner or as a kind of “attach request” shown in ST1710. Alternatively, “MBMS reception status notification + no paging received” may be notified in the same manner as “Tracking Area Update (TAU)” or as a kind.

  In this case, the notification parameters include the identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) of the mobile terminal, the frequency (f (MBMS)) for terminating the reception of the MBMS service, the MBSFN Area number (ID), and the like. is there. Thereby, the network side can know that the mobile terminal ends the reception of MBMS in the MBMS dedicated cell without adding a new message. Therefore, an effect that the complexity of the mobile communication system can be avoided can be obtained. Information indicating that “MBMS reception status notification + paging is not received” may be added to “tracking area update”. As a specific method, “MBMS reception status notification + not to receive paging” may be added to the TAU Type information. Type information may be indicated by a numerical value. A 1-bit indicator indicating whether or not “MBMS reception status notification + paging is not received” may be provided on the TAU request message. Information indicating that “MBMS reception status notification + paging is not received” may be added to the “attach request” message. As a specific method, “MBMS reception status notification + not to receive paging” may be added to the type information of the attach request. Type information may be indicated by a numerical value. A 1-bit indicator may be provided on the attach request message to indicate whether or not “MBMS reception status notification + paging is not received”. This makes it possible to distinguish between the conventional “tracking area update” and “MBMS reception status notification + no paging received” used to notify “tracking area update”. Further, it is possible to distinguish from the conventional “attach request” and “attach request” used to notify “MBMS reception status notification + no paging received”. Thereby, the effect of preventing the control delay of the mobile communication system can be obtained.

  As a mobile terminal, step ST1605, step ST1608, step ST1610, and step ST1611 are not performed. By simplifying the processing of the mobile terminal, an effect of reducing the power consumption of the mobile terminal can be obtained. In step ST1745, the mobile communication system receives “no paging received” from the mobile terminal. In step ST1746, the fact that “paging notification is stopped” for the mobile terminal is stored in the TA list of the mobile terminal or separately. Thereafter, in step ST1773, paging for the mobile terminal occurs. In Step ST1774, the MME confirms the tracking area list of the mobile terminal based on the identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) of the mobile terminal where paging has occurred. Then, the MME confirms “paging notification stop” for the mobile terminal. Also in the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment, there are mobile terminal identifiers used in the unicast / mixed frequency layer and mobile terminal identifiers used in the MBSFN transmission dedicated frequency layer in the mobile communication system as in the mobile communication system. Method can be used.

  As the mobile communication system, the paging generation processing in steps ST1775 to ST1783 and steps ST1814 to ST1818 is stopped. Then, the MME notifies the network side of “paging reception refusal” of the mobile terminal. Thereby, the paging generation process as a mobile communication system can be stopped for a mobile terminal that does not receive paging at the user's will. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load and radio resources of the mobile communication system used for notifying the paging signal that the mobile terminal does not intend to receive.

Embodiment 6 FIG.
In the first to fourth embodiments, even when a paging signal addressed to the own mobile terminal in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission is received, the MBMS / unicast mixed cell is configured to perform intermittent reception again ( Hereinafter, this is referred to as two-stage intermittent reception.) In principle, the base station in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell and the base station in the mixed MBMS / unicast cell are asynchronous. Therefore, this is to solve the problem that the radio resource allocation for the downlink control signal after the paging signal of the base station in the MBMS / unicast mixed cell cannot be performed from the base station of the MBMS transmission dedicated cell. However, the two-step intermittent reception has a problem that the control delay becomes larger compared to a configuration in which a normal paging signal is notified to a mobile terminal other than the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. . A specific operation example will be described with reference to FIG. In step ST1705, the unicast cell or the mixed cell notifies two types of intermittent reception periods using BCCH. Specifically, it is for two-stage intermittent reception and for normal intermittent reception. More specifically, the length of two intermittent receptions is set to be equal to or shorter than that for normal intermittent reception for two-stage intermittent reception. The intermittent reception cycle for two-stage intermittent reception may indicate continuous reception. Thereby, different lengths can be set for two-stage intermittent reception and normal intermittent reception. Therefore, the effect that a mobile communication system with a high degree of freedom can be constructed can be obtained. Further, by setting the length for intermittent reception to be shorter than that for normal intermittent reception, even when a paging signal addressed to the mobile terminal in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission is received, the MBMS / unicast is again performed. Even in the case where intermittent reception is performed in the mixed cell, the cycle is shortened, so that an effect that the control delay can be reduced can be obtained.

Embodiment 7 FIG.
In LTE, it is considered that a new MBMS dedicated cell is provided. In the MBMS dedicated cell, a unicast service for performing individual communication addressed to individual terminals is not performed. Therefore, it is difficult to directly apply a method executed in a W-CDMA system that can execute both MBMS and a unicast service in an MBMS dedicated cell, for example, as defined in the Release 6 standard of 3GPP. In order for the mobile terminal to receive paging from the MBMS dedicated cell, it is necessary to provide a new paging channel. The present invention provides a method for a mobile terminal that is receiving or is about to receive an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission to receive a paging signal from an MBMS dedicated cell. Also disclosed are a channel configuration and mapping method for transmitting a paging signal, and a mobile communication system therefor.

  Hereinafter, a method for placing a paging signal on a physical multicast channel (PMCH) will be disclosed. FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of a physical multicast channel provided for each MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) area. In FIG. 39, a PMCH to which a multicast control channel (Multicast control channel: MCCH) that is a downlink logical channel and a multicast traffic channel (Multicast Traffic channel: MTCH) are mapped is time-division multiplexed (Time Division) for each MBSFN area 1 to 3. Multiplexing (TDM). In FIG. 39, cell # n1 is a cell in MBSFN area 1, cell # n2 is a cell in MBSFN area 2, and cell # n3 is a cell in MBSFN area 3. Since the cell of the cell # n1 belongs to the MBSFN area 1, the PMCH corresponding to the MBSFN area is transmitted at a certain time. Since PMCH is transmitted in multiple cells (Multi Cell: MC) in the MBSFN area, it is transmitted on the MBSFN subframe. A set of MBSFN frames to which MBSFN subframes are allocated is referred to as an “MBSFN frame cluster” (MBSFN frame cluster). In the MBMS dedicated cell, all subframes in the MBSFN frame may be MBSFN subframes used for multicell transmission. A cycle in which the MBSFN frame cluster is repeated is referred to as an “MBSFN frame cluster repetition period”.

  The MCH of one or a plurality of MBMS transport channels is mapped to the PMCH, and either or both of the MCCH, which is a logical channel of MBMS control information, and the MTCH, which is a logical channel of MBMS data, are mapped to the MCH. To be mapped. MCCH and MTCH may be temporally divided and mapped onto PMCH, or may be further temporally divided and mapped to a physical region that is transmitted in multicell. For example, MBSFN subframes, which are physical areas to which MTCH and MCCH are mapped, may be different. MCCH may be mapped on each MBSFN frame cluster, or only MTCH may be mapped. When only MTCH is mapped onto PMCH, the MCCH repetition period is different from the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period. In some cases, a plurality of MCCHs are mapped on the MBSFN frame cluster. The MCCH repetition period is referred to as an “MCCH repetition period”. In FIG. 39, MCCH1 is MBMS control information for MBSFN area 1, and MTCH1 is MBMS data for MBSFN area 1. Cell # n2 belongs to MBSFN area 2, MCCH2 is MBMS control information for MBSFN area 2, and MTCH2 is MBMS data for MBSFN area 2. Cell # n3 belongs to MBSFN area 3, MCCH3 is MBMS control information for MBSFN area 3, and MTCH3 is MBMS data for MBSFN area 3. The MCCH repetition period may be different for each MBSFN area. The PMCH for each MBSFN area is time-division multiplexed. Therefore, the orthogonality of the cells between the MBSFN areas can be obtained within the MBSFN synchronization area (MBSFN Synchronization Area FIG. 7) in which synchronization between cells is ensured, and interference from cells in other MBSFN areas can be prevented. it can. Since multi-cell transmission is performed in the MBSFN area, cells in each MBSFN area transmit the same data on the same PMCH. Even if one cell belongs to a plurality of MBSFN areas and a plurality of cells are overlapped, the PMCH for each MBSFN area is time-division multiplexed and transmitted on the MBSFN subframe. Therefore, the configuration of the PMCH is between the MBSFN areas. It is possible to apply while maintaining the orthogonality.

  In a mobile terminal, MBMS can be received by receiving PMCH transmitted in multiple cells from a plurality of cells in the MBSFN area in which the mobile terminal exists, and reception quality is improved by SFN gain by multi-cell transmission. Even in the case where one cell belongs to a plurality of MBSFN areas, the mobile terminal can receive a plurality of MBMS services by receiving the PMCH of each MBSFN area. In addition, since a mobile terminal receiving a PMCH in a desired MBSFN area does not need to receive a PMCH other than the PMCH, discontinuous reception (DRX) can be performed for a time other than the PMCH, which is consumed. Electric power can be reduced. Since the PMCH is continuously transmitted for each MBSFN area and the MBSFN frame is used as the MBSFN frame cluster, the mobile terminal can continuously perform the intermittent reception operation, thereby further reducing the power consumption. It becomes possible.

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of a physical multicast channel provided for each MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) area. In FIG. 39, the PMCH is time division multiplexed (TDM) for each of the MBSFN areas 1 to 3. FIG. 40 shows a case where PMCH is code division multiplexed (CDM) for each of MBSFN areas 1 to 3. Cell # n1 is a cell in MBSFN area 1, cell # n2 is a cell in MBSFN area 2, and cell # n3 is a cell in MBSFN area 3. The PMCH corresponding to MBSFN area 1 is transmitted in the cell of cell # n1. Here, the PMCH may be continuous in time or discontinuous. In the case of discontinuity, the cycle in which the MBSFN frame cluster in which the PMCH corresponding to the MBSFN area is transmitted is repeated becomes an “MBSFN frame cluster repetition period” (MBSFN frame cluster repetition period). In addition, the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period in the case of continuous may be 0 or may not be specified. MCCH and MTCH may be temporally divided and mapped onto PMCH, or may be further temporally divided and mapped to a physical region that is transmitted in multicell. For example, MBSFN subframes that are physical areas to which MTCH and MCCH are mapped as a result may be different. The period in which the MCCH is repeated is referred to as “MCCH repetition period” (MCCH Repetition period). Similarly, a PMCH corresponding to MBSFN area 2 is transmitted in the cell of cell # n2, and a PMCH corresponding to MBSFN area 3 is transmitted in the cell of cell # n3. The MCCH repetition period may be different for each MBSFN area. Since the data multiplied by the spreading code specific to the MBSFN area is mapped to the PMCH for each MBSFN area, interference between MBSFN areas can be suppressed in the MBSFN synchronization area in which synchronization between cells is ensured. Since multi-cell transmission is used in the MBSFN area, cells in each MBSFN area transmit the same data on the same PMCH, that is, data multiplied by a spreading code (Scrambling Code) unique to the MBSFN area. Even if one cell belongs to a plurality of MBSFN areas, the configuration of the PMCH can be applied while suppressing interference between the MBSFN areas.

  The mobile terminal receives the PMCH transmitted from a plurality of cells in the MBSFN area in which the mobile terminal is present, and despreads it with a spreading code unique to the MBSFN area, thereby affecting interference from other MBSFN areas. MBMS can be received while removing reception, and the reception quality can be improved by the SFN gain by multi-cell transmission. Even when one cell belongs to a plurality of MBSFN areas, the mobile terminal receives a PMCH of each MBSFN area and receives a plurality of MBMS services by despreading with a spreading code unique to each MBSFN area. It is possible. In addition, when the PMCH in a desired MBSFN area is not continuous in time, the mobile terminal does not need to receive the time other than the PMCH, so that the intermittent reception operation can be performed at times other than the PMCH, thereby reducing power consumption. It becomes. Even if the PMCH is continuous in time, if there are a plurality of services mapped to the PMCH and the services are temporally multiplexed on the PMCH, the mobile terminal transmits the service to which the desired service is mapped. It is only necessary to receive the time domain within the PMCH, and there is no need to receive other time domains. Therefore, the intermittent reception operation can be performed at other times in the PMCH, and the power consumption can be reduced.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of a physical multicast channel (PMCH) carrying a paging signal. FIG. 32 shows the configuration of a physical multicast channel (PMCH) carrying a paging signal. FIG. 32 (a) is a diagram showing a PMCH provided with a paging signal area, which shows that MBMS related information and a paging signal are included on the PMCH. Each of the MBMS related information and the paging signal may exist as an information element in the MTCH and MCCH, or a physical area (resource) to which each is mapped may be time-division multiplexed. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing a mapping method when MBMS related information and a paging signal are carried as information elements on a multicast control channel (MCCH). Of the MBMS related information, MBMS control information is put on the logical channel MCCH together with the paging signal. MCCH is mapped to a multicast channel (MCH) that is a transport channel together with MTCH, and MCH is mapped to a physical multicast channel (PMCH) that is a physical channel. In this way, it is possible to receive a paging signal when a mobile terminal receiving or trying to receive the MBMS service receives the MCCH.

  Another example will be described. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing a mapping method when the logical channel PCCH is multiplexed with the logical channels MTCH and MCCH and placed on the transport channel MCH. In FIG. 54, the paging signal is carried on the logical channel PCCH, and the MBMS related information is carried on the MTCH and MCCH. The base station may provide an MTCH-only MBSFN subframe and an MBSFN subframe in which MCCH and PCCH are mapped. Further, control may be performed so as to provide an MCS-only MBSFN subframe and a PCCH-only MBSFN subframe. By doing so, MTCH, MCCH and PCCH, and further, MCCH and PCCH can be transmitted after being divided in time. The mobile terminal only needs to receive the MBSFN subframes of necessary information, and can perform the DRX operation during the MBSFN subframes of unnecessary information. Further, MBSFN subframes carrying MCCH and PCCH may be temporally adjacent. For example, the base station performs scheduling so that an MBSFN subframe on which the PCCH is carried is continuously formed after (or before) the MBSFN subframe on which the MCCH is carried. Since a mobile terminal that is receiving or intending to receive MBMS receives MCCH, MCCH and PCCH reception timing can be known from the MCCH repetition period by making MCCH and PCCH continuous. Therefore, it is possible to continuously receive the paging signal when the mobile terminal receiving or trying to receive the MBMS service receives the MCCH. Also, since no MTCH is inserted between the MCCH and the PCCH, a terminal that has not received the MTCH can receive the PCCH without shifting to the DRX operation. As yet another example, FIG. 55 shows a method using MCH and PCH. FIG. 55 shows a mapping method when the logical channel PCCH is placed on the transport channel PCH, the logical channels MTCH and MCCH are multiplexed and placed on the transport channel MCH, and the PCH and MCH are multiplexed and placed on the physical multicast channel. It is explanatory drawing shown. In FIG. 55, the paging signal is carried on PCCH, and this PCCH is mapped to transport channel PCH. This PCH is multiplexed with MCH and mapped to PMCH. In this way, the base station can transmit the PCH and MCH by dividing them in time, and further can perform encoding separately. Therefore, the mobile terminal can perform decoding separately at the time of reception.

  All cells in a certain MBSFN area periodically perform multi-cell transmission in the MCCH repetition period with the MCCH corresponding to the MBSFN area on the PMCH. A mobile terminal that is receiving or intending to receive an MBMS service transmitted in a multi-cell manner from a cell in the MBSFN area periodically receives the MCCH and receives the contents of the MBMS service, the frame configuration, etc. Enable service reception. Therefore, by including a paging signal in the MCCH as disclosed in FIG. 53, a mobile terminal receiving or attempting to receive an MBMS service can receive the paging signal when receiving the MCCH. it can. This eliminates the need for the mobile terminal to separately receive paging at a timing other than receiving the MCCH, and thus enables paging to be received without interrupting reception of the MBMS service. In addition, intermittent reception operation can be performed during the time when the MCCH is not received and the time when the MBMS service is not received, and the power consumption of the mobile terminal can be reduced.

  In the case of the mapping method disclosed in FIG. 54, MCCH and PCCH may be configured in the same MBSFN subframe, or an MBSFN subframe in which MCCH is carried and an MBSFN subframe in which a paging signal is carried are temporally arranged. It may be divided and further adjacent. As a feature of the present invention, there is “so that PCCH can be seen when viewing MCCH”. Therefore, if MCCH and PCCH are in the same MBSFN subframe, the subframe may be received. However, if the MBSFN subframe on which MCCH is carried and the subframe on which PCCH is carried are time-divided, they should be adjacent to each other. Is preferred. In the case of the mapping method disclosed in FIG. 55, the MBSFN subframe carrying the MCCH and the MBSFN subframe carrying the paging signal may be temporally adjacent. For example, the base station performs scheduling so that an MBSFN subframe on which the PCCH is carried is continuously formed after (or before) the MBSFN subframe on which the MCCH is carried. With this configuration, it is possible to continuously receive a paging signal when a mobile terminal that is receiving or intending to receive an MBMS service receives an MCCH. This eliminates the need for the mobile terminal to receive a separate paging signal at a timing other than receiving a subframe carrying MCCH and PCCH, and thus enables the mobile terminal to receive the paging signal without interrupting reception of the MBMS service. In addition, intermittent reception operation can be performed during the time when the MCCH is not received and the time when the MBMS service is not received, and the power consumption of the mobile terminal can be reduced.

  FIG. 32B discloses a configuration in which an indicator indicating whether MBMS control information has been changed and an indicator indicating whether a paging signal has been transmitted are provided. Either of these indicators may be provided, or both of them may be provided. An indicator indicating whether the MBMS control information has been changed is referred to as an “MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator”, and an indicator indicating whether a paging signal has been transmitted is referred to as a “paging signal presence indicator”. The physical area to which the indicator is mapped may be provided in the MBSFN subframe in which the PMCH is transmitted, or may be provided in the physical area temporally adjacent to the MBSFN subframe in which the PMCH is transmitted. By doing so, the mobile terminal can receive and decode the MCCH and the paging signal on the PMCH immediately after receiving the indicator. For example, 1-bit information is used as an indicator. Each indicator is multiplied by a spreading code unique to the MBSFN area and is mapped to a predetermined physical area. As another method, for example, each indicator may be composed of a sequence specific to the MBSFN area and mapped to a predetermined physical area. When the mobile terminal receives an incoming call, the paging signal presence / absence indicator is set to “1”, and when there is no incoming call, the paging signal presence / absence indicator is set to “0”. Also, for example, when the MBMS control information on the MCCH is changed due to a change in the content of the MBMS service transmitted in the MBSFN area, the MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator is set to “1”. A period (MBMS modification period) in which MBMS related information can be changed is determined, and a change presence / absence indicator “1” is repeatedly transmitted within the period. The period (MBMS modification period), start timing (SFN, starting point), etc. may be determined in advance, or may be notified by broadcast information from a serving cell in a unicast service or from an MBMS dedicated cell. If there is no further change in the MBMS related information after the period has elapsed, the MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator is set to “0”.

  The mobile terminal receives the indicator in the MBSFN subframe in which the PMCH in the desired MBSFN area is transmitted by multi-cell or adjacent MBSFN subframe, performs despreading, etc., and determines whether the indicator is 1 or 0, thereby It is possible to determine whether there has been a change in the MBMS control information existing in the, and whether there is a paging signal. By providing the indicator in this manner, when there is no change in the MBMS control information or when there is no paging signal, the mobile terminal does not need to receive or / and decode the entire PMCH information. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal. The physical area to which the MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator indicating whether the MBMS control information has been changed may be the first MBSFN subframe of one or more MBSFN subframes to which the MBMS control information is mapped. Furthermore, it may be an OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) symbol at the head of the first MBSFN subframe. Accordingly, the mobile terminal can determine whether the MBMS control information has changed by receiving the first OFDM symbol.

  Further, a physical area to which a paging signal presence / absence indicator indicating whether or not a paging signal is present may be used as the first MBSFN subframe of one or a plurality of MBSFN subframes to which the paging signal is mapped. Further, it may be the first OFDM symbol of the first MBSFN subframe. As a result, the mobile terminal can determine whether a paging signal exists by receiving the first OFDM symbol. By mapping each indicator to the physical area as described above, when there is no MBMS control signal change, when there is no paging information, it is not necessary to receive or / and decode each subsequent OFDM symbol. It is possible to reduce received power. In addition, since it can be determined early with the first MBSFN subframe or the first OFDM symbol, the MBMS control information can be received immediately or the paging signal can be received immediately. Control delay can be reduced. As an indicator, the MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator and the paging signal presence / absence indicator may be mapped to the same physical area, or may be mapped to different physical areas. When mapping to the same physical area, an OR operation of each indicator may be taken. As a result, since the mobile terminal needs only one indicator to receive, the effect of simplifying the receiving circuit configuration can be obtained. In the case of mapping to different physical areas, this allows the mobile terminal to receive only the necessary indicators and eliminates the need to receive other indicators. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal and further reduce the reception delay of necessary information. For example, a mobile terminal that has received an MBMS service but is set not to receive a paging signal need only receive an MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator, eliminating the need to receive a paging signal presence / absence indicator. Can do. The repetition period of each indicator may be the same or different. The repetition period of each indicator may be the same as or different from the repetition period of MCCH. For example, an MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator may be provided on the PMCH on which the MCCH is carried once every several times.

  The repetition period of the indicator is a paging signal presence / absence indicator repetition period (Repetition period) and an MBMS-related change presence / absence indicator repetition period (Repetition period), respectively. The start timing (SFN, starting point) of the MBSFN subframe in which the indicator exists, the subframe number, the repetition period of each indicator, etc. may be notified by the broadcast information of the serving cell of the unicast service, or the broadcast of the MBMS dedicated cell It may be notified by information or may be determined in advance. The channel dedicated to the MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator may be, for example, a MICH (MBMS Indicating CHannel), and a paging signal presence / absence indicator may be configured in the MICH. The repetition period of the paging signal presence / absence indicator may be the same as or different from the MICH repetition period (MICH Repitition period). The notification of the indicator can be performed by the same method as described above. Thereby, the time when each indicator is transmitted is not limited to the time when MCCH is transmitted, and the system can be designed flexibly.

  When the paging signal is included in the PMCH, there is a problem that it takes too much time to detect the paging signal addressed to the own mobile terminal when the number of mobile terminals that have received calls becomes enormous. Further, there arises a problem that an area for mapping paging signals of all mobile terminals that have received incoming calls cannot be secured in a predetermined physical area carrying a paging signal. In order to solve these problems, a paging grouping method is disclosed. FIG. 32C shows a paging grouping method. All mobile terminals are divided into K groups, and a paging signal presence / absence indicator is provided for each group. The physical area for the paging signal presence / absence indicator is divided into K pieces, and the paging signal presence / absence indicator of each group is mapped to each of the divided physical areas. Here, K can take from 1 to the value of the total number of mobile terminals. When an incoming call is received at a certain mobile terminal, the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs is set to “1”. When all mobile terminals belonging to a certain group do not receive an incoming call, the paging signal presence / absence indicator of that group is set to “0”. The paging signal presence / absence indicator may be subjected to repetition or the like in order to satisfy a desired reception error rate at the mobile terminal. The physical area to which the paging signal is mapped is also divided into K pieces so as to correspond to the K groups. The paging signal may be an identifier (identification number, identification code) for each mobile terminal. One physical area divided into K is a physical area in which paging signal data required by one mobile terminal is accommodated by adding the number of mobile terminals in the group. The number of mobile terminals in a group may be the same in all groups, or may be different for each group.

  For example, the number of mobile terminals in the group may be an average value of the number of mobile terminals that simultaneously receive incoming calls. Alternatively, the number of mobile terminals that can be assigned to one OFDM symbol may be used, and each OFDM symbol may be associated with each group. When an incoming call is received at a certain mobile terminal, the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs is set to “1” and mapped to the paging signal presence / absence indicator physical area corresponding to the group. At the same time, the paging signal for the mobile terminal that has received the incoming call is mapped to the physical area of the paging signal corresponding to the group to which the mobile terminal belongs. The mapping of the paging signal to the physical area is performed by multiplying each mobile terminal by an identification code unique to the mobile terminal. When the paging signal is an identifier for each mobile terminal, the control for multiplying the mobile terminal specific identification code can be omitted.

  As the identification code unique to the mobile terminal, a code unique to each cell is used in unicast transmission. However, if the identification code unique to the mobile terminal is unique for each cell in the MBMS dedicated frequency layer cell, the same code is not transmitted from each cell when MC is transmitted in the MBSFN area. The transmission signal from the cell becomes noise, resulting in a problem that reception quality deteriorates and reception becomes impossible. In order to solve this problem, in the present invention, an identification code unique to the mobile terminal is made unique to each MBSFN area. As a specific example, a mobile terminal identification code is provided for each MBSFN area, and the mobile terminal identification code is transmitted in advance to a mobile terminal that transmits a paging signal from the MBSFN area. Further, it may be derived from the IMSI or MBSFN area ID. The derivation method may be determined in advance. You may make it derive | lead-out using the same parameter and calculation formula by the network side and the mobile terminal side. This eliminates the need to transmit the mobile terminal identification code for each MBSFN area from the network side to the mobile terminal. Therefore, an effect of reducing the amount of signaling can be obtained. Since the identification code unique to the mobile terminal for each MBSFN area is individual information, it cannot be broadcast as broadcast information from a unicast cell or an MBMS dedicated cell. Therefore, the MBSFN area ID and the number unique to the mobile terminal such as IMSI may be used for deriving. What is necessary is just to derive | lead-out the mobile terminal identification number for every MBSFN area using the same calculation formula in the network side (MME, MCE) and a mobile terminal. The calculation formula may be determined in advance. As a result, an identification code for each MBMSFN area can be used as an identification code unique to the mobile terminal, and a paging signal addressed to the mobile terminal can be received.

  Alternatively, the MME derives a mobile terminal-specific identification code for each MBSFN area using the mobile terminal's unique identification number and the MBSFN area ID, and transmits the identification code from the MME to the mobile terminal via the serving cell. To MCE. For example, the transmission from the MME via the serving cell may be performed by the attach accept of ST1716 to ST1718. What is necessary is just to transmit not only with attach acceptance but with an individual signal (DCCH, DTCH, etc.). Further, the MME may notify the identification number unique to the mobile terminal for each MBSFN area in a paging request to be transmitted to the MCE, for example, ST1776. What is necessary is just to transmit with the paging request of ST1780 from the MCE to the MBMS dedicated cell. In this case, since it is transmitted together with the paging request, the control in the MME, MCE, and MBMS dedicated cells can be simplified. The identification number unique to the mobile terminal for each MBSFN area is derived in the MME using, for example, the identification number unique to the mobile terminal and the MBSFN area ID. The method of making the mobile terminal identification code unique to each MBSFN area is not limited to the present embodiment, and can be applied to the case of multiplying the identification code unique to the mobile terminal when performing multi-cell (MC) transmission for each MBSFN area. There may be a plurality of identification codes unique to the mobile terminal for each MBSFN area. Each may be used for different purposes. For example, two types of identification codes unique to the mobile terminal for each MBSFN area may be provided, and each may be used for a paging signal and for MBMS control information. In this way, it is possible to divide the paging signal transmitted by MC in the MBSFN area for each mobile terminal, and the mobile terminal can receive the paging signal addressed to the own mobile terminal.

  Further, a physical region to which an indicator (for example, a paging signal presence / absence indicator) indicating whether or not a paging signal is transmitted may be used as an MBSFN subframe to which a paging signal is mapped. By doing so, both the scheduling information of the MBSFN subframe in which the paging signal presence / absence indicator is present (for example, the head and period of the MBSFN frame) and the scheduling information of the MBSFN subframe in which the paging signal is present are notified or predetermined. It is not necessary to keep it, and only one of them can be notified or determined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control of the paging process, and it is possible to reduce the amount of signaling between the network side or the base station and the mobile terminal.

  The mobile terminal receives the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs, and determines whether an incoming call has been made to the group to which the mobile terminal belongs. When it is determined that an incoming call is received, a physical area to which a paging signal associated with a group to which the mobile terminal belongs is received and decoded (Decode). After decoding processing, blind detection is performed by performing correlation calculation with an identification code unique to the mobile terminal, and it is possible to determine that there is an incoming call to the mobile terminal by specifying a paging signal for the mobile terminal. It becomes. If no paging signal for the mobile terminal is detected, it is determined that there is no incoming call to the mobile terminal. By grouping the mobile terminals into K groups, the mobile terminal does not need to receive all the paging signal areas, and only receives the necessary areas, that is, only the physical areas corresponding to the group to which the mobile terminal belongs Therefore, the paging signal detection time at the mobile terminal can be shortened, and further, it is not necessary to receive the corresponding physical area of the group to which the mobile terminal does not belong, so that the reception power of the mobile terminal can be reduced. Furthermore, by using a paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to each group, a paging signal presence / absence indicator can be provided with few physical resources even when there are a large number of mobile terminals. Furthermore, the mobile terminal only needs to receive the paging signal area as needed, and it is possible to reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal, and when it is not necessary to receive the paging signal, the mobile terminal immediately moves to the next operation. Therefore, the control delay can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, one physical area divided into K pieces for mapping the paging signal is obtained by adding the physical area in which the paging signal data required by one mobile terminal is accommodated by the number of mobile terminals in the group. It was in the physical area. However, when the number of mobile terminals increases, the required physical area increases, and the overhead for transmitting the MBMS service increases, so the transmission speed of MBMS service data decreases. In order to prevent this, the paging signal for the mobile terminal is multiplied by an identification code unique to the mobile terminal for each mobile terminal. As a result, the mobile terminal can blindly detect whether the information is addressed to its own mobile terminal using an identification code unique to the mobile terminal, so that the physical area for mapping the paging signal for each mobile terminal is fixed in advance. There is no need to keep it. Therefore, a physical area for paging signals for all mobile terminals is not required, and it is sufficient if there is an area for the number of mobile terminals that are expected to actually receive incoming calls. As an example, there is a method in which the number of mobile terminals in the group is an average value of the number of mobile terminals that receive incoming calls simultaneously. This method makes it possible to effectively use limited physical resources. In addition, by using the above method, even when the number of mobile terminals receiving more than expected is increased, it becomes possible to transmit a paging signal to a new incoming mobile terminal on the next PMCH, etc. It becomes possible to respond flexibly by scheduling at the base station.

  When the total number of mobile terminals is small, only the paging signal presence / absence indicator may be transmitted with the value of K as the total number of mobile terminals. In this case, it is not necessary to secure a paging-related physical area, and as many paging signal presence / absence indicator physical areas as the total number of mobile terminals may be secured. For this reason, the efficiency of radio resources can be improved. In this case, a physical area for a paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to each mobile terminal exists. For this reason, in the mobile terminal, it is possible to determine the presence / absence of an incoming call without receiving the paging signal area only by receiving and decoding the physical area for the paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to the mobile terminal. The control delay in the paging operation can be reduced.

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing a method of mapping a paging signal to an area on the physical multicast channel. In FIG. 33, a paging signal for mobile terminals n1, n2, etc. that has received an incoming call such as a voice call among mobile terminals belonging to paging group n is mapped to a physical area for group n. The base station multiplies the paging signal of each mobile terminal by an identification code (number, sequence) unique to the mobile terminal, adds CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check), and performs processing such as encoding (Encode) and rate matching . The result of performing a series of these processes is assigned to each control information element (CCE: Control Channel Element) corresponding to the size of the physical area to be mapped, and connected to each mobile terminal that has received an incoming call. The concatenated result is subjected to spreading processing, modulation processing, etc., using a spreading code (Scrambling code) unique to the MBSFN area. The modulation process may be specific to the MBSFN area. The result of performing these processes is mapped to the physical area corresponding to the paging group n. At this time, the base station sets “1” to the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the paging group n and maps it to the physical area of the paging group n of the paging signal presence / absence indicator.

  The physical area corresponding to the paging group n may be determined in advance, or may be notified as broadcast information from the unicast-side serving cell or the MBMS dedicated cell. The mobile terminal receives the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the paging group to which the mobile terminal belongs, and if it is “1”, receives the paging signal physical area corresponding to the paging group. The paging signal physical area is received, demodulated, and despread by a spreading code unique to the MBSFN area, and the result is divided into control information element units. A process such as decoding (Decode) is performed for each divided control information element unit, and a correlation calculation is performed using an identification number unique to the mobile terminal, thereby blindly detecting a paging signal for the mobile terminal. If the correlation calculation result is greater than a certain threshold, it is determined that there is paging for the mobile terminal, and a paging incoming operation is started by a paging signal. If it is less than a certain threshold value, it is determined that there is no paging for the terminal itself, and the process shifts to reception of MBMS related information, or shifts to the intermittent reception operation if it is not necessary to receive MBMS related information. Which group the own mobile terminal belongs to may be derived by a predetermined calculation method, or may be notified from a higher layer as a broadcast information from a serving cell or MBMS dedicated cell of unicast service.

  In the above example, allocation is made in units of control information elements corresponding to the size of the physical area to which the paging signal is mapped. By allocating in units of transport blocks, physical resources to be allocated can be increased / decreased depending on the amount of information, so that flexible allocation to physical areas becomes possible.

  FIG. 34 shows another example of a method for mapping a paging signal to a physical area carrying a paging signal on the PMCH. Among the mobile terminals belonging to the paging group n, the paging signal is mapped to the physical area for the group n for the mobile terminals n1, n2, etc. that are receiving calls. The base station adds CRC to the paging signal of each mobile terminal and performs processing such as encoding and rate matching. The results of these processes are multiplied by an identification code (number) unique to the mobile terminal. The orthogonality is obtained between the mobile terminals by using an identification code unique to the mobile terminal as a spreading code having orthogonality. The base station multiplexes the result of multiplying the spreading code for each mobile terminal that is receiving an incoming call. The multiplexed result is subjected to spreading processing, modulation processing, etc. using a spreading code unique to the MBSFN area. The modulation process may be specific to the MBSFN area. The result of performing these processes is mapped to the physical area corresponding to the paging group n. At this time, the base station sets “1” to the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the paging group n and maps it to the physical area of the paging group n of the paging signal presence / absence indicator. The physical area corresponding to the paging group n may be determined in advance, or may be notified as broadcast information from the unicast-side serving cell or the MBMS dedicated cell. The mobile terminal receives the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the paging group to which the mobile terminal belongs, and if it is “1”, receives the paging signal physical area corresponding to the paging group. The paging signal physical area is received, demodulated, and despread by a spreading code unique to the MBSFN area. By performing a correlation operation on the result using an identification number unique to the mobile terminal, a paging signal for the mobile terminal is blind-detected. When the correlation calculation result is larger than a certain threshold value, it is determined that there is paging for the mobile terminal, and the paging incoming operation is started by the paging signal after decoding. If it is less than a certain threshold value, it is determined that there is no paging for the terminal itself, and the process shifts to reception of MBMS related information, or shifts to the intermittent reception operation if it is not necessary to receive MBMS related information. Which group the own mobile terminal belongs to may be derived by a predetermined calculation method, or may be notified from a higher layer as a broadcast information from a serving cell or MBMS dedicated cell of unicast service. Note that the paging signal described in FIGS. 33 and 14 may be a transport channel to which the paging signal is mapped. This can be applied to the following embodiments. Any information that carries a paging signal, which is paging-related information required when the mobile terminal receives paging, may be used.

  Several methods for mapping the paging signal to the physical area carrying the paging signal of the PMCH have been disclosed. However, the mapping to the physical area carrying the paging signal may be an arbitrary predetermined area or a localized area. It may be mapped to (physical region continuous on the frequency axis) or may be mapped to distributed (physical region distributed on the frequency axis).

  In the above example, the paging signal is multiplied by an identification number or spreading code unique to the mobile terminal. By adopting such a configuration, when the information amount of the paging signal is the same in each mobile terminal, the control information element unit to be allocated by making the processing such as encoding (encode) and rate matching the same between the mobile terminals It is possible to make the sizes of the regions of the same. Therefore, since the size of the area of the control information element unit for blind detection in the mobile terminal is limited to one, the number of blind detections can be reduced and the detection time can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that the circuit configuration of the mobile terminal, power consumption, and control delay can be reduced.

  As described above, the mobile terminal receives the entire paging signal area by multiplying the paging signal by the identification number or spreading code unique to the mobile terminal and mapping it to the physical area where the PMCH paging signal is carried for each paging group. Since it is only necessary to receive only the necessary area, that is, only the physical area corresponding to the group to which the mobile terminal belongs, the paging signal detection time at the mobile terminal can be shortened, and the time mobile terminal does not belong Since it is not necessary to receive the physical area corresponding to the group, the reception power of the mobile terminal can be reduced. Furthermore, a paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to each group can be used, and even when there are a large number of mobile terminals, the paging signal presence / absence indicator can be provided with few physical resources. Furthermore, the mobile terminal only needs to receive the paging signal area as needed, and it is possible to reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal, and when it is not necessary to receive the paging signal, the mobile terminal immediately moves to the next operation. Therefore, the control delay can be reduced. Furthermore, since the mobile terminal can blindly detect whether the information is addressed to the mobile terminal by using an identification code or a spreading code unique to the mobile terminal, a physical area for mapping a paging signal for each mobile terminal Since there is no need to have a fixed paging signal area for all mobile terminals, there is no need for a physical area for paging signals for all mobile terminals, and there is only an area for the number of mobile terminals that are expected to actually receive calls. It is possible to effectively use physical resources. Furthermore, even if the number of mobile terminals that receive more than expected is increased, a paging signal to a new incoming mobile terminal can be transmitted on the PMCH carrying the next MCCH. It is possible to respond flexibly by scheduling.

  In the above example, the base station multiplies the paging signal by the identification number unique to the mobile terminal. However, it is also possible to use a method of multiplying CRC instead of a paging signal by an identification number unique to the mobile terminal. The method of multiplying the CRC by the identification number unique to the mobile terminal is effective when the information amount of the paging signal of each mobile terminal is different.

  In the above example, the mobile terminal can detect the paging information addressed to the mobile terminal blindly by performing the process of multiplying the paging signal of each mobile terminal by the identification code unique to the mobile terminal. As a processing method, a paging signal of each mobile terminal and an identification number unique to the mobile terminal may be added. For example, in the process 1 shown in FIG. 33, the paging signal of each mobile terminal is not multiplied by an identification code unique to the mobile terminal, but a process of adding an identification number unique to the mobile terminal is performed. In this case, the mobile terminal receives the paging signal physical area, performs demodulation, descrambling with the MBSFN area-specific scrambling code, divides the result into information element units, decodes each divided information element unit, etc. Perform the process. A paging signal for the mobile terminal is detected based on whether or not an identification number unique to the mobile terminal exists in the information after processing such as decoding. By setting it as such a process, the effect equivalent to what was mentioned above is acquired.

  In the above example, the method for mapping the paging signal to the physical region has been disclosed. However, this method can also be applied to the case where an indicator indicating whether the paging signal is transmitted is mapped to the physical region. In the above example, the paging signal is multiplied by the identification number unique to the mobile terminal in the base station. However, an identification code (UE-ID, RNTI) unique to the mobile terminal is displayed on the indicator indicating whether the paging signal is transmitted. )) Or may be added. It is also possible to use a method in which a CRC is added to an indicator indicating whether or not a paging signal has been transmitted, and the CRC is multiplied by an identification number unique to the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal can blindly detect whether the information is addressed to the mobile terminal by using an identification code unique to the mobile terminal. For this reason, it is not necessary to fix in advance a physical area to which an indicator indicating whether or not a paging signal for each mobile terminal has been transmitted. In addition, a physical area to which the indicator may be mapped may be determined in advance or notified. In this way, flexible physical resources can be used. As will be described later, these methods are effective when the indicator indicating whether or not the paging signal has been transmitted is not 1-bit information but the amount of information to each mobile terminal is different, for example, paging message allocation information. It becomes.

  When mapping a paging signal to the PMCH, it is necessary to distinguish it from other information such as MCCH and MTCH. In the above, distinction is made by providing a physical area for paging signals, or by multiplying or adding an identification number unique to the mobile terminal. As another method, information mapped to PMCH may be multiplied by a unique identifier (ID) for each information type. Further, only one specific information type may be multiplied by an identifier specific to the information type. Unlike the unicast communication, the unique identifier for each information type is used in an MBSFN subframe transmitted in multicell, and therefore, the same identifier needs to be transmitted from a plurality of cells performing multicell transmission. For example, a unique identifier is used for each same information type for each MBSFN area. As a specific example, consider a case in which a paging signal, MCCH, and MTCH are notified from the MBMS dedicated cell by PMCH. The MBMS dedicated cell multiplies the paging signal identifier for the paging signal, the MCCH identifier for the MCCH, and the MTCH identifier for the MTCH, and transmits them using the PMCH. A mobile terminal that needs to receive a paging signal among the mobile terminals being served by the MBMS dedicated cell performs blind detection using an identifier for the paging signal. Also, a mobile terminal that needs to receive MTCH or MCCH among the mobile terminals being served by the MBMS dedicated cell performs blind detection using each identifier. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that the mobile terminal can receive necessary information when necessary. This can achieve the effect of reducing the power consumption of the mobile terminal. Further, it is possible to obtain the effect of preventing the control delay of the mobile terminal. The identifier for each information type may be determined in advance or may be notified by the notification information of the serving cell. Moreover, you may alert | report from a MBMS dedicated cell. Furthermore, if the paging signal is multiplied or added with an identifier unique to the mobile terminal, blind detection can be performed for each mobile terminal. Therefore, it is necessary to fix the physical area to which the paging signal is mapped in advance. As a result, flexible mapping is possible, and the use efficiency of physical resources is improved.

  By adopting the method of placing a paging signal on the PMCH disclosed in the seventh embodiment, the paging signal of all the mobile terminals that are receiving or intending to receive the MBMS service from the MBMS dedicated cell as the mobile communication system And the mobile terminal can receive a paging signal from the MBMS dedicated cell.

  Hereinafter, modifications of the seventh embodiment will be described. In Embodiment 7, in order to receive a paging signal from an MBMS dedicated cell, a method of placing a paging signal on the PMCH for each MBSFN area has been disclosed. As a configuration of PMCH, a method of time division multiplexing (TDM) for each MBSFN area and code division multiplexing (CDM) for each MBSFN area has been disclosed. In a first modification described below, a method of mixing time division multiplexing (TDM) and code division multiplexing (CDM) for each MBSFN area is disclosed as the PMCH configuration.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the PMCH provided for each MBSFN area. In FIG. 41, both time division multiplexing (TDM) and code division multiplexing (CDM) are used for each MBSFN area. Cell # n1 is a cell in MBSFN area 1, cell # n2 is a cell in MBSFN area 2, and cell # n3 is a cell in MBSFN area 3. The cells of cell # 1, cell # 2, and cell # 3 are also cells in the MBSFN area 4. The PMCHs of MBSFN areas 1, 2, and 3 are code division multiplexed, and the PMCHs of MBSFN areas 1, 2, and 3 and the PMCH of MBSFN area 4 are time division multiplexed. Since the cell of the cell # n1 belongs to the MBSFN area 1, the PMCH corresponding to the MBSFN area 1 is transmitted at a certain time. Since PMCH is transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN area, it is transmitted on the MBSFN subframe. A set of MBSFN frames to which MBSFN subframes are allocated is referred to as an “MBSFN frame cluster” (MBSFN frame cluster). In the MBMS dedicated cell, all subframes in the MBSFN frame may be MBSFN subframes used for multicell transmission. A period in which an MBSFN frame cluster corresponding to an MBSFN area is repeated is referred to as an “MBSFN frame cluster repetition period”. The MBCH transport channel MCH is mapped to the PMCH, and either or both of the logical channel MCCH of the MBMS control information and the logical channel MTCH of the MBMS data are mapped to the MCH.

  MCCH and MTCH may be temporally divided and mapped onto PMCH, or may be further temporally divided and mapped to a physical region that is transmitted in multicell. For example, MBSFN subframes that are physical areas to which MTCH and MCCH are mapped as a result may be different. MCCH may be mapped on each MBSFN frame cluster or only MTCH. When only MTCH exists, the MCCH repetition period is different from the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period. In some cases, a plurality of MCCHs are mapped on the MBSFN frame cluster. The MCCH repetition period is referred to as an “MCCH repetition period”. In FIG. 41, MCCH1 is MBMS control information for MBSFN area 1, and MTCH1 is MBMS data for MBSFN area 1. Similarly, MCCH2 is MBMS control information for MBSFN area 2, MTCH2 is MBMS data for MBSFN area 2, MCCH3 is MBMS control information for MBSFN area 3, and MTCH3 is MBMS data for MBSFN area 3. The PMCHs of cell # n1, cell # n2, and cell # n3 are code division multiplexed and transmitted at the same timing. Since the cells of cell # n1 (cell # n2, cell # n3) belong to MBSFN area 1 (2, 3) and MBSFN area 4, the PMCH of MBSFN area 1 (2, 3) and the PMCH of MBSFN area 4 are time-shared. Is multiplexed. Since the PMCH in the MBSFN area 4 is transmitted by multi-cell transmission in the MBSFN area 4, the PMCH transmission timings are all the same in the cells # n1, # n2, and # n3. In this way, by mixing the time division multiplexing and code division multiplexing for the PMCH for each MBSFN area, for example, time division multiplexing is performed for MBSFN areas that overlap between MBSFN areas, and code division multiplexing is performed for non-overlapping MBSFN areas. Can be used. Therefore, since code division multiplexing is used compared to the case of only time division multiplexing, the efficiency of radio resources can be improved. Furthermore, compared with the case of only code division multiplexing, it is possible to reduce mutual interference between overlapping MBSFN areas, and it is possible to reduce reception errors of MBMS data at the mobile terminal.

  Next, the configuration of each PMCH for the mobile terminal to receive paging from the MBMS dedicated cell will be described. Time division multiplexing and code division multiplexing are mixed for each MBSFN area. Accordingly, there are a plurality of PMCHs for each MBSFN area transmitted from each cell. Thus, in order to cope with the case where there are a plurality of PMCHs for each MBSFN area in a certain cell, a paging signal is placed on the PMCHs corresponding to all MBSFN areas. A method of including a paging signal as shown in FIG. 32 can be applied to the PMCH in each MBSFN area. With this configuration, a mobile terminal in an area capable of receiving MBMS services in a plurality of MBSFN areas receives the MCCH of any one MBSFN area that is receiving or is about to receive the MBMS service. Thus, paging can be received when the MCCH is received. The mobile terminal does not need to receive MCCH in an MBSFN area different from the MBMS service being received, and intermittent reception is possible, so that power consumption can be reduced. As another method, a configuration on the PMCH of one MBSFN area will be described. For example, MCCH (P-MCCH) is mapped only to the PMCH of the smallest MBSFN area to which a certain cell belongs, and the MCCH is not mapped to the PMCH of other MBSFN areas, and the PMCH of the smallest MBSFN area is mapped. Applies a method of putting a paging signal as shown in FIG. The MBMS control information of other MBSFN areas is included in the MCCH (P-MCCH) mapped to the PMCH of the smallest MBSFN area.

  By adopting such a configuration, for example, even if the mobile terminal receives the MBMS service of any MBSFN area, the MCCH (P-MCCH) of the smallest MBSFN area is received. Paging can be received when receiving (P-MCCH). Furthermore, the mobile terminal does not need to change the paging reception period, here, the MCCH repetition period (MCCH repetition period) in accordance with the change of the MBMS service to be received, and can simplify the control. Furthermore, since only MTCH can be mapped to PMCHs in other MBSFN areas, an effect that the efficiency of radio resources can be achieved as a system is obtained. As another method, the MCCH corresponding to another MBSFN area may be mapped to the PMCH of the smallest MBSFN area. In this case as well, a method of putting a paging signal as shown in FIG. 32 can be applied to the PMCH. Thereby, the same effect can be obtained, and each MCCH can be time-divided and mapped to the physical area. Therefore, the mobile terminal can receive the MCCH of a desired MBSFN area, and can receive intermittently the other physical area in which the MCCH is transmitted. As still another method, a configuration for placing on the PMCH of one MBSFN area will be described. For example, the primary MCCH (P-MCCH) is mapped to the PMCH in the MBSFN area to which a certain cell belongs, and the secondary MCCH (S-MCCH) is mapped to the PMCH in the other MBSFN area. A method of including a paging signal as shown in FIG. With such a configuration, for example, even if a mobile terminal receives an MBMS service in any of a plurality of MBSFN areas, by receiving the P-MCCH, paging is performed when the P-MCCH is received. It becomes possible to receive. Furthermore, the mobile terminal does not need to change the paging reception period, here, the MCCH repetition period (MCCH repetition period) in accordance with the change of the MBMS service to be received, and can simplify the control. The method disclosed in FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 can be applied to the method for mapping the paging signal to the physical area carrying the paging signal on the PMCH.

  In the seventh embodiment and the modification, the case where there are a plurality of cells in the MBSFN area is shown. However, the present invention is applicable even if there is only one cell in the MBSFN area. In this single cell, it is possible to apply the method of mapping the paging signal disclosed in FIG. 33 to the physical area carrying the paging signal on the PMCH, with the PMCH configuration disclosed in FIG. In the case of only one cell, even though transmission using PMCH, the SFN gain associated with normal multi-cell transmission cannot be obtained, but the MBMS service can be limited to a narrow area, and so-called spot service can be provided. Become. Further, there may be only one cell in the MBSFN area, and the MBMS service data corresponding to the MBSFN area is not transmitted in the one cell, and only the MBMS control information is transmitted. In this case, only the MCCH is mapped without mapping the MTCH on the PMCH. The MCCH may include MBMS control information (MCCH) of another MBSFN area to which the one cell belongs. This eliminates the need to map each MCCH to PMCHs in other MBSFN areas, thereby improving the efficiency of radio resources. Furthermore, since the mobile terminal receives only the MCCH corresponding to the MBSFN area, it can receive all the MCCHs of one or more MBSFN areas that can be received without receiving other PMCHs. Control delay time when receiving the MBMS service can be reduced. Furthermore, when it is not necessary to receive MBMS service information of other MBSFN areas, an intermittent reception operation becomes possible, and the reception power can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is provided in which an indicator indicating whether or not a paging signal is transmitted is disclosed, but the indicator may be paging signal allocation information. Thereby, when the mobile terminal receives the paging signal allocation information to the mobile terminal, it can be determined that there is paging. As a specific example of paging signal allocation information, for example, paging signals transmitted in the same subframe, for example, information indicating a physical area to which a paging message is mapped may be used. Since the allocation information is physical area information, the mobile terminal that has received the paging message allocation information needs to receive only the physical area in order to receive the paging message, and needs to receive other physical areas. Disappear. For this reason, the power consumption at the time of reception of the mobile terminal can be reduced. Also, it is not necessary to transmit the physical area information to which the paging signal is allocated in advance to the mobile terminal by broadcast information or the like, so that the signaling amount can be reduced and the allocation of the paging signal to the physical area can be flexibly performed. As a result, it is possible to improve the use efficiency of radio resources.

Embodiment 8 FIG.
Since the mobile terminal receives paging from an MBMS dedicated cell that does not support the unicast service, in the seventh embodiment, paging is performed on a physical multicast channel (PMCH) for each MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) area. A method for placing a signal has been disclosed. In the eighth embodiment, a method for providing a paging dedicated physical channel for multi-cell transmission in the MBSFN area and placing a paging signal on the physical channel is disclosed.


FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of a paging-dedicated physical channel that is transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN area. In a certain cell, a part of the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area to which the cell belongs is defined as a dedicated physical channel (DPCH) for paging, and a DPCH is provided for each subframe. As shown in the seventh embodiment, since the unicast service is not supported in the MBMS dedicated channel, all subframes of the MBSFN frame may be MBSFN subframes. As an example, FIG. 56 shows a method of mapping a paging signal to a physical channel dedicated to paging. FIG. 56 shows a mapping method when the logical channel PCCH including the paging signal is put on the transport channel PCH, the logical channels MTCH and MCCH are multiplexed and put on the transport channel MCH, and the PCH is put on the physical channel dedicated to paging. It is explanatory drawing shown. The logical channel PCCH carrying the paging signal is mapped to the transport channel PCH and mapped to the DPCH, which is a physical channel dedicated to paging. On the other hand, as usual, MBMS related information is carried on logical channels MTCH and MCCH, which are mapped to transport channel MCH and mapped to physical channel PMCH. The DPCH is configured to be transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN area, and DPCH and PMCH are multiplexed and transmitted in the same MBSFN subframe.

  When the PMCH configuration for each MBSFN area is, for example, code division multiplexed as shown in FIG. 40, the PMCH is transmitted in consecutive MBSFN subframes. In this case, DPCH can be provided in all subframes on the time axis. Therefore, the number of times that the paging signal can be transmitted is increased as compared with the seventh embodiment. In this way, a part of each subframe of the MBSFN subframe transmitted in multi-cells in the MBSFN area is used as a DPCH for paging signal transmission, so that the frequency of paging signal transmission can be increased as a system, and the MBMS dedicated cell The number of mobile terminals that enable paging can be increased. Furthermore, when paging to a mobile terminal capable of paging can be avoided, a shortage of paging area can be avoided, so that the paging information transmission delay time can be shortened. The above example describes the case where the PMCH configuration for each MBSFN area is code division multiplexing (CDM). However, in the case of time division multiplexing (TDM) or when both time division multiplexing and code division multiplexing are applied, a certain cell is used. The DPCH may be provided in all MBSFN subframes to which PMCHs corresponding to one or a plurality of MBSFN areas to which the UE belongs are transmitted. Thereby, compared with Embodiment 7, since the frequency | count that a paging signal can be transmitted can be increased, the same effect can be acquired.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the MBSFN subframe. In FIG. 43, DPCH and PMCH are time-division multiplexed in the MBSFN subframe. A paging signal is mapped to DPCH, and MBMS related information is mapped to PMCH. By separating the physical channels to which each is mapped, the paging signal and the MBMS-related information can be encoded separately in the base station, and decoding can be performed separately in reception at the mobile station. In addition, the physical area can be time division multiplexed, the mobile terminal that has not received the MBMS service and has received only the paging information does not need to receive the PMCH, while the PMCH is being transmitted. Is capable of discontinuous reception, thereby reducing the power consumption of the mobile terminal. On the other hand, mobile terminals that do not need to receive paging information do not need to receive DPCH, and can perform intermittent reception operations while DPCH is transmitted, thereby reducing power consumption of the mobile terminal. It becomes possible. The DPCH is transmitted in kOFDM symbols of each MBSFN subframe. The value of k may be determined in advance or may be notified by broadcast information of the MBMS dedicated cell. Moreover, you may notify by the alerting | reporting information of a unicast cell.

  A PCFICH (Physical control format indicator channel) may be provided for each subframe as a channel indicating the value of the number of OFDM symbols k through which the DPCH is transmitted. PCFICH is transmitted in the first OFDM symbol of each subframe. The notification of the allocation information of the physical resource of the PCFICH to the mobile terminal may be notified by broadcast information of the MBMS dedicated cell, or by notification in association with the frequency layer information of the MBMS dedicated cell by the broadcast information of the unicast cell. Also good. Moreover, you may decide beforehand. By determining in advance, it is possible to reduce the amount of information required for notification. Thus, by indicating the value of k for each subframe, the value of k can be changed for each subframe, and the MBMS information transmission area and the DPCH transmission area can be dynamically changed. Become. The value of k can take from 0 to the maximum number of OFDM symbols in one subframe. For example, the same 1 to 3 OFDM symbols as the PDCCH (Physical downlink control channel) of the unicast cell may be used. In this case, PCFICH is 2 bits. Also, for example, the same 1-2 OFDM symbols as the PDCCH in the MBSFN subframe of the MBMS / unicast mixed cell may be used. In this case, PCFICH is 2 bits or 1 bit. The PCFICH of a unicast cell is multiplied by a cell-specific scrambling code, but in the present invention, the PCFICH is also multiplied by a scrambling code specific to the MBSFN area in order to enable multi-cell transmission within the MBSFN area. With the configuration as described above, the mobile terminal can perform decoding (Decode) in the same manner as the unicast cell, and the reception circuit of the mobile terminal can be simplified.

  In a unicast cell, PDSCH or PDCCH is used to transmit a paging signal, but it is necessary to include radio allocation (Resource Allocation) information in the paging signal. This is because radio allocation for communication after paging is necessary. Resources for communication after paging are transmitted using PDSCH. The PDSCH is transmitted in the remaining OFDM symbol region excluding the OFDM symbol region in which the PDCCH in the subframe is transmitted. In the paging method according to the present invention, since communication after paging is performed by a unicast cell, only paging indicators (Paging Indicator: PI) for notifying whether there is an incoming call may be used as paging information transmitted by DPCH. This is because it is not necessary to transmit radio allocation information for communication after paging. In order to be able to specify a mobile terminal only with a paging indicator, an MBSFN frame or an MBSFN subframe in which a paging indicator for a certain mobile terminal exists can be uniquely calculated from an identification number (ID) unique to the mobile terminal. It ’s fine. As another method, the base station may multiply the paging indicator by an identification number unique to the mobile terminal, and the mobile terminal may perform blind detection using the identification number unique to the mobile terminal. Furthermore, the above two methods may be combined. For example, the mobile terminals are grouped according to an identification number (ID) unique to the mobile terminal, and an MBSFN frame or an MBSFN subframe in which a paging indicator exists for the group is uniquely associated with the group. The station multiplies the paging indicator by an identification number unique to the mobile terminal.

  On the mobile terminal side, MBSFN frames and MBSFN subframes carrying the paging indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs derived from the mobile terminal unique identification number are received, and blind detection is performed using the mobile terminal specific identification number. You may do it. The method for deriving the MBSFN frame or MBSFN subframe in which the paging indicator of the mobile terminal or group exists from the identification number unique to the mobile terminal may be determined in advance, or may be notified by the broadcast information of the MBMS dedicated cell from the higher layer. It is good and you may notify by the alerting | reporting information of a unicast cell. MBSFN frames and MBSFN subframes in which a paging indicator is present may be periodically present. Since it is not necessary to transmit radio allocation information, it is possible to configure the DPCH with a small amount of information, and it is possible to transmit MBMS related information in the remaining area in the same subframe. Instead of mapping the paging indicator to the PCCH as shown in FIG. 56, the paging indicator may be directly mapped to the DPCH in the physical layer. It is also possible to transmit DPCH using all OFDM symbols in the subframe. For example, when the number of OFDM symbols in a subframe is 7 at maximum, an arbitrary OFDM symbol from k = 0 to 7 can be used for DPCH transmission by setting the PCFICH to 3 bits and indicating the value of k. Can do. Thus, the MBMS information transmission area and the DPCH transmission area can be flexibly changed and combined in units of subframes, and the efficiency of radio resources can be improved.

  In the present invention, the case of an MBMS dedicated cell has been described. However, in the case of an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, both unicast and MBMS services are possible. Therefore, in paging in the case of an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, Requires radio assignment for post-paging communication. However, since MBMS can be executed in an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, there is an MBSFN subframe for transmitting MC data for broadcast-type MBMS. Since there is no PDSCH in the MBSFN subframe, when the paging method in the unicast cell is applied in the MBMS / unicast mixed cell, an area for mapping the radio allocation information addressed to the individual mobile terminal cannot be secured in the MBSFN subframe. The problem arises. In this case, a method of limiting the subframe in which the paging indicator is transmitted in advance to a subframe in which the PDSCH exists, or a method of transmitting the allocation information in the PDCCH of the subframe in which the first PDSCH after the paging signal is transmitted exists. By taking this, paging in the MBMS / unicast mixed cell can be enabled.

  In the MBMS / unicast mixed cell, as a specific example of the above-described method for limiting the subframe in which the paging indicator is transmitted in advance to the subframe in which the PDSCH is present, An existing subframe is assumed. This makes it possible to adjust the number of subframes carrying the paging signal in the PDSCH according to the number of mobile terminals being served by the cell, thereby improving the utilization efficiency of radio resources. The mobile terminal does not need to receive all subframes of the PDSCH, thereby reducing power consumption.

  In the case of paging in the case of an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, when there is no need to put radio allocation information on the PDSCH for communication after paging, a method is adopted in which the mobile terminal can be identified only by the paging indicator. Is possible. In this case, a paging indicator may be placed on the PDCCH area. In the MBSFN subframe, a paging indicator may be placed in the area allocated for unicast and the first 1 or 2 OFDM symbol area. As a specific method thereof, the method using the paging dedicated channel (DPCH) can be applied. For the number of symbols to be used, the method using the PCFICH can be applied, and k = 0, 1 may be used. The mobile terminal side receives a radio frame or subframe carrying the paging indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs, derived from the mobile terminal's unique identification number, and performs blind detection using the mobile terminal's unique identification number. You can do it. In the case of paging in the case of an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, there is no need to put radio allocation information on the PDSCH for post-page communication, for example, after the mobile terminal receives the paging indicator, A method of transmitting an uplink RACH to make a request is conceivable. In this way, the base station does not need to place the radio assignment information on the PDSCH of the same subframe with the paging indicator. By adopting such a method, even in the case of an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, a paging signal (paging indicator) can be transmitted in an arbitrary radio frame or subframe regardless of the presence or absence of the MBSFN subframe. It becomes possible.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a method of mapping a paging signal to a paging dedicated channel (DPCH). FIG. 44 shows only a paging indicator (Paging Indicator: PI) as a paging signal. The paging indicator is paging information expressed by 1 bit of 1 to 0, and indicates whether there is an incoming call. The base station sets “1” to the paging indicator for the mobile terminal receiving the incoming call and maps it to the paging dedicated physical channel. The base station multiplies the paging indicator for each mobile terminal m receiving the incoming call by an identification number unique to the mobile terminal (processing 1). Next, CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is added to the multiplication result (processing 2), and encoding (coding) processing such as encoding, rate matching, and interleaving is performed (processing 3). The results of these series of processes are assigned to control information element units corresponding to the size of the physical area to be mapped, and connected to each mobile terminal that has received an incoming call (process 4). The concatenated result is subjected to spreading processing, modulation processing, etc. using a spreading code (Scrambling Code) unique to the MBSFN area (processing 5). The modulation process may be specific to the MBSFN area. The results of these processes are mapped from the beginning into the kOFDM symbol (process 6). At that time, the base station derives the required number of OFDM symbols k based on the result of connection for each mobile terminal receiving the incoming call, and performs processing such as encoding on the indicator corresponding to the k. , Map to PCFICH. These are performed by the same method in all cells in the MBSFN area, and multicell transmission is performed in the MBSFN area. In the present embodiment, the number of OFDM symbols (k) for transmitting DPCH is set to 1. DPCH is mapped to the first OFDM symbol of the subframe together with PCFICH and reference symbols. In FIG. 44, A indicates 1 OFDN symbol, and B indicates PCFICH and reference symbol.

  In a mobile terminal receiving a signal transmitted by multicell transmission, the number of OFDM symbols used for paging is determined based on the received PCFICH decoding result, and demodulation processing, despreading processing, etc. are performed. After these processes, the image is divided into certain areas, sequentially subjected to deinterleaving, decoding (decoding), error detection, correction processing, and the like, and blind detection is performed using a terminal-specific identification number. When the identification number of the mobile terminal is detected by blind detection, it can be determined that paging has occurred. For PCFICH, reference symbols, etc., mapping to physical resources is performed by a predetermined method, for example. You may use the method similar to a unicast cell. By using the same method as the unicast cell, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the base station and the configuration of the receiving circuit of the mobile terminal. When the mobile terminal has the same amount of information as in the case where the paging signal is only the paging indicator, the size of the control information element unit for allocating the coding result may be one. By making the encoding processing etc. the same in all mobile terminals that receive paging, the size of the control information element after encoding can be made one. As a result, when a mobile terminal performs blind detection of an identification number unique to the mobile terminal, it suffices to perform processing such as decoding for each control information element unit of one size, thereby reducing the time for blind detection. And the detection speed can be increased. Further, instead of multiplying the identification number unique to the mobile terminal, a code unique to each mobile terminal may be used as a paging indicator, and an equivalent effect can be obtained.

  In the above example, allocation is made in units of control information elements corresponding to the size of the physical area to which the paging signal is mapped. By allocating in units of transport blocks, physical resources to be allocated can be increased / decreased depending on the amount of information, so that flexible allocation to physical areas becomes possible.

  Further, in the above example, the processing 1 was performed by multiplying the paging signal of each mobile terminal by the identification code unique to the mobile terminal, but as another processing method, the paging signal of each mobile terminal and the identification specific to the mobile terminal You may make it add a number. In this case, the mobile terminal receives the paging signal physical area, performs demodulation, descrambling with the MBSFN area-specific scrambling code, divides the result into information element units, decodes each divided information element unit, etc. Perform the process. A paging signal for the mobile terminal is detected based on whether or not an identification number unique to the mobile terminal exists in the information after processing such as decoding.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing a method of mapping a paging signal to a paging dedicated channel (DPCH). FIG. 45 shows only the paging indicator (PI) as a paging signal. 45, the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 44 indicate the same or corresponding processes. The paging indicator is paging information represented by 1 bit of 1/0, and indicates whether there is an incoming call. The base station sets “1” in the paging indicator for the mobile terminal receiving the incoming call and maps it to the paging dedicated physical channel. The base station adds CRC to the paging signal of each mobile terminal (process 2), and performs processes such as encoding (Encode), rate matching, and interleaving (process 3). The result of performing these processes is multiplied by an identification code (number) unique to the mobile terminal (process 1). The orthogonality is obtained between the mobile terminals by using an identification code unique to the mobile terminal as a spreading code having orthogonality. The base station multiplexes the result of multiplying the spreading code for each mobile terminal receiving the incoming call (process 7). The multiplexed result is subjected to spreading processing, modulation processing, etc. using a spreading code (Scrambling Code) unique to the MBSFN area (processing 5). The modulation process may be specific to the MBSFN area. The results of these processes are mapped from the beginning into the kOFDM symbol (process 6). When the number of mobile terminals is large, it is divided into a plurality of groups, multiplied by a mobile terminal identification code so as to obtain orthogonality among the mobile terminals in the group, and multiplexed for the mobile terminal, and an MBSFN area specific spreading code Performs diffusion processing, modulation processing, and the like. These processes may be performed for each group and then mapped to different OFDM symbols. At that time, the base station derives the required number of OFDM symbols k based on the result of multiplexing each mobile terminal receiving the incoming call, performs an encoding process or the like on the indicator corresponding to the k, and PCFICH To map. These are performed by the same method in all cells in the MBSFN area, and multicell transmission is performed in the MBSFN area. In the present embodiment, the number of OFDM symbols (k) for transmitting DPCH is set to 1. DPCH is mapped to the first OFDM symbol of the subframe along with PCFICH, reference symbols, and the like. In a mobile terminal receiving a signal transmitted by multi-cell transmission, the number of OFDM symbols used for paging is determined from the received physical resource based on the PCFICH decoding result, and demodulation processing, descrambling processing, and the like are performed. After these processes, the image is divided into certain areas, a correlation calculation is performed using a terminal-specific identification number, and blind detection is performed. When the identification code of the own mobile terminal is detected by blind detection, it can be determined that paging has occurred, and a paging signal is received by performing deinterleaving, decoding, error detection, correction processing, and the like.

  Several methods for mapping the paging signal to the paging dedicated channel (DPCH) have been disclosed. Mapping may be performed on a physical area that is distributed on the frequency axis).

  The physical area to which the paging signal is mapped may be a unique physical area for each MBSFN area. The unique physical area for each MBSFN area may be determined in advance, or may be derived from an MBSFN area unique number (MBSFN area ID) or the like. At this time, it may be derived using a common calculation formula for the network side, the base station side, and the mobile terminal. Further, a part of the paging signal may be mapped to a unique physical area for each MBSFN area, and the rest may be mapped to a physical area that is not unique for each MBSFN area. As a specific example, information indicating the presence / absence of an incoming call (for example, information indicating the presence / absence of 1 bit or paging message allocation information) is mapped to a specific physical area for each MBSFN area, and other paging information ( For example, a paging message is mapped to a physical area that is not unique for each MBSFN area. When other paging information is mapped to a physical area that is not unique for each MBSFN area, based on the allocation information of the paging message mapped to the physical area unique to each MBSFN area, which physical area contains other paging information It is possible to determine whether or not it is assigned. As described above, as a method of multiplexing the paging signal for each mobile terminal in the unique physical area for each MBSFN area, there is a method of multiplying the paging signal or CRC added to the paging signal by the identification number unique to the mobile terminal. A mobile terminal can determine whether it is addressed to itself by correlating with an identification number unique to the mobile terminal, and can receive. As a result, the mobile terminal only needs to receive the physical area of the MBSFN area that is receiving the MBMS service, and does not need to receive other physical areas, so the power consumption of the mobile terminal can be reduced. The effect is obtained.

  In addition, the physical area unique to each MBSFN synchronization area may be used instead of the physical area unique to each MBSFN area, and the same effects as described above can be obtained. In this case, a number unique to the MBSFN synchronization area (MBSFN synchronization area ID) may be used instead of a number unique to the MBSFN area. As a specific example of the unique physical area for each MBSFN synchronization area, a physical area (for example, frequency area #m of symbol #n) in the MBSFN subframe is determined. Then, the paging signal can be mapped to the common physical region (for example, frequency region #m of symbol #n) in the MBSFN subframe for each MBSFN area. As a result, there is no need to determine the physical area for mapping the paging signal for each MBSFN area, and only one MBSFN synchronization area needs to be determined. The circuit scale can be reduced.

  This embodiment may be applied not only to the case where the PMCH configuration for each MBSFN area is code division multiplexed, but also to the case where time division multiplexing and both time division multiplexing and code division multiplexing are applied.

  In the mobile terminal, it is necessary to know at which timing the paging signal for the mobile terminal is mapped on the DPCH of the MBSFN frame or the MBSFN subframe. Alternatively, it may be notified from the upper layer as broadcast information from the serving cell of the unicast service or the MBMS dedicated cell. The timing may be periodic. When the paging signal is transmitted at a certain period, the mobile terminal can perform an intermittent reception operation during the time when the paging signal is not transmitted if the MBMS service is not received. Therefore, the power consumption of the mobile terminal can be reduced.

  Since the mobile terminal can blindly detect whether the information is addressed to the mobile terminal by using an identification code or a spreading code unique to the mobile terminal, the physical area for mapping the paging signal for each mobile terminal is fixed in advance. There is no need to have a physical area for paging signals for all mobile terminals, and there is only an area for the number of mobile terminals that are expected to actually receive incoming calls. It can be used effectively. In the above example, the base station multiplies the paging signal by the identification number unique to the mobile terminal. However, it is also possible to use a method of multiplying CRC instead of a paging signal by an identification number unique to the mobile terminal. The method of multiplying the CRC by the identification number unique to the mobile terminal is effective when the information amount of the paging signal of each mobile terminal is different.

  In the above, the case where only the paging indicator for notifying of the presence / absence of an incoming call is described as the paging information transmitted on the paging dedicated channel. However, as another specific example of the paging information transmitted on the paging dedicated channel, paging message allocation It may be information. This can be used when it is necessary to transmit paging information in addition to information for notifying whether there is an incoming call. The presence or absence of an incoming call may be notified to the mobile terminal by paging message allocation information. Thereby, when the mobile terminal receives the paging message allocation information for the mobile terminal, it can be determined that there is paging. As a specific example of the paging message allocation information, for example, information indicating a physical area to which a paging message transmitted in the same subframe is mapped may be used. The paging message is also paging information and is transmitted on a paging dedicated channel. Since the allocation information is physical area information, the mobile terminal that has received the paging message allocation information needs to receive only the physical area in order to receive the paging message, and needs to receive other physical areas. Disappear. For this reason, the power consumption at the time of reception of the mobile terminal can be reduced. Also, it is not necessary to transmit the physical area information to which the paging signal is allocated in advance to the mobile terminal by broadcast information or the like, so that the signaling amount can be reduced and the allocation of the paging signal to the physical area can be flexibly performed. As a result, it is possible to improve the use efficiency of radio resources.

  In the case of the method of placing a paging signal on the PMCH for each MBSFN area disclosed in the seventh embodiment, the frequency of the PMCH on which the paging signal can be carried decreases with time. Therefore, there arises a problem that paging signals for many or all mobile terminals must be mapped to one PMCH carrying the paging signal. In order to solve this problem, the seventh embodiment disclosed a method such as paging grouping. In the eighth embodiment, the above-mentioned problem can be solved by providing a paging-dedicated physical channel for multi-cell transmission in the MBSFN area and placing a paging signal on the physical channel. In addition, since the mobile communication system can transmit a paging signal of a mobile terminal that is receiving or is about to receive an MBMS service from the MBMS dedicated cell, the mobile terminal can receive the paging signal in the MBMS dedicated cell. Become.

  In the example of the present embodiment, in a certain cell, a part of the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area to which the cell belongs is set as a physical channel dedicated to paging (referred to as DPCH), and the DPCH is provided for each subframe. However, it may be transmitted periodically instead of every subframe. For example, a part of the MBSFN subframe corresponding to each MBSFN area may be transmitted as a paging-dedicated physical channel (referred to as DPCH) once every two subframes or once per radio frame. Depending on the number of mobile terminals considered in the system, the repetition period of transmission as DPCH of each MBSFN area may be determined based on the number of mobile terminals that can simultaneously transmit paging and the frequency of paging. As a result, a subframe in which no DPCH is transmitted can be used as an MBMS service data area, and the speed of the MBMS service can be increased.

Embodiment 9 FIG.
In the eighth embodiment, a method for providing a paging-dedicated physical channel for multi-cell transmission in an MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) area and placing a paging signal on the physical channel has been disclosed. In the following, Embodiment 9 discloses a method of providing a physical channel for multi-cell transmission in the MBSFN synchronization area and placing a paging signal on the physical channel.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of a physical channel (referred to as main PMCH) transmitted in multicell within the MBSFN synchronization area. This shows a case where time division multiplexing and code division multiplexing are mixed as PMCH provided for each MBSFN area. Cell # n1 is a cell in MBSFN area 1, cell # n2 is a cell in MBSFN area 2, and cell # n3 is a cell in MBSFN area 3. The cells # n1, # n2, and # n3 are also cells in the MBSFN area 4. The PMCHs in MBSFN areas 1, 2, and 3 are code division multiplexed, and the PMCHs in MBSFN areas 1, 2, and 3 and the PMCH in MBSFN area 4 are time division multiplexed. The main PMCH is time-division multiplexed with the PMCH for each MBSFN area. Since cell # n1 belongs to MBSFN area 1 and MBSFN area 4, PMCH1 and PMCH4 are time-division multiplexed, and the main PMCH is time-division multiplexed. The same applies to cell # 2 and cell # 3. Since the main PMCH is transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN synchronization area, it is transmitted on an MBSFN subframe in which SFN combining is performed. A set of MBSFN frames to which MBSFN subframes are allocated is referred to as an MBSFN frame cluster. In the MBMS dedicated cell, all subframes in the MBSFN frame may be MBSFN subframes used for multicell transmission. A period in which the main PMCH is repeated is referred to as a “main PMCH repetition period”. MCH, which is a transport channel for MBMS, is mapped to the main PMCH. MCCH, which is a logical channel for transmitting MBMS control information, and MTCH, which is a logical channel for transmitting MBMS data, or both are mapped to MCH. MCCH and MTCH may be divided in time and mapped onto the main PMCH, or may be divided in time and mapped to a physical region that is transmitted in multicell.

  For example, MBSFN subframes that are physical areas to which MTCH and MCCH are mapped as a result may be different. The MCCH may be mapped to each MBSFN frame cluster in which the main PMCH is transmitted, or only the MTCH may be mapped. When only MTCH exists, the MCCH repetition period is different from the main PMCH repetition period. In some cases, a plurality of MCCHs are mapped on the MBSFN frame cluster in which the main PMCH is transmitted. The MCCH repetition period is referred to as “MCCH repetition period”. 46, MCCH1 (MCCH2,3,4) is MBMS control information for MBSFN area 1 (MBSFN areas 2,3,4), and MTCH1 (MTCH2,3,4) is MBSFN area 1 (MBSFN areas 2,3, 4) Transmit MBMS data for use. Each MCCH may be mapped on each PMCH, or only MTCH. When only MTCH exists, MCCH of each MBSFN area may be mapped to main PMCH. Further, it may be included as an information element of MCCH mapped to the main PMCH. Since the main PMCH is transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN synchronization area, it is impossible to multiply the main PMCH by a spreading code (Scrambling Code) unique to the MBSFN area as in the PMCH of each MBSFN area. This is because the main PMCH is transmitted from the cells of different MBSFN areas at the same timing, and therefore when the main PMCH is multiplied by a spreading code specific to the MBSFN area, the mobile terminal receiver transmits the main PMCH transmitted from each MBSFN area. This is because the phase of the main PMCH becomes random and SFN synthesis cannot be performed. Therefore, as shown above, the main PMCH and the PMCH of each MBSFN area can be time-division multiplexed to multiply each MBSFN area-specific spreading code in units of subframes, and only the main PMCH. It is possible not to multiply the spreading code unique to each MBSFN area. As a result, the main PMCH can be transmitted in a multi-cell manner in the MBSFN synchronization area, and the mobile terminal can receive the main PMCH regardless of which MBMS service is received in the MBSFN synchronization area. In addition, an SFN gain can be obtained. Although it has been described that the main PMCH is not multiplied by a unique spreading code, it may be multiplied by a spreading code unique to the MBSFN synchronization area. In this case, interference from other cells in the MBSFN synchronization area can be suppressed, and the reception error of the MBMS service in the mobile terminal can be reduced.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of a radio frame in which the main PMCH is transmitted. In FIG. 47, subframes in which the main PMCH is transmitted are subframes # k1 to # k2 excluding # 0 and # 5 (k1 to k2 ≠ 1, 5). In an MBMS dedicated cell, it is considered that a synchronization channel (SCH) is transmitted in subframes # 0 and # 5 in one radio frame. In addition, it is considered that a broadcast channel (BCH) is transmitted in the # 0 subframe. It is considered that the synchronization channel (SCH) includes a cell-specific sequence or MBSFN area-specific sequence, and the broadcast channel (BCH) is multiplied by a cell-specific spreading code or MBSFN area-specific spreading code. Therefore, the subframe in which the main PMCH is transmitted is a subframe excluding # 0 and # 5, so that multicell transmission can be performed in the MBSFN synchronization area. Even if the MBMS service is received or about to be received, the main PMCH can be received, and further, an SFN gain can be obtained. In the figure, the subframes in which the main PMCH is transmitted are continuous, but may not be continuous. By making it continuous in the subframes excluding # 0 and # 5, it becomes possible for the mobile terminal to perform intermittent reception during other subframe periods that do not require reception, thereby reducing the reception power. The main PMCH may not be provided every radio frame, and may be provided periodically, such as every 2 radio frames and every 10 radio frames. The period of the main PMCH is represented by a “Main PMCH repetition period”. As a result, the PMCH of the subframe that does not transmit the main PMCH can be used as the MBMS service data area, and the speed of the MBMS service can be increased. The start timing (SFN, starting point) of the radio frame and subframe in which the main PMCH exists, the subframe number, and the main PMCH repetition period may be notified by broadcast information of the unicast-side serving cell, or broadcast information of the MBMS dedicated cell You may be notified at. It may be determined in advance. Since the main PMCH is transmitted in multicell, the subframe in which the main PMCH exists may be an MBSFN subframe and the radio frame may be an MBSFN frame.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of a radio frame in which the main PMCH is transmitted in the same subframe as the synchronization channel SCH. FIG. 48 shows a configuration in which the subframe in which the main PMCH is transmitted is # 5 and the main MCH is mapped outside the region to which the synchronization channel SCH is mapped. FIG. 47 shows a configuration in which subframes are mapped to subframes excluding # 0 and # 5. This is because all the OFDM symbols in the subframe can be multi-cell transmitted in the MBSFN synchronization area. Therefore, the transmitter of the base station and the receiver of the mobile terminal can be simplified. In FIG. 48, the main PMCH is further configured to be all or a part of the area excluding the physical area to which the synchronization channel SCH of the # 5 subframe is mapped. It has been described that the synchronization channel SCH is transmitted in the subframes # 0 and # 5 in one radio frame in the MBMS dedicated cell. Here, since the broadcast channel BCH is not transmitted in the subframe # 5, it is not necessary to multiply the cell-specific spreading code or the MBSFN area-specific spreading code. Therefore, it is possible to use all or part of the area of the # 5 subframe excluding the physical area to which the synchronization channel SCH is mapped for the main PMCH. For example, when the SCH is mapped to the sixth and seventh OFDM symbols of the # 5 subframe, the first to fifth and eighth to last OFDM symbols are used as the main PMCH region. In this way, the main PMCH can be transmitted in a multi-cell in the MBSFN synchronization area, and the mobile terminal receives the main PMCH regardless of which MBMS service is received in the MBSFN synchronization area. In addition, an SFN gain can be obtained. By allowing the # 5 subframe to be used also for the main PMCH, the flexibility of the system is increased and the efficiency of radio resources can be improved.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the main PMCH provided with a paging signal area. FIG. 49A is a diagram showing a configuration including MBMS related information and a paging signal on the main PMCH. Each of the MBMS related information and the paging signal may exist as an information element in the MTCH and MCCH, or a physical area (resource) to which each is mapped may be time-division multiplexed. In the case of a mapping method in the case of being put as an information element, the method disclosed in FIG. 53 can be applied as an example. The physical channel PMCH in FIG. 53 may be the main PMCH. Among the MBMS related information, a paging signal is put on the logical channel MCCH as an information element together with MBMS control information. The MCCH is mapped to the transport channel MCH together with the MTCH, and the MCH is mapped to the main PMCH that is a physical channel. This makes it possible to receive a paging signal when a mobile terminal that is receiving or intending to receive an MBMS service receives the MCCH. As another example, the method disclosed in FIG. 54 can be applied. The PMCH that is the physical channel in FIG. 54 may be the main PMCH. The logical channel PCCH carrying the paging signal is multiplexed with the logical channels MTCH and MCCH of the MBMS related information and placed on the transport channel MCH. The base station may provide an MTCH-only MBSFN subframe, an MBSFN subframe on which MCCH and PCCH are mapped, and control to provide an MCS-only MBSFN subframe and a PCCH-only MBSFN subframe. You may do it. In this way, transmission can be performed after being divided in time. Also, MBSFN subframes carrying MCCH and PCCH may be temporally adjacent. This makes it possible to receive a paging signal when a mobile terminal that is receiving or intending to receive an MBMS service receives the MCCH.

  As yet another example, the method disclosed in FIG. 55 can be applied. The physical channel PMCH in FIG. 55 may be the main PMCH. The PCCH carrying the paging signal is mapped to the transport channel PCH, multiplexed with the MCH, and mapped to the main PMCH. In this way, the base station can transmit the PCH and MCH by dividing them in time, and further can perform encoding separately. Therefore, the mobile terminal can perform decoding separately at the time of reception. In the above example, the difference from Embodiment 7 is that MTCH, MCCH, and PCCH mapped to the main PMCH are transmitted in multicells in the MBSFN synchronization area, not in the MBSFN area. Therefore, the PMCH transmitted in multicell in the MBSFN area and the main PMCH transmitted in multicell in the MBSFN synchronization area may be clearly divided. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a mapping method when the main PMCH is provided as a physical channel common to the MBSFN synchronization area. FIG. 57 discloses the mapping when the PMCH and the main PMCH are provided. This example shows the case where MCH and PCH in FIG. 55 are used. MTCH and MCCH, which are MBMS related information to be transmitted into the MBSFN area, are mapped to the transport channel MCH and mapped to the physical channel PMCH. The PMCH is transmitted in an MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area. MTCH and MCCH, which are MBMS related information to be transmitted into the MBSFN synchronization area, are mapped to the transport channel MCH and mapped to the main PMCH, which is a physical channel. The PCCH carrying the paging signal transmitted into the MBSFN synchronization area is mapped to the transport channel PCH and mapped to the main PMCH which is a physical channel. The main PMCH is transmitted in an MBSFN subframe transmitted in multi-cells in the MBSFN synchronization area.

  Also, for the logical channel and / or transport channel, the MBSFN area use and the MBSFN synchronization area use may be provided separately. For example, the case where only the MBMS control information is transmitted in the MBSFN synchronization area is indicated by a broken line in FIG. The logical channel MCCH transmitted in the MBSFN synchronization area may be the main MCCH, for example, and the transport channel MCH may be the main MCH, for example. The main MCH is mapped to the main PMCH, which is a physical channel. By making these separate, the base station scheduling, HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest) processing, encoding processing, AMC (Adaptive Modulation Coding) processing, etc. can be performed separately in the MBSFN synchronization area and the MBSFN area. In addition, it becomes possible to flexibly cope with fluctuations in the radio wave environment between the base station and the mobile terminal, and it is possible to improve the efficiency of radio resources. The MCCH transmitted in multicell within the MBSFN synchronization area includes service information, frame configuration information, and the like of each MBSFN area included in the MBSFN synchronization area. Also, MBMS service control information for each MBSFN area may be included. In this case, since it is not necessary to transmit the MCCH on the PMCH for each MBSFN area, the MBMS data area can be increased, and the speed of MBMS transmission can be increased. MCCHs transmitted in multi-cells in the MBSFN synchronization area are periodically transmitted in multi-cells in each MBSFN synchronization area in the main PMCH repetition period.

  On the other hand, a mobile terminal that is receiving or intending to receive an MBMS service transmitted from a cell in a certain MBSFN area periodically receives the MCCH on the main PMCH and receives the contents of the MBMS service, the frame configuration, and the like. By doing so, the MBMS service can be received. Therefore, after receiving and decoding the MCCH on the main PMCH, the mobile terminal can perform intermittent reception operation until the next main PMCH without receiving a PMCH corresponding to another MBSFN area when there is no desired service. It becomes possible. Therefore, the power consumption of the mobile terminal can be reduced. Further, by including a paging signal in the MCCH, it is possible to receive a paging signal when a mobile terminal receiving or attempting to receive an MBMS service receives the MCCH. This eliminates the need for the mobile terminal to separately receive paging at a timing other than receiving the MCCH, and thus enables paging to be received without interrupting reception of the MBMS service. Further, intermittent reception can be performed during a period when the MCCH is not received and during a period when the MBMS service is not being received, so that power consumption of the mobile terminal can be reduced. When the method disclosed in FIG. 54 is applied, MCCH and PCCH may be configured in the same MBSFN subframe, or an MBSFN subframe on which MCCH is carried and an MBSFN subframe on which a paging signal is carried are temporally adjacent. You may do it. When the method disclosed in FIG. 55 is applied, the MBSFN subframe carrying the MCCH and the MBSFN subframe carrying the paging signal may be temporally adjacent. With this configuration, it is possible to continuously receive a paging signal when a mobile terminal that is receiving or intending to receive an MBMS service receives an MCCH. This eliminates the need for the mobile terminal to receive a separate paging signal at a timing other than receiving a subframe carrying MCCH and PCCH, and thus enables the mobile terminal to receive the paging signal without interrupting reception of the MBMS service. Further, intermittent reception can be performed during a period when the MCCH is not received and during a period when the MBMS service is not being received, so that power consumption of the mobile terminal can be reduced.

  In FIG. 49 (b), “paging signal presence / absence indicator” which is an indicator indicating whether or not a paging signal has been transmitted is an indicator 1; A configuration in which the indicator 2 is provided with the indicator 2 is disclosed. The physical area to which these indicators are mapped may be provided in the MBSFN subframe in which the main PMCH is transmitted, or in the physical area temporally adjacent to the MBSFN subframe in which the main PMCH is transmitted. Also good. By doing so, the mobile terminal can receive and decode the MCCH and the paging signal on the main PMCH immediately after receiving the indicator. For example, 1-bit information is used as an indicator. Each indicator is encoded or mapped to a predetermined physical region, such as multiplied by a spreading code specific to the MBSFN synchronization area. For example, when an incoming call occurs in the mobile terminal, the paging signal presence / absence indicator is set to “1”, and when there is no incoming call, the paging signal presence / absence indicator is set to “0”. Also, for example, when MBMS control information on the MCCH is changed due to a change in the content of the MBMS service transmitted in the MBSFN synchronization area, the MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator is set to “1”. . A period (MBMS modification period) in which MBMS related information can be changed is determined, and a change presence / absence indicator “1” is repeatedly transmitted within the period. The MBMS modification period, the start timing (SFN, starting point), etc., in which MBMS-related information can be changed may be determined in advance. You may be notified. If the MBMS related information is not changed after the period (MBMS modification period) has passed, the MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator is set to “0”.

  The mobile terminal receives an indicator in an MBSFN subframe in which the main PMCH is transmitted in a multi-cell manner or an adjacent MBSFN subframe, performs despreading, etc., and determines whether the indicator is 1 or 0, so that the MBMS existing in the MCCH It is possible to determine whether the related information has changed or whether paging exists. By providing the indicator in this way, when there is no change in the MBMS control information or when there is no paging, the mobile terminal does not need to receive and decode all the information on the main PMCH. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal. The physical area to which the MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator indicating whether the MBMS control information has been changed may be the first MBSFN subframe of one or more MBSFN subframes to which the MBMS control information is mapped. Further, it may be the first OFDM symbol of the first MBSFN subframe. Accordingly, the mobile terminal can determine whether the MBMS control information has changed by receiving the first OFDM symbol. Further, a physical area to which a paging signal presence / absence indicator indicating whether or not a paging signal is present may be used as the first MBSFN subframe of one or a plurality of MBSFN subframes to which the paging signal is mapped. Further, it may be the first OFDM symbol of the first MBSFN subframe. As a result, the mobile terminal can determine whether a paging signal exists by receiving the first OFDM symbol.

  By mapping each indicator to the physical area as described above, when there is no MBMS control signal change, when there is no paging information, it is not necessary to receive and decode each subsequent OFDM symbol, and the received power of the further mobile terminal Can be reduced. In addition, since it can be determined early with the first MBSFN subframe or the first OFDM symbol, the MBMS control information can be received immediately or the paging signal can be received immediately. Control delay can be reduced. As an indicator, the MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator and the paging signal presence / absence indicator may be mapped to different physical areas, or may be mapped to different physical areas. When mapping to the same physical area, an OR operation of each indicator may be taken. As a result, since the mobile terminal needs only one indicator to receive, the effect of simplifying the receiving circuit configuration can be obtained. In the case of mapping to different physical areas, this allows the mobile terminal to receive only the necessary indicators and eliminates the need to receive other indicators. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal and further reduce the reception delay of necessary information. For example, in a mobile terminal that has received an MBMS service but is set not to receive paging, it is only necessary to receive an MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator, eliminating the need to receive a paging signal presence / absence indicator. it can. The repetition period of each indicator may be the same or different. The repetition period of each indicator may be the same as or different from the repetition period of the main PMCH. For example, an MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator may be provided in the main PMCH once in several times. The repetition period of the indicator is “paging signal presence / absence indicator repetition period” and “MBMS-related change presence / absence indicator repetition period”, respectively. The start timing (SFN, starting point) of the MBSFN subframe in which the indicator exists, the subframe number, the repetition period of each indicator, etc. may be notified by the broadcast information of the serving cell of the unicast service, or the broadcast of the MBMS dedicated cell It may be notified by information or may be determined in advance.

  Furthermore, a channel dedicated to the change presence / absence indicator of MBMS related information may be configured on the main PMCH, for example, MICH (MBMS Indicating CHannel). A paging signal presence / absence indicator is formed in the MICH, and the MICH repetition period is set to “MICH repetition period”. The repetition period of the paging signal presence / absence indicator may be the same as or different from the MICH repetition period. The notification of the indicator can be performed by the same method as described above. Thereby, the time when each indicator is transmitted is not limited to the time when MCCH is transmitted, and the system can be designed flexibly. When configured as described above, the MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator indicates whether the MBMS control information on the main PMCH has been changed, so whether the MBMS service transmitted in the desired MBSFN area has been changed. It is unclear just by detecting the indicator. Whether the MBMS service transmitted in the desired MBSFN area has been changed must receive and decode the MBMS control information on the main PMCH. As the MBMS control information on the main PMCH, an indicator may be provided that indicates in which MBSFN area the MBMS service transmitted has been changed. The physical area for the indicator may be provided immediately before the MBSFN subframe carrying the MBMS control information on the main PMCH. In this way, it is possible to detect whether the MBMS service transmitted in a desired MBSFN area has been changed without having to receive and decode all MBMS control information on the main PMCH. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control delay at the mobile terminal.

  When the paging signal is put on the main PMCH, there is a problem that it takes too much time to detect the paging signal addressed to the own mobile terminal when the number of mobile terminals that have received an incoming call becomes enormous. Further, there arises a problem that an area for mapping paging signals of all mobile terminals that have received incoming calls cannot be secured in a predetermined physical area carrying a paging signal. In order to solve these problems, a paging grouping method is disclosed. FIG. 49C shows a configuration example of the paging signal presence / absence indicator. All mobile terminals are divided into K groups, and a paging signal presence / absence indicator is provided for each group. The physical area for the paging signal presence / absence indicator is divided into K pieces, and the paging signal presence / absence indicator of each group is mapped to each of the divided physical areas. Here, K can take from 1 to the value of the total number of mobile terminals. When an incoming call is received at a certain mobile terminal, the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs is set to “1”. When all mobile terminals belonging to a certain group do not receive an incoming call, the paging signal presence / absence indicator of that group is set to “0”. The paging signal presence / absence indicator may be subjected to repetition or the like in which “1” (or “0”) is repeatedly mapped to the physical area in order to satisfy a desired reception error rate at the mobile terminal. The physical area to which the paging signal is mapped is also divided into K pieces so as to correspond to the K groups. The paging signal may be an identifier (identification number, identification code) for each mobile terminal. One physical area divided into K is a physical area in which paging signal data required by one mobile terminal is accommodated by adding the number of mobile terminals in the group. The number of mobile terminals in a group may be the same in all groups, or may be different for each group. For example, the number of mobile terminals in the group may be an average value of the number of mobile terminals that simultaneously receive incoming calls. Alternatively, the number of mobile terminals that can be assigned to one OFDM symbol may be used, and each OFDM symbol may be associated with each group.

  When an incoming call occurs at a certain mobile terminal, the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs is set to “1” and mapped to the paging signal presence / absence indicator physical area corresponding to the group. At the same time, the paging signal for the mobile terminal that has received the incoming call is mapped to the paging-related physical area corresponding to the group to which the mobile terminal belongs. The mapping of the paging signal to the physical channel region is multiplied for each mobile terminal by an identification code unique to the mobile terminal. When the paging signal is an identifier for each mobile terminal, the control for multiplying the mobile terminal specific identification code can be omitted. The mobile terminal receives the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs, and determines whether an incoming call has been made to the group to which the mobile terminal belongs. When it is determined that the incoming call is received, the physical area to which the paging signal associated with the group to which the mobile terminal belongs is received and decoded. After decoding, blind detection is performed by performing correlation calculation with an identification code unique to the mobile terminal, and it is possible to determine that there is an incoming call to the mobile terminal by specifying a paging signal for the mobile terminal. . If no paging signal for the mobile terminal is detected, it is determined that there is no incoming call to the mobile terminal. By grouping the mobile terminals into K groups, the mobile terminal does not need to receive the entire paging signal area, and only receives the necessary area, that is, only the physical area to which the group to which the mobile terminal belongs corresponds. Therefore, the reception power of the mobile terminal can be reduced. Furthermore, by using a paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to each group, a paging signal presence / absence indicator can be provided with few physical resources even when there are a large number of mobile terminals. Furthermore, the mobile terminal only needs to receive the paging signal area as needed, and it is possible to reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal, and when it is not necessary to receive the paging signal, the mobile terminal immediately moves to the next operation. Therefore, the control delay can be reduced.

  As a method for mapping an indicator indicating whether or not a paging signal has been transmitted to a physical area, the method for mapping a paging signal to a physical area according to the seventh embodiment can also be applied. In this case, an indicator indicating whether or not a paging signal is transmitted in the base station may be multiplied by an identification code (UE-ID, RNTI) unique to the mobile terminal. It is also possible to use a method in which a CRC is added to an indicator indicating whether or not a paging signal has been transmitted, and the CRC is multiplied by an identification number unique to the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal can blindly detect whether the information is addressed to the mobile terminal by using an identification code unique to the mobile terminal. For this reason, it is not necessary to fix in advance a physical area to which an indicator indicating whether or not a paging signal for each mobile terminal has been transmitted. In addition, a physical area to which the indicator may be mapped may be determined in advance or notified. In this way, flexible physical resources can be used. As will be described later, these methods are effective when the indicator indicating whether or not the paging signal has been transmitted is not 1-bit information but the amount of information to each mobile terminal is different, for example, paging message allocation information. It becomes.

  In the above embodiment, one physical area divided into K pieces for mapping the paging signal is obtained by adding the physical area in which the paging signal data required by one mobile terminal is accommodated by the number of mobile terminals in the group. It was in the physical area. However, when the number of mobile terminals increases, the required physical area increases, and the overhead for transmitting the MBMS service increases, so the transmission speed of MBMS service data decreases. In order to prevent this, the paging signal for the mobile terminal is multiplied by an identification code unique to the mobile terminal for each mobile terminal. As a result, the mobile terminal can blindly detect whether the information is addressed to its own mobile terminal using an identification code unique to the mobile terminal, so that the physical area for mapping the paging signal for each mobile terminal is fixed in advance. There is no need to keep it. Therefore, the physical area for all the mobile terminals is not required, and there may be an area for the number of mobile terminals that are expected to actually receive incoming calls. As an example, there is a method in which the number of mobile terminals in the group is an average value of the number of mobile terminals that receive incoming calls simultaneously. This method makes it possible to effectively use limited physical resources. In addition, with the above method, when the number of mobile terminals receiving more than expected is increased, a paging signal to a new incoming mobile terminal is transmitted on the next main PMCH. It becomes possible to respond flexibly by scheduling.

  When the total number of mobile terminals is small, only the paging signal presence / absence indicator may be transmitted with the value of K as the total number of mobile terminals. In this case, it is not necessary to secure a paging signal area, and it is sufficient to secure physical areas for paging signal presence / absence indicators for all the mobile terminals. For this reason, it is possible to improve the efficiency of radio resources. In this case, a physical area for a paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to each mobile terminal exists. For this reason, in the mobile terminal, it is possible to determine the presence / absence of an incoming call without receiving the paging signal area only by receiving and decoding the physical area for the paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to the mobile terminal. The control delay in the paging operation can be reduced.

  In the above example, the paging signal of each mobile terminal is multiplied by the identification code unique to the mobile terminal. Alternatively, the paging signal of each mobile terminal and the identification number unique to the mobile terminal may be added. In this case, the mobile terminal can detect a paging signal for the mobile terminal depending on whether or not an identification number unique to the mobile terminal exists in the received information after processing such as decoding.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is provided in which an indicator indicating whether or not a paging signal is transmitted is disclosed, but the indicator may be paging signal allocation information. Thereby, when the mobile terminal receives the paging signal allocation information to the mobile terminal, it can be determined that there is paging. As a specific example of paging signal allocation information, for example, paging signals transmitted in the same subframe, for example, information indicating a physical area to which a paging message is mapped may be used. Since the allocation information is physical area information, the mobile terminal that has received the paging message allocation information needs to receive only the physical area in order to receive the paging message, and needs to receive other physical areas. Disappear. For this reason, the power consumption at the time of reception of the mobile terminal can be reduced. Also, it is not necessary to transmit the physical area information to which the paging signal is allocated in advance to the mobile terminal by broadcast information or the like, so that the signaling amount can be reduced and the allocation of the paging signal to the physical area can be flexibly performed. As a result, it is possible to improve the use efficiency of radio resources.

  The method disclosed in the seventh embodiment can be applied to the method for mapping the paging signal to the paging-related physical area of the main PMCH. For example, it is the method of FIG. 33 or FIG. However, in the modulation process, the spreading process, etc., the step of multiplying the MBSFN area-specific spreading code cannot be applied, and it is necessary not to multiply the MBSFN area-specific spreading code or to multiply the MBSFN synchronization area-specific spreading code. is there.

  For the identification code unique to the mobile terminal used in the present embodiment, the same method as that described in the seventh embodiment is used. In the present embodiment, the identification code unique to the mobile terminal is unique to each MBSFN synchronization area. The method for making the mobile terminal identification code unique to each MBSFN synchronization area is not limited to the present embodiment, and is applicable to the case where multi-cell (MC) transmission is performed in the MBSFN synchronization area and the mobile terminal identification code is multiplied. . There may be a plurality of identification codes unique to the mobile terminal for each MBSFN synchronization area. Each may be used for different purposes. For example, two types of identification codes unique to the mobile terminal for each MBSFN synchronization area may be provided, which may be used for paging signals and for MBMS control information, respectively. In this way, it is possible to divide the paging signal transmitted by MC in the MBSFN synchronization area for each mobile terminal, and the mobile terminal can receive the paging signal addressed to the mobile terminal itself.

  In the above example, the method disclosed in Embodiment 7 is applied as a method for mapping the configuration of the main PMCH and the paging signal to the main PMCH. Similarly, for example, when the frequency of transmission of the main PMCH is high in time, the method disclosed in the eighth embodiment can be applied as a method of mapping the configuration of the main PMCH and the paging signal to the main PMCH. .

  By providing a physical channel for multi-cell transmission in the MBSFN synchronization area disclosed in the ninth embodiment and placing a paging signal on the physical channel, an MBMS service is provided from an MBMS dedicated cell as a mobile communication system. The paging signal of all mobile terminals that are receiving or are about to receive can be transmitted, and the mobile terminal can receive the paging signal from the MBMS dedicated cell.

Embodiment 10 FIG.
In the above embodiments, a method has been disclosed in which a paging signal is provided so as to be transmitted in a multi-cell manner from all cells in the MBSFN area or the MBSFN synchronization area. It is conceivable that the MBSFN area and the MBSFN synchronization area are geographically vast. In such a case, transmitting a paging signal for the mobile terminal from a cell that does not contribute to SFN combining in the mobile terminal wastes radio resources and causes a reduction in system capacity. Therefore, it becomes necessary to limit the cell that transmits the paging signal to a cell in which the mobile terminal exists and a neighboring cell. When the cell that transmits the paging signal is limited to the cell in which the mobile terminal exists and the neighboring cell, a cell that transmits the paging signal to a certain mobile terminal and a cell that does not transmit are generated in the same MBSFN area or the same MBSFN synchronization area. Thus, different signals are transmitted between cells, and multi-cell transmission is not performed. Since the mobile terminal cannot selectively limit the cells to be received, a signal that is not multi-cell transmission is also received, causing a reception error. The reception quality of a desired paging signal deteriorates due to a different signal transmitted from a cell that does not transmit a paging signal. In particular, a reception error increases for a mobile terminal that exists near the boundary between a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit a paging signal, and a paging signal cannot be received. Therefore, this embodiment discloses a configuration in which a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit a paging signal are provided.

  In order to reduce paging signal reception errors at the mobile terminal, the method of mapping the paging signal is changed between the cell that transmits the paging signal and the cell that does not transmit the paging signal. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing a method of transmitting a paging signal to some cells in the MBSFN area or the MBSFN synchronization area. As shown in FIG. 50, in the cell that transmits the paging signal, as described with reference to FIG. 33 or FIG. 44, processing for multiplying the signal by the identification number unique to the mobile terminal is performed (processing 1). Add (processing 2), and perform processing (processing 3) such as encoding and rate matching. Then, the result of the series of processing is assigned to each control information element unit (processing 8), and processing is performed until each mobile terminal that is receiving an incoming call is connected. On the other hand, such processing is not performed in a cell that does not transmit a paging signal. The physical area where the paging signal is carried includes the PMCH, DPCH, and main PMCH shown in the above embodiment. In the MBSFN area or the MBSFN synchronization area, if there is a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit to a mobile terminal that has received an incoming call, the cell in the cell that transmits the paging signal Connect 2401 to terminal a. The paging signal to the mobile terminal is multiplied by an identification number unique to the mobile terminal, CRC is added, and processing such as encoding and rate matching is performed. Since the switch 2401 is connected to the terminal a, the information after the above processing for each mobile terminal is assigned to a certain control information element unit.

  In the above example, allocation is made in units of control information elements corresponding to the size of the physical area to which the paging signal is mapped. By allocating in units of transport blocks, physical resources to be allocated can be increased / decreased depending on the amount of information, so that flexible allocation to physical areas becomes possible.

  On the other hand, in a cell that does not transmit a paging signal, the base station connects the switch 2401 in the figure to the terminal b. A padding code is provided for each cell without using a paging signal to the mobile terminal, and the padding code is assigned to each control information element unit. Here, the area of the control information element unit allocated to a certain mobile terminal is the same in a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit. As a result, the base station can easily switch the information to be allocated between the cell that transmits the paging signal and the cell that does not transmit the paging signal by the switch. Furthermore, by making the size of the control information element unit area allocated to a certain mobile terminal the same for all mobile terminals, it becomes possible to determine the padding code length for each cell in advance. . Thus, padding code embedding control can be easily configured. On the other hand, a mobile terminal receiving or trying to receive a multi-cell MBMS service from a cell in a certain MBSFN area or MBSFN synchronization area receives PMCH, DPCH or main PMCH to which a paging signal is mapped, and demodulates it. Processing, despreading processing, and the like are performed to divide the control information element unit area. The divided control information element unit area is decoded and the like, and the correlation calculation is performed using the identification number unique to the own terminal, thereby blindly detecting the paging signal for the own mobile terminal. If the correlation calculation result is greater than a certain threshold, it is determined that there is paging for the mobile terminal, and a paging incoming operation is started by a paging signal. If it is less than a certain threshold value, it is determined that there is no paging for the terminal itself, and the process shifts to reception of MBMS related information, or shifts to the intermittent reception operation if it is not necessary to receive MBMS related information.

  If the transmission signal from the cell that does not transmit the paging signal is different from the transmission signal from the cell that transmits the paging signal, the multi-cell transmission is not performed, and not only the SFN gain cannot be obtained by the multi-cell transmission, but also the paging signal is changed. A transmission signal from a cell that does not transmit becomes noise, and errors increase in the correlation calculation result at the mobile terminal. As disclosed in the present embodiment, in a cell that does not transmit a paging signal, a padding (embedding, setting) code is determined in advance, and the padding code is embedded in an area where the paging signal is mapped, It is possible to reduce errors in correlation calculation at the mobile terminal. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a padding code for each cell provided in a cell that does not transmit a paging signal. For example, a cell that does not transmit a paging signal has a padding code of “all 0” (all 0). In this case, the same code, that is, “all 0” is set in all cells not transmitting the paging signal. In this way, since the mobile terminal has an interference canceling function such as an interference canceller in the mobile terminal, the mobile terminal can cancel the “0” component transmitted from the cell that does not transmit the paging signal. Only the paging signal transmitted from the cell transmitting the signal can be SFN-combined, and the reception error of the paging signal in the correlation calculation at the mobile terminal can be reduced. The padding code for cells that do not transmit paging may be “all 1”. In this case, the same code, that is, all 1 is set in all cells that do not transmit paging. Also in this case, since the mobile terminal has an interference canceling function such as an interference canceller, the “1” component can be canceled, and the reception error of the paging signal at the mobile terminal can be reduced. It should be noted that a known specific code may be used instead of all 0 and all 1. A padding code for a cell that does not transmit a paging signal may be a random value. In this case, a random value is derived for each cell and padded. In this way, in the mobile terminal, the signals transmitted from the cells that do not transmit the paging signal are canceled each other due to different random signals, and the paging signal components transmitted from the cell that transmits the paging signal are relative to each other. Therefore, it is possible to reduce paging signal reception errors in the correlation calculation.

  A paging transmission cell identification code for identifying a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit the paging signal may be used. The paging transmission cell identification code may be an orthogonal or pseudo-orthogonal code. Further, it may be a scrambling code or a spreading code. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing a method of using a paging transmission cell identification code. The base station multiplies the paging signal by the mobile terminal identification code (processing 1), performs coding processing such as CRC addition, encoding, rate matching, MCS (Modulation Coding Scheme) reflection (processing 2), Multiply the paging transmission cell identification code (process 3). As a paging transmission cell identification code, a spreading code for a paging signal transmission cell is used in a cell that transmits a paging signal. In a cell that does not transmit a paging signal, a spreading code for a paging signal non-transmitting cell is used. The spreading code for the paging signal transmission cell and the spreading code for the paging signal non-transmission cell, which are paging transmission cell identification codes, are set as orthogonal codes. The result of multiplying these paging transmission cell identification codes is assigned to each control information element unit and connected to each mobile terminal that is receiving an incoming call (process 4). On the other hand, a mobile terminal receiving or trying to receive an MBMS service transmitted from a cell in a certain MBSFN area or MBSFN synchronization area receives a PMCH, DPCH, or main PMCH to which a paging signal is mapped. Then, demodulation processing, despreading processing, etc. are performed to divide the area into control information element units. The divided area of the control information element unit is despread by the paging signal transmission cell spreading code. In the same physical area, the cells that transmit the paging signal and the cells that do not transmit are multiplied and transmitted by orthogonal spreading codes, so by performing despreading using the spreading code for the paging signal transmission cell, It is possible to eliminate the influence of a signal from a cell that does not transmit a paging signal, and a reception error can be reduced.

  The despread data is subjected to processing such as decoding, and blind detection is performed using the mobile terminal identification code. If the correlation calculation result is greater than a certain threshold, it is determined that there is paging for the mobile terminal, and a paging incoming operation is started by a paging signal. If it is less than a certain threshold value, it is determined that there is no paging for the terminal itself, and the process shifts to reception of MBMS related information, or shifts to the intermittent reception operation if it is not necessary to receive MBMS related information. Each paging transmission cell identification code may be determined in advance, or may be notified by broadcast information of an MBMS dedicated cell or broadcast information of a unicast cell. In this way, by multiplying the cells that transmit the paging signal and the cells that do not transmit by orthogonal spreading codes and despreading on the receiving side, the influence of the signal from the cell that does not transmit the paging signal is eliminated, and the paging signal Can be extracted with a low reception error. In the present invention, the order of multiplying the mobile terminal identification code and the paging transmission cell identification code may be reversed. When the mobile terminal identification code is multiplied later, the mobile terminal first determines whether there is a paging signal for the mobile terminal by performing a correlation operation with an identification number unique to the mobile terminal first. The advantage is that this is possible.

  In the above example, the process of multiplying the paging signal of each mobile terminal by the identification code unique to the mobile terminal was performed in the process 1 disclosed in FIGS. 50 and 52. As another processing method, the paging signal of each mobile terminal is used. And an identification number unique to the mobile terminal may be added. In this case, the mobile terminal receives the paging signal physical area, performs demodulation, descrambling with the MBSFN area-specific scrambling code, divides the result into information element units, decodes each divided information element unit, etc. Perform the process. A paging signal for the mobile terminal is detected based on whether or not an identification number unique to the mobile terminal exists in the information after processing such as decoding.

  In the present embodiment, each cell may be a code that does not transmit a paging signal with a padding code or a paging transmission cell identification code as an initial setting. Only when a paging occurrence notification is received from the MME, MCE or MBMS-GW, the cell sends a paging signal and a paging transmission cell identification code to only the mobile terminal that has received the notification. A code to be transmitted may be used. This eliminates the need to send a notification that no paging occurs from the MME, MCE, or MBMS-GW to each cell, thereby reducing the amount of signaling.

  As a specific example of a configuration in which a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit a paging signal are provided, a method of transmitting a padding code from a cell that does not transmit a paging signal has been disclosed. When the physical area to which the paging signal is mapped is determined, the transmission power of the physical area from a cell that does not transmit the paging signal may be set to zero. Nothing may be transmitted in the physical area. In a cell that does not transmit a paging signal, the base station determines the physical area to which the paging signal is mapped, so that the transmission power of the physical area can be reduced. The transmission power may be set to 0, or nothing may be transmitted. For this reason, the paging signal in the cell that does not transmit the paging signal does not need to be a padding code and may be anything. This eliminates interference that occurs when different signals are transmitted between cells that perform MC transmission in the MBSFN area or MBSFN synchronization area, that is, interference from a cell that does not transmit a paging signal to a cell that transmits a paging signal. It becomes possible. Further, in a cell that does not transmit a paging signal, the base station can increase the power of other physical areas by setting the transmission power of the physical area to zero. Also, in the cell that does not transmit the paging signal, the base station sets the transmission power in the physical area to 0, so that the power consumption of the base station can be reduced. This method may be used even when a physical area to which all of the paging signal is mapped does not have to be determined and a physical area to which a part of the paging signal (for example, information indicating the presence or absence of paging) is mapped is determined. Is applicable. In addition, this method can also be applied when the physical area to which the paging signal presence / absence indicator disclosed in the seventh and ninth embodiments is mapped is determined.

  By configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit, and even when the MBSFN area or the MBSFN synchronization area is geographically wide, It becomes possible to limit the cell which transmits a paging signal to the cell in which a mobile terminal exists, and the nearby cell. Even when the cell that transmits the paging signal is limited to the cell where the mobile terminal exists and the neighboring cell, the reception quality of the desired paging signal deteriorates due to the different signal transmitted from the cell that does not transmit the paging signal. An effect is obtained that a paging signal can be received without causing it to occur. In particular, an effect that a high-quality paging signal can be received is obtained for a mobile terminal that exists near the boundary between a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit a paging signal. Further, for example, when a paging signal is transmitted only to a cell in one or a plurality of MBSFN areas that are geographically close to the tracking area of a unicast cell, the MME that has received the paging request It is not necessary to transmit a paging request signal to all corresponding MCEs, and it is only necessary to transmit a paging request signal to the MCE that controls the MBSFN area. An MCE that has received a paging request signal transmits a paging signal to a cell in an MBSFN area controlled by the MCE, and an MCE that does not receive a paging request signal does not transmit a paging signal in an MBSFN area controlled by the MCE. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of signaling between the MME and the MCE. Furthermore, by limiting the cell that transmits the paging signal to the cell in which the mobile terminal exists and the neighboring cell, the physical resources used for the paging signal transmission of a certain mobile terminal can be transferred to other mobile terminals at geographically distant locations. It can be used for paging signal transmission to a terminal, and the efficiency of radio resources can be improved.

  In the above Embodiments 1 to 10, the method of performing multi-cell transmission by putting a paging signal on the MBSFN subframe from the cell of the frequency layer dedicated for MBMS transmission has been disclosed. Here, a method for transmitting a paging signal in an MBSFN subframe in a unicast / MBMS mixed frequency layer cell is disclosed. In a unicast / MBMS mixed frequency layer cell, there is an MBSFN subframe for MC transmission. The method disclosed in Embodiments 1 to 10 is applied to this MBSFN subframe, and a paging signal is transmitted. As a specific example, the seventh embodiment may be applied to the MBSFN subframe, and the paging signal and the paging signal presence / absence indicator may be mapped to the PMCH of the MBSFN subframe. Also, by applying the eighth embodiment, a paging dedicated channel (DPCH) is configured in the MBSFN subframe, and a paging signal (information for notifying paging message and paging presence / absence) is transmitted to the paging dedicated channel. Should be mapped. Further, by applying the ninth embodiment, a main PMCH may be provided in an MBSFN subframe transmitted in the MBSFN synchronization area, and a paging signal or a paging signal presence / absence indicator may be mapped to the main PMCH. In addition, when a paging signal is transmitted only to a part of cells in the MBSFN area or the MBSFN synchronization area of the unicast / MBMS mixed frequency layer, the method of Embodiment 410 may be applied.

  As described above, it is possible to use the PDSCH and the MBSFN subframe for paging signal transmission by using the method of transmitting the paging signal in the MBSFN subframe in the unicast / MBMS mixed frequency layer cell. For this reason, in the paging occasion derivation method, it is not necessary to use only the PDSCH subframes excluding the MBSFN subframe, and it is possible to effectively use radio resources and to reduce the delay time of incoming processing. Can be obtained. There are mobile terminals under the control of a unicast / MBMS mixed frequency layer cell that receive MBMS (MBMS related information, MCCH, MTCH) and those that do not. Since a mobile terminal that has not received MBMS does not need to receive an MBSFN subframe, the mobile terminal transmits a paging signal in a subframe in which PDSCH exists, and the mobile terminal that has received MBMS A paging signal may be transmitted in the PDSCH and MBSFN subframes. The above method may be used as a method for mapping the paging signal to the MBSFN subframe. Accordingly, each mobile terminal can receive a paging signal in a subframe corresponding to the reception capability. Also, since the mobile terminal receiving MBMS receives the MBSFN subframe, the paging signal to the mobile terminal receiving MBMS may be mapped to the MBSFN subframe using the above method. good. The mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS can receive the paging signal without waiting for the unicast paging cycle (DRX cycle), and the delay time until the reception can be shortened.

  You may make it map the paging signal to the mobile terminal which performed the counting at the time of MBMS reception to an MBSFN sub-frame. Counting is an operation of notifying information indicating that MBMS is received from the mobile terminal to the network side. Since the network side can obtain information on the identification number (UE-ID, etc.) of the mobile terminal that has performed the counting, the paging signal of the mobile terminal that has performed the counting is stored in the MBSFN subframe based on this information. It is only necessary to send it over. Since the network side can recognize that the mobile terminal that has performed counting receives MBMS, it is possible to reliably transmit the paging signal to the mobile terminal in the MBSFN subframe. When counting is performed for each MBMS service, the paging signal may be mapped to the MBSFN subframe for transmitting the counted MBMS service and transmitted.

  When a paging signal is put on the PMCH of the MBSFN subframe, a part of the paging signal may be transmitted using the L1 / L2 control signal symbol of the MBSFN subframe and the rest of the paging signal may be transmitted using the PMCH of the MBSFN subframe. good. As a specific example, information indicating the presence of a paging signal is mapped to the L1 / L2 control signal symbol, a paging message is mapped to the PMCH, and transmitted to the mobile terminal. The information indicating the presence of the paging signal may be 1-bit information indicating the presence or absence of the paging signal, or paging signal allocation information. Scheduling information (paging occasion) indicating that a paging signal exists may be determined in advance or may be transmitted on the BCCH from the serving cell. It may be derived using the same parameters and calculation formulas on the network side and the mobile terminal side. By doing so, the amount of signaling between the mobile terminal and the network can be reduced. Information indicating that a paging signal exists may be multiplied by an identification code unique to the mobile terminal. By doing so, it becomes possible to blindly detect a paging signal addressed to the own mobile terminal. Even if the paging signal presence / absence indicator is not placed on the PMCH, since the presence / absence of the paging signal and the paging signal allocation area can be known, the mobile terminal only needs to receive the paging signal when there is a paging signal. Does not need to be received. For this reason, the effect that the power consumption of the mobile terminal can be reduced is obtained.

  In the unicast / MBMS mixed frequency layer, if the tracking area for unicast paging and the tracking area for multi-cell transmission in MBMS are different, one of the paging signals unicast transmitted using the L1 / L2 control signal symbol And the remaining paging signal transmitted in multicell on the PMCH may not be transmitted from the same cell. Only information indicating the presence of paging is transmitted from cells included only in the unicast transmission tracking area, while only the remaining paging messages are transmitted from cells included only in the tracking area of multicast transmission. turn into. In order to solve such a problem, the tracking area for unicast and the tracking area for multi-cell transmission in MBMS are made the same. As a tracking area, one tracking area may be used for both unicast transmission and multi-cell transmission, and it has two tracking areas with the same cell belonging to each tracking area. Also good. The tracking area may be managed by either MME or MCE. Moreover, you may make it manage by both. In this way, a part of the paging signal can be transmitted from the same cell using the L1 / L2 control signal symbol, and the remaining paging signal can be transmitted using the PMCH of the same MBSFN subframe. Accordingly, since decoding of the paging signal is simplified in the MME, MCE, base station, and mobile terminal, the effect of reducing the complexity of paging signal reception control and increasing the processing speed can be obtained.

Embodiment 11
FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the overall configuration of the mobile communication system according to the present invention. In FIG. 10, the mobile terminal 101 transmits and receives control data (C-plane) and user data (U-plane) to and from the base station 102. The base station 102 is a unicast cell 102-1 that handles only unicast transmission / reception, a mixed cell 102-2 that handles transmission / reception of unicast and MBMS services (MTCH and MCCH), and an MBMS dedicated cell 101- that handles only transmission / reception of MBMS services. It is classified into 3. The unicast cell 102-1 that handles unicast transmission / reception and the MBMS / unicast mixed cell (mixed cell, mixed cell) 102-2 are connected by the MME 103 and the interface S1_MME. Furthermore, the unicast cell 102-1 and the mixed cell 102-2 that handle unicast transmission / reception are connected to the S-GW 104 via an interface S1_U for transmission / reception of unicast user data. The MME 103 is connected to a PDNGW (Packet Data Network Gateway) 902 through an interface S11. The MCE 801 allocates radio resources to all base stations 102 in the MBSFN area in order to perform multi-cell (MC) transmission. For example, there is an MBSFN area # 1 composed of one or a plurality of MBMS / unicast mixed cells 102-2 and a MBSFN area # 2 composed of one or a plurality of MBMS dedicated cells 101-3. Think. The MBMS / unicast mixed cell 102-2 is connected to the MCE 801-1 that allocates radio resources for all base stations in the MBSFN area # 1 through the interface M2. The MBMS dedicated cell 102-3 is connected by an interface M2 to the MCE 801-2 that allocates radio resources for all base stations in the MBSFN area # 2.

  The MBMS GW 802 can be classified into MBMS CP 802-1 that handles control data and MBMS UP 802-2 that handles user data. The MBMS / unicast mixed cell 102-2 and the MBMS dedicated cell 102-3 are connected to the MBMS CP 802-1 at the interface M1 for transmission / reception of MBMS-related control data. The MBMS / unicast mixed cell 102-2 and the MBMS dedicated cell 102-3 are connected to the MBMS UP 802-2 at the interface M1_U for transmission / reception of MBMS-related user data. The MCE 801 is connected to the MBMS CP 802-1 at the interface M3 for transmission / reception of MBMS-related control data. The MBMS UP 802-2 is connected to the eBMSC 901 through the interface SGimb. The MBMS GW 802 is connected to the eBMSC 901 through the interface SGmb. The eBMSC 901 is connected to a content provider. The eBMSC 901 is connected to the PDN GW 902 through an interface SGi. The MCE 801 is connected to the MME 103 via an MME-MCE interface (IF) which is a new interface.

  FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the mobile terminal 101 used in the present invention. In FIG. 11, the transmission processing of the mobile terminal 101 is executed as follows. First, control data from the protocol processing unit 1101 and user data from the application unit 1102 are stored in the transmission data buffer unit 1103. Data stored in the transmission data buffer unit 1103 is transferred to the encoder unit 1104 and subjected to encoding processing such as error correction. There may be data that is directly output from the transmission data buffer unit 1103 to the modulation unit 1105 without being encoded. The data encoded by the encoder unit 1104 is subjected to modulation processing by the modulation unit 1105. The modulated data is converted into a baseband signal, and then output to the frequency conversion unit 1106 where it is converted into a radio transmission frequency. Thereafter, a transmission signal is transmitted from the antenna 1107 to the base station 102. In addition, the reception process of the mobile terminal 101 is executed as follows. A radio signal from the base station 102 is received by the antenna 1107. The received signal is converted from a radio reception frequency to a baseband signal by the frequency converter 1106, and demodulated by the demodulator 1108. The demodulated data is transferred to the decoder unit 1109 and subjected to decoding processing such as error correction. Of the decoded data, control data is passed to the protocol processing unit 1101, and user data is passed to the application unit 1102. A series of processing of the mobile terminal is controlled by the control unit 1110. Therefore, although the control part 1110 is abbreviate | omitted in drawing, it is connected with each part (1101-1109).

  FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the base station 102. The transmission process of the base station 102 is executed as follows. The EPC communication unit 1201 transmits and receives data between the base station 102 and the EPC (MME 103 and S-GW 104). The other base station communication unit 1202 transmits / receives data to / from other base stations. The EPC communication unit 1201 and the other base station communication unit 1202 exchange information with the protocol processing unit 1203, respectively. Control data from the protocol processing unit 1203 and user data and control data from the EPC communication unit 1201 and the other base station communication unit 1202 are stored in the transmission data buffer unit 1204. Data stored in the transmission data buffer unit 1204 is transferred to the encoder unit 1205 and subjected to encoding processing such as error correction. There may exist data that is directly output from the transmission data buffer unit 1204 to the modulation unit 1206 without being encoded. The encoded data is subjected to modulation processing by the modulation unit 1206. The modulated data is converted into a baseband signal, and then output to the frequency conversion unit 1207 to be converted into a radio transmission frequency. Thereafter, a transmission signal is transmitted from the antenna 1208 to one or a plurality of mobile terminals 101. Further, the reception process of the base station 102 is executed as follows. Radio signals from one or a plurality of mobile terminals 101 are received by the antenna 1208. The received signal is converted from a radio reception frequency to a baseband signal by the frequency converter 1207, and demodulated by the demodulator 1209. The demodulated data is transferred to the decoder unit 1210 and subjected to decoding processing such as error correction. Of the decoded data, the control data is passed to the protocol processing unit 1203 or the EPC communication unit 1201 and the other base station communication unit 1202, and the user data is passed to the EPC communication unit 1201 and the other base station communication unit 1202. A series of processing of the base station 102 is controlled by the control unit 1211. Therefore, the control unit 1211 is connected to each unit (1201 to 1210), which is omitted in the drawing.

  FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing a configuration of MME (Mobility Management Entity). A PDN GW communication unit 1301 transmits and receives data between the MME 103 and the PDN GW 902. The base station communication unit 1302 transmits and receives data between the MME 103 and the base station 102 using the S1_MME interface. When the data received from the PDN GW 902 is user data, the user data is passed from the PDN GW communication unit 1301 to the base station communication unit 1302 via the user plane processing unit 1303 and transmitted to one or a plurality of base stations 102. The When the data received from the base station 102 is user data, the user data is transferred from the base station communication unit 1302 to the PDN GW communication unit 1301 via the user plane processing unit 1303 and transmitted to the PDN GW 902. The MCE communication unit 1304 transmits and receives data between the MME 103 and the MCE 801 using the MME-MCE IF.

  When the data received from the PDN GW 902 is control data, the control data is transferred from the PDN GW communication unit 1301 to the control plane control unit 1305. When the data received from the base station 102 is control data, the control data is transferred from the base station communication unit 1302 to the control plane control unit 1305. The control data received from the MCE 801 is transferred from the MCE communication unit 1304 to the control plane control unit 1305. The result of the processing in the control plane control unit 1305 is transmitted to the PDN GW 902 via the PDN GW communication unit 1301, transmitted to one or a plurality of base stations 102 via the S1_MME interface via the base station communication unit 1302, and MCE. The data is transmitted to one or a plurality of MCEs 801 by the MME-MCE IF via the communication unit 1304. The control plane control unit 1305 includes a NAS security unit 1305-1, an SAE bearer control unit 1305-2, an idle state mobility management unit 1305-3, and the like, and performs overall processing for the control plane. The NAS security unit 1305-1 performs security of a NAS (Non-Access Stratum) message. The SAE bearer control unit 1305-2 manages the SAE (System Architecture Evolution) bearer. The idle state mobility management unit 1305-3 manages mobility in a standby state (LTE-IDLE state, also simply referred to as idle), generates and controls a paging signal in the standby state, and one or a plurality of mobile terminals 101 being served thereby Add, delete, update, search, tracking area list (TA List) management, etc. The MME initiates a paging protocol by transmitting a paging message to a cell belonging to a tracking area (tracking area: TA) where the UE is registered. A series of processing of the MME 103 is controlled by the control unit 1306. Therefore, the control unit 1306 is connected to each unit (1301 to 1305), which is omitted in the drawing.

  FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the configuration of MCE (Multi-cell / multicast Coordination Entity). The MBMS GW communication unit 1401 transmits and receives control data between the MCE 801 and the MBMS GW 802 using the M3 interface. A base station communication unit 1402 transmits and receives control data between the MCE 801 and the base station 102 using the M2 interface. The MME communication unit 1403 transmits and receives control data between the MCE 801 and the MME 103 by the MME-MCE IF. The MC transmission scheduler unit 1404 includes control data from the MBMS GW 802 passed through the MBMS GW communication unit 1401 and base stations in an MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) area passed through the base station communication unit 1402 The control data from 102 and the control data from the MME 103 passed via the MME communication unit 1403 are used to schedule multi-cell transmission of one or more MBSFN areas managed by itself. Examples of scheduling include base station radio resources (time, frequency, etc.), radio structure (modulation scheme, code, etc.), and the like. The scheduling result of multi-cell transmission is passed to the base station communication unit 1402 and transmitted to one or a plurality of base stations 102 in the MBSFN area. A series of processing of the MCE 801 is controlled by the control unit 1405. Therefore, the control unit 1405 is connected to each unit (1401 to 1404), which is omitted in the drawing.

  FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the MBMS gateway. In FIG. 15, an eBMSC communication unit 1501 of the MBMS GW 802 transmits and receives data (user data and control data) between the MBMS GW 802 and the eBMSC 901. The MCE communication unit 1502 transmits and receives control data using the M3 interface between the MBMS GW 802 and the MCE 801. Control data received from the eBMSC 901 is transmitted to the MBMS CP unit 1503 via the eBMSC communication unit 1501, and after being processed by the MBMS CP unit 1503, is transmitted to one or a plurality of MCEs 801 via the MCE communication unit 1502. The control data received from the MCE 801 is transferred to the MBMS CP unit 1503 via the MCE communication unit 1502, and after being processed by the MBMS CP unit 1503, transmitted to the eBMSC 901 and / or the MCE 801 via the eBMSC communication unit 1501. The base station communication unit 1504 transmits user data (also referred to as traffic data) using the M1_U interface to the MBMS GW 802 and one or a plurality of base stations. User data received from the eBMSC 901 is transmitted to the MBMS UP unit 1505 via the eBMSC communication unit 1501, and after being processed by the MBMS UP unit 1505, transmitted to one or a plurality of base stations 102 via the base station communication unit 1504. The The MBMS CP unit 1503 and the MBMS UP unit 1505 are connected. A series of processing of the MBMS GW 802 is controlled by the control unit 1506. Therefore, the control unit 1506 is connected to each unit (1501 to 1506) although not shown in the drawing.

  Next, FIG. 16 shows an example of the flow of processing as a mobile communication system according to the present invention. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an outline of processing from the start of use of MBMS to the end of use by the mobile terminal in the LTE communication system. In step ST1601 of FIG. 16, the mobile terminal performs cell selection of the serving cell in the MBMS / unicast mixed cell. Hereinafter, the processing of step 1601 is referred to as “unicast side cell selection”. In step ST1601-1, the network side performs a “notice about receivable MBMS” process for the mobile terminal. Specifically, the mobile terminal is notified from the network side that there is an MBMS service that is currently available and information about the frequency (a list of frequencies). Since the mobile terminal can know that there is an available MBMS service and its frequency by the processing of ST1601-1, it is not necessary to search for a receivable frequency in a brute force manner. This has the effect of shortening the control delay until the mobile terminal receives a service from a frequency other than the current frequency.

  In step ST1602, the mobile terminal performs an MBMS transmission dedicated cell search process based on the information notified from the network side in step ST1601. Specific examples of the search process include timing synchronization (synchronization based on radio frame timing), system bandwidth, number of transmission antennas, MBSFN area identifier (ID) (also referred to as MBSFN area number), MCCH (multicast control channel). System information such as related information is acquired. Hereinafter, the processing in step 1602 is referred to as “MBMS search”. In Step ST1603, the mobile terminal receives information for receiving the MBMS service (MCCH and MTCH) in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell from the network side. Hereinafter, the processing in step 1603 is referred to as “MBMS Area information acquisition”. In step ST1604, the user (mobile terminal) selects the MBMS service desired by the user using the information for receiving the MBMS service received from the network side in step ST1603. Hereinafter, the processing in step 1604 is referred to as “MBMS service selection”.

  In an LTE communication system, only a downlink for transmitting broadcast data provided by the MBMS service to a mobile terminal is provided, and a cell dedicated to MBMS transmission that realizes a simple system configuration by omitting the uplink may be provided. It is being considered. Steps 1601-1 to ST1604 in the above description disclosed a method until the MBMS service by the MBMS transmission dedicated cell is selected. By the series of processes described above, the mobile terminal can receive a desired MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell.

  In step ST1605, the mobile terminal makes preparations for intermittently receiving MBMS data from the MBMS transmission dedicated cell using the information for receiving the MBMS service received from the network side in step ST1603. Hereinafter, the processing in step 1605 is referred to as “preparation for intermittent reception during MBMS reception”. In Step ST1606, the mobile terminal performs “MBMS side reception status notification” processing for notifying the network side of the MBMS reception status in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell. Since the MBMS transmission dedicated cell is not provided with an uplink, a mobile terminal receiving MBMS data in the MBMS dedicated cell cannot perform location registration on the network side. In this case, since the network side cannot identify the cell in which the mobile terminal exists, it is difficult to send a paging signal when an incoming call directed to the mobile terminal occurs. By this step ST1606, the network side can know that the mobile terminal is receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell and can track the mobile terminal. When an incoming call occurs for a mobile terminal that is using the service, the paging information is transferred to the MBMS transmission dedicated cell via the MME 103 and the MCE 801-1 to notify the mobile terminal that is using the MBMS service that the individual incoming call has occurred. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to solve the problem related to paging for the mobile terminal that is using the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell.

  In Step ST1607, the mobile terminal performs measurement (measurement) processing including electrolytic strength measurement and cell selection of the unicast cell (FIG. 10 102-1) or / and the MBMS / unicast mixed cell (FIG. 10 102-2). . This process is referred to as “Unicast side measurement”. This step ST1607 allows a mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer to perform unicast / mixed frequency layer measurement. This enables mobility management of the mobile terminal via the unicast / mixed frequency layer even when the MBMS service is being received in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer configured by the MBMS dedicated base station having no uplink. An effect can be obtained. In Step ST1608, the mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission performs intermittent reception for paging signal reception. The network side notifies the paging signal to the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer in the MBMS reception time missing reception configuration. Hereinafter, the processing in step 1608 is referred to as “intermittent reception during MBMS reception”. In steps ST1605 to ST1608, it is possible to disclose a paging signal notification method for a mobile terminal receiving an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, and a mobile communication system therefor. Even in a mobile terminal that receives an MBMS service in a transmission-only frequency layer, there is an effect that a paging signal can be received. The mobile terminal that has not received the Paging signal in “Intermittent reception during MBMS reception” in Step ST1608 moves to Step ST1609.

  In Step ST1609, the mobile terminal receives MBMS traffic data (MTCH) from the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. Hereinafter, the process of step ST1609 is referred to as “MTCH reception”. The mobile terminal performing “MTCH reception” moves to step ST1607 at the timing of “Unicast side measurement”. Alternatively, the mobile terminal performing “MTCH reception” moves to step ST1602 or step ST1604 when the reception sensitivity is deteriorated. The mobile terminal that has received the Paging signal in “Intermittent reception during MBMS reception” in Step ST1608 moves to Step ST1610. In Step ST1610, the mobile terminal moves from the frequency layer dedicated for MBMS transmission to the unicast / mixed frequency layer, and transmits and receives control data from the unicast cell or the mixed cell. Hereinafter, the process of step ST1610 is referred to as “Unicast side intermittent reception”. As a result, the mobile terminal can transmit uplink data to the network side in the unicast / mixed frequency layer. Therefore, a method for transmitting a response to a paging signal in a unicast / mixed frequency layer by a mobile terminal that has received the paging signal in an MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer without an uplink, and a mobile communication system therefor are disclosed. I can do it.

  In step ST1611, the mobile terminal notifies the network side that MBMS reception in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission is to be terminated. Hereinafter, the process of step ST1611 is referred to as “MBMS reception end”. Through this step ST1611, the network side can know that the mobile terminal ends the reception of the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. Accordingly, the configuration in which the network side notifies the paging signal to the mobile terminal in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission can be stopped. As a result, it becomes possible to cancel the paging signal to the mobile terminal from the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission that is not received by the mobile terminal as a mobile communication system, and there is an effect of effective use of radio resources. .

  Hereinafter, a specific example of the processing flow of the mobile communication system described in FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart for explaining cell selection on the unicast side. In Step ST1701, a unicast cell, an MBMS / unicast mixed cell (also simply referred to as a mixed cell) is a first synchronization channel (Primary Synchronization Channel: P-SCH) and a second synchronization channel (Secondary Synchronization Channel: S-SCH) and a reference signal (also referred to as reference symbol: Reference Symbol: RS) are broadcast to the mobile terminals being served thereby. In Step ST1702, the mobile terminal receives P-SCH, S-SCH, and RS from the base station (unicast cell or / and mixed cell). In Step ST1703, the mobile terminal performs an initial cell search operation using the received P-SCH, S-SCH, and RS. Details of the cell search operation currently being discussed in 3GPP will be described. As a first step, the mobile terminal performs blind detection on a first synchronization channel (P-SCH) in which three types of defined sequences exist as a mobile communication system. The P-SCH is mapped to the center 72 subcarriers of the system bandwidth as a frequency and first (# 0) and sixth (# 5) for each radio frame in terms of time. Therefore, the mobile terminal that has detected the P-SCH blindly can detect the 5 ms timing and know the cell group (1 to 3 groups corresponding to the previous P-SCH 3-week sequence). As a second step, the mobile terminal performs blind detection on the second synchronization channel (S-SCH). The mapping position of S-SCH is the same as that of P-SCH. A mobile terminal that blindly detects S-SCH can detect 10 ms timing detection (frame synchronization) and a cell identifier (Cell ID).

  In step ST1704, the mobile terminal performs cell selection. Cell selection is a process of selecting one base station that satisfies a condition that can be a serving base station (cell) by using a measurement result obtained by the mobile terminal measuring downlink reception sensitivities from a plurality of base stations. Specific examples of conditions that can serve as a serving base station include those having the best reception sensitivity among downlink reception sensitivities from a plurality of base stations, or base stations that have exceeded the minimum threshold of reception sensitivity of the serving base station. It is done. Values actually measured by the mobile terminal include reference symbol received power (RSRP), E-UTRA carrier received signal strength indicator (RSSI), and the like. A serving base station is a base station that is responsible for scheduling of the mobile terminal. Even a base station other than the serving base station of the mobile terminal can be a serving base station for other mobile terminals. That is, all base stations of a unicast cell or a mixed MBMS / unicast cell have a scheduling function and can serve as a serving base station for any mobile terminal. In Step ST1705, the unicast cell and the MBMS / unicast mixed cell transmit broadcast information using a broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is one of logical channels. Specific examples of the broadcast information include a measurement cycle, an intermittent reception cycle, tracking area information (TA information), and the like. The measurement cycle is a cycle notified from the network side to a mobile terminal being served by the network, and the mobile terminal measures the electric field strength and the like according to this cycle. The intermittent reception period is a period for periodically monitoring the paging signal so that the mobile terminal receives the paging signal in the idle state. TA information is information related to a “Tracking Area”. The MME starts a paging process by sending a paging message to each eNB belonging to the tracking area in which the UE is registered (TS36.300 19.2.2.1). In Step ST1706, the mobile terminal receives a measurement period, an intermittent reception period, TA information, and the like from the serving base station via the BCCH.

  In Step ST1707, the unicast cell and the MBMS / unicast mixed cell use BCCH to the mobile terminal, the frequency of the MBMS service that can be used, that is, the frequency of the receivable MBSFN synchronization area (MBSFN Synchronization Area) (f (Referred to as “MBMS”). In the W-CDMA communication system, there is a parameter called preferred frequency information (Preferred frequency information: PL information). The PL information is mapped to a multicast control channel (MCCH), which is a logical channel, on the network side, and is broadcast to mobile terminals being served thereby. However, in the LTE system, it is planned to provide a unicast cell that does not provide an MBMS service. In such a unicast cell, a method of broadcasting f (MBMS) using MCCH, which is an MBMS channel, is adopted. There is a problem that you can not.

  In Step ST1708, the mobile terminal receives f (MBMS) transmitted from the serving base station using BCCH. When the mobile terminal receives f (MBMS), it is not necessary for the mobile terminal to comprehensively search for frequencies that may have a service other than the current frequency. This has the effect of shortening the control delay until the mobile terminal receives a service from a frequency other than the current frequency. Step ST1707 and step ST1708 are detailed specific examples of “informing about receivable MBMS” described in the eleventh embodiment. Here, if f (MBMS) is determined to be static (Static) or quasi-static (Semi-Static) as the mobile communication system, the mobile terminal does not broadcast f (MBMS) from the base station. It is possible to obtain an effect that the control delay until the service is received from a frequency other than the current frequency is shortened. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to report f (MBMS), the effect of effective use of radio resources can also be obtained.

  On the other hand, in step ST1707 and step ST1708, in addition to f (MBMS), the system bandwidth and the number of transmission antennas in each f (MBMS) can be reported from the base station using BCCH. As a result, in step ST1708, the mobile terminal receives f (MBMS) transmitted from the serving base station using BCCH, thereby enabling system information (system bandwidth, transmission antenna) in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that the control delay can be shortened. Because it is necessary to receive BCCH from the serving base station in the unicast / frequency layer in order to receive f (MBMS), even if the information (system bandwidth, number of transmission antennas) increases, the processing of the mobile terminal The time should not be so long. On the other hand, in order to acquire the system information of the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer after moving to the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer, it is necessary to receive information in the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer. Since decoding processing is necessary, a control delay occurs.

  In Step ST1709, the mobile terminal includes the TA information of the serving base station received in Step ST1706 in the current tracking area list (TA List) stored in the protocol processing unit 1101 or the control unit 1110. Check. If included, the process proceeds to step ST1720 in FIG. If not included, step ST1710 is executed. In Step ST1710, the mobile terminal notifies the serving base station of an “Attach Request”. As information included in the “attach request”, an identifier of a mobile terminal (IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) or S-TMSI (S-Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity, S-TMSI) is simply referred to as Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity (TMSI). The serving base station that has received the “attach request” in step ST1711 sends the “attach request” to the MME (Mobility Management Entity) or HSS in step ST1712. In step ST1713, the MME receives an “attach request.” The idle state mobility management unit 1305-3 of the MME manages the tracking area list of each mobile terminal. MME is managing the mobile terminal It is confirmed whether or not the serving base station of the mobile terminal is included in the tracking area list, and if it is included, the process proceeds to step ST1716 of Fig. 18. Otherwise, step ST1715 is executed. Then, the idle state mobility management unit 1305-3 of the MME performs a process of adding (or updating) the TA information of the serving base station of the mobile terminal to the tracking area list managed by the mobile terminal in Step ST1716. The MME notifies the serving base station of “Attach Accept.” Information included in the “Attach Accept” includes a tracking area list, an identifier (S-TMSI, etc.) given to the mobile terminal, and the like. “Attach Accept” at ST1717 Received serving base station, the "attach accept" in step ST1718 notifies to the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal, in step ST1719 receives the "attach accept".

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the MBMS search process. Steps 1720 to 1725 in FIG. 18 are specific processing of “MBMS search” described in the eleventh embodiment. In Step ST1720, the mobile terminal confirms whether or not the frequency of the MBSFN synchronization area that can be received in Step ST1708 (or the frequency of the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission) has been received. That is, it is confirmed whether at least one f (MBMS) has been received. If it does not exist, the process ends. If present, step ST1721 is executed. In Step ST1721, the mobile terminal confirms whether or not the user intends to receive the MBMS service at f (MBMS). As a specific example of the confirmation, when the user has an intention to receive the MBMS service, an instruction is sent to the mobile terminal using the user interface, and the mobile terminal stores the user's intention in the protocol processing unit 1101. In step ST1721, the mobile terminal confirms whether or not it intends to receive the MBMS service stored in the protocol processing unit 1101. If there is no intention to receive the MBMS service, the process of step ST1721 is repeated. As a method of repeating, a method in which the mobile terminal performs the determination in step ST1721 at a constant period, or a method in which step ST1721 or step ST1720 is performed when there is a notification of change of intention to receive the MBMS service from the user through the user interface. and so on. If there is an intention to receive the MBMS service, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST1722. In Step ST1722, the mobile terminal changes the set frequency of the frequency conversion unit 1107 (synthesizer), and starts the MBMS search operation by changing the center frequency to f (MBMS). Changing the set frequency of the frequency conversion unit 1107 and changing the center frequency is referred to as re-tune. In Step ST1723, the MBMS dedicated cell is served by the first synchronization channel (Primary Synchronization Signal: P-SCH), the second synchronization channel (Secondary Synchronization Signal: S-SCH), the reference signal (RS (MBMS)), and the BCCH. Informs the mobile terminal. In Step ST1724, the mobile terminal receives P-SCH, S-SCH, RS (MBMS), and BCCH (broadcast control channel) from the MBMS dedicated cell.

  In step ST1725, the mobile terminal performs an MBMS search operation. A search operation in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission currently being discussed in 3GPP will be described. A sequence used exclusively in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission is added to the P-SCH. Additional dedicated sequences shall be defined statically. As a first step, the mobile terminal blind-detects the P-SCH with an additional dedicated sequence. The P-SCH is mapped to the center 72 subcarriers of the system bandwidth in terms of frequency, and to the first (# 0) and sixth (# 5) in terms of time for each radio frame. Therefore, the mobile terminal that has detected P-SCH blindly can detect the timing for 5 ms. In addition, P-SCH is transmitted in multicell. As a second stage, the mobile terminal performs blind detection on the S-SCH. The mapping position of S-SCH is the same as that of P-SCH. A mobile terminal that blindly detects S-SCH can detect 10 ms timing detection (frame synchronization) and the MBSFN area ID. S-SCH is transmitted in multicell. The BCCH is received using the scrambling code associated with the MBSFN area ID obtained in the second stage. The mobile terminal can obtain MCCH (multicast control channel) scheduling by decoding BCCH. This decoding process uses a scrambling code associated with the MBSFN area ID. BCCH is transmitted in multicell. In the present invention, it is assumed that the system bandwidth in f (MBMS) and the number of transmission antennas in f (MBMS) can be obtained by further decoding BCCH. Here, if the system bandwidth and the number of transmission antennas in f (MBMS) as a mobile communication system are determined to be static (Static) or quasi-static (Semi-Static), the base station uses f (MBMS). There is no need to report the system bandwidth or / and the number of transmission antennas, and the effect of effective use of radio resources can be obtained. Further, since it is not necessary to decode and change the parameters (system bandwidth or / and the number of transmission antennas in f (MBMS)), it is possible to obtain the effects of reducing the power consumption of the mobile terminal and reducing the control delay.

  In the present invention, the MCCH scheduling performed in step ST1725 is further examined. In the current 3GPP standard, an MBSFN synchronization area (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network Synchronization Area f (MBMS)) can support one or more MBSFN areas (MBSFN Areas) (see FIG. 7). . On the other hand, it is not determined how to multiplex a plurality of MBSFN areas with f (MBMS), which is a single frequency (Single Frequency). Here, the “MBMS search” process will be described for each multiplexing method so that the present invention can be applied even when the multiplexing method of the MBSFN area is different.

  FIG. 60 shows the configuration of PMCH provided for each MBSFN area. FIG. 60 shows time division multiplexing (TDM) for each MBSFN area. Cell # n1 (cell # n2, cell # n3) is a cell in MBSFN area 1 (MBSFN area 2, MBSFN area 3). In the current 3GPP, non-patent document 2 discusses allocation of MBSFN subframes in mixed cells. However, since there is no unicast subframe in the MBMS dedicated cell, all of them are MBSFN subframes. Therefore, the discussion of Non-Patent Document 2 cannot be used as it is. However, unifying the configurations of the mixed cell and the MBMS dedicated cell as much as possible is important to avoid complication of the mobile communication system. Therefore, after following the concept of “MBSFN frame cluster” (MBSFN frame cluster) disclosed in Non-Patent Document 2, a method for scheduling an MBMS dedicated cell is disclosed. Further, Non-Patent Document 2 is different from the present invention in that it does not mention scheduling of MCCH in the MBSFN subframe. Specific examples of MCCH scheduling are not discussed. The present invention shows a specific example of MCCH scheduling.

  Since the cell of the cell # n1 belongs to the MBSFN area 1, the PMCH corresponding to the MBSFN area is transmitted at a certain time. Since PMCH is transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN area, it is transmitted on the MBSFN subframe. A set of MBSFN frames to which MBSFN subframes are allocated is referred to as an “MBSFN frame cluster”. In the MBMS dedicated cell, all subframes in the MBSFN frame may be MBSFN subframes used for multicell transmission. A period in which the MBSFN frame cluster is repeated is referred to as an “MBSFN frame cluster repetition period”. One or a plurality of MBMS transport channels MCH are mapped to the PMCH, and one or both of the logical channel MCCH for MBMS control information and the logical channel MTCH for MBMS data are mapped to the MCH. MCCH and MTCH may be temporally divided and mapped onto PMCH, or may be further temporally divided and mapped to a physical region that is transmitted in multicell. For example, MBSFN subframes, which are physical areas to which MTCH and MCCH are mapped, may be different. MCCH may be mapped on each MBSFN frame cluster or only MTCH. When only MTCH exists, the MCCH repetition period is different from the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period. In some cases, a plurality of MCCHs are mapped on the MBSFN frame cluster.

  In FIG. 60, a cell of cell # n1 (cell # n2, cell # n3) belongs to MBSFN area 1 (MBSFN area 2, MBSFN area 3), and is transmitted at a certain time with a PMCH corresponding to each MBSFN area. MCCH1 (MCCH2, MCCH3) is MBMS control information for MBSFN area 1 (MBSFN area 2, MBSFN area 3), and MTCH1 (MTCH2, MTCH3) is MBMS data for MBSFN area 1 (MBSFN area 2, MBSFN area 3). is there. The MCCH repetition period may be different for each MBSFN area. In the figure, the MCCH repetition period of cell # n1 (cell # n2) is written as “MCCH Repetition period1 (2)”. The PMCH for each MBSFN area is time-division multiplexed. Therefore, the orthogonality of cells between MBSFN areas is obtained in the MBSFN synchronization area where synchronization between cells is ensured, and interference from cells in other MBSFN areas is prevented. I can prevent it. Since multi-cell transmission is used in the MBSFN area, the cells in each MBSFN area transmit the same data on the same PMCH. Even if a plurality of MBSFN areas overlap in one cell, the PMCH configuration can be applied while maintaining orthogonality between the MBSFN areas.

Details of MCCH scheduling will be described. A case where the MBSFN frame cluster is smaller than the MCCH repetition period will be described. The case where the MBSFN frame cluster is longer than the MCCH repetition period will be described later. Let us consider notifying the starting point value of the time to which the MCCH is mapped and the MCCH repetition period as MCCH scheduling. More specifically, SFN (System Frame Number) is used to specify the starting point value. A specific calculation formula for obtaining the MCCH starting point value is as follows.
MCCH starting point value = (first SFN number to which MCCH is mapped) mod (MCCH Repeat Period)
In FIG. 60, the MCCH starting point value 1 of the MBSFN area 1 is 1 mod 18 = 1 or 19 mod 8 = 1... 1 “1”. The MCCH starting point value 2 of the MBSFN area 2 is 4 mod 9 = 4 or 13 mod 9 = 4 or 22 mod 9 = 4... “4”. The same applies to the MBSFN area 3. If the system frame number SFN at this time is mapped to the BCCH, it is broadcast every subframe, and is effective when receiving the MCCH from the MCCH starting point value. Further, when the MCCH is mapped to some subframes in the radio frame, SFN and subframe number may be notified as a starting point.

  That is, the data transmitted from the base station (cell) belonging to the MBSFN area 1, for example, the cell # n1, is as follows. MB-MS transmission-dedicated frequency layer-dedicated sequence P-SCH, MBSFN area ID1, etc. mapped S-SCH1, MCCH starting point value 1 “1”, MCCH repetition period 1 “18”, etc. are mapped and spread BCCH1 to which code 1 (Scrambling code1) is applied, MCCH1 and MTCH1 in MBSFN area 1 are transmitted. The resources of MCCH 2 and 3 and MTCH 2 and 3 from the base stations belonging to MBSFN areas 2 and 3 are turned off (DTX: Discontinuous transmission). MCCH1 and MTCH2 may be multiplied by spreading code 1. By applying a spreading code to MCCH1 and MTCH1, it is possible to obtain an effect that the processing to data specific to the MBSFN area (BCCH, MCCH, MTCH) is unified. Conversely, since MCCH and MTCH are time-division multiplexed between areas, it is not necessary to apply a spreading code specific to the MBSFN area. By not applying spreading codes to MCCH1 and MTCH1, it is possible to reduce the load of the encoding process on the base station side and the decoding process on the mobile terminal side and reduce the delay until data reception.

  Similar to the MBSFN area 1, data transmitted from the MBSFN area 2 is as follows. MB-MS transmission-dedicated frequency layer sequence P-SCH, MBSFN area ID2 etc. mapped S-SCH2, MCCH starting point value 2 “4”, MCCH repetition period 2 “9” etc. are mapped and spread BCCH2 to which code 2 is applied, MCCH2 and MTCH2 of MBSFN area 2 are transmitted. The resources of MCCH 1 and 3 and MTCH 1 and 3 from the base stations belonging to MBSFN areas 1 and 3 are turned off (DTX). The same applies to MBSFN Area3. Although FIG. 60 shows an example in which MCCH and MTCH are time-divided in units of subframes for convenience, even if the multiplexing method of MCCH and MTCH is different, the unit of time-division multiplexing is not in units of subframes. Even if it exists, this invention is applicable. Moreover, if the MCCH repetition period is determined as static (Static) or quasi-static (Semi-Static) as a mobile communication system, there is no need to report the MCCH repetition period from the base station. Since the information to be notified is reduced, the effect of effective use of radio resources can be obtained.

  FIG. 61 shows the configuration of PMCH provided for each MBSFN area. In FIG. 61, PMCH is code division multiplexed for each MBSFN area. Cell # n1 (cell # n2, cell # n3) is a cell in MBSFN area 1 (MBSFN area 2, MBSFN area 3). The PMCH corresponding to MBSFN area 1 is transmitted in the cell of cell # n1. Here, the PMCH may be continuous in time or discontinuous. In the case of discontinuity, the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period (MBSFN frame cluster Repetition period) matches the period in which the MBSFN frame cluster in which the PMCH corresponding to the MBSFN area is transmitted is repeated. Moreover, the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period (MBSFN frame cluster repetition period) in the case of continuous may be zero. In the case of continuous, the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period may not be explicitly notified. MCCH and MTCH may be temporally divided and mapped onto PMCH, or may be further temporally divided and mapped to a physical region that is transmitted in multicell. For example, MBSFN subframes that are physical areas to which MTCH and MCCH are mapped as a result may be different. The cycle in which the MCCH is repeated is defined as MCCH repetition cycle 1.

  Similarly, the PMCH corresponding to MBSFN area 2 (MBSFN area 3) is transmitted in the cell of cell # n2 (cell # n3). The MCCH repetition period may be different for each MBSFN area. The MCCH repetition period of cell # n2 (cell # n3) is MCCH repetition period 2 (MCCH repetition period 3). Since the data multiplied by the spreading code specific to the MBSFN area is mapped to the PMCH for each MBSFN area, interference between MBSFN areas can be suppressed in the MBSFN synchronization area in which synchronization between cells is ensured. Since multi-cell transmission is used in the MBSFN area, cells in each MBSFN area transmit the same data on the same PMCH, that is, data multiplied by a spreading code unique to the MBSFN area. Even if a plurality of MBSFN areas overlap in one cell, the PMCH configuration can be applied while suppressing interference between the MBSFN areas.

Data (P-SCH, S-SCH, BCCH) transmitted from each MBSFN area is the same as that described above for time division multiplexing, and thus the description thereof is omitted. The specific example of MCCH scheduling is also the same as described above for time division multiplexing. In the present invention, since the “starting point value of the time when MCCH is mapped” and “MCCH repetition period” are used for MCCH scheduling, it is considered that the cell notifies the terminal. More specifically, SFN (System Frame Number) is used to designate the offset value. A specific calculation formula for obtaining the starting point value is represented by the following formula.
MCCH starting point value = (first SFN number to which MCCH is mapped) mod (MCCH Repeat Period)

  In FIG. 61, the MCCH starting point value of MBSFN area 1 is 1 mod 9 = 1, 10 mod 9 = 1..., And the MCCH scheduling parameter of MBSFN area 1 is MCCH repetition period 1 “9” The value is “1”. The MCCH starting point value of MBSFN Area 2 is 4 mod 12 = 4, or 16 mod 12 = 4. . The same applies to MBSFN Area3. Further, when the MCCH is mapped to some subframes in the radio frame, SFN and subframe number may be notified as a starting point.

That is, as data transmitted from a base station (cell) belonging to MBSFN area 1, for example, cell # n1, S-SCH1 in which P-SCH, MBSFN area ID1, and the like, which are sequences dedicated to the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, are mapped. MCCH starting point value 1 “1” and MCCH repetition period 1 “9”. These data are mapped to BCCH1, MCCH1, and MTCH1, and further spread by spreading code 1 and transmitted. The same applies to the MBSFN areas 2 and 3.
FIG. 61 shows an example in which MCCH and MTCH are time-divided in units of subframes for convenience. However, even if the multiplexing method of MCCH and MTCH is different, the unit of time-division multiplexing is not in units of subframes. Even if it exists, this invention is applicable. Moreover, if the MCCH repetition period is determined as static (Static) or quasi-static (Semi-Static) as a mobile communication system, there is no need to report the MCCH repetition period from the base station. Since the information to be notified is reduced, the effect of effective use of radio resources can be obtained. Further, when MBSFN areas are code division multiplexed, different repetition periods can be set for each MBSFN area. Therefore, the MBMS service can be scheduled with a high degree of freedom as compared with the case of MBSFN area time division multiplexing. Can be obtained. In addition, even when the mobile terminal receives MTCH and MCCH from a plurality of MBSFN areas, they can be separated, so that MTCH and MCCH can be transmitted simultaneously from MBSFN areas 1 to 3, and one MBSFN can be transmitted. It is possible to obtain an effect that the frequency and time radio resources allocated to the area are expanded.

  Next, “MBMS area information acquisition” in step ST1603 in FIG. 16 will be described more specifically with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 as appropriate. The MCCH (multicast control channel) in each MBSFN area considers multi-cell transmission. Therefore, in step ST1726 in FIG. 18, the MCE transmits the contents of the MCCH and the assignment of radio resources for transmitting the MCCH to the base station in the MBSFN area. In Step ST1727, each MBMS dedicated base station receives the contents of the MCCH and assignment of radio resources for transmitting the MCCH from the MCE. In step ST1728 of FIG. 19, each base station performs MBMS area information, discontinuous reception (DRX) information, MBMS reception time missing reception parameters (specifically, the number of paging groups is K) according to radio resources allocated from the MCE. Control information such as is transmitted by multi-cell using MCCH. In Step ST1729, the mobile terminal receives MCCH from each base station in the MBSFN area. MCCH reception uses the scheduling of MCCH received from the network side in step ST1725.

A specific example of the reception method will be described. As a representative, a case will be described in which each MBSFN area is time-division multiplexed as shown in FIG. A case where the mobile terminal is located in cell # n1 belonging to MBSFN area 1 will be described. By decoding BCCH1 (broadcast control channel), the mobile terminal receives the starting point value 1 “1” and the MCCH repetition period 1 (MCCH Repetition Period) “7” as the scheduling parameters of MCCH1. If SFN (System Frame Number) is mapped to BCCH, the mobile terminal can know the SFN number by decoding BCCH. The mobile terminal can obtain the SFN number to which the MCCH is mapped by the following formula.
SFN = MCCH repetition period 1 × α + starting point value 1 (α is a positive integer)

  The mobile terminal can receive MCCH1 by receiving and decoding the radio resource of the SFN number to which MCCH1 is mapped. Control information for MBMS service transmitted in multicell from MBSFN area 1 is mapped to MCCH1. Specific examples of the control information include MBMS area information, DRX information, MBMS reception time missing reception parameters, and the like.

  A specific example of MBMS area information will be described with reference to FIG. As MBMS area information, the frame configuration (MBSFN frame cluster, MBSFN subframe), service content, MTCH modulation information, and the like of each area can be considered. As the MBSFN frame cluster 1, the number of frames in the set of frames allocated to the MBSFN area 1 within one MBSFN frame cluster repetition period is notified. As MBSFN subframe 1, a subframe number in which MBMS data (MTCH or / and MCCH) is actually mapped in one radio frame in MBSFN frame cluster 1 is notified. In providing an MBMS service using an MBMS dedicated base station, unlike an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, it is not necessary to share radio resources with unicast data. Therefore, MBMS data can be mapped to all subframes in one radio frame (except for the P-SCH, S-SCH, and BCCH mapping portions). When mapping MBMS data to all subframes, it is not necessary to notify the parameters of the MBSFN subframe from the network side to the mobile terminal side. Thereby, effective utilization of radio resources can be achieved. Alternatively, when MBMS data is statically transmitted from an MBMS dedicated cell as a wireless communication system, it is possible to transmit a large amount of MBMS data by mapping the MBMS data to all subframes. Since it is not necessary to notify the parameter of the MBSFN subframe, it is possible to further effectively use radio resources. As the service content, the service content performed in the MBMS area 1 is notified. When a plurality of services (movies and sports broadcasts, etc.) are performed in the MBSFN area 1, a plurality of service contents and their multiple parameters are notified.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a relationship between a DRX period in which transmission of MBMS data to a mobile terminal is stopped and reception of MBMS data at the mobile terminal is stopped, and a DRX period in which the DRX period is repeated. . A specific example of DRX (Discontinuous reception) information will be described with reference to FIG. As a solution that enables mobility management of mobile terminals even in the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer configured by the MBMS dedicated base station, which is the subject of the present invention, the MBMS service is being received in the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer. However, the unicast / mixed frequency layer measurement is disclosed. Thereby, the effect that it becomes possible to ensure the mobility in a MBMS exclusive cell without an uplink via a unicast / mixed cell can be acquired. Therefore, even for a mobile terminal that is receiving an MBMS service in an MBMS transmission dedicated cell, it is necessary to measure a unicast cell and an MBMS / unicast mixed cell at a fixed period. In the conventional method (3GPP W-CDMA), the measurement period is an integral multiple of the intermittent reception period and is notified to the mobile terminal from the network side in the upper layer.

  Here, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell applies the measurement in the measurement cycle notified from the upper layer of the unicast cell and the MBMS / unicast mixed cell by applying the conventional method. If so, the base station constituting the MBMSFN synchronization area of the MBMSFN dedicated frequency cell and the base station constituting the unicast / mixed frequency layer are not synchronized (asynchronous) with each other. In order to perform this, there arises a problem that the MBMS reception must be interrupted.

  Therefore, in the present invention, as a solution to the above problem, one DRX period is provided in the MBSFN synchronization area (see FIG. 62). The DRX period is a period in which transmission of MBMS data from the network side to the mobile terminal is stopped with respect to the MBMS service in all MBSFN areas in the MBSFN synchronization area, that is, a period in which MBMS data is not received when viewed from the mobile terminal side. I mean. The mobile terminal using the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer uses the MBMS service by performing measurement of the unicast cell and the MBMS / unicast mixed cell during the DRX period in which MBMS data is not transmitted from the network side. The effect of eliminating the need to interrupt is obtained. Further, by providing the DRX period in the MBSFN synchronization area, the mobile terminal can simultaneously receive MBMS data from the MBSFN area in the MBSFN synchronization area without adding any control.

  Next, the DRX cycle shown in FIG. 62 will be described. The DRX cycle is a cycle in which the DRX period described above is repeated. In the conventional method, the measurement cycle is set (notified) from the network side to the mobile terminal. If this method is followed also in LTE, if a mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer performs measurement in the unicast / mixed frequency layer in the DRX period, the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency is used. It is necessary to notify the control device (base station, MME, PDNGW, etc.) on the unicast cell, MBMS / unicast mixed cell side through any route of the DRX cycle and DRX period information of the layer. Furthermore, since the base stations constituting the unicast / mixed frequency layer are basically configured asynchronously, the DRX cycle and DRX period of the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer are set to each unicast cell or each MBMS / unicast. It becomes necessary to notify the mixed cell. This method complicates the mobile communication system and is not preferable. Therefore, the present invention discloses the following method.

  The DRX period in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer includes at least one measurement cycle in the unicast / mixed frequency layer. Thereby, no matter what measurement cycle is notified (set) to the mobile terminal in the unicast cell, MBMS / unicast mixed cell, in the DRX period provided in the DRX cycle in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, If measurement of the unicast / mixed frequency layer is performed, the measurement cycle notified from the network side can be satisfied. By adopting this method, the MBMS transmission dedicated cell is controlled from the MBMS transmission dedicated cell control device (base station, MCE, MBMS gateway, eBNSC, etc.) to the unicast cell, MBMS / unicast mixed cell control device. There is no need to notify the DRX cycle or DRX period. Therefore, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the MBSFN transmission dedicated frequency layer interrupts the reception of the MBMS service while preventing the mobile communication system from becoming complicated, that is, avoiding additional signaling on the radio interface or in the network. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that the measurement can be executed in the measurement cycle notified (set) by the unicast cell or the MBMS / unicast mixed cell to the mobile terminal.

  The DRX cycle in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell is the minimum value of the measurement cycle that can be taken by the unicast cell or the unicast / mixed frequency cell or a divisor of the minimum value. A measurement cycle that can be set for a mobile terminal that is receiving an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission in a unicast cell or a mixed MBMS / unicast cell is a measurement cycle that can be taken in the unicast / mixed frequency layer. If they are different, the DRX cycle is approximately the measurement cycle that can be set for the mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, or the minimum value of the measurement cycle, or the minimum value of the measurement cycle. It is a number. Thereby, no matter what measurement cycle is notified (set) to the mobile terminal in the unicast cell, MBMS / unicast mixed cell, in the DRX period provided in the DRX cycle in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, If measurement of the unicast / mixed frequency layer is performed, the measurement cycle notified from the network side can be satisfied. By adopting this method, the MBMS transmission dedicated cell is controlled from the MBMS transmission dedicated cell control device (base station, MCE, MBMS gateway, eBNSC, etc.) to the unicast cell, MBMS / unicast mixed cell control device. There is no need to notify the DRX cycle or DRX period. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect of preventing the mobile communication system from being complicated, that is, avoiding additional signaling on the radio interface or in the network. Also, broadcast information may be acquired from the serving cell of the unicast / mixed frequency layer in the DRX period, and for example, it is possible to cope with the case where the broadcast information in the serving cell is modified.

  A specific parameter example of the DRX information will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, DRX information parameters may include a DRX period, a DRX cycle, and a starting point value (DRX). Specifically, the number of radio frames is used to specify the DRX period and the DRX cycle. In FIG. 62, the DRX period is “4” radio frames (a period between SFN4 and SFN7). The DRX cycle is “7” radio frames (periods from SFN4 to SFN10). Further, SFN is used to specify the starting point value (DRX) at which the DRX period starts. Specific examples of the DRX period and DRX cycle other than the number of radio frames may include subframes. Other than SFN may be used to specify the starting point value. Specific examples include an offset value from some reference value. When the DRX period is a part of subframes in a radio frame, the SFN and the subframe number may be notified as a starting point. A specific calculation formula for obtaining the starting point value (DRX) is the starting point value (DRX) = (first SFN number at which the DRX period starts) mod (DRX cycle). In FIG. 62, the starting point value (DRX) is 4 mod 7 = 4 or 11 mod 7 = 4. Here, an example is shown in which SFN is used to specify the starting point value (DRX). Here, an example in which one DRX period is provided in the MBSFN synchronization area has been described. Therefore, the starting point value (DRX) is also common to the base stations in the MBSFN synchronization area. Consider a case where SFN is used as a starting point value (DRX). Assume that the same number is transmitted from the base station in the MBSFN synchronization area at the same timing. In the above, an example has been described in which DRX information is mapped to MCCH and notified from a base station in MBSFN Area to a mobile terminal. Similarly, the same effect can be obtained by mapping DRX information to BCCH and notifying a mobile terminal from a base station in the MBSFN area. Furthermore, the same effect can be obtained by mapping DRX information to BCCH and notifying the mobile terminal from the serving base station. Furthermore, the same effect can be obtained even if the DRX information is determined to be static or semi-static. This eliminates the need for notification, so that the effect of effective use of radio resources can also be obtained.

A specific example of the MBMS reception time missing reception parameter will be further described. Non-Patent Document 1 discloses that a paging group is notified by an L1 / L2 signaling channel (PDCCH). Whether or not the L1 / L2 signaling channel exists in the radio resource transmitted from the MBMS dedicated cell has not yet been determined. In this embodiment, it is assumed that there is no L1 / L2 signaling channel in radio resources transmitted from an MBMS dedicated cell. However, it is preferable that the paging notification methods for the unicast cell, MBMS / unicast mixed cell, and MBMS transmission dedicated cell existing in the same mobile communication system called LTE be unified as much as possible. This is because the unification of the mobile communication system can be avoided by unifying. In the following description, the number of paging groups (hereinafter referred to as K MBMS ) is considered as a parameter for reception of missing MBMS reception time.

  Next, “MBMS service selection” described with reference to FIG. 16 will be described more specifically. In step ST1730 in FIG. 19, the mobile terminal confirms the service content included in the MBMS area information in order to know whether the user-desired service is being performed in the corresponding MBMS area. When a user-desired service is performed in the MBSFN area, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST1731. If the service desired by the user is not provided, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST1733. In Step ST1731, the mobile terminal receives a reference signal (RS) using radio resources in the MBSFN area and measures received power (RSRP). It is determined whether or not the received power is equal to or greater than a threshold value determined statically or semi-statically. If the threshold value is equal to or greater than the threshold value, it indicates that the sensitivity is satisfactory for receiving the MBMS service, and if the threshold value is less than the threshold value, it indicates that the sensitivity is not sufficient for receiving the MBMS service. If it is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the process proceeds to step ST1732, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value, the process proceeds to step ST1733. In Step ST1732, the mobile terminal acquires a frequency f (MBMS) dedicated to MBMS transmission and an MBSFN area ID for the user to receive a desired MBMS service. On the other hand, in step ST1733, the mobile terminal determines whether there is another MBMS area that can be received within the same frequency (f (MBMS)). If there is another MBMS area that can be received within the same frequency (f (MBMS)), the process returns to step ST1730 and is repeated. When it does not exist, it transfers to step ST1734. In step 1734, the mobile terminal determines whether another frequency exists in the frequency list of the receivable MBSFN synchronization area received in step ST1708. If it exists, the process returns to step ST1722, and the process is repeated by switching the synthesizer to a new frequency (f2 (MBMS)). If not, the process returns to step ST1720 and repeats the process. Further, instead of receiving the reference signal in step 1731 and measuring the received power, it is also possible to actually receive and decode the MBMS service (MTCH or / and MCCH) in the MBSFN area. In this case, the user himself / herself can determine whether or not the reception sensitivity is acceptable by listening or viewing the decoded data. If permitted, the process proceeds to step ST1732, and if not permitted, the process proceeds to step ST1733. Since there are individual differences in permissible reception sensitivity for each user, an effect of becoming a mobile terminal more suitable for the user can be obtained.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the unicast side measurement process. In Step ST1753 of FIG. 58, the mobile terminal determines whether the DRX period start timing of the MBMS service has arrived using the DRX information received in Step ST1729 of FIG. As a specific example, the first SFN number at which the DRX period starts is obtained using the DRX cycle and the starting point value (DRX) of the parameter example received in step ST1729, and the SFN mapped to BCCH (broadcast control channel) or the like. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not it is the DRX period start timing. When it is not a start timing, it transfers to step ST1772. When it is a start timing, it transfers to step ST1754. A mobile terminal judges whether it is the measurement period in the MBMS / unicast mixed cell received in step ST1705 in step ST1754. When it is not a measurement cycle, it transfers to step ST1772. When it is a measurement cycle, it transfers to step ST1755. In Step ST1755, the mobile terminal changes the set frequency of the frequency conversion unit 1107 (synthesizer) and changes the center frequency to f (Unicast) to receive the downlink signal of the MBMS / unicast mixed cell. In Step ST1756, the mobile terminal performs measurement on the unicast side (unicast cell or / and MBMS / unicast mixed cell). As values actually measured by the mobile terminal, RSRP, RSSI, etc. of the serving cell and the neighboring cells are conceivable. The information on neighboring cells may be broadcast from the serving cell as neighboring cell information (list).

  In Step ST1757, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the serving cell re-selection is necessary as a result of the measurement in Step ST1756. As a specific example of the determination, there may be a case where the measurement result of one cell among the neighboring cells exceeds the measurement result of the serving cell. If reselection is not necessary, the process proceeds to step ST1771. If reselection is necessary, steps ST1758 and 1759 are executed. A base station (new serving cell) newly selected as a serving cell in step 1758 is subordinate to the measurement period, intermittent reception period, and tracking area information (TA information) in BCCH (broadcast control channel) as in step ST1705. Informs the mobile terminal. In Step ST1759, the mobile terminal receives the BCCH from the new serving cell and decodes it, thereby receiving the measurement period, intermittent reception period, and TA information. In Step ST1760, the mobile terminal includes the TA information of the serving base station received in Step ST1759 in the current tracking area list (TA List) stored in the protocol processing unit 1101 or the control unit 1110. Check. If included, the process proceeds to ST1771. If not included, step ST1761 is executed. The description from step ST1761 to step ST1770 is the same as the description from step ST1710 to step ST1719, and will be omitted. In Step ST1771, the mobile terminal moves to the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission by changing the set frequency of the frequency conversion unit 1107 and changing the center frequency to f (MBMS).

  Through the “unicast side measurement” process from step ST1753 to step ST1771, the mobile terminal can receive the unicast cell and / or the mixed MBMS / unicast cell even when receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer. Measurement is possible. As a result, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer can secure mobility in the unicast cell and / or the MBMS / unicast mixed cell. Thereby, the effect that it becomes possible to ensure the mobility in the MBMS dedicated cell without an uplink via a MBMS / unicast mixed cell can be acquired. Also, a mobile terminal that is receiving a service in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer can establish downlink synchronization through measurement with a unicast cell or a mixed MBMS / unicast cell in accordance with a measurement cycle. Thereby, even when the mobile terminal transmits a message in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, it is possible to obtain an effect that can be realized with a small control delay.

  Next, the “MTCH reception” described in FIG. 16 will be specifically described. In Step ST1772 of FIG. 59, the mobile terminal determines whether it is the MCCH reception timing of the MBSFN area number being received based on the MCCH scheduling information. That is, the mobile terminal determines whether it is the MCCH reception timing using the MCCH (multicast control channel) scheduling received in step ST1725. Specifically, the MCCH repetition period of the parameter example received in step ST1725, the leading SFN number to which the MCCH is mapped is obtained using the starting point value, and the MCCH is mapped based on the SFN mapped to the BCCH or the like. It is determined whether or not it is the head SFN number to which the MCCH is mapped by determining whether or not it is the head. When it is the reception timing of MCCH, it transfers to step ST1840. When it is not the reception timing of MCCH, it transfers to step ST1841. In Step ST1840, the mobile terminal performs MCCH reception / decoding. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step ST1842. In Step ST1841, the mobile terminal determines whether it is the MTCH reception timing using the MCCH scheduling received in Step ST1725 and / or the MBMS Area information received in Step ST1729. When it is the reception timing of MTCH, it transfers to step ST1843. When it is not the reception timing of MTCH, it transfers to step ST1753. In Step ST1842, the mobile terminal determines whether it is the MTCH reception timing using the MCCH scheduling received in Step ST1725 and / or the MBMS Area information received in Step ST1729. When it is the reception timing of MTCH, it transfers to step ST1843. When it is not MTCH reception timing, it transfers to step ST1794. In Step ST1843, the mobile terminal performs MTCH reception / decoding. Then, the process proceeds to step ST1794.

  In ST1794 of FIG. 59, the mobile terminal measures the reception quality of the MBMS service being received. The mobile terminal receives the reference signal (RS) with the radio resource in the MBSFN area and measures the received power (RSRP). It is determined whether or not the received power is equal to or greater than a threshold value determined statically or semi-statically. If the threshold value is equal to or greater than the threshold value, it indicates that the sensitivity is satisfactory for receiving the MBMS service, and if the threshold value is less than the threshold value, it indicates that the sensitivity is not sufficient for receiving the MBMS service. If it is equal to or greater than the threshold, the process proceeds to step ST1795, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold, the process proceeds to step ST1796. Further, instead of receiving the reference signal in step 1794 and measuring the received power, it is also possible to actually receive and decode the MBMS service (MTCH or / and MCCH) in the MBSFN area. In that case, the user himself / herself can determine whether or not the reception sensitivity is acceptable by listening or viewing the decoded data. If allowed, the process proceeds to step ST1795, and if not permitted, the process proceeds to step ST1796. Since there are individual differences in permissible reception sensitivity for each user, an effect of becoming a mobile terminal more suitable for the user can be obtained. In step ST1795, the mobile terminal confirms the user's intention. If the user wants to continue receiving the currently received MBMS service, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST1753. If the user wishes to end the reception of the MBMS service being received, the process ends. In Step ST1796, the mobile terminal determines whether there is another MBMS area that can be received within the same frequency (f (MBMS)). When it exists, it returns to step ST1730 and repeats a process. If not, the process proceeds to step ST1797. In step 1797, the mobile terminal determines whether another frequency exists in the frequency list of the receivable MBSFN synchronization area received in step ST1708. If it exists, the process returns to step ST1722, and the process is repeated by switching the synthesizer to a new frequency (f2 (MBMS)). If it does not exist, the process ends. Also in the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment, there are mobile terminal identifiers used in the unicast / mixed frequency layer and mobile terminal identifiers used in the MBSFN transmission dedicated frequency layer in the mobile communication system as in the mobile communication system. Method can be used.

  In the mobile communication system disclosed above, a method until a desired service is selected in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, and a mobile communication system therefor can be disclosed.

  Next, a modification will be described (Modification 1). In the current 3GPP discussion, it is said that a base station (cell) in an MBSFN synchronization area may constitute a plurality of MBSFN areas. However, as described above, in the current 3GPP, the MBSFN area multiplexing method has not been determined in detail. In the first modification, a specific example of the MBSFN area multiplexing method in such a case will be described, and a method for selecting a desired service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, which is the subject of the present invention, and therefore It is an object to disclose a mobile communication system. In addition, it demonstrates centering around a different part from Embodiment 11, and description of the part similar to Embodiment 11 is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the eleventh embodiment, as the PMCH configuration, a method of time division multiplexing (TDM) for each MBSFN area and code division multiplexing (CDM) for each MBSFN area has been disclosed. In the first modification, a method of mixing time division multiplexing (TDM) and code division multiplexing (CDM) for each MBSFN area as the configuration of the PMCH is disclosed. FIG. 63 shows the configuration of the PMCH provided for each MBSFN area. In FIG. 63, time division multiplexing (TDM) and code division multiplexing are mixed for each MBSFN area. Cell # n1 is a cell in MBSFN area 1, cell # n2 is a cell in MBSFN area 2, and cell # n3 is a cell in MBSFN area 3. Further, the cells # n1, # n2, and # n3 are also cells in the MBSFN area 4. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing a plurality of MBSFN areas constituting an MBSFN synchronization area, and is an explanatory diagram showing an MBSFN area covering a plurality of MBSFN areas. In FIG. 28, MBSFN areas 1 to 4 exist in one MBSFN synchronization area. Among them, MBSFN area 4 covers MBSFN areas 1 to 3. The PMCHs of MBSFN area 1, MBSFN area 2, and MBSFN area 3 are code division multiplexed, and the PMCHs of MBSFN area 1, MBSFN area 2, MBSFN area 3, and PMCH of MBSFN area 4 are time division multiplexed. Since the cell of the cell # n1 belongs to the MBSFN area 1, the PMCH corresponding to the MBSFN area 1 is transmitted at a certain time. Since PMCH is transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN area, it is transmitted on the MBSFN subframe.

  A set of MBSFN frames, which are radio frames to which MBSFN subframes are assigned, is referred to as an “MBSFN frame cluster” (MBSFN frame cluster). In the MBMS dedicated cell, all subframes in the MBSFN frame may be MBSFN subframes used for multicell transmission. A period in which an MBSFN frame cluster corresponding to an MBSFN area is repeated is referred to as an “MBSFN frame cluster repetition period”. The MBCH transport channel MCH is mapped to the PMCH, and either or both of the logical channel MCCH of MBMS control information and the MBMS data logical channel MTCH are mapped to the MCH. MCCH and MTCH may be temporally divided and mapped onto PMCH, or may be further temporally divided and mapped to a physical region that is transmitted in multicell. For example, MBSFN subframes that are physical areas to which MTCH and MCCH are mapped as a result may be different. MCCH may be mapped on each MBSFN frame cluster or only MTCH. When only MTCH exists, the MCCH repetition period is different from the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period. In some cases, a plurality of MCCHs are mapped on the MBSFN frame cluster. The MCCH repetition period is assumed to be “MCCH Repetition period 1”.

  In FIG. 63, MCCH1 is MBMS control information for MBSFN area 1, and MTCH1 is MBMS data for MBSFN area 1. Since the cell # n1 belongs to the MBSFN area 1 and the MBSFN area 4, the PMCH in the MBSFN area 1 and the PMCH in the MBSFN area 4 are time-division multiplexed. Similarly, since the cell of cell # n2 belongs to MBSFN area 2 and MBSFN area 4, the PMCH of MBSFN area 2 and the PMCH of MBSFN area 4 are time-division multiplexed, and the cell of cell # n3 is MBSFN area 3 and MBSFN area 4 Therefore, the PMCH in the MBSFN area 3 and the PMCH in the MBSFN area 4 are time division multiplexed. Since the PMCH in the MBSFN area 4 is transmitted by multi-cell transmission in the MBSFN area 4, the PMCH transmission timings are all the same in the cells # n1, # n2, and # n3. In this way, by mixing the time division multiplexing and code division multiplexing for the PMCH for each MBSFN area, for example, time division multiplexing is performed for MBSFN areas that overlap between MBSFN areas, and code division multiplexing is performed for non-overlapping MBSFN areas. Can be used. Therefore, the efficiency of radio resources can be improved because code division multiplexing is used as compared with the case of only time division multiplexing. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce mutual interference between overlapping MBSFN areas as compared with the case of only code division multiplexing, and it is possible to reduce reception errors of MBMS data at the mobile terminal.

  Hereinafter, a specific example of step ST1725 in FIG. 18 will be shown. As a first step, the mobile terminal performs blind detection of the P-SCH using the dedicated sequence. A mobile terminal that has blind-detected P-SCH can detect timing for 5 ms. P-SCH is multi-cell transmission. Base stations located in the MBSFN synchronization area are synchronized for multi-cell transmission. Therefore, multi-cell transmission of P-SCH is targeted for base stations included in the synchronization area. As a second stage, the mobile terminal performs blind detection on the S-SCH. A mobile terminal that blindly detects S-SCH can detect 10 ms timing detection (frame synchronization) and the MBSFN area ID. S-SCH is multi-cell transmission. In this modification, it is assumed that one base station belongs to a plurality of MBSFN areas. Therefore, it becomes a problem which MBSFN area the MBSFN area ID mapped to the S-SCH indicates. In this case, the MBSFN area ID mapped to the S-SCH is any one of the MBSFN area IDs to which the base station belongs. Furthermore, the ID is the smallest (covered) MBSFN area to which the base station belongs. Therefore, multi-cell transmission of S-SCH is targeted for base stations included in each covered MBSFN area. The mobile terminal receives BCCH using the spreading code associated with the MBSFN area ID obtained in the second stage. MCCH scheduling can be obtained by decoding BCCH. BCCH is multi-cell transmission. Since the spreading code obtained in the second stage is used, the BCCH becomes the BCCH from the covered MBSFN area. Therefore, BCCH multi-cell transmission is targeted for base stations included in each covered MBSFN area. The mobile terminal can obtain MCCH scheduling, system bandwidth in f (MBMS), the number of transmission antennas, and the like by decoding BCCH.

  Here, MCCH scheduling will be further examined. Since the MBSFN synchronization area is synchronized in time, the P-SCH is transmitted to the MBMS dedicated cell in the MBSFN area 1, the MBMS dedicated cell in the MBSFN area 2, and the MBMS dedicated cell in the MBSFN area 3 at the same timing. Yes. Further, if a sequence dedicated to the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission is used, the sequences of P-SCHs in all MBSFN areas are the same. Therefore, the same information is transmitted at the same timing in the MBSFN synchronization area for the P-SCH. It is considered that the MBSFN area ID is transmitted by S-SCH as described above. Therefore, S-SCH is transmitted at the same timing in the MBSFN synchronization area with different information for each MBSFN area. In this case, the same information is transmitted at the same timing from all the MBMS dedicated cells in each MBSFN area. S-SCH uses the same radio resources in terms of frequency and time in the MBSFN synchronization area. Further, since the S-SCH is used for searching for the MBSFN area ID associated with the spreading code of each MBSFN area, the spreading code of each MBSFN area cannot be applied to the S-SCH. In order to realize that one base station belongs to a plurality of MBSFN areas while following such S-SCH functions, as described above, the S-SCH specific to the covering MBSFN area is used. This can be realized by setting the MBSFN area ID mapped to the S-SCH as the smallest MBSFN area ID to which the base station belongs.

  Further, S-SCH transmission is not performed from the covering MBSFN area, but a plurality of MBSFN areas overlap as geographical locations, but in the overlapping MBSFN areas (for example, MBSFN area 1 and MBSFN area 4) Therefore, only one type of S-SCH needs to be transmitted. Thereby, the effect that it can prevent that S-SCH from a mutual MBSFN area becomes interference is acquired. The mobile communication system transmits a BCCH that has been subjected to spreading processing using a spreading code associated with the MBSFN area ID notified by S-SCH. Therefore, in this case, the BCCH is transmitted with different information for each MBSFN area covered at the same timing in the MBSFN synchronization area. The contents of BCCH are the same in all MBMS dedicated base stations in the MBSFN area. The mobile terminal can obtain MCCH scheduling by decoding BCCH. The current 3GPP does not discuss specific examples of MCCH scheduling. The present invention shows a specific example of MCCH scheduling.

63, MCCH scheduling when the MBSFN frame cluster is longer than the MCCH repetition period will be described together. Two stages are considered for the scheduling of the MCCH in the covering MBSFN area, for example, the MBSFN area 4 in FIG. In the following description, a case where the mobile terminal is under the control of base stations belonging to the MBSFN area 1 and the MBSFN area 4 will be described for convenience. As a first step, MCCH scheduling of MBSFN area 1 is notified on BCCH of MBSFN area 1. The present invention shows a specific example of MCCH scheduling. In the present invention, “starting point value of time for mapping MCCH”, “MBSFN frame cluster repetition period”, and “number of MCCH transmissions within MBSFN frame cluster repetition period” are transferred from the cell to the terminal for MCCH scheduling. Shall be notified. More specifically, SFN (System Frame Number) is used to specify the starting point value. The specific calculation formula for obtaining the starting point value is as follows.
Starting point value = (first SFN number to which MCCH is mapped in the MBSFN frame cluster) mod (MBSFN frame cluster repetition period)

More specifically, the number of MCCH transmissions in the MBSFN frame cluster (hereinafter referred to as N MCCH ) is used as the number of MCCH transmissions in the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period. A specific calculation formula for obtaining N MCCH is as follows.
N MCCH = MBSFN frame cluster / MCCH repetition period In FIG. 63, the starting point value 1 of MBSFN area 1 is 5 mod 16 = 5 or 21 mod 16 = 5. The starting point value 2 of the MBSFN area 2 is 5 mod 16 = 5 or 21 mod 16 = 5. The MBSFN area 3 is the same. Next, N MCCH 1 of MBSFN area 1 is 12/6 = 2, and N MCCH 2 of MBSFN area 2 is 12/4 = 3. In the case of MBSFN area 3, it is obtained in the same manner. Therefore, the MCCH scheduling parameters of MBSFN area 1 are MBSFN frame cluster repetition period 1 “16”, starting point value 1 “5”, and N MCCH 1 “2”. At this time, instead of notifying N MCCH 1 as a parameter, MBSFN frame cluster 1 and MCCH repetition period 1 may be notified.

  As a second step, the MCCH scheduling of the MBSFN area 4 is notified on the MCCH of the MBSFN area 1. The MCCH scheduling parameter calculation method is the same as in FIG. 60 because the MBSFN frame cluster is smaller than the MCCH repetition period. The starting point value 4 of the MBSFN area 4 is 1 mod 16 = 1 or 17 mod 16 = 1. A specific example of MCCH scheduling is to notify the MBSFN area ID of the covering MBSFN area 4 in addition to the parameters of the MBSFN area 4 (MCCH repetition period 4 “16”, state point 4 “1”). Since there is no S-SCH dedicated to MBSFN area 4, it is necessary to notify the MBSFN area ID here.

That is, the data transmitted from the MBSFN area 1 is as follows. S-SCH1, which is a sequence dedicated to the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, S-SCH1 mapped with MBSFN area ID1, etc., MCCH starting point value 1 “5”, MBSFN frame cluster repetition period 1 “16”, N MCCH 1 “2” or the like is mapped, and BCCH1 to which spreading code 1 is applied and MCCH1 and MTCH1 of MBSFN area 1 to which spreading code 1 is applied are transmitted. In MCCH1, an MBSFN area ID (MBSFN area 4) and MCCH scheduling point value 4 “1” and MCCH repetition period 4 “16”, which are MCCH scheduling of MBSFN area 4, are transmitted.

Similar to the MBSFN area 1, data transmitted from the MBSFN area 2 is as follows. S-SCH2, which is a sequence dedicated to the MBMS transmission and dedicated to the frequency layer, S-SCH2 to which MBSFN area ID2 and the like are mapped, MCCH starting point value 2 “5”, MBSFN frame cluster repetition period 2 “16”, N MCCH 2 “3” or the like is mapped, BCCH2 to which spreading code 2 is applied, and MCCH2 and MTCH2 of MBSFN area 2 to which spreading code 2 is applied are transmitted. In MCCH2, an MBSFN area ID (MBSFN area 4) and an MCCH scheduling point value 4 “1” and an MCCH repetition period 4 “16”, which are MCCH scheduling of the MBSFN area 4, are transmitted. As data transmitted from the MBSFN area 4, there is no transmission of P-SCH and S-SCH as described above. Further, if there is no information to be notified other than the information transmitted on the BCCH of the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN areas 1 to 3) as the system information of the MBSFN area 4, transmission of BCCH from the MBSFN area 4 is omitted. I can do it. Thereby, the effect of effective utilization of radio resources can be obtained. MCCH4 and MTCH4 of MBSFN area 4 to which no spreading code is applied are transmitted. A spreading code peculiar to the MBSFN area 4 may be applied to MCCH4 and MTCH4. The effect that the interference between each MBSFN area is suppressed can be acquired. In this case, it is assumed that the MBSFN area 4 specific spreading code is associated with the MBSFN area ID of the MBSFN area 4 notified through the MCCH such as the MBSFN area 1, the MBSFN area 2, the MBSFN area 3, and the like. Thereby, the effect that the further signaling is unnecessary can be acquired.

  FIG. 63 shows an example in which MCCH and MTCH are time-divided in units of subframes for convenience, but even if the multiplexing method of MCCH and MTCH is another method, the unit of time-division multiplexing is in units of subframes. The present invention can be applied to other than the above. In the mobile communication system described above, even when a base station configures a plurality of MBSFN areas, a method until a desired service is selected in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, which is an object of the present invention, And a mobile communication system therefor can be disclosed.

  In the above, the service content of MBSFN area 4 is included in the MBMS area information in MCCH4. Here, when notifying the MCCH scheduling information of the covering MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4, see FIG. 28) using the MCCH of the covering MBSFN area (MBSFN area 1-3, see FIG. 28), The service content of the MBSFN area 4 may be notified together with the scheduling information. As a result, the mobile terminal (user) can grasp the service contents of the plurality of MBSFN areas to which the base station belongs at the stage of decoding the MCCH of the covered MBSFN area. Therefore, it is not necessary to sequentially receive and decode the MCCHs of a plurality of MBSFN areas to which the base station belongs to perform MBMS service selection, and an effect of reducing the control delay can be obtained. Specifically, in step ST1729 in FIG. 19, the mobile terminal uses the MCCH of the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 1-3, see FIG. 28) to cover the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 1− 3) and the service content of the covering MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4, see FIG. 28). Thereby, the mobile terminal can grasp the service contents of MBMS that can be received at the current position (location). In Step ST1730 of FIG. 19, the mobile terminal confirms the MBSFN area where the desired MBMS service content is transmitted.

In addition, for MCCH scheduling of MBSFN area 4, a method of notifying on the BCCH of MBSFN area 1 is also conceivable. As a result, the mobile terminal that receives the service in the MBSFN area 4 does not need to receive and decode the MCCH in the MBSFN area 1, so that the control delay can be reduced. As the MCCH scheduling, the above-mentioned starting point, MBSFN frame cluster repetition period, and N MCCH (MBSFN frame cluster and MCCH repetition period may be used) are used. It can also be used when there are multiple MCCHs in the cluster.

Modification 2
In the eleventh embodiment, the service content for each MBSFN area is included in the MBMS area information in the MCCH. Here, the service contents for each MBSFN area may be notified together with MCCH scheduling on the BCCH. Thereby, the mobile terminal (user) can grasp the service contents of the MBSFN area to which the base station belongs at the stage of decoding the BCCH. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not a desired service exists before receiving and decoding the MCCH, and it is not necessary to receive and decode the MCCH in the MBSFN area where the desired service is not performed, thereby reducing control delay. The effect that can be obtained. Specifically, in step ST1725 of FIG. 18, the mobile terminal receives the service content of the MBSFN area. Thereby, the mobile terminal can grasp the service contents of MBMS that can be received at the current position (location). After that, the mobile terminal confirms whether the service desired by the user is performed in the corresponding MBSFN area prior to ST1729 in step FIG. If the desired service has been performed, the process proceeds to step ST1729. After step ST1729, the process proceeds to step ST1731. On the other hand, when the desired service is not performed, the processing of step ST1729 and step ST1731 is omitted, and the process proceeds to step ST1733.

  Further, MBMS area information, DRX information, MBMS reception time missing reception parameters, etc. mapped to MCCH may be notified together with BCCH. Thereby, MCCH becomes unnecessary and the efficiency of radio resources can be improved. Therefore, there is no need to notify MCCH scheduling on the BCCH, and the efficiency of radio resources can be further improved. The second modification can be applied to the first modification, and the same effect can be obtained.

  Next, in 3GPP, application of single-cell transmission in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission is also under consideration. As a method therefor, a method of realizing single cell transmission in an MBSFN area having a single cell configuration is conceivable. However, the specific implementation method has not been determined. In the above description, assuming that one base station belongs to the MBSFN area, a mobile communication system that realizes single cell transmission in an MBSFN area having a single cell configuration can be disclosed.

Embodiment 12 FIG.
In the twelfth embodiment, a mobile communication system different from the eleventh embodiment is disclosed mainly in the MBMS search portion. The flow of processing as a mobile communication system according to the twelfth embodiment is almost the same as that in FIGS. 16 and 17 of the eleventh embodiment. In the description, the description will focus on parts different from those of the eleventh embodiment. In step ST1707 of FIG. 17, the unicast cell or the unicast / MBMS mixed cell uses BCCH to select one or a plurality of frequencies for which the MBMS service is performed at a frequency other than the current unicast / mixed frequency layer. , Notify the mobile terminal being served. That is, one or a plurality of receivable MBSFN synchronization area frequencies (f (MBMS)) are broadcast. In addition, the system bandwidth in each f (MBMS), the number of transmission antennas, or both are notified. In step ST1708 of FIG. 17, the mobile terminal receives and decodes the BCCH from the serving base station, thereby receiving f (MBMS), the system bandwidth in each f (MBMS), and the number of transmission antennas. In addition, for each f (MBMS), information indicating whether the frequency layer is configured with a unicast / MBMS mixed cell or the frequency layer configured with an MBMS dedicated cell may be notified. As a result, the operation of the mobile terminal can be changed in the frequency layer configured with the unicast / MBMS mixed cell and the frequency layer configured with the MBMS dedicated cell. As a specific operation, there is an MBMS search operation. Since a unicast / MBMS mixed cell provides a unicast service, it is difficult to reduce P-SCH, S-SCH and the like used in the unicast service. Therefore, the MBMS search operation in the frequency layer configured with the unicast / MBMS mixed cell uses the method described in the eleventh embodiment. On the other hand, since the unicast service is not provided in the MBMS dedicated cell, reducing P-SCH, S-SCH, etc. has fewer restrictions compared to the unicast / MBMS mixed cell. Therefore, the processing described below is applied to the MBMS search operation of the frequency layer configured by the MBMS dedicated cell.

  In the twelfth embodiment, step ST1723 to step ST1725 in FIG. 18 are changed as shown in FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an MBMS search method. In FIG. 64, in step ST2201, MBMS GW 802, more specifically, MBMS CP 802-1 notifies MCE 801 of the contents of a physical channel (referred to as main PMCH) transmitted in multi-cells within the MBSFN synchronization area. Since the main PMCH is transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN synchronization area, the same information needs to be transmitted from the base station in the MBSFN synchronization area using the same radio resource. Therefore, the MBMS GW notifies scheduling information on radio resources (frequency, time, etc.) together with notifying the contents of the main PMCH in step ST2201.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the main PMCH in the MBSFN synchronization area. FIG. 65 shows a case where the PMCH provided for each MBSFN area is multiplexed by time division multiplexing and code division multiplexing. Cell # n1 is a cell in MBSFN area 1, cell # n2 is a cell in MBSFN area 2, and cell # n3 is a cell in MBSFN area 3. Further, the cells # n1, # n2, and # n3 are also cells in the MBSFN area 4. The PMCHs in the MBSFN area 1 to the MBSFN area 3 are code division multiplexed and further time division multiplexed with the PMCH in the MBSFN area 4. The main PMCH is time-division multiplexed with the PMCH for each MBSFN area. Since cell # n1 belongs to MBSFN area 1 and MBSFN area 4, PMCH1 and PMCH4 are time-division multiplexed, and the main PMCH is time-division multiplexed. The same applies to cell # 2 and cell # 3. Since the main PMCH is transmitted by multi-cell within the MBSFN synchronization area, it is transmitted on the MBSFN subframe where SFN combining is performed. A set of MBSFN frames to which MBSFN subframes are allocated is referred to as an MBSFN frame cluster. In the MBMS dedicated cell, all subframes in the MBSFN frame may be MBSFN subframes used for multicell transmission. A cycle in which the main PMCH is repeated is defined as a main PMCH repetition cycle.

  The MCH of the transport channel for MBMS is mapped to the main PMCH. The logical channel MCCH of MBMS control information and the logical channel MTCH of MBMS data are mapped to the MCH. MCCH and MTCH may be divided in time and mapped onto the main PMCH, or may be further divided in time and mapped to a physical region that is transmitted in multicell. For example, MBSFN subframes that are physical areas to which MTCH and MCCH are mapped as a result may be different. The MCCH may be mapped to each MBSFN frame cluster in which the main PMCH is transmitted, or only the MTCH may be used. When only MTCH exists, the MCCH repetition period is different from the main PMCH repetition period. In some cases, a plurality of MCCHs are mapped on the MBSFN frame cluster in which the main PMCH is transmitted.

  In FIG. 65, MCCH1 is MBMS control information for MBSFN area 1, and MTCH1 is MBMS data for MBSFN area 1. MCCH2 is MBMS control information for MBSFN area 2, and MTCH2 is MBMS data for MBSFN area 2. MCCH3 is MBMS control information for MBSFN area 3, and MTCH3 is MBMS data for MBSFN area 3. MCCH4 is MBMS control information for MBSFN area 4, and MTCH4 is MBMS data for MBSFN area 4. Each MCCH may be mapped on each PMCH, or only MTCH. When only MTCH exists, MCCH of each MBSFN area may be mapped to main PMCH. Further, it may be included as an information element of MCCH mapped to the main PMCH. Since the main PMCH is transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN synchronization area, it is impossible to multiply the main PMCH by a scrambling code unique to the MBSFN area so that the PMCH is spread in each MBSFN area. This is because, since the main PMCH is transmitted from the cells of different MBSFN areas at the same timing, when the main PMCH is spread with the spreading code specific to the MBSFN area, it is transmitted from each MBSFN area at the receiver of the mobile terminal. This is because the phase of the main PMCH becomes random and SFN synthesis cannot be performed. Therefore, as shown above, the main PMCH and the PMCH of each MBSFN area are time-division multiplexed, so that scrambling codes unique to each MBSFN area can be multiplied in subframe units, and only the main PMCH Can not be multiplied by a scrambling code unique to each MBSFN area. As a result, the main PMCH can be transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN synchronization area, and the mobile terminal receives the main PMCH regardless of which MBMS service in the MBSFN synchronization area is being received or is about to be received. In addition, an SFN gain can be obtained. Although it has been described that the main PMCH is not multiplied by a specific scrambling code, it may be multiplied if it is a scrambling code specific to the MBSFN synchronization area. In this case, interference from other cells in the MBSFN synchronization area can be suppressed, and the reception error of the MBMS service in the mobile terminal can be reduced. The scrambling code unique to the MBSFN synchronization area may be defined statically or mapped to the BCCH from the serving base station defined semi-statically and in step ST1705, the mobile terminal May be notified.

Further, scheduling of radio resources (frequency, time, etc.) of the main PMCH in step ST2201 in FIG. 64 will be described. Specific examples of frequency scheduling include frequency and band. A specific example of time scheduling will be described with reference to FIG. For scheduling of the main PMCH, it is considered to notify the starting point value of the time when the main PMCH is mapped and the main PMCH repetition period. More specifically, SFN (System Frame Number) is used to specify the starting point value. A specific calculation formula for obtaining the main PMCH starting point value is as follows.
Main PMCH starting point value = (first SFN number to which main PMCH is mapped) mod (main PMCH repetition period)

  In FIG. 65, the main PMCH starting point value is 1 mod 11 = 1, 12 mod 11 = 1. "

  Next, a specific example of the contents of the main PMCH in step ST2201 in FIG. 64 will be described. As specific examples of information notified on the main PMCH, numbers (IDs and identifiers) of all MBSFN areas existing in the MBSFN synchronization area, MCCH scheduling of each MBSFN area, DRX information, and the like are conceivable. Detailed description of the DRX information is the same as in the eleventh embodiment, and will be omitted. The same effect can be obtained even if the DRX information is reported on the MCCH of each MBSFN area. Furthermore, the same effect can be obtained by mapping DRX information to the BCCH of the serving cell and notifying the mobile terminal in step ST1705 of FIG. Furthermore, the same effect can be obtained even if DRX information is a statically defined value. When the value is statically defined, there is no need to notify the mobile terminal of the value, so that the effect of effective use of radio resources can be obtained. MCCH scheduling in each MBSFN area is the same as in the eleventh embodiment. In FIG. 65, MCCH repetition period 1 “11” and MCCH starting point value 1 “2” are used as MCCH scheduling information (parameters) in the MBSFN area 1. The MCCH scheduling information (parameters) of the MBSFN area 2, MBSFN area 3, and MBSFN area 4 is the same as that of the MBSFN area 1. Here, by mapping MCCH scheduling of all MBSFN areas in the MBSFN synchronization area to the main PMCH, the main PMCH can be transmitted in multi-cells in the MBSFN synchronization area.

  In step ST2202 of FIG. 64, the MCE receives the contents and scheduling information of the main PMCH from the MBMS GW. In Step ST2203, the MCE transmits the contents of the main PMCH and scheduling information to the base station belonging to the MBSFN area that is controlled by the MCE. In Step ST2204, the base station receives the contents of the main PMCH and scheduling information. In step ST2205, the base station transmits the main PMCH according to the scheduling from the MCE.

  In Step ST2206, the mobile terminal performs an MBMS search. In step ST2206, timing synchronization is particularly performed. Specified information is mapped to a part of the main PMCH. Accordingly, the mobile terminal establishes timing synchronization by blindly detecting the prescribed information of the main PMCH.

  The specified information (or symbol or sequence) is mapped to a physical radio resource in a part of the main PMCH. As a result, the mobile terminal can establish timing synchronization by blindly detecting information (or symbols or sequences) defining physical radio resources. Also, prescribed information (or symbols or sequences) is mapped to physical radio resources that are adjacent to the main PMCH in time or contact with a certain offset. As a result, the mobile terminal can establish timing synchronization by blindly detecting information (or symbols or sequences) defining physical radio resources.

  In the eleventh embodiment, timing synchronization is performed by P-SCH and S-SCH in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. However, in the twelfth embodiment, it can be realized without using P-SCH and S-SCH. . Therefore, with the MBMS search method of the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to reduce P-SCH and S-SCH in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer (MBMS dedicated base station). Thereby, the effect of effective utilization of radio resources can be obtained. In step ST2207, the mobile terminal receives and decodes the main PMCH detected in step ST2206. The mobile terminal receives all MBSFN area IDs mapped to the main PMCH, MCCH scheduling of each MBSFN area, and DRX information.

  Information mapped to BCCH in the eleventh embodiment includes MCCH scheduling, system bandwidth in f (MBMS), number of transmission antennas in f (MBMS), SFN, and the like. In Embodiment 12, MCCH scheduling is mapped to main PMCH. The system bandwidth in f (MBMS) and the number of transmission antennas in f (MBMS) are mapped to BCCH in the unicast cell and the unicast / MBMS mixed cell. Here, by mapping the SFN to the main PMCH, BCCH transmission from the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer (MBMS dedicated cell) can be reduced. Thereby, the effect of effective utilization of radio resources can be obtained. Further, it is not necessary to receive BCCH, which is a channel different from the main PMCH, in order to receive SFN. Therefore, the control load on the mobile terminal is reduced, and the effects of reducing the control delay and reducing the power consumption of the mobile terminal can be obtained. Since the process after step ST1726 of FIG. 18 is the same as that of Embodiment 11, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. In step ST1729 of FIG. 19, the control information for MBMS service obtained by the mobile terminal receiving and decoding the MCCH of each MBSFN area includes MBMS area information, MBMS reception time missing reception parameters, and the like. As specific examples of the MBMS area information, the frame configuration of each area (MBSFN frame cluster, MBSFN subframe), service content, MTCH modulation information, and the like can be considered.

  Further, step ST1723 to step ST1725 of FIG. 18 described in the eleventh embodiment may be used. In that case, the scheduling information of the main PMCH may be notified in place of the MCCH scheduling of the eleventh embodiment using BCCH from the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. This eliminates the need for blind detection in step ST2206 in FIG. As a result, the effects of reducing the processing load on the mobile terminal and reducing the power consumption can be obtained.

  Next, the modification 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. In the twelfth embodiment, service contents for each MBSFN area are included in MBMS area information in MCCH. Here, service contents for each MBSFN area may be notified together with MCCH scheduling on the main PMCH. Thereby, the mobile terminal (user) can grasp the service content of each MBSFN area at the stage of decoding the main PMCH. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not a desired service exists before receiving and decoding the MCCH, and it is not necessary to receive and decode the MCCH in the MBSFN area where the desired service is not performed, thereby reducing control delay. The effect that can be obtained. Specifically, in step ST2207 of FIG. 64, the mobile terminal receives the service content of each MBSFN area. Thereby, the mobile terminal can grasp the service contents of each MBSFN area. Thereafter, prior to step ST1729 in FIG. 19, the mobile terminal searches for an MBSFN area where a service desired by the user is performed. If there is an MBSFN area where a desired service is performed, step ST1729 is executed according to the MCCH scheduling of the corresponding MBSFN area in order to receive the MCCH of the corresponding MBSFN area. On the other hand, if there is no MBSFN area where the desired service is performed, the processing of step ST1729, step ST1730, and step ST1733 in FIG. 19 is omitted, and the process proceeds to step ST1734.

  Furthermore, MBMS area information mapped to each MCCH, MBMS reception time missing reception parameters, and the like may be notified together in the main PMCH. Thereby, the MCCH for each MBSFN area is not required, and the efficiency of radio resources can be improved (see FIG. 66). Therefore, it is not necessary to notify the MCCH scheduling of each MBSFN area on the main PMCH, and the efficiency of radio resources can be further improved. In addition, since it is not necessary for the mobile terminal to receive the MCCH for each MBSFN area, it is possible to obtain the effect of reducing the load on the mobile terminal and reducing the power consumption.

  Next, a second modification of the present embodiment will be described. Instead of Step ST2201 to Step ST2207 in FIG. 64 in Embodiment 12, the following processing is performed in Modification 2. The processing flow as the mobile communication system according to the second modification is substantially the same as that described in the twelfth embodiment. In the description, the description will focus on parts different from the twelfth embodiment. In Modification 2, steps ST2201 to ST2207 in FIG. 64 are changed as shown in FIG. The description from step ST1726 to step ST1728 is the same as the description from step ST1726 to step ST1728 in FIGS. In step ST2501 in FIG. 67, the mobile terminal performs an MBMS search. In step ST2501, the mobile terminal performs timing synchronization. The prescribed information is mapped to a part of the MCCH for each MBSFN area. Thereby, the mobile terminal establishes timing synchronization by blindly detecting the prescribed information of each MBSFN area. The specified information (or symbol or sequence) is mapped to some physical radio resources of the MBSFN subframe to which the MCCH for each MBSFN area is mapped. As a result, the mobile terminal can establish timing synchronization by blindly detecting physical radio resources with prescribed information (or symbols or sequences). Also, prescribed information (or symbols or sequences) is mapped to physical radio resources that are adjacent in time with the MCCH for each MBSFN area or that have a certain offset. As a result, the mobile terminal can establish timing synchronization by blindly detecting physical radio resources with prescribed information (or symbols or sequences). By not applying the scrambling code specific to each MBSFN area to the prescribed information used for blind detection, the mobile terminal can be blindly detected. Therefore, in the multiplexing method of each MBSFN area, time division multiplexing has a high affinity with Modification 2 (see FIG. 60). In Embodiment 11, timing synchronization is performed by P-SCH and S-SCH in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, but in Embodiment 12, it can be realized without using P-SCH and S-SCH. Therefore, with the MBMS search method of the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to reduce P-SCH and S-SCH in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer (MBMS dedicated base station). Furthermore, although timing synchronization is performed on the main PMCH in the twelfth embodiment, in the second modification, it is performed on the MCCH for each MBSFN area. Accordingly, timing synchronization is performed only by the MCCH in the MBSFN area that can be received at the current position (location) of the mobile terminal. Therefore, it is less determined in step ST1731 that the sensitivity sufficient for receiving the MBMS service is not satisfied as compared with the eleventh and twelfth embodiments. Thereby, the effect that the control delay as a mobile communication system can be reduced can be acquired. In step ST2502 of FIG. 67, the mobile terminal receives and decodes the MCCH in the MBSFN area detected in step ST2501. The mobile terminal receives the control information for the MBMS service mapped to the MCCH. Specific examples of the control information include MBMS area information, MBMS reception time missing reception parameters, and the like. As the MBMS area information, the frame configuration (MBSFN frame cluster, MBSFN subframe) of each area, service content, MTCH modulation information, and the like can be considered.

  In step ST1730 of FIG. 19, the mobile terminal confirms the service content included in the MBMS area information. When a user-desired service is performed in the MBSFN area, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST1731. If the service desired by the user is not provided, the process proceeds to step ST2503 in FIG. In Step ST1731, the mobile terminal receives the RS with the radio resource in the MBSFN area and measures the received power (RSRP). It is determined whether or not the received power is equal to or greater than a threshold value determined statically or semi-statically. If the threshold value is equal to or greater than the threshold value, it indicates that the sensitivity is satisfactory for receiving the MBMS service, and if the threshold value is less than the threshold value, it indicates that the sensitivity is not sufficient for receiving the MBMS service. If it is equal to or greater than the threshold, the process proceeds to step ST1732, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold, the process proceeds to step ST2503. In step ST2503, the mobile terminal searches for MBMS using the same method as in step ST2501. In Step ST2504, the mobile terminal determines that the MBSFN area where the desired service is not performed in Step 1730, or the MBSFN area that does not satisfy the sufficient sensitivity for receiving the MBMS service in Step ST1731. It is determined whether the timing synchronization of the other MBSFN areas has been achieved. When the timing synchronization of another MBSFN area is taken, it transfers to step ST2502. When the timing synchronization of another MBSFN area cannot be taken, it transfers to step ST1734. Further, DRX information mapped to the main PMCH, SFN, and the like may be notified together in each MCCH. As a result, the main PMCH is not required and the efficiency of radio resources can be improved.

Embodiment 13 FIG.
In the thirteenth embodiment, a mobile communication system different from the eleventh embodiment is disclosed mainly with DRX information. The flow of processing as a mobile communication system according to the thirteenth embodiment is almost the same as that in FIGS. 16 and 17 of the eleventh embodiment. In the description, the description will focus on parts different from those of the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, one DRX period is provided in the MBSFN synchronization area (see FIG. 62), but in the thirteenth embodiment, one DRX period is provided in the MBSFN area. The DRX period in the thirteenth embodiment refers to a period in which MBMS service transmission from the corresponding MBSFN area is OFF. Specific examples will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. First, a description will be given with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing a PMCH configuration for each MBSFN area. The DRX period for the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service from the MBSFN area 1 is DRX period 1 and the DRX period is DRX period 1. A specific parameter example of the DRX information will be described. Specifically, a DRX period, a DRX cycle, and a starting point value (DRX) can be considered. The DRX period 1 is a “6” radio frame. Also, DRX cycle 1 is a “9” radio frame. Further, SFN is used to specify the starting point value (DRX) at which the DRX period starts. A specific calculation formula for obtaining the starting point value (DRX) is as follows.
Starting point value (DRX) = (first SFN number at which the DRX period starts) mod (DRX cycle), and starting point value 1 (DRX) is 4 mod 9 = 4 or 13 mod 9 = 4.
The DRX period for the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service from the MBSFN area 2 is DRX period 2 and the DRX period is DRX period 2. The DRX period 2 is a “6” radio frame. The DRX cycle 2 is a “9” radio frame. The starting point value 2 (DRX) is 7 mod 9 = 7 or 16 mod 9 = 7. The DRX information for the mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service from the MBSFN area 3 is the same.

  Next, a description will be given with reference to FIG. The DRX period for the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service from the MBSFN area 1 is DRX period 1 and the DRX period is DRX period 1. The DRX period 1 is “4” radio frames. The DRX cycle 1 is “16” radio frames. The starting point value 1 (DRX) is 1 mod 16 = 1 or 17 mod 16 = 1. The same applies to the DRX information for the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service from the MBSFN area 2 and the MBSFN area 3. The DRX period for the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service from the MBSFN area 4 is DRX period 4 and the DRX period is DRX period 4. The DRX period 4 is a “12” radio frame. The DRX cycle 4 is a “16” radio frame. The starting point value 4 (DRX) is 5 mod 16 = 5 or 21 mod 16 = 5. When there is a main PMCH described in the twelfth embodiment, it is necessary to receive the main PMCH even if the mobile terminal is receiving the MBMS service in each MBSFN area. Therefore, the DRX period for each MBSFN area. To the main PMCH transmission period.

  The mobile terminal can perform unicast / mixed frequency layer measurement using the DRX period provided for each MBSFN area. As a result, the mobile terminal via the unicast / mixed frequency layer is receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer configured with the MBMS dedicated base station having no uplink, which is the subject of the present invention. The effect that enables mobility management can be obtained.

  In addition, the MBMS service is received without notifying the unicast / mixed layer side control device (base station, MME, PDNGW, etc.) of the DRX cycle and DRX period information of the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission through any route. In order to be able to satisfy the measurement cycle of the unicast / mixed frequency layer notified from the network side without interruption, the present invention discloses the following method as in the eleventh embodiment.

  The DRX period in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer includes at least one measurement cycle in the unicast / mixed frequency layer. Thereby, no matter what measurement cycle is notified (set) to the mobile terminal in the unicast cell, MBMS / unicast mixed cell, in the DRX period provided in the DRX cycle in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, If measurement of the unicast / mixed frequency layer is performed, the measurement cycle notified from the network side can be satisfied. By adopting this method, the MBMS transmission dedicated cell is controlled from the MBMS transmission dedicated cell control device (base station, MCE, MBMS gateway, eBNSC, etc.) to the unicast cell, MBMS / unicast mixed cell control device. There is no need to notify the DRX cycle or DRX period. Therefore, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the MBSFN transmission dedicated frequency layer interrupts the reception of the MBMS service while preventing the mobile communication system from becoming complicated, that is, avoiding additional signaling on the radio interface or in the network. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that the measurement can be executed in the measurement cycle notified (set) by the unicast cell or the MBMS / unicast mixed cell to the mobile terminal. The DRX cycle in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission is the minimum value of the measurement cycle that can be taken in the unicast / mixed frequency layer or a divisor of the minimum value. If the measurement cycle that can be set for the mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission is different from the measurement cycle that can be taken in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, the DRX cycle is the frequency dedicated to MBMS transmission. The measurement period that can be set for the mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service in the layer, or the minimum value of the measurement period, or the divisor of the minimum value of the measurement period. Thereby, the problem of the present invention can be solved.

  In Step ST1729 of FIG. 19, the mobile terminal receives DRX information. Since DRX information differs for each MBSFN area, mapping DRX information to MCCH in each MBSFN area can prevent the mobile terminal from receiving unnecessary information (DRX information in other MBSFN areas). Thereby, the effect of reducing the processing load of the mobile terminal and reducing the power consumption can be obtained. However, the same effect as in the thirteenth embodiment can be obtained even if DRX information is mapped to BCCH or main PMCH in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission.

  The mobile communication system according to the thirteenth embodiment can obtain the following effects as compared with the mobile communication system disclosed in the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, one DRX period is provided in the MBSFN synchronization area (see FIG. 62). The DRX period in the method of Embodiment 11 is the MBMS service transmission OFF of all MBSFN areas within the MBSFN synchronization area. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, a DRX period is provided for each MBSFN area, that is, if one MBSFN area 1 is seen, the DRX period 1 is MBMS service OFF, but if another MBSFN area 2 is seen, the DRX period 1 is An MBMS service may be provided. That is, it is not necessary to turn off the MBMS service of all MBSFN areas in the MBSFN synchronization area. Therefore, the thirteenth embodiment can obtain an effect that radio resources can be effectively used as compared with the eleventh embodiment.

  Next, the modification 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. In the eleventh embodiment, since the mobile terminal provides one DRX period in the MBSFN synchronization area, it can simultaneously receive MBMS data from the MBSFN area in the MBSFN synchronization area without adding any control. In other words, when the MBMS service from each MBSFN area is received at the same time, the mobile terminal (user) can freely select the MBSFN area combination method. However, in Embodiment 13, the mobile terminal cannot receive the MBSFN area at the same time. A specific example will be described with reference to FIG. The DRX period for the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service from the MBSFN area 1 is DRX period 1 and the DRX period is DRX period 1. The DRX period 1 is a “6” radio frame. Also, DRX cycle 1 is a “9” radio frame. The starting point value 1 (DRX) at which the DRX period starts is “4”. When the mobile terminal performs the measurement of the unicast / mixed frequency layer using the DRX period 1 as in the eleventh embodiment, the MBSFN area 2 transmitted from the base station in time overlap with the DRX period 1 and The MBMS service from the MBSFN area 3 cannot be received. Similarly, for a mobile terminal that is receiving an MBMS service from MBSFN area 2, when performing the unicast / mixed frequency layer measurement by the method of Embodiment 13, the MBMS service from MBSFN area 1 and MBSFN area 3 is received. Impossible. The same applies to the MBSFN area 3.

  The following solution is disclosed for the problem that when one DRX period is provided in the MBSFN area, MBMS services from each MBSFN area cannot be received simultaneously. The MBSFN area that can be simultaneously received is notified from the network side to the mobile terminal. Further, DRX information for each MBSFN area that can be received simultaneously is notified. A specific example of DRX information will be described with reference to FIG. The DRX period when the mobile terminal receives the MBMS service from the MBSFN area 1 and the MBSFN area 2 is DRX period (1 + 2) = [3]. The DRX cycle at that time is DRX cycle (1 + 2) = [9]. Furthermore, the starting point value (1 + 2) (DRX) at which the DRX period starts becomes 7 mod 9 = 7 or 16 mod 9 = 7, and the starting point value 1 + 2 (DRX) = [7]. The DRX period when the mobile terminal receives the MBMS service from the MBSFN area 1 and the MBSFN area 3 is DRX period (1 + 3) = [3]. The DRX cycle at that time is DRX cycle (1 + 3) = [9]. Further, the starting point value (1 + 3) (DRX) at which the DRX period starts is 4 mod 9 = 4 or 13 mod 9 = 4, and the starting point value (1 + 3) (DRX) = [4].

  In Step ST1729 of FIG. 19, the mobile terminal receives DRX information. FIG. 71 summarizes specific examples of DRX information received by the mobile terminal in step ST1729. FIG. 71 [a] is a specific example of DRX information mapped to the MCCH of MBSFN area 1. FIG. 71 [b] is a specific example of DRX information mapped to the MCCH of the MBSFN area 2. FIG. 71 [c] is a specific example of DRX information mapped to the MCCH of the MBSFN area 3. Here, the DRX period and the DRX cycle are shown in units of subframes, but may be in units other than subframes. Further, although the starting point value (DRX) is indicated by the SFN number, another designation method may be used.

  In addition, the MBMS service is received without notifying the unicast / mixed layer side control device (base station, MME, PDNGW, etc.) of the DRX cycle and DRX period information of the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission through any route. In order to make it possible to satisfy the measurement period of the unicast / mixed frequency layer notified from the network side without interruption, the present invention discloses the following method as in the case of the eleventh and thirteenth embodiments. The DRX period in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer includes at least one measurement cycle in the unicast / mixed frequency layer. Also, the DRX cycle in the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer is the minimum value of the measurement cycle that can be taken in the unicast / mixed frequency layer or a divisor of the minimum value. If the measurement cycle that can be set for the mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission is different from the measurement cycle that can be taken in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, the DRX cycle is the frequency dedicated to MBMS transmission. The measurement period that can be set for the mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service in the layer, or the minimum value of the measurement period, or the divisor of the minimum value of the measurement period. Thereby, the problem of the present invention can be solved.

  Since the MBSFN area information that can be received simultaneously is notified from the network side to the mobile terminal, the MBMS service from each MBSFN area can be received simultaneously. By reporting the DRX information at that time together with the MBSFN area information that can be received at the same time, the effect of solving the problem of the present invention can be obtained.

  In the first modification, the MBSFN area information that can be simultaneously received and the DRX information at that time are mapped to the MCCH for each MBSFN area. The same effect as that of the first modification can be obtained by mapping simultaneously receivable MBSFN area information mapped to the MCCH of each MBSFN area and DRX information at that time to the BCCH of the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. Further, the same effect as that of the first modification can be obtained even when mapping to the main PMCH.

Modification 2
In the case where one DRX period is provided in the MBSFN area, a solution different from the following Modification 1 is disclosed regarding the problem that the MBMS service from each MBSFN area cannot be received simultaneously. The DRX information of each MBSFN area is notified from the network side, and the DRX information in the MBSFN area that the mobile terminal desires to receive simultaneously is calculated. A mobile terminal receives DRX information in step ST1729. FIG. 72 is a specific example of DRX information mapped to the MCCH of each MBSFN area notified from the network side to the mobile terminal in Modification 2 in the case of FIG. As a specific example of the DRX information, the MBSFN area number (ID) for each MBSFN area, service contents, MBSFN frame cluster, MBSFN frame cluster repetition period, and MBSFN frame cluster starting point are notified. Thereby, the effect that DRX information can be calculated in a mobile terminal can be acquired. Here, the service content of each MBSFN area may be notified in addition to the DRX information. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that the mobile terminal can select the MBSFN area to be simultaneously received by the user by receiving and decoding the MCCH from one MBSFN area.

  In Step ST1730, the mobile terminal calculates DRX information in the MBSFN area received at the same time as desired by the user. A specific example will be described with reference to FIG. For example, when the user wishes to simultaneously receive “weather forecast” and “news”, the mobile terminal calculates DRX information in simultaneous reception of MBSFN area 1 and MBSFN area 2. The DRX period will be described. In order to receive the MBSFN area 1 and the MBSFN area 2, the period during which the MBSFN area 1 and the MBSFN area 2 are not transmitted is the DRX period (1 + 2). A DRX cycle in which the DRX period (1 + 2) = 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 72. FIG. In order to receive the MBSFN area 1 and the MBSFN area 2, the period in which the transmission of the MBSFN area 1 and the MBSFN area 2 is not performed is the DRX period (1 + 2). DRX cycle (1 + 2) = MBSFN frame cluster Repeat cycle 3 = 9. The starting point of DRX will be described. In order to receive MBSFN area 1 and MBSFN area 2, the starting point value during a period in which transmission of MBSFN area 1 and MBSFN area 2 is not performed becomes a starting point (1 + 2) (DRX). Starting point (1 + 2) (DRX) = 7.

  In addition, the MBMS service is received without notifying the unicast / mixed layer side control device (base station, MME, PDNGW, etc.) of the DRX cycle and DRX period information of the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission through any route. In order to be able to satisfy the measurement period of the unicast / mixed frequency layer notified from the network side without interruption, the following method is disclosed. The mobile terminal selects MBSFN area multiplexing in which the DRX period in the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer includes at least one measurement cycle in the unicast / mixed frequency layer. Also, the mobile terminal selects the multiplexing of the MBSFN area so that the DRX cycle in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission is the minimum value of the measurement cycle that can be taken in the unicast / mixed frequency layer or a divisor of the minimum value. In other words, the mobile terminal calculates DRX information and does not select a combination of MBSFN areas whose DRX cycle does not satisfy the above condition. If the measurement cycle that can be set for the mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission is different from the measurement cycle that can be taken in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, the DRX cycle is the frequency dedicated to MBMS transmission. The measurement period that can be set for the mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service in the layer, or the minimum value of the measurement period, or the divisor of the minimum value of the measurement period. This can solve the problem.

  In the second modification, the same effect as in the first modification can be obtained. Furthermore, when the number of MBSFN areas is increased and the number of MBSFN areas is increased, the amount of DRX information to be notified from the network side to the mobile terminal is smaller in Modification 2 than in Modification 1. I'll do it. Thereby, the effect of effective utilization of radio resources can be obtained.

  In the second modification, the MBSFN area information that can be simultaneously received and the DRX information at that time are mapped to the MCCH for each MBSFN area. The same effect as that of the second modification can be obtained by mapping simultaneously receivable MBSFN area information mapped to the MCCH of each MBSFN area and DRX information at that time to the BCCH of the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. Further, the same effect as that of the second modification can be obtained by mapping to the main PMCH.

  The present thirteenth embodiment and its modifications are applicable to the eleventh embodiment and its modifications, and the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

Embodiment 14 FIG.
A problem to be solved by the invention will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 73, A is an L1 / L2 signaling channel, and B is a unicast transmission resource. As described in Non-Patent Document 2, the assignment of MBSFN subframes in an MBMS / unicast mixed cell has been studied. As described in Non-Patent Document 1, multiplexing of channels other than MBSFN and MBSFN is performed in units of subframes. Hereinafter, a subframe for MBSFN transmission is referred to as an MBSFN sub-frame. Further, in the current 3GPP, it is determined that in the mixed cell, in the MBSFN frame (subframe), except for the first 1 to 2 OFDM symbols in subframe units, it should not be used for unicast transmission. In other words, resources other than the first 1-2 OFDM symbols are dedicated to MBMS transmission. In FIG. 73, it is described as PMCH. On the other hand, Non-Patent Document 1 discloses that PCH is mapped to PDSCH or PDCCH. Non-Patent Document 1 discloses that the paging group uses the L1 / L2 signaling channel (PDCCH), and the clear identifier (UE-ID) of the mobile terminal can be found on the PCH. Therefore, since PCH uses the L1 / L2 signaling channel, it can be mapped even in the MBSFN frame. On the other hand, in the MBSFN frame, when the downlink radio resource of the next control information is allocated in the PCH, the downlink radio resource on the same subframe is dedicated to MBMS transmission. The problem of not being able to do occurs.

  Non-Patent Document 3 has the following description regarding paging signal transmission to a mobile terminal. A PICH (Paging Indicator channel) that indicates that a paging signal addressed to any mobile terminal belonging to the paging group has been generated is transmitted using the L1 / L2 signaling channel. The mobile terminal decodes the paging signal to determine whether the paging signal is addressed to itself. The PCH can have one or more paging signals. PICH is transmitted using the L1 / L2 signaling channel, that is, positioned in the first 1 to 3 OFDM symbols in subframe units. On the other hand, PCH is mapped to PDSCH in the same subframe as PICH. The problem to be solved by the present invention also occurs in the paging signal transmission procedure of Non-Patent Document 3. That is, when MBSFN subframes are configured in an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, even if PICH is transmitted in the first 1-2 OFDM symbols of the MBSFN subframe, the same subframe as PICH is a resource dedicated to MBMS transmission. is there. Therefore, it is not possible to transmit a PCH that maps a paging signal for determining whether or not the paging signal is addressed to itself.

  Non-Patent Document 4 has the following description regarding an expression for obtaining a time when paging occurs (paging occasion (paging occasion)). In order to obtain the paging occasion, two parameters are necessary: a paging interval (corresponding to the intermittent reception period in the mixed frequency layer in the present invention) and the number of paging occasions in the paging interval. It is not described. Further, it is described that a subframe in a radio frame in which paging occasion occurs is a fixed value. However, Non-Patent Document 4 does not describe a method for determining a subframe in a radio frame of a paging occasion to which a paging signal is mapped. Non-Patent Document 4 does not describe the relationship between subframes and MBSFN subframes in a radio frame for paging occasions.

  Other than the first 1-2 OFDM symbols in the MBSFN subframe, the resources are dedicated to MBMS transmission. When the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion overlaps with the allocation of the MBSFN subframe, other than the first 1-2 OFDM symbols become resources dedicated to MBMS transmission and cannot be used for paging processing. Since the conventional paging processing method does not consider the MBSFN subframe at all, there is a problem that it cannot be applied to the paging processing in the MBMS / unicast mixed cell. In order to solve this problem, this Embodiment 14 discloses a method for determining a radio frame for paging occasion in consideration of MBSFN subframes.

  Other than the first 1-2 OFDM symbols in the MBSFN subframe, the resources are dedicated to MBMS transmission. When the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion overlaps with the allocation of the MBSFN subframe, other than the first 1-2 OFDM symbols become resources dedicated to MBMS transmission and cannot be used for paging processing. Since the conventional paging processing method does not consider the MBSFN subframe at all, there is a problem that it cannot be applied to the paging processing in the MBMS / unicast mixed cell. In order to solve this problem, this Embodiment 14 discloses a method for determining a radio frame for paging occasion in consideration of MBSFN subframes.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the MBSFN subframe is assigned to each MBSFN frame (MBSFN frame). An MBSFN frame set repetition period (Repetition Period) is provided, and an MBSFN frame set (MBSFN frame Cluster) is scheduled within the repetition period. The MBSFN subframe assigned to each MBSFN frame may be the same or different. An allocation pattern of MBSFN subframes within a repetition period is determined by a set of MBSFN frames. The allocation pattern of the MBSFN subframe is repeated every repetition period. In the figure, the allocation pattern of the MBSFN subframes in the MBSFN frame is the same, but by doing so, the number of bits necessary to represent the subframe number of the MBSFN subframe is reduced compared to the case where the MBSFN subframes are not the same. be able to. Further, although the MBSFN frames are continuous in the figure, they need not be particularly continuous. In the case of continuous, the number of bits necessary to represent the frame number of the MBSFN frame can be reduced as compared with the case of not continuous.

The repetition period of the set of MBSFN frames, the allocation pattern within the repetition period of MBSFN frames and MBSFN subframes are mapped to the broadcast control channel (BCCH) which is a logical channel, and further, the broadcast channel (BCH) which is a transport channel, It is mapped to a physical broadcast channel (PBCH) that is a physical channel and notified to the mobile terminal. In addition, the own cell information is mapped to a broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is a logical channel, and further mapped to a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) that is a transport channel and a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) that is a physical channel. To the mobile terminal. On the other hand, the following calculation formula can be considered as a method of determining a radio frame for paging occasion.
“Paging occurrence radio frame” (Paging Occasion) = identifier (such as IMSI) of mobile terminal mod X + n × (intermittent reception cycle), n: 0, 1, 2,..., Where Paging Occusion ≦ SFN. SFN is an integer from 0 to the maximum value of SFN. X is the number of radio frames in which paging occurs within the intermittent reception cycle, and X ≦ intermittent reception cycle (the number of radio frames). A value of X (residue value at X) and a radio frame number (SFN) are associated with each other.

  As can be seen from the above equation, a paging occasion occurs in a radio frame related to the number X of paging-generated radio frames within the intermittent reception cycle. In other words, the occurrence of the paging occasion is repeated at every intermittent cycle in the radio frame pattern related to the X. Parameters necessary for deriving a paging occasion, mobile terminal identifier, intermittent reception period, X, etc. are mapped to a broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is a logical channel, and further a broadcast channel (BCH) that is a transport channel And mapped to the physical broadcast channel (PBCH), which is a physical channel, and notified to the mobile terminal. In addition, the own cell information is mapped to a broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is a logical channel, and further mapped to a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) that is a transport channel and a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) that is a physical channel. To the mobile terminal.

  As described above, the MBSFN subframe cannot be used for the paging process because the first and second OFDM symbols other than the first one of the MBSFN subframe are resources dedicated to MBMS transmission. Therefore, since the conventional paging processing method does not consider the MBSFN subframe at all, there is a problem that it cannot be applied to the paging processing in the MBMS / unicast mixed cell. In order to solve this problem, here is disclosed a method for avoiding that the MBSFN frame and the frame in which paging occasion occurs are always the same radio frame. Specifically, the repetition period (Repetition Period) of the set of MBSFN frames is different from the intermittent reception period. In particular, the repetition period and the intermittent reception period of the set of MBSFN frames are not made the same or do not have a multiple relationship.

An example is shown below. Conventionally, 2 a × radio frame (unit is number or time) and a is a positive integer is used as the intermittent reception cycle. The value of a is determined by the base station or the network and notified to the mobile terminal through the serving cell.
In this case, the repetition period (Repetition Period) of the set of MBSFN frames is set as the following derivation formula.
2 b × radio frame (unit: number or time), b is a positive integer.
However, a ≠ b.
By doing so, the periods do not become the same, and even if the initial assigned radio frame number (offset value) is the same, the MBSFN frame and the paging occasion always occur in the same radio frame. It can be avoided.
This enables paging processing in an MBMS / unicast mixed cell in which MBSFN subframes exist. In the above example, the occurrence of MBSFN frames and paging occasions can always be avoided in the same radio frame. However, since the derivation formula for both periods is 2 m × radio frame (m = a, b), each period has a multiple relationship, and the MBSFN frame and the paging are performed once in the same radio frame several times. Occurrence will occur.

In order to avoid this, as another example, the derivation formula for each period may be as follows.
S m × radio frame (unit: number or time), S is a prime number, and m is a positive integer.
Different values of S are used for the repetition period of the set of MBSFN frames and the intermittent reception period. Since S is a prime number, by using different values of S for each period, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of MBSFN frames and paging occasions in the same radio frame. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the frequency at which the MBSFN frame and the frame in which the paging occasion occurs are the same.

  If an MBSFN frame and a paging occasion occur in the same radio frame, the base station or the network gives priority to the MBSFN frame over the paging occasion, and gives priority to the communication of information for MBMS. To send. By determining the priorities in advance, the mobile terminal can determine which information is transmitted in the radio frame that is generated at the same time, and can receive and decode the information. The priority may be higher for either the MBSFN frame or the paging occasion. When the priority order of the MBSFN frame is increased, it is possible to receive the MBMS service without missing or delaying MBMS data. In the case of increasing the priority of paging occasions, it is possible to reduce the time required for the incoming call processing to the mobile terminal, and it is possible to reduce the delay time at the time of incoming call.

  The derivation formula for each period in these examples may be determined statically. Two or more types of derivation formulas may be prepared in advance and it may be determined which one to select. Also, which derivation formula to select may be used as a parameter. The parameters used in the derivation formula may be determined statically, quasi-statically or dynamically. When determined semi-statically or dynamically, each parameter is determined by the base station or the network, and is notified to the mobile terminal through the serving cell by BCCH, MCCH, or L1 / L2 signaling. With regard to the parameter to determine which derivation formula is used, two types of derivation formulas are set in advance, so that the parameter can be notified in 1 bit, and the base station or network can be notified to the mobile terminal with the minimum amount of information. This increases the use efficiency of radio resources.

  FIG. 74 shows a specific example of a sequence diagram in the case where notification of allocation information of MBSFN subframes and derivation of a paging occasion to which a paging signal is mapped are performed. In step ST4001, the serving cell notifies the mobile terminal being served thereby of the system information of the own cell. Specific examples of system information to be notified include measurement cycle, tracking area information (TA information), and intermittent reception cycle. It is assumed that the system information of the own cell includes a parameter for intermittent reception. The intermittent reception cycle is derived using the intermittent reception parameters by the method for determining a paging occasion generation radio frame disclosed above. Specific examples of parameters for intermittent reception include a, m, S, information on which derivation formula is used, parameters for derivation of the intermittent reception cycle, and the number of paging occasions during the intermittent reception cycle (X) (Or the number of paging groups), the relationship between the value of X (the remainder value at X) and the radio frame number (SFN). A specific example of how to represent the intermittent reception period includes the number of radio frames. In Step ST4002, the mobile terminal receives the system information of the own cell from the serving cell. In step ST4501, the serving cell transmits MBSFN subframe allocation information. In the current 3GPP for allocation of MBSFN subframes, the following is discussed. The mapping positions of the reference signal in the MBSFN subframe and the reference signal of the subframe that is not the MBSFN subframe as radio resources are different. Therefore, in order to perform measurement using a more accurate reference signal, there is a discussion that even a mobile terminal that does not have the ability to receive an MBMS service needs to grasp the allocation information of the MBSFN subframe of the serving cell. (Non-patent document 2). As specific examples of allocation information of MBSFN subframes, parameters for deriving the repetition period of a set of MBSFN frames and MBSFN subframe allocation patterns within the period can be considered. The repetition period of the MBSFN frame set is derived using the MBSFN frame set repetition period determination method disclosed above, using the repetition period derivation parameter of the MBSFN frame set. Specific examples of the parameters for deriving the repetition period of the MBSFN frame set include b, m, and S, which are parameters for deriving the repetition period, and information on which derivation formula is used. As a specific example of the MBSFN subframe allocation pattern within the period, there is an MBSFN frame number within the repetition period and / or an MBSFN subframe number. In Step ST4502, the mobile terminal receives MBSFN subframe allocation information from the serving cell. In step ST4503, the mobile terminal obtains a paging occasion. In steps ST4503 and 4504, the mobile terminal and the serving cell obtain a radio frame for paging occasion using the same method as the mobile communication system. In Step ST4505, the mobile terminal obtains a subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion. In step ST4506, the serving cell obtains a subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion using the same method as the mobile terminal as the mobile communication system.

  As disclosed in the fourteenth embodiment, the problem of the present invention can be solved by preventing the MBSFN frame and the frame in which the paging occasion is generated from always being the same radio frame, and the MBSFN subframe. Paging processing in existing MBMS / unicast mixed cells can be enabled.

Next, the modification 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. In the fourteenth embodiment, the repetition cycle of the MBSFN frame set is different from the intermittent reception cycle in the paging occasion, but the pattern of the MBSFN frame in the repetition cycle of the MBSFN frame set and the intermittent reception cycle The generation pattern of the paging occasion radio frame may not be the same. For example, the repetition cycle of the set of MBSFN frames is 32 radio frames. Assume that MBSFN frames in the repetition period are # 0 to # 7 (the first radio frame in the repetition period is # 0). In this case, for example, using the above paging occasion derivation formula, the intermittent reception cycle is 32 radio frames, the paging-generated radio frame number X is 4, and the relationship between the remainder value at X and the radio frame number is expressed as follows: Keep it like that.

When the remainder of X = 0, radio frame number # 8,
When the remainder value of X = 1 Radio frame number # 14,
When the remainder of X = 2 Radio frame number # 20,
When the remainder of X = 3 Radio frame number # 26.
However, in the radio frame number, the first radio frame in the intermittent reception cycle is set to # 0.
By associating in this way, the pattern of the MBSFN frame within the repetition cycle of the set of MBSFN frames and the generation pattern of the radio frame of the paging occasion within the intermittent reception cycle can be prevented from being the same. Therefore, even if the repetition period of the set of MBSFN frames and the intermittent reception period in the paging occasion are the same, the patterns in the period are different from each other, and therefore the occurrence of the MBSFN frame and the paging occasion is always the same. It can be avoided that it occurs in a radio frame.
In this modification, the paging occasion occurrence radio frame is determined based on the MBSFN frame, but conversely, the MBSFN frame may be determined based on the paging occasion occurrence radio frame. For example, when the paging occasion generation radio frame is statically determined and the MBSFN frame is determined semi-statically or dynamically, a radio frame different from the paging occasion generation radio frame within the intermittent reception period is set as the MBSFN frame. You can do that. By doing so, for example, it is possible to flexibly determine MBSFN subframes according to the amount of MBMS data, and it is possible to increase the use efficiency of radio resources. A method of statically determining a radio frame in which this paging occasion is generated and quasi-statically or dynamically determining an MBSFN frame can be applied to the fourteenth embodiment or the second modification. Further, the method described in the fourteenth embodiment can be applied to the parameter notification method in the present modification.

  By using the method of the first modification, in addition to the effect of the fourteenth embodiment, an effect that the repetition period of the MBSFN frame set and the intermittent reception period may be the same can be obtained. By making the repetition period and the intermittent reception period of the set of MBSFN frames the same, the number of parameters notified from the base station or the network to the mobile terminal can be reduced, and the use efficiency of radio resources can be increased.

  In the above example, the MBSFN frame pattern within the repetition period of the set of MBSFN frames is used, but an MBSFN subframe allocation pattern within the repetition period may also be used. In this case, the MBSFN frame including the MBSFN subframe may be an MBSFN frame pattern within the repetition cycle of the set of MBSFN frames. Thereby, an equivalent effect can be obtained.

Embodiment 15 FIG.
In the second embodiment, the paging signal is transmitted from the base station every MCCH repetition period or every paging signal presence / absence indicator repetition period, and the mobile terminal that receives the paging signal performs an intermittent reception operation in those repetition periods. A method of doing so has been disclosed. Here, another new method is disclosed as a paging signal notification method. As described in the second embodiment, in the conventional technique (W-CDMA), the number of S-CCPCHs (number of channelization codes) to which PCH is mapped is defined as the number of groups, and the mobile terminal identifier (UE-IDD, IMSI), a method of calculating a timing at which a paging indication is transmitted using intermittent reception timing, that is, an SFN (System Frame Number). However, there is no disclosure of a paging signal notification method in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer of the LTE system. In the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, multi-cell transmission is used, and furthermore, any one cell is allowed to belong to a plurality of MBSFN areas, so that a paging signal is transmitted on which radio frame or on which subframe. As for the mapping method, the conventional paging indication transmission method cannot be applied. Furthermore, since the LTE system is not a CDM method, there is no concept of the number of channelization codes. It is impossible to apply technology. Therefore, here, a method for notifying a paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer of the LTE system is disclosed. In the description, the description will focus on parts that are different from the second embodiment. Portions that are not particularly described are the same as in the second embodiment.

  As a method for the MBMS dedicated cell notifying the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer of the LTE system, the paging signal is transmitted in a radio frame corresponding to the MBSFN area to which the cell belongs. As a specific example, as shown in FIG. 40, a paging signal notification method is disclosed when there is no overlapping (overlapping) MBSFN area in each cell and the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area is CDMed. . First, a paging group calculation formula will be disclosed. In the paging group calculation formula (IMSI mod Ksf), Ksf is the number of paging groups. A specific example of the value of Ksf is the number of MBSFN subframes in one radio frame. When the number of MBSFN subframes in one radio frame is 10, Ksf = 10. When the number of MBSFN subframes excluding # 0 and # 5 to which the SCH is mapped in one radio frame is used, Ksf = 8. By associating the value of Ksf (the remainder value in Ksf) with the subframe number in the radio frame, the mobile station moves to any subframe in the radio frame according to the paging group value calculated by the above formula. It can be seen whether the paging information of the group to which the terminal belongs is mapped.

  Next, it associates with which radio frame the paging signal of the group to which it belongs is mapped. As a specific example, the calculation formula is as follows. “Paging Occasion” = (IMSI div Ksf) mod (intermittent reception period in MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer) + n × (intermittent reception period in MBMS transmission frequency layer), n: 0, 1, 2,. -However, the maximum value of Paging Occusion <= SFN. SFN is an integer from 0 to the maximum value of SFN.

  A “paging generated radio frame” (hereinafter referred to as paging occasion) is an SFN to which a paging signal is mapped. As can be seen from this equation, the paging occasion can take all values from 0 to the maximum value of SFN. Therefore, compared to the method disclosed in the second embodiment, the number of MBSFN subframes on which a paging signal is carried and the number of radio frames having the MBSFN subframes can be increased. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the number of mobile terminals that can be carried in one MBSFN subframe, and the physical area required to carry the paging signal of the number of mobile terminals in one MBSFN subframe can be reduced. become. In addition, since it is not necessary to determine the intermittent reception cycle in the MBMS transmission frequency layer depending on the cycle in which the MCCH is transmitted, the intermittent reception cycle can be flexibly set as a system. Next, a physical area for carrying a paging signal will be described. A configuration is adopted in which all radio frames corresponding to the MBSFN area to which the cell belongs are transmitted. A method of providing a paging-dedicated physical channel (DPCH) disclosed in the eighth embodiment for multi-cell transmission in the MBSFN area and placing a paging signal on the physical channel is applied. As shown in FIG. 42, a DPCH for carrying a paging signal is provided in a part of the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area. DPCH may be configured in all radio frames corresponding to the MBSFN area, and DPCH may be configured in all MBSFN subframes in one radio frame, except for # 0 and # 5 to which SCH is mapped in one radio frame. It may be configured in an MBSFN subframe. When DPCH is configured in all MBSFN subframes in one radio frame, Ksf = 10 may be set, and MBSFN subframes except for # 0 and # 5 to which SCH is mapped in one radio frame are configured. In this case, Ksf = 8 may be set. Further, Ksf may be another value as long as it is the number of subframes in one radio frame. Since the method disclosed in the eighth embodiment can be applied to the method for mapping the paging signal to the paging signal dedicated channel for the paging signal on the paging dedicated channel, description thereof is omitted here.

  By using the paging signal notification method and the channel configuration on which the paging signal is placed as described above, the paging signal can be transmitted in all radio frames corresponding to the MBSFN area to which the MBMS dedicated cell belongs. The MBMS dedicated cell can notify the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer.

As another specific example, a method of transmitting a paging signal when the DRX period is taken into consideration is disclosed. In the second embodiment, in order to notify the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell, to maintain synchronization in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, to acquire broadcast information, and to perform cell reselection, for measurement of the unicast / mixed frequency layer A method for providing a DRX period is disclosed. Here, in the case where the DRX period is provided, a paging signal transmission method when the DRX period is also taken into consideration will be described. Since the detailed description about the DRX is disclosed in the second embodiment, it is omitted here. In this specific example, it is assumed that one DRX period is provided in the MBSFN synchronization area. FIG. 75 shows an example of MBSFN subframe configuration for each MBSFN area in each cell when the DRX period is also taken into consideration. SFN is set to 0 to SFNmax, and the DRX period is set to d radio frame. From each cell, MBMS data is transmitted in a radio frame of SFN = 0 to SFNmax-d. SFN = SFNmax−d + 1 to SFNmax is a DRX period, and transmission is turned off. One DRX period is provided in the MBSFN synchronization area. Therefore, the cells belonging to each MBSFN area are turned off at the same timing (SFN). The paging signal is transmitted on the DPCH disclosed in the eighth embodiment in a radio frame of SFN = 0 to SFNmax-d in which MBMS data is transmitted. First, a paging group calculation formula will be disclosed. The paging group calculation formula is shown below.
IMSI mod Ksf
Let Ksf be the number of paging groups. A specific example of the value of Ksf is the number of MBSFN subframes in one radio frame. When the number of MBSFN subframes in one radio frame is 10, Ksf = 10. When the number of MBSFN subframes excluding # 0 and # 5 to which the SCH is mapped in one radio frame is used, Ksf = 8. By associating the value of Ksf with the subframe number in the radio frame, it is possible to know to which subframe in the radio frame the paging information of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs is mapped by the paging group. Become.

Next, two methods are disclosed as specific calculation formulas regarding to which radio frame the paging signal of the group to which the user belongs is mapped. First, the first method is disclosed. Set Paging Occasion as follows.
Paging occasion = (IMSI div Ksf) mod (SFNmax-ΣDRX),
Intermittent reception period in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer = SFNmax,
However, the paging occasion is a value obtained by renumbering radio frames excluding DRX.

  Here, SFNmax is the maximum value of SFN, and ΣDRX is the sum of all DRX periods existing from 0 to SFNmax. That is, (SFNmax−ΣDRX) indicates the number of radio frames excluding the DRX period. Therefore, as can be seen from this equation, the SFN to which the paging signal is mapped can take the value of the radio frame in which the MBSFN subframe for each MBSFN area excluding DRX exists. Also, since the intermittent reception cycle is SFNmax, for a certain mobile terminal, one paging occasion occurs when SFN is 0 to SFNmax. This makes it possible to provide a paging signal in the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area that the mobile terminal is receiving or is about to receive, and the mobile terminal is receiving or attempting to receive the paging signal. A paging signal can be received. Since the above-described method can be applied to the configuration method of the physical area on which the paging signal is placed and the method of mapping the paging signal to the paging signal dedicated channel, the description thereof is omitted here.

A second method for disclosing to which radio frame the paging signal of the group to which the user belongs is mapped is disclosed. A method having two types of cycles as the intermittent reception cycle in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer. One is a cycle in which intermittent reception is repeated within the maximum value of SFN, and the other is a cycle in which intermittent reception is repeated for each maximum value of SFN. The specific paging occasion (Paging Occasion) is as follows.
Paging Occasion = (IMSI div Ksf) mod (intermittent reception cycle # 1 in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer) + n × (intermittent reception cycle # 1 in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer),
Intermittent reception cycle # 1 ≦ (SFNmax−ΣDRX) in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer,
Intermittent reception period # 2 = SFNmax in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer,
n: 0, 1, 2,... However, ∀Paging Occlusion ≦ (SFNmax−ΣDRX).
However, the paging occasion is a value obtained by renumbering radio frames excluding DRX.

Here, the intermittent reception cycle # 1 in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer is a cycle in which intermittent reception is repeated within the maximum value of SFN. The intermittent reception cycle # 2 in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer is a cycle in which intermittent reception is repeated for each maximum value of SFN. In the intermittent reception cycle # 2 in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, the value pattern of the radio frame between 0 and SFNmax calculated in the intermittent reception cycle # 1 in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer is repeated for each maximum value of SFN. It is the period for setting as follows. By determining n so that all possible values of the paging occasion calculation result are (SFNmax-ΣDRX) or less, the paging opportunities of each mobile terminal are given equally. If it is not necessary to give each mobile terminal equal paging opportunities,
n: 0, 1, 2,... However, Paging Occation ≦ (SFNmax−ΣDRX) may be used.
By doing this, there will be a difference in paging opportunities for each mobile terminal, but there will be no radio frames that are not used for paging signal notification, and it will be possible for mobile terminals to receive paging signals as much as possible, It is possible to reduce paging signal reception errors, incoming operation delays, and the like.

A specific setting example of the intermittent reception cycle # 1 in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer is shown. For example,
a × 2 (k−1) ≦ SFNmax−ΣDRX, where a and k are positive integers,
In advance, a, a × 2, a × 2 2 ,..., A × 2 (k−1) are set as the intermittent reception cycle # 1 in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer so that they can be selected from them. It ’s fine. a, k values are selected in the upper layer, and broadcast information of cells in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, broadcast information of cells in the MBMS dedicated frequency layer, or in the MBSFN area that the mobile terminal is receiving or is about to receive The mobile terminal may be notified using the MCCH corresponding to the MBMS service, and the mobile terminal may calculate based on the notified value. Also in this method, since the above-described method can be applied to the configuration method of the physical area on which the paging signal is carried and the method of mapping the paging signal to the paging signal dedicated channel, the description thereof is omitted here.

  In the above, the specific example of the transmission method of the paging signal when the DRX period is taken into consideration has been disclosed. As a paging signal transmission method when the DRX period is taken into consideration, the paging signal may be put on the MBSFN subframe of the radio frame excluding the DRX period. The MBSFN subframe may be all MBSFN subframes of a radio frame excluding the DRX period or may be a part of MBSFN subframes.

  In the above, the transmission method of the paging signal when the DRX period is taken into consideration has been disclosed. This method having two types of intermittent reception periods in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer is also applicable to the case where the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area is TDMed. For example, as shown in FIG. 39, when there is no overlapping MBSFN area in each cell and the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area is TDM and there is a DRX period, (SFNmax-ΣDRX) Instead of this, the number of radio frames having MBSFN subframes corresponding to the MBSFN area to which each cell belongs may be used, and the number of MBSFN subframes in one radio frame may be set to Ksf. For example, as shown in FIG. 41, there is an overlapping MBSFN area in each cell, an MBSFN subframe corresponding to a non-overlapping MBSFN area is CDMed, and an overlapping MBSFN area is supported. When the MBSFN subframe is TDM and there is a DRX period, several methods are conceivable.

  Similarly, when a paging signal is transmitted on one MBSFN area to which each cell belongs, the number of radio frames having MBSFN subframes corresponding to the MBSFN area is used instead of (SFNmax-ΣDRX), and one radio frame Of these, the number of MBSFN subframes may be set to Ksf. When transmitting a paging signal in the covering MBSFN area (area 4), a DPCH is provided in the subframes # 0 and # 5 of the covering MBSFN area, and scrambling of the covering MBSFN area (for example, area 1) is performed. Just send a ring code. As disclosed in the second embodiment, since the SCH is transmitted in the subframes # 0 and # 5 of the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the covered MBSFN area, the scrambling code and the reference signal of the MBSFN area 1 are transmitted. (RS) is configured to be used. Therefore, DPCH is provided in the subframes of # 0 and # 5 in the covering MBSFN area, and the DPCH is provided in all radio frames except for the DRX period by sending the MBSFN area 1 with the scrambling code. Is possible. Therefore, (SFNmax-ΣDRX) may be used as it is, and Ksf may be set to 2 (corresponding to # 0 and # 5 subframes). If there is no subframe to be multiplied by the scrambling code of the covered MBSFN area (eg area 1) in the covering MBSFN area (area 4), the same paging signal shall be transmitted in all radio frames except for the DRX period Is impossible. Therefore, DPCH is provided in the MBSFN subframe of only MBSFN area 1 or MBSFN area 4 and a paging signal is transmitted. In this case, as in the case of transmitting a paging signal on one MBSFN area, the number of radio frames having MBSFN subframes corresponding to any one MBSFN area is set instead of (SFNmax−ΣDRX). The number of MBSFN subframes in the radio frame may be set to Ksf.

  In the above description, it has been explained that the paging signal transmission method can be applied even when the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area is TDM. However, in this case, a DRX period is further provided. Is applicable. By adopting the above-described paging signal notification method and channel configuration for paging signal transmission, even when a DRX period is provided in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, the MBMS dedicated cell in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer of the LTE system. Can be notified of a paging signal. Furthermore, as the DRX period, the case where the DRX period is provided for the purpose of enabling the synchronization maintenance in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, the acquisition of broadcast information, and the cell reselection is described above. Even when a period is provided, the paging signal notification method and the channel configuration on which the paging signal is disclosed disclosed in this embodiment can be applied. Therefore, the unicast / mixed frequency layer, the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, Other systems can coexist and be shared, and a mobile communication system can be configured and operated flexibly.

  A process flow of the mobile communication system in the present embodiment will be described. Differences from the method disclosed in the second embodiment are mainly described. First, in addition to MCCH scheduling information such as MCCH repetition period and DRX information for unicast / mixed frequency layer measurement, parameters for MBMS reception time absence reception, specifically MBMS transmission The mobile terminal must be notified of the intermittent reception period in the dedicated frequency layer and the intermittent reception periods # 1, # 2, a, k, and Ksf in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer. It is not necessary to notify all of these pieces of information, and it is only necessary to notify the necessary parameters according to the paging group used and the calculation formula of the paging occasion (paging occasion). These parameters for reception without MBMS reception time may be reported to the mobile terminal via BCCH from the MBMS dedicated cell in ST1723 and ST1724 together with information related to MCCH scheduling. In addition, MBMS area information, DRX information for measurement of a unicast / mixed frequency layer, and the number of paging groups may be notified from the MBMS dedicated cell to the mobile terminal via MCCH in ST1728 and ST1729. Here, it is only required to be notified of parameters necessary for the paging-acquisition calculation formula, but not only paging-acquisition, but a parameter indicating which timing (SFN) the mobile terminal should receive during the intermittent reception operation If it is good. Specific examples include explicit reception timing (SFN) and intermittent reception cycle.

  Next, the intermittent reception preparation operation in the mobile terminal will be described. FIG. 76 shows the intermittent reception preparation operation process in the mobile terminal according to the present embodiment. ST6201 is performed instead of ST1735 in FIG. In ST6201, the mobile terminal performs MBMS reception time missing reception preparation using the MBMS reception time missing reception parameter received in step ST1729. Specifically, using the number of paging groups Ksf received in step ST1729, the intermittent reception period in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, a, k, DRX information, etc., the paging group and paging occasion of the mobile terminal described above are used. calculate. Further, the mobile terminal identification ID (UE-ID, IMSI) is used for the calculation of the paging group and the paging occasion. SFNmax may be determined in advance as a system, and the value is used.

  Next, the intermittent reception process at the time of MBMS reception will be described. FIG. 77 shows MBMS reception time missing reception processing in the present embodiment. In step ST6301, the mobile terminal determines whether it is the reception timing of the paging signal from the paging occasion calculation result performed in step ST6201. More specifically, it is determined whether the SFN number of the paging occasion addressed to the mobile terminal itself. If it is not a paging occasion SFN number, the mobile terminal makes a transition to ST6306. In ST6306, the mobile terminal uses MCCH scheduling received in ST1725 to determine whether it is MCCH reception timing. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the head SFN number to which the MCCH is mapped is determined. As a specific example, the MCCH repetition period of the parameter example received in step ST1725, the head SFN number to which the MCCH is mapped is obtained using the starting point value, and the MCCH is mapped based on the SFN mapped to the BCCH or the like. It is determined whether or not it is the head to be played. When it is not the head timing to which MCCH is mapped, it transfers to step ST1753. When it is the head timing to which MCCH is mapped, it transfers to step ST1788. For example, step ST1722 may determine for each MCCH repetition period 1 in FIG. For example, in FIGS. 27 and 29, the determination may be made for each MCCH repetition period. If it is the SFN number of the paging occasion in ST6301, the process moves to ST6302.

  In step ST6307, paging occurs to the mobile terminal. In Step ST6308, the MME confirms the TA (Tracking Area) list of the mobile terminal based on the identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) of the mobile terminal where paging has occurred. In Step ST6309, the MME determines whether TA (MBMS) is included in the TA list of the mobile terminal. As a specific example, the TA list of the mobile terminal is searched based on the UE-ID in the list as shown in FIG. If the mobile terminal is UE # 1 (UE-ID # 1) in FIG. 31 [a], it is determined that TA (MBMS) is not included. On the other hand, when the mobile terminal is UE # 2 (UE-ID # 2) in FIG. 31 [a], it is determined that TA (MBMS) is included because TA (MBMS) # 1 is included. To do. When TA (MBMS) is not included, it transfers to step ST1814. If TA (MBMS) is included, the process proceeds to step ST6310. In Step ST6310, the MME transmits a paging request to the MCE. As MCEs that transmit a paging request from the MME, all MCEs that manage base stations that are geographically overlapped with the base stations managed by the MME can be considered. Specific examples of parameters in the paging request include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), TA (MBMS) numbers, and the like. At this time, f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID or MBSFN area ID may be used instead of the TA (MBMS) number.

  In step ST6311, the MCE receives the paging request. Of the MCEs that have received the paging request in Step ST6312, the MCE that is notified as a parameter in the paging request and controls the MBSFN area ID associated with the TA (MBMS) number prepares for paging transmission. As a specific example of preparation for paging transmission, a paging group and a paging occasion of the mobile terminal are calculated using parameters for reception when MBMS reception time is missing. More specifically, the parameters for the MBMS reception time missing reception are the number of paging groups Ksf of the own base station (own MBSFN Area), the intermittent reception cycle in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, a, k, DRX information, and the like. When calculating the paging group and the paging occasion, the same formula as that used on the mobile terminal side is used. Since a specific calculation formula has been described above, it is omitted here. As described above, the method for managing the connection between the TA (MBMS) number (MBSFN Area) and the MCE on the MCE side that has received the paging request is based on the relationship between the MBSFN area ID and the MCE that controls the MBSFN area architecture. Since it can be performed only within the network, that is, it can be performed independently of the MME, an effect that a mobile communication system with a high degree of freedom can be constructed can be obtained.

  In addition, the MME manages the MBSFN area ID related to the TA (MBMS) number as shown in FIG. 31 [c], and further, as shown in FIG. 31 [d], the MBSFN area ID and the MCE that controls the MBSFN area ID. Consider the case of managing numbers. In this case, in step ST6310, the MME transmits a paging request only to the MCE that manages the MBSFN area ID related to the TA (MBMS) number. As a specific example of the parameter in the paging request at that time, an identifier of the mobile terminal can be considered. The MCE that has received the paging request in Step ST6311 prepares for paging transmission in the same manner as described above. As described above, the method of managing the relationship between the MBSFN area ID and the MCE that controls the ID in the MME (FIG. 31 [d]) effectively uses resources because the number of MCEs notified from the MME to the MCE is reduced. Can be obtained. Further, since the amount of information to be notified is reduced, it is possible to obtain an effect that resources can be effectively used.

  Further, the MME manages the MBSFN area ID related to the TA (MBMS) number as shown in FIG. 31 [c], and further, the MBMS included in the MBSFN area ID and the MBSFN area ID as shown in FIG. 31 [e]. Consider a case in which cell IDs of dedicated cells and MBMS / unicast mixed cells are managed. In this case, in step ST6310, the MME transmits a paging request to the cell included in the MBSFN area ID managed by the MME, not the MCE. As a specific example of the parameter in the paging request at that time, an identifier of the mobile terminal can be considered. As described above, the method of managing the relationship between the MBSFN area ID and the cells included in the MBSFN area ID in the MME (FIG. 31 [e]) does not require the MCE to perform processing related to paging signal transmission of the mobile terminal. Get better. This eliminates the need for adding a function to the MCE, so that the effect of avoiding the complexity of the MCE can be obtained. In addition, the effect of reducing the processing load of the MCE can be obtained.

  As a channel configuration example for actually mapping the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, the channel configuration of the paging dedicated channel (DPCH) disclosed in Embodiment 8 and the method for mapping the paging signal to the paging signal dedicated channel can be applied. These configurations and methods are shown in FIGS. 43, 44, and 45. Since these details are disclosed in the eighth embodiment, they are omitted here.

  Hereinafter, the channel configuration for mapping the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44 as an example. In Step ST6313, the MCE schedules the paging signal of the mobile terminal. Specifically, the PCFICH value is determined from the paging signal physical area (number of OFDM symbols) required according to the number of mobile terminals in which paging occurs. In addition, the mobile terminal number of the information element mapped to the paging signal physical area on the MBSFN subframe number of the SFN number obtained from the paging group number of the mobile terminal calculated in step ST6312 and the paging occasion. Decide whether to assign an identifier. By performing this scheduling in the MCE, the identifier of the mobile terminal is transmitted from the same physical resource of the base station included in the MBSFN area. As a result, the mobile terminal can receive the paging signal benefiting from the SFN gain by receiving the DPCH transmitted in multi-cell in the MBSFN area. In Step ST6314, the MCE transmits a paging request for the mobile terminal to the base station in the MBSFN area. Specific examples of parameters included in the paging request include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), and paging signal scheduling results (specifically, SFN and MBSFN subframes) performed in step ST6313. Number, information element number, and PCFICH value). In step ST6315, each base station in the MBSFN area receives the paging request from the MCE.

  Instead of providing the MME-MCE IF between the MME 103 and the MCE 801, an MME-MBMS GW interface may be provided between the MME 103 and the MBMS GW 802 (more specifically, MBMS CP 802-1). Even if the processing contents of the MCE from step ST6311 to step ST6314 are performed by the MBMS GW, the same effect as the present invention can be obtained.

  In step ST6316, each base station in the MBSFN area calculates the mobile terminal paging group and the paging occasion. In the calculation, the same formula as that used on the mobile terminal side is used. If the paging group and paging occasion of the mobile terminal are also notified in step ST6314, step ST6316 can be omitted. Thereby, the reduction effect of the control load of each base station in the MBSFN area can be obtained. On the other hand, in the method of calculating the paging group and the paging occasion at each base station in the MBSFN area at step ST6316 without notifying the paging group or the paging occasion of the mobile terminal at step ST6314, the MCE to the MBSFN area The notification information for each base station can be reduced, and the effect of effective use of resources can be obtained. In step ST6317, each base station in the MBSFN area derives the radio frame number and MBSFN subframe number for transmitting the paging signal using the identifier of the mobile terminal, the scheduling result of the paging signal, etc. received in step ST6315. To do. In Step ST6318, the PCFICH value is mapped to the PCFICH physical area of the derived radio frame number and MBSFN subframe number, and the mobile terminal has the DPCH physical area of the derived radio frame number and MBSFN subframe number to the physical area of the DPCH. The identifier is assigned to the information element number and mapped and transmitted. A paging signal is transmitted to each base station in the MBSFN area. In this case, the method disclosed in the eighth embodiment can be used as the mapping method to the paging-related area in the DPCH, the specific mapping method to the physical channel, and the like.

  In Step ST6302, the mobile terminal receives the PCFICH of the MBSFN subframe of its own group obtained from the paging group calculation result. In Step ST6303, the mobile terminal determines the number of OFDM symbols for DPCH from PCFICH. In Step ST6304, the mobile terminal receives and decodes the physical area carrying the DPCH of the same MBSFN subframe based on the determined number of DPCH OFDM symbols. At that time, blind detection is performed by performing a correlation calculation with an identification code unique to the mobile terminal. In step ST6305, the mobile terminal determines whether the identifier of the mobile terminal has been detected in the blind detection performed in step ST6304. When not detected, it transfers to step ST1788. If detected, the process proceeds to step ST1819.

  Accordingly, it is possible to disclose a paging signal notification method and a mobile communication system therefor for a mobile terminal receiving an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, which is a subject of the present invention. Also, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission has an effect that the paging signal can be received.

  By using the method of notifying the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer disclosed in the present embodiment, the number of MBSFN subframes carrying the paging signal and the number of radio frames having the same can be increased. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the number of mobile terminals that can be carried in one MBSFN subframe, and the physical area required to carry the paging signal of the number of mobile terminals in one MBSFN subframe can be reduced. become. In addition, since it is not necessary to determine the intermittent reception cycle in the MBMS transmission frequency layer depending on the cycle in which the MCCH is transmitted, the intermittent reception cycle can be flexibly set as a system.

  In the above description, as a paging signal notification method, the case where the paging occasion exists in all radio frames except the DRX period has been described. The paging occasion may be one or a plurality of radio frames excluding the DRX period. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a paging dedicated channel (DPCH) for carrying a paging signal in all radio frames, and it becomes possible to transmit data for MBMS service in radio frames that do not carry a paging signal. Service speed and capacity can be increased. A specific method is disclosed in which one or a plurality of radio frames excluding the DRX period are used as the paging occasion. The calculation formula of the paging group is the same, and K is IMSI mod K as the number of paging groups.

  A specific example of the value of K is the number of MBSFN subframes in one radio frame. For example, when the number of MBSFN subframes in one radio frame is 10, K = 10. When the number of MBSFN subframes excluding # 0 and # 5 to which SCH is mapped in one radio frame is used, K = 8. By associating the value of K (the remainder value at K) with the subframe number in the radio frame, the mobile station moves to any subframe in the radio frame according to the paging group value calculated by the above formula. It can be seen whether the paging information of the group to which the terminal belongs is mapped. Next, it associates with which radio frame the paging signal of the group to which it belongs is mapped. As a specific example, the calculation formula is as follows. First, a case where there is no DRX period will be disclosed.

  “Paging Occasion” = (IMSI div K) mod X + n × (intermittent reception cycle in the MBMS transmission frequency layer), n: 0, 1, 2,..., Where Paging Occation ≦ SFN . SFN is an integer from 0 to the maximum value of SFN. X is the number of radio frames in which paging occurs within the intermittent reception cycle in the MBMS transmission frequency layer, and X ≦ intermittent reception cycle (number of radio frames) in the MBMS transmission frequency layer. A value of X (residue value at X) and a radio frame number (SFN) are associated with each other.

  In this way, paging can occur in X radio frames within the intermittent reception period in the MBMS transmission frequency layer, and the radio frame automatically moves to which radio frame depending on the value of the paging occasion calculated by the above formula. It will be understood whether the paging information of the terminal is carried. In a radio frame other than the radio frame related to the value of X, paging occasion does not occur, and data for MBMS service can be transmitted. When radio frames in which paging occurs are periodic, for example, when the period is TX, the following equation may be used.

  “Paging Occasion” = ((IMSI div K) mod (Int (T / TX))) × TX + n × (intermittent reception cycle in MBMS transmission frequency layer), n: 0, 1, 2, .. However, the maximum value of Paging Occlusion ≦ SFN. SFN is an integer from 0 to the maximum value of SFN. TX ≤ MBMS transmission frequency layer intermittent reception period (number of radio frames).

  By making it periodic, it is no longer necessary to associate the aforementioned X value (the remainder value at X) with the radio frame number (SFN), so that the calculation operation can be simplified. Next, a case where there is a DRX period will be disclosed. “Paging Occasion” = (IMSI div K) mod X + n × (intermittent reception cycle in the MBMS transmission frequency layer), n: 0, 1, 2,..., Where Paging Occation ≦ SFN . SFN is an integer from 0 to the maximum value of SFN. X is the number of radio frames in which paging occurs within the intermittent reception period in the MBMS transmission frequency layer, and X ≦ (SFNmax−ΣDRX). A value of X (residue value at X) and a radio frame number (SFN) are associated with each other.

  Or, “paging occurrence radio frame” (Paging Occasion) = ((IMSI div K) mod (Int (T / TX))) × TX + n × (intermittent reception cycle in MBMS transmission frequency layer), n: 0, 1, 2 However, the maximum value of Paging Occlusion ≦ SFN. SFN is an integer from 0 to the maximum value of SFN. TX ≦ (SFNmax−ΣDRX). However, the paging occasion is a value obtained by renumbering radio frames excluding DRX.

  The above-mentioned parameters for MBMS reception time missing reception may be notified of necessary parameters according to the paging group used and the calculation formula of the paging occasion (paging occasion). For example, as a parameter for missing reception of MBMS reception time, in the above paging approximation calculation formula, discontinuous reception cycle, X, X value (remainder value of X) and radio frame number (SFN) in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer , TX, K, K values (remainder values of K) and subframes. These parameters for reception without MBMS reception time may be reported to the mobile terminal via BCCH from the MBMS dedicated cell in ST1723 and ST1724 together with information related to MCCH scheduling. In addition, MBMS area information, DRX information for measurement of a unicast / mixed frequency layer, and the number of paging groups may be notified from the MBMS dedicated cell to the mobile terminal via MCCH in ST1728 and ST1729. Here, it is only required to be notified of parameters necessary for the paging-acquisition calculation formula, but not only paging-acquisition, but a parameter indicating which timing (SFN) the mobile terminal should receive during the intermittent reception operation If it is good. Specific examples include explicit reception timing (SFN) and intermittent reception cycle. The relationship between the X value (residue value of X) and the radio frame number (SFN) and the relationship between the K value (residue value of K) and the subframe may be determined in advance without using parameters. For example, when the number of subframes on which a paging signal is carried is K, when the K remainder value is 0, the first subframe in which the paging signal in the radio frame is carried, and when the K remainder value is 1, the paging signal When the remainder value of K is K−1, it is the last Kth subframe in which the paging signal in the radio frame is carried. By doing so, the amount of signaling can be reduced, and the transmission capacity of the MBMS service can be increased.

  In the above description, as a paging signal notification method, the case where the paging occasion is one or a plurality of radio frames excluding the DRX period is shown. This method can also be applied when an MBSFN subframe corresponding to an MBSFN area is TDMed. As described above, when the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area is TDMed, the number of radio frames having the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area may be used instead of (SFNmax-ΣDRX). .

  As described above, with respect to the physical area on which the paging signal is carried, a paging dedicated physical channel (DPCH) disclosed in the eighth embodiment for multi-cell transmission in the MBSFN area is provided, and the paging signal is transmitted on the physical channel. Can be applied. In this case, the DPCH does not need to be configured in all radio frames corresponding to the MBSFN area, and may be configured in a radio frame in which paging occasions occur. Further, the DPCH may be configured in all MBSFN subframes in one radio frame or may be configured in K MBSFN subframes. As a result, data for the MBMS service can be transmitted in a radio frame that does not constitute the DPCH, so that the speed and capacity of the MBMS service can be increased. By adopting such a paging signal notification method, even when a DRX period is provided in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, the MBMS dedicated cell can notify the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer of the LTE system. The effect of becoming can be obtained. In the paging method according to the present invention, since communication after paging is performed by a unicast cell, only paging indicators (Paging Indicator: PI) for notifying whether there is an incoming call may be used as paging information transmitted by the base station. Also in this case, the DPCH configuration disclosed in the eighth embodiment can be applied.

Embodiment 16
In the second embodiment, a method for transmitting a paging signal from all the cells in the MBSFN area that transmits the MBMS service that the mobile terminal is receiving or is about to receive has been disclosed. Here, in order to enable a mobile terminal to receive a paging signal in the MBMS dedicated frequency layer regardless of the presence or absence of an MBSFN area covering a plurality of MBSFN areas, the paging signal is transmitted using the main PMCH. A method of transmitting from all cells in the MBSFN Synchronization Area is disclosed. In the description, the description will focus on parts that are different from the second embodiment. Portions that are not particularly described are the same as in the second embodiment.

  A main PMCH used for multi-cell transmission in all cells in the MBSFN synchronization area is used as a physical channel for carrying a paging signal. The main PMCH has been disclosed in the ninth embodiment. The main PMCH is configured to be synchronized in all cells in the MBSFN synchronization area, and SFN synthesis is performed. This is because one MBSFN area to which all cells in the MBSFN synchronization area belong is provided, and the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area may be used as the main PMCH. Here, a case where time division multiplexing and code division multiplexing are mixed as a PMCH provided for each MBSFN area will be described as an example. FIG. 46 shows a configuration of a physical channel (main PMCH) transmitted in multicell within the MBSFN synchronization area. Cell # n1 is a cell in MBSFN area 1, cell # n2 is a cell in MBSFN area 2, and cell # n3 is a cell in MBSFN area 3. Further, the cells # n1, # n2, and # n3 are also cells in the MBSFN area 4. The main PMCH is provided by time-division multiplexing with MBSFN subframes for other MBSFN areas, and is transmitted in a repetition period main PMCH repetition period. Since a specific configuration is disclosed in the ninth embodiment, a description thereof will be omitted.

  A process flow of the mobile communication system in the present embodiment will be described. Since the paging signal is on the main PMCH transmitted in multi-cells in all cells in the MBSFN synchronization area, the method for notifying the paging signal to the mobile terminal is different from that in the second embodiment. Differences from the method disclosed in the second embodiment are mainly described. First, in addition to information related to MCCH scheduling such as the MCCH repetition period, scheduling information of the main PMCH must be notified to the mobile terminal. Specifically, the main PMCH scheduling information includes main PMCH start timing (SFN, starting point), main PMCH repetition period, subframe number, paging signal presence / absence indicator repetition period, MBMS-related change presence / absence indicator repetition period, These are the start timing (SFN, starting point) of the existing MBSFN subframe, subframe number, and the like. The scheduling information of the main PMCH may be notified from the DMBMS to the mobile terminal via BCCH in ST1723 and ST1724 together with the information related to the scheduling of the MCCH, or for MBMS area information and unicast / mixed frequency layer measurement. In addition to the DRX information and the number of paging groups, the mobile terminal may be notified from the MBMS dedicated cell via MCCH in ST1728 and ST1729.

  The scrambling code used in the MCH / PCH / main PCH mapped to the main PMCH is transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN synchronization area, so that the scrambling corresponding to the MBSFN area (eg, MBSFN area 1) to which the searched MBMS dedicated cell belongs. Different from ring code. Therefore, the scrambling code needs to be notified to the mobile terminal. The scrambling code may be notified from the MBMS dedicated cell to the mobile terminal via BCCH in ST1723 and ST1724 together with the scheduling information of the main PMCH, or from the MBMS dedicated cell in ST1728 and ST1729. May be notified to the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal receives the main PMCH based on the main PMCH scheduling information received in ST1724 or ST1729, and descrambles and decodes the main PMCH using the scrambling code received in ST1724 or ST1729 ( decode). Since the scrambling code is used in all cells in the MBSFN synchronization area, the scrambling code may be determined in advance. (MBMS) may be transmitted to the mobile terminal. The number of paging groups K (Kmp) used in the main PMCH channel configuration described in the ninth embodiment is the same as in the second embodiment in the MBSFN area (to which the searched MBMS dedicated cell belongs) in ST1728 and ST1729. For example, it is included in the MCCH of MBSFN area 1) and transmitted from the MBMS dedicated cell to the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal uses the paging group number Kmp to calculate a paging group as a preparation for MBMS reception time missing reception in ST1735.

  Next, a tracking area (TA) list at a frequency dedicated to MBMS transmission will be described. Since the main PMCH is transmitted by multi-cell transmission in all cells in the MBSFN synchronization area, the paging signal notification range to the mobile terminal can be all in the MBSFN synchronization area. For this reason, the tracking area of the MBMS transmission dedicated cell can be all within the MBSFN synchronization area. In Embodiment 2, FIG. 31 [a] shows a TA list of each mobile terminal, and FIG. 31 [b] shows a correspondence table between TAs (unicast) and cells belonging to a unicast / mixed frequency layer. These can also be applied to this embodiment. Next, in the present embodiment, a table for newly associating the tracking area (TA) and the MBSFN synchronization area at a frequency dedicated to MBMS transmission is provided. FIG. 78 shows a specific example of a table indicating a tracking area (TA) at a frequency dedicated to MBMS transmission. FIG. 78 [a] shows a table of MBSFN area IDs and f (MBMS) numbers and MBSFN synchronization area numbers (ID) to which the MBSFN area IDs and f (MBMS) numbers belong. Using this table, the MBSFN synchronization area number is related from the MBSFN area ID and the f (MBMS) number. FIG. 78 [b] shows a table showing the relationship between the MBSFN synchronization area ID and the TA (MBMS) number. As a result, the TA (MBMS) number in the MBMS dedicated frequency layer to which the MBSFN area received by the mobile terminal belongs is associated.

  Details of TA list management will be described. In the second embodiment, the method disclosed in the reception status on the MBMS side is applicable. As shown in FIG. 20, in step ST1742, the mobile terminal transmits an “MBMS side reception status notification” to the serving cell according to the UL allocation received in step ST1741. Examples of parameters included in the “MBMS side reception status notification” include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), MBMS service reception frequency (f (MBMS)), and MBSFN area number (ID). )and so on. In Step ST1743, the serving cell receives an MBMS-side reception status notification from the mobile terminal. In step ST1743, the network side receives the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission without adding an uplink to the MBMS dedicated cell, that is, without increasing the complexity as a mobile communication system. You can know that it is. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to change from the configuration in which the network side notifies the normal paging signal to the MBMS reception time missing reception configuration. In Step ST1744, the serving cell transmits an MBMS side reception status notification to the MME. In Step ST1745, the MME receives the MBMS side reception status notification from the serving cell. In Step ST1746, the MME determines a tracking area (hereinafter referred to as TA (MBMS)) that is receiving the MBMS service at the frequency dedicated to MBMS transmission of the mobile terminal. When determining the tracking area, based on the MBMS side reception status notification, more specifically, based on the MBMS side reception status parameter, more specifically, based on f (MBMS) and MBSFN area number in the parameter. decide. When f (MBMS) and the MBSFN synchronization area have a one-to-one correspondence, the MBSFN area number need not be used. Specifically, the MBSFN area ID is not included in the table of FIG. Also, the MBSFN area number is not included in the MBMS side reception status parameters of ST1742 to ST1745. By doing so, it becomes possible to reduce the amount of signaling between the mobile terminal and the serving cell, and between the serving cell and the MME, and the efficiency of radio resources can be improved.

  In step ST1747, the tracking area list of the mobile terminal is updated. In the current 3GPP, it is determined to have a plurality of tracking areas for one mobile terminal in the unicast / mixed frequency layer (hereinafter referred to as TA (unicast)). However, at the present stage where it is not determined whether or not to transmit a paging signal to the mobile terminal from the MBMS dedicated cell or in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, the MBMS dedicated cell and MBMS transmission dedicated The frequency layer is not taken into consideration. In Step ST1747, the TA list including TA (unicast) and / or TA (MBMS) is managed (saved, added, updated, deleted). Details of the management of the TA list in step ST1747 will be described. The MME searches for the TA (MBMS) number managed in the MME based on the f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID received in step ST1745. As a specific search method, for example, the table of FIG. 78 is used. From the received f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID, the corresponding MBSFN synchronization area number (ID) is searched using FIG. 78 [a], and the corresponding TA (MBMS) number is searched using FIG. 78 [b]. To do. Next, it is determined whether or not TA (MBMS) found as a result of the search exists in the TA list of the mobile terminal.

  If it exists, the current TA list is saved. If not, the TA (MBMS) is added to the TA list of the mobile terminal. In Step ST1748, the MME transmits an MBck side reception status notification Ack to the serving cell. As a parameter example included in Ack of the MBMS side reception status notification, a TA list of the mobile terminal can be considered. In Step ST1749, the serving cell receives an Ack of MBMS side reception status notification from the MME. In Step ST1750, the serving cell transmits Ack of MBMS side reception status notification to the mobile terminal. In Step ST1751, the mobile terminal receives an Ack of MBMS side reception status notification from the serving cell. In Step ST1752, the mobile terminal changes the set frequency of the frequency conversion section 1107 and moves to the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission by changing the center frequency to the frequency of the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission (f (MBMS)). .

  Next, details of the processing when paging occurs in the mobile terminal according to the present embodiment will be described. In step ST1773, paging occurs to the mobile terminal. In Step ST1774, the MME confirms the TA list of the mobile terminal based on the identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) of the mobile terminal where paging has occurred. In Step ST1775, the MME determines whether TA (MBMS) is included in the TA list of the mobile terminal. As a specific example, the TA list of the mobile terminal is searched based on the UE-ID in the list as shown in FIG. When the mobile terminal is UE # 1 (UE-ID # 1) in FIG. 31 [a], it is determined that TA (MBMS) is not included. On the other hand, if the mobile terminal is UE # 2 (UE-ID # 2) in FIG. 31 [a], it is determined that TA (MBMS) is included because TA (MBMS) # 1 is included. To do. When TA (MBMS) is not included, it transfers to step ST1814. If TA (MBMS) is included, the process proceeds to step ST1776. In Step ST1776, the MME transmits a paging request to the MCE. As MCEs that transmit a paging request from the MME, all MCEs that manage base stations that are geographically overlapped with the base stations managed by the MME can be considered. Specific examples of parameters in the paging request include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), TA (MBMS) numbers, and the like. At this time, f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID or MBSFN synchronization area ID may be used instead of the TA (MBMS) number.

  In step ST1777, the MCE receives the paging request. Of the MCEs that have received the paging request in step ST1778, control the MBSFN synchronization area ID or f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID, which are notified as parameters in the paging request, associated with the TA (MBMS) number. The MCE that is present prepares for paging transmission. As a specific example of preparation for paging transmission, the paging group of the mobile terminal is calculated using the number of paging groups Kmp used in the main PMCH and the received paging request. In the calculation, the same formula as that used on the mobile terminal side is used. As a specific example, the same paging group = IMSI mod Kmp as in step ST1735 is used. As described above, the MCE side that has received the paging request has information for attaching the TA (MBMS) number and the MCE as shown in the table of FIG. 78, and the method for managing the attachment is the MBSFN synchronization area ID. Alternatively, since the relationship between the f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID and the MCE that controls it can be performed only within the architecture of the MBMS service, that is, independent of the MME, a mobile communication system with a high degree of freedom is constructed. The effect that it becomes possible can be acquired.

  78, the MME manages the f (MBMS) and MBSFN area IDs related to the TA (MBMS) number as shown in FIG. 78, and further, as shown in FIG. 79 [a], the f (MBMS) and MBSFN area IDs. And the case of managing the number of the MCE that controls it. In this case, in Step ST1776, the MME transmits a paging request only to the MCE that manages the f (MBMS) and MBSFN area IDs related to the TA (MBMS) number. As a specific example of the parameter in the paging request at that time, an identifier of the mobile terminal can be considered. FIG. 79 [a] shows a correspondence table of f (MBMS) and MBSFN area IDs and the numbers of MCEs controlling the IDs, but not f (MBMS) and MBSFN area IDs, and MBSFN synchronization area IDs and control them. It may be a correspondence table of MCE numbers. The MCE that has received the paging request in Step ST1778 prepares for paging transmission as described above. As described above, the method of managing the relationship between f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID and the MCE controlling the same in the MME reduces the number of MCEs to be notified from the MME to the MCE, thereby effectively using resources. Can be obtained. Further, since the amount of information to be notified is reduced, it is possible to obtain an effect that resources can be effectively used.

  78, the MME manages the f (MBMS) and MBSFN area IDs related to the TA (MBMS) number as shown in FIG. 78, and further, as shown in FIG. 79 [b], the f (MBMS) and MBSFN area IDs. Consider the case of managing the cell IDs of MBMS dedicated cells and / or mixed cells included therein. In this case, in Step ST1776, the MME transmits a paging request to the cell included in the MBSFN area ID managed by the MME, not the MCE. As a specific example of the parameter in the paging request at that time, an identifier of the mobile terminal can be considered. Also in this case, as in FIG. 79 [a], not the f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID in FIG. 79 [b], but the MBSFN synchronization area ID and the cell ID of the MBMS dedicated cell or / and the mixed cell included therein. It may be a correspondence table. As described above, the method for managing the relationship between f (MBMS) and MBSFN area IDs and the cells included therein in the MME does not require the MCE to perform processing related to paging signal transmission of the mobile terminal. This eliminates the need for adding a function to the MCE, so that the effect of avoiding the complexity of the MCE can be obtained. In addition, the effect of reducing the processing load of the MCE can be obtained. Since the method disclosed in the ninth embodiment can be applied to the channel configuration for mapping the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, description thereof is omitted here.

  In Step ST1779, the MCE schedules the paging signal of the mobile terminal. Specifically, it is determined to which number of information elements mapped to the physical area assigned to the paging group number of the mobile terminal calculated in step ST1778 is assigned the mobile terminal identifier. Here, unlike the method disclosed in the second embodiment, the physical area carrying the paging signal is a physical area for the main PMCH transmitted in multi-cells in the MBSFN synchronization area. Bases included in the MBSFN synchronization area by performing this scheduling in the MBSFN synchronization area ID associated with the TA (MBMS) received in ST1777 or the MCE controlling f (MBMS) and the MBSFN area ID. The identifier of the mobile terminal is transmitted from the same physical resource of the station. As a result, the mobile terminal can receive the paging signal benefiting from the SFN gain by receiving the main PMCH transmitted in multicell in the MBSFN synchronization area. In Step ST1780, the MCE transmits a paging request for the mobile terminal to the base station in the MBSFN area. As specific examples of the parameters included in the paging request, the mobile terminal identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), the scheduling result of the paging signal performed in step ST1779 (specifically, the SFN of the main PMCH, MBSFN subframe number, information element number) and the like are conceivable. In step ST1781, each base station in the MBSFN area receives a paging request from the MCE.

  In scheduling of a paging signal to the mobile terminal, the paging signal may be put on all subframes in which the main PMCH is transmitted, or the paging signal may be put on some subframes. For example, the paging signal may be put on the MCCH or the subframe in which the main MCCH is carried on the main PMCH. When paging signals are put on some subframes among the subframes in which the main PMCH is transmitted, the subframes may be determined in advance or broadcast from a unicast / mixed cell or an MBMS dedicated cell. Also good. Moreover, you may make it derive | lead-out using the same calculation formula with the same parameter by the network side (MME, MCE), a base station, and a mobile terminal. The parameter and the calculation formula may be determined in advance, or may be broadcast from a unicast / mixed cell or an MBMS dedicated cell. By placing a paging signal in all subframes, it is possible to perform paging to many mobile terminals with a small delay time. On the other hand, when a paging signal is put on some subframes, a terminal that wants to receive the paging signal does not need to receive it in all subframes in which the main PMCH is transmitted, and some of the paging signals are transmitted. Only subframes need be received, and power consumption can be reduced. In addition, by placing a paging signal on a subframe on which the MCCH or the main MCCH is carried, the mobile terminal can receive in the same subframe that receives the MCCH or the main MCCH. A mobile terminal can receive paging with a small delay time.

  In Step ST1782, each base station in the MBSFN area calculates the mobile terminal paging group. As a specific example of the calculation method, the paging group of the mobile terminal is calculated using the number of paging groups Kmp used in the main PMCH and the received paging request. In the calculation, the same formula as that used on the mobile terminal side is used. As a specific example, the same paging group = IMSI mod Kmp as in step ST1735 is used. If the paging group of the mobile terminal is also notified in step ST1780, step ST1782 can be omitted. Thereby, the effect of reducing the control load of each base station in the MBSFN area can be obtained. On the other hand, in the method of calculating the paging group in each base station in the MBSFN area in step ST1782 without notifying the paging group of the mobile terminal in step ST1780, notification information from the MCE to each base station in the MBSFN area Can be reduced, and the effect of effective use of resources can be obtained. In step ST1783, each base station in the MBSFN area uses the identifier of the mobile terminal received in step ST1781, the scheduling result of the paging signal, the paging group of the mobile terminal calculated in step ST1782, and the PMCH. Instead, the main PMCH carrying the paging signal is transmitted. The method described in the ninth embodiment can be used as a mapping method to a paging-related area in the main PMCH and a specific physical channel mapping method.

  In Step ST1784, the mobile terminal receives the paging-related change presence / absence indicator corresponding to the paging group calculated in Step ST1735 of the own mobile terminal in the main PMCH, not in the PMCH. In Step ST1785, the mobile terminal determines whether there is a change in the paging-related change presence / absence indicator. When there is no change, it transfers to step ST1788. If there is a change, the process proceeds to step ST1786. In Step ST1786, the mobile terminal continues to receive and decode the physical area to which the paging related information of the own paging group is mapped. At that time, blind detection is performed by performing a correlation calculation with an identification code unique to the mobile terminal. In step ST1787, the mobile terminal determines whether the identifier of the mobile terminal has been detected in the blind detection performed in step ST1786. When not detected, it transfers to step ST1788. If detected, the process proceeds to step ST1814. By adopting the method as described above, the mobile terminal can receive a paging signal in the MBMS dedicated frequency layer regardless of the presence or absence of an MBSFN area covering a plurality of MBSFN areas.

  In the present embodiment, a method for transmitting a paging request from the MME to the MCE as in the second embodiment has been described. As another method, a paging request may be transmitted from the MME to the MBMSGW instead of from the MME to the MCE. More specifically, it may be transmitted from the MME to the MBMSCP in the MBMSGW. This is because the channel on which the paging signal is carried is transmitted by multicell within the MBSFN synchronization area. The MBMSCP that has received the paging request transmits the paging request directly to the eNB without going through the MCE. In this case, an IF between the MME 103 and the MBMSGW 802 or the MBMSSCP 802-1 may be newly provided in the overall architecture of the mobile communication system used in the present invention disclosed in FIG. Using this IF, the paging request is transmitted from the MME to the MBMSGW or the MBMSCP. The MBMSGW or MBMSCP that has received the paging request transmits a paging request signal to all eNBs in the MBSFN synchronization area using the IF of M1.

  Next, processing when paging occurs in the mobile terminal in this case will be described. In step ST1773, paging occurs to the mobile terminal. In Step ST1774, the MME confirms the TA list of the mobile terminal based on the identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) of the mobile terminal where paging has occurred. In Step ST1775, the MME determines whether TA (MBMS) is included in the TA list of the mobile terminal. When TA (MBMS) is not included, it transfers to step ST1814. If TA (MBMS) is included, the process proceeds to step ST1776. In Step ST1776, the MME transmits a paging request to the MBMSCP instead of the MCE. As the MBMSCP that transmits a paging request from the MME, all MBMSCPs that manage the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission that can be received from the base station managed by the MME can be considered. Specific examples of parameters in the paging request include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), TA (MBMS) numbers, and the like. At this time, f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID or MBSFN synchronization area ID may be used instead of the TA (MBMS) number. In step ST1777, not MCE but MBMSCP receives the paging request. Controlling the MBSFN synchronization area ID associated with the TA (MBMS) number, or f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID, notified as a parameter in the paging request, of the MBMSCPs that received the paging request in step ST1778 The MBMSCP that is present prepares for paging transmission. As a specific example of paging transmission preparation, the paging group of the mobile terminal is calculated using the number of paging groups Kmp used in the main PMCH and the received paging request. In the calculation, the same formula as that used on the mobile terminal side is used.

  As a specific example, the same paging group = IMSI mod Kmp as in step ST1735 is used. Since the method disclosed in the ninth embodiment can be applied to the channel configuration for mapping the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, description thereof is omitted here. In Step ST1779, the MBMSCP performs scheduling of the paging signal of the mobile terminal. Specifically, it is determined to which number of information elements mapped to the physical area assigned to the paging group number of the mobile terminal calculated in step ST1778 is assigned the mobile terminal identifier. By performing this scheduling by MBMSCP, the identifier of the mobile terminal is transmitted from the same physical resource of the base station included in the MBSFN synchronization area, not in the MBSFN area. As a result, the mobile terminal can receive the paging signal benefiting from the SFN gain by receiving the main PMCH transmitted in multicell in the MBSFN synchronization area. In Step ST1780, the MBMSCP transmits a paging request for the mobile terminal to the base station in the MBSFN synchronization area. Specific examples of parameters included in the paging request include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), and paging signal scheduling results (specifically, SFN, MBSFN subframes) performed in step ST1779. Number, information element number) and the like. In Step ST1781, each base station in the MBSFN synchronization area receives a paging request from MBMSCP.

In Step ST1782, each base station in the MBSFN synchronization area calculates the mobile terminal paging group. As a specific example of the calculation method, the paging group of the mobile terminal is calculated using the number of paging groups Kmp used in the main PMCH and the received paging request. In the calculation, the same formula as that used on the mobile terminal side is used. As a specific example, paging group = IMSI mod Kmp is used as in step ST1735. If the paging group of the mobile terminal is notified in step ST1780, step ST1782 can be omitted. Thereby, effects, such as reduction of the control load of each base station in the MBSFN synchronization area, can be obtained. On the other hand, in the method of calculating the paging group in each base station in the MBSFN synchronization area in step ST1782 without notifying the paging group of the mobile terminal in step ST1780, from the MBMSCP to each base station in the MBSFN synchronization area Notification information can be reduced, and the effect of effective use of resources can be obtained.
Each base station in the MBSFN synchronization area in step ST1783 uses the identifier of the mobile terminal received in step ST1781, the scheduling result of the paging signal, the paging group of the mobile terminal calculated in step ST1782, and the like. The main PMCH carrying the signal is transmitted. The method described in the ninth embodiment can be used as a mapping method to a paging-related area in the main PMCH and a specific physical channel mapping method.

  In Step ST1784, the mobile terminal receives the paging-related information presence / absence indicator corresponding to the paging group calculated in Step ST1735 of the own mobile terminal in the main PMCH, not in the PMCH. In Step ST1785, the mobile terminal determines the presence / absence of paging-related information using the paging-related information presence / absence indicator. When there is no change, it transfers to step ST1788. If there is a change, the process proceeds to step ST1786. In Step ST1786, the mobile terminal continues to receive and decode the physical area to which the paging related information of the own paging group is mapped. At that time, blind detection is performed by performing a correlation calculation with an identification code unique to the mobile terminal. In step ST1787, the mobile terminal determines whether the identifier of the mobile terminal has been detected in the blind detection performed in step ST1786. When not detected, it transfers to step ST1788. If detected, the process proceeds to step ST1814.

  By adopting the method as described above, the mobile terminal can receive a paging signal in the MBMS dedicated frequency layer regardless of the presence or absence of an MBSFN area covering a plurality of MBSFN areas. Although the case where MME and MBMSCP exist separately was shown above, MBMSCP may have the function of MME. This eliminates the need for laying a long-distance physical IF between the MME (or EPC) and the MBMSGW or the MBMSSCP, so that the system can be configured at a low cost and with high security. Furthermore, the MME (or EPC) and the MBMSGW Alternatively, since a signal delay between MBMSCPs can be reduced, a control delay, in this case, a paging control delay can be reduced.

  When the tracking area in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer is an MBSFN synchronization area or an MBSFN area as in this embodiment or Embodiment 2, the TA (MBMS) number is derived in the MME and each mobile terminal Although a method of adding to the TA list has been disclosed, each mobile terminal and f (MBMS) and MBSFN area IDs received by the mobile terminal may be directly listed without regard to the TA list. In this case, what is necessary is just to confirm what was made into this direct list instead of the TA list of the corresponding UE in ST1774. In this case, in ST1776 and ST1777, TA (MBMS) may not be transmitted / received, but f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID may be transmitted / received. This is possible because TA is not in cell units but in MBSFN area units or MBSFN synchronization area units.

  In this embodiment, the case where time division multiplexing and code division multiplexing are mixed as a PMCH provided for each MBSFN area has been described as an example. The present invention can also be applied to the case of TDM or CDM as the PMCH.

  Accordingly, it is possible to disclose a paging signal notification method and a mobile communication system therefor for a mobile terminal receiving an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, which is a subject of the present invention. Also, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission has an effect that the paging signal can be received.

  By adopting the method of notifying the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer disclosed in the present embodiment, the main PMCH is carried in the same manner regardless of the MBSFN area of the MBMS service being received by the mobile terminal. Since the paging signal can be received by receiving the MBSFN subframe, even when the MBSFN area received by the mobile terminal is changed and the MBMS service is received, the processing can be simplified.

Embodiment 17. FIG.
In the second embodiment, a method for transmitting a paging signal from all the cells in the MBSFN area that transmits the MBMS service that the mobile terminal is receiving or is about to receive has been disclosed. In the sixteenth embodiment, a method for transmitting a paging signal from all cells in the MBSFN synchronization area has been disclosed. However, it is conceivable that the MBSFN area and the MBSFN synchronization area are geographically vast. In such a case, transmitting a paging signal for the mobile terminal from a cell that does not contribute to SFN combining in the mobile terminal wastes radio resources and causes a reduction in system capacity. Therefore, it becomes necessary to limit the cell that transmits the paging signal to a cell in which the mobile terminal exists and a neighboring cell. In order to satisfy these needs, an MBMS dedicated cell geographically corresponding to the serving cell on the unicast side of the mobile terminal is used as a tracking area, and the MBSFN area (or MBSFN synchronization area) belonging to the tracking area is used. A method for transmitting a paging signal from some of the cells is disclosed. In the description, the description will focus on parts that are different from the second embodiment. Portions that are not particularly described are the same as in the second embodiment.

  An MBSFN area that is being received or is being received by the mobile terminal, geographically corresponding to the tracking area on the unicast side of the mobile terminal, in order to limit the cell that transmits the paging signal to the cell in which the mobile terminal exists and the neighboring cells. An arbitrary MBMS dedicated cell within the MBSFN synchronization area is set as the tracking area. The MBMS dedicated frequency layer base stations are arranged in the same way as the unicast / mixed frequency layer cells, but the base stations are shared, but the devices (antennas, etc.) are unicast / mixed for the MBMS dedicated frequency layer. It is conceivable to provide both for the frequency layer, or to arrange an MBMS dedicated frequency layer base station in a part of a cell of the unicast / mixed frequency layer for spot MBMS service. In order to geographically correspond the tracking area of the unicast side and the tracking area of the MBMS dedicated cell, in the former case, the same cell for the MBMS dedicated frequency layer as the cell in the tracking area in the unicast / mixed frequency layer is used. A cell in the tracking area may be used. In the latter case, a cell for the MBMS dedicated frequency layer existing in the tracking area in the unicast / mixed frequency layer may be a cell in the tracking area. FIG. 80 shows an example in which an arbitrary MBMS dedicated cell in one MBSFN area is used as a tracking area. In the MBSFN area (MBSFN area 1) of the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, MBMS dedicated cells (tracking area TA (MBMS) # 1 in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer) and MBMS dedicated cells other than that are configured. . In the figure, a TA (MBMS) geographically corresponding to the tracking area (TA (unicast) # 1) in the unicast / mixed frequency layer is configured. The paging signal is transmitted from the MBMS dedicated cell in TA (MBMS) # 1, and the paging signal is not transmitted from other MBMS dedicated cells. In this case, in the same MBSFN area (or in the same MBSFN synchronization area), a cell that transmits a paging signal to a certain mobile terminal and a cell that does not transmit are generated, so that different signals are transmitted between the cells and multi-cell transmission is not performed. End up. Since the mobile terminal cannot selectively limit the cells to be received, a signal that is no longer multi-cell transmission is also received, causing a reception error.

  The reception quality of a desired paging signal deteriorates due to a different signal transmitted from a cell that does not transmit a paging signal. In particular, a reception error increases for a mobile terminal that exists near the boundary between a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit a paging signal, and a paging signal cannot be received. The channel configuration for paging signals for solving these problems has been disclosed in the tenth embodiment. Here, the method disclosed in the tenth embodiment is applied to the channel configuration for the paging signal. A case where code division multiplexing is performed as a PMCH provided for each MBSFN area will be described as an example. FIG. 40 shows the configuration of PMCH provided for each MBSFN area. Cell # n1 is a cell in MBSFN area 1, cell # n2 is a cell in MBSFN area 2, and cell # n3 is a cell in MBSFN area 3. PMCH corresponding to MBSFN area 1 is transmitted in the cell of cell # n1, PMCH corresponding to MBSFN area 2 is transmitted in the cell of cell # n2, and similarly, PMCH corresponding to MBSFN area 3 is transmitted in the cell of cell # n3. Is sent. The PMCH may be continuous in time or discontinuous. In the case of discontinuity, the cycle in which the MBSFN frame cluster (MBSFN frame cluster) in which the PMCH corresponding to the MBSFN area is transmitted is the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period. In addition, the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period in the case of continuous may be 0 or may not be specified. MCCH and MTCH may be temporally divided and mapped onto PMCH, or may be further temporally divided and mapped to a physical region that is transmitted in multicell. For example, MBSFN subframes that are physical areas to which MTCH and MCCH are mapped as a result may be different. A cycle in which the MCCH is repeated is defined as an MCCH repetition period.

  As for the configuration of the physical area for the paging signal, as disclosed in FIG. 46, a method of placing the paging signal on the PMCH together with the MCCH, a method of mapping the paging signal to the PMCH as one of the information elements of the MCCH, and a method of using an indicator , A method for grouping mobile terminals, a method for providing a paging signal by providing a paging dedicated channel as disclosed in FIG. 42, and a paging signal by providing a main PMCH as disclosed in FIG. The method of putting can be applied. When mapping the paging signal to the physical area where the paging signal is carried, the mapping method is changed between the cell that transmits the paging signal and the cell that does not transmit the paging signal. For example, in the MBSFN area, when there is a cell that transmits a paging signal to a mobile terminal that receives an incoming call and a cell that does not transmit, a cell that transmits a paging signal to a mobile terminal that receives an incoming call. The base station connects the switch to the terminal a using the switch 2401 as disclosed in FIG. The paging signal to the mobile terminal is multiplied by an identification number unique to the mobile terminal, CRC is added, and processing such as encoding and rate matching is performed. Since the switch 2401 is connected to the terminal a, the information after the above processing for each mobile terminal is assigned to a certain information element unit. In a cell that does not transmit a paging signal to a mobile terminal receiving an incoming call, the base station connects the switch to the terminal b using the switch 2401 as disclosed in FIG. A padding code is provided for each cell without using a paging signal to the mobile terminal, and the padding code is assigned to a certain information element unit.

  Here, the area of the information element unit allocated to a certain mobile terminal is the same in a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit. As a result, the base station can easily switch the information to be allocated between the cell that transmits the paging signal and the cell that does not transmit the paging signal by the switch. Furthermore, by making the size of the information element unit area allocated to a certain mobile terminal the same for all mobile terminals, it is possible to determine the padding code length for each cell in advance. Thus, padding code embedding control can be easily configured. As a specific example of the padding code for each cell provided in a cell that does not transmit a paging signal, for example, all0 and all1 are set as shown in FIG. In this way, the mobile terminal has an interference canceling function such as an interference canceller in the receiver, so that the mobile terminal can cancel the “0” or “1” component transmitted from the cell that does not transmit the paging signal. Therefore, only the paging signal transmitted from the cell transmitting the paging signal can be SFN-combined. Alternatively, a random value may be used. In this case, a random value is derived for each cell and padded. In this way, in the mobile terminal, the signals transmitted from the cells that do not transmit the paging signal are canceled each other due to different random signals, and the paging signal components transmitted from the cell that transmits the paging signal are relative to each other. Therefore, it is possible to reduce paging signal reception errors in the correlation calculation. Therefore, it is possible to receive a paging signal even when there are a cell that transmits a paging signal to a mobile terminal and a cell that does not transmit to the mobile terminal in the MBSFN area. A more detailed paging signal channel configuration has been described in Embodiment 10 and will not be described here.

  Next, a tracking area (TA) list at a frequency dedicated to MBMS transmission will be described. In order to limit the cell that transmits the paging signal to the cell where the mobile terminal exists and the neighboring cells, the mobile terminal is receiving or is about to receive in the MBSFN area geographically corresponding to the serving cell on the unicast side of the mobile terminal. Alternatively, any MBMS dedicated cell in the MBSFN synchronization area is set as a tracking area (TA (MBMS)). Here, a method will be described in which an arbitrary MBMS dedicated cell in the MBSFN area being received or about to be received by the mobile terminal is used as a TA. In Embodiment 2, FIG. 31 [a] shows a TA list of each mobile terminal, and FIG. 31 [b] shows a correspondence table between a tracking area (TA (unicast)) and a cell belonging to a unicast / mixed frequency layer. Indicated. These can also be applied to this embodiment. In Embodiment 2, a table associating f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID and TA (MBMS) number as shown in FIG. 31 [c] is provided, and the mobile terminal is receiving or is about to receive f ( The tracking area in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer can be derived from the MBMS) and MBSFN area ID. In the present embodiment, there are cells that transmit a paging signal and cells that do not transmit in the MBSFN area, so that the tracking area in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer is simply associated with f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID. I can't. In order to solve this problem, here, a table for associating TA (MBMS) ID with f (MBMS) and TA (unicast) ID is provided, and further, TA (MBMS) ID, TA (unicast), and geographic A table that associates MBMS transmission-dedicated cells corresponding to the above is provided. FIG. 81 shows a specific example of a table indicating TA (MBMS). 81 [a] is a table that associates TA (MBMS) ID with f (MBMS) and TA (unicast) ID, and FIG. 81 [b] is geographically associated with TA (MBMS) ID and TA (unicast). The table which associates an MBMS transmission-only cell is shown. According to these tables, the MBMS transmission dedicated cell geographically corresponding to the TA (unicast) is identified using the TA (MBMS), and the paging signal transmission is limited to the cells in the TA (MBMS). In the cell, it is possible to provide a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit the paging signal.

  Details of TA list management will be described. The method disclosed in the reception status on the MBMS side in the second embodiment can be applied. At this time, in step ST1746 of FIG. 20, in the process of determining the TA (MBMS) of the mobile terminal, the MME determines the tracking area based on the TA (unicast) ID and the MBMS side reception status notification content. Change to determine. The MBMS-side reception status notification content may be determined more specifically based on the MBMS-side reception status parameter, and more specifically based on f (MBMS) in the parameter. Also, in managing the tracking area list of the mobile terminal in step ST1747, the MME manages in the MME based on f (MBMS) received in step ST1745 and TA (unicast) determined in ST1714 to ST1716. Change to search for existing TA (MBMS) number. As a specific search method, for example, the table of FIG. Next, it is determined whether a TA (MBMS) found as a result of the search exists in the TA list of the mobile terminal (FIG. 31 [a]). If it exists, the current TA list is saved. If not, the TA (MBMS) is added to the TA list of the mobile terminal. As described above, by changing a part of the MBMS-side reception status notification process disclosed in the second embodiment, it is possible to manage the TA according to the present embodiment.

  In the above example, in ST 1742, the mobile terminal notifies the serving cell of the MBSFN area number that is being received or is about to be received, as in Embodiment 2, and further, in ST 1744, the serving cell notifies the MME of the MBSFN area number. I did it. However, in the invention according to the present embodiment, the MBSFN area number information is not necessary in managing TA (MBMS). Therefore, it is not necessary to notify the MBSFN area number in ST 1742 and ST 1744, and the amount of signaling between the mobile terminal and the serving cell and between the serving cell and the MME can be reduced.

  Next, details of the processing when paging occurs in the mobile terminal according to the present embodiment will be described. Here, in order to limit the cell that transmits the paging signal to the cell in which the mobile terminal exists and the neighboring cell, from any MBMS dedicated cell in the MBSFN area that geographically corresponds to the serving cell on the unicast side of the mobile terminal A case where a paging signal is transmitted will be described. In the MBMS reception time missing reception process disclosed in the second embodiment, as described above, the tracking area (TA (MBMS)) of the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer is changed to the tracking area (TA (unicast) of the unicast / mixed frequency layer. And the paging signal mapping method is changed so that different information is assigned to the cell that transmits the paging signal and the cell that does not transmit the paging signal. This will be described more specifically. In step ST1773, paging occurs to the mobile terminal. In Step ST1774, the MME confirms the TA list of the mobile terminal based on the identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) of the mobile terminal where paging has occurred. In Step ST1775, the MME determines whether TA (MBMS) is included in the TA list of the mobile terminal. As a specific example, the TA list of the mobile terminal is searched based on the UE-ID in the list as shown in FIG. If the mobile terminal is UE # 1 (UE-ID # 1) in FIG. 31 [a], it is determined that TA (MBMS) is not included. On the other hand, when the mobile terminal is UE # 2 (UE-ID # 2) in FIG. 31 [a], it is determined that TA (MBMS) is included because TA (MBMS) # 1 is included. To do. When TA (MBMS) is not included, it transfers to step ST1814. If TA (MBMS) is included, the process proceeds to step ST1776.

In Step ST1776, the MME transmits a paging request to the MCE. As MCEs that transmit a paging request from the MME, all MCEs that manage base stations that are geographically overlapped with the base stations managed by the MME can be considered. In addition, the MME has one or more MCE information corresponding to each MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer (f (MBMS)), and corresponds to it based on f (MBMS) notified from the mobile terminal. A paging request may be transmitted to one or a plurality of MCEs. This is also possible in the second embodiment. Specific examples of parameters in the paging request include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), TA (MBMS) numbers, and the like. At this time, f (MBMS) and TA (unicast) number may be used instead of the TA (MBMS) number. In step ST1777, the MCE receives the paging request. Of the MCEs that have received the paging request in step ST1778, are dedicated as MBMS, which are notified as parameters in the paging request, are associated with the TA (MBMS) number, or are associated with f (MBMS) and the TA (unicast) number The MCE controlling the cell prepares for paging transmission. As a specific example of paging transmission preparation, the same method as in the second embodiment can be applied. The paging group of the mobile terminal is calculated using the paging group number KMBMS of the own base station (own MBSFN area) and the received paging request. In the calculation, the same formula as that used on the mobile terminal side is used. As a specific example, the same as in step ST1735, paging group = IMSI mod KMBMS
Is used. As described above, the method of managing the connection between the TA (MBMS) number and the MBMS dedicated cell on the MCE side that has received the paging request, specifically, in the second embodiment, FIG. 31 [c] In the present embodiment, a table showing the association information shown in FIG. 81 [b] is configured in the MCE, and the method of deriving using it is the relationship between the MBMS dedicated cell and the MCE controlling it. Can be performed only within the architecture of the MBMS service, that is, it can be performed independently of the MME, so that it is possible to obtain a mobile communication system with a high degree of freedom.

  In Step ST1779, the MCE schedules the paging signal of the mobile terminal. Specifically, it is determined to which number of information elements mapped to the physical area assigned to the paging group number of the mobile terminal calculated in step ST1778 is assigned the mobile terminal identifier. By performing this scheduling in the MCE, the identifier of the mobile terminal is transmitted from the same physical resource of the base station included in the MBSFN area. Thereby, the mobile terminal can receive the paging signal which received the benefit of SFN gain by receiving MCCH currently transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN area. In Step ST1780, the MCE transmits a paging request for the mobile terminal to the base station of the MBMS dedicated cell included in the MBSFN area controlled by the MCE. Specific examples of parameters included in the paging request include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), and paging signal scheduling results (specifically, SFN and MBSFN subframes) performed in step ST1779. In addition to the information disclosed in the second embodiment such as the number and the information element number), paging transmission availability information is conceivable. The paging transmission availability information newly provided in the present embodiment is information indicating whether each MBMS dedicated cell transmits a paging signal. A specific example of the paging transmission permission information is 1 bit (“1”, “0”). In ST1780, the MCE transmits information “1” indicating that paging transmission is possible to the MBMS dedicated cell existing in the table using the table in FIG. Paging transmission rejection information “0” is transmitted to an MBMS dedicated cell that does not exist in the table of FIG. By providing information for whether or not paging transmission is possible and transmitting from the MCE to each MBMS dedicated cell, it is possible to provide a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit the paging signal.

  In step ST1781, each base station in the MBSFN area controlled by the MCE receives a paging request from the MCE. The base station of the MBMS dedicated cell of TA (MBMS) shown in FIG. 81 [b] receives paging signal permission, and the base station of the other MBMS dedicated cell receives paging signal rejection.

  Instead of providing an MME-MCE IF between the MME 103 and the MCE 801, an MME-MBMS GW interface may be provided between the MME 103 and the MBMS GW 802 (more specifically, MBMSCP802-1). Even if the processing contents of MCE from step ST1776 to step ST1780 are performed by the MBMS GW, the same effect as the present invention can be obtained.

  Also, consider the case where the MME manages the cell ID of an MBMS dedicated cell or / and a mixed cell related to the TA (MBMS) number as shown in FIG. In this case, in step ST1776, the MME transmits a paging request to each MBMS dedicated cell in the MBSFN area managed by the MME, not the MCE. As a parameter in the paging request at that time, the above-described paging transmission permission / inhibition information is included in addition to the identifier of the mobile terminal. The MME transmits paging transmission permission information “1” to the MBMS dedicated cell included in the TA (MBMS) number shown in FIG. 81 [b], and paging transmission rejection information “0” to the MBMS dedicated cell not included. To do. As described above, in addition to the TA (unicast) within the MME, the method for managing the relationship between the TA (MBMS) number and the cells included in the TA (MBMS) number (FIG. 81) It is not necessary to perform processing for recognizing a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit, and transmitting individual paging transmission permission information to each cell according to the result. This eliminates the need for adding a function to the MCE, so that the effect of avoiding the complexity of the MCE can be obtained. In addition, the effect of reducing the processing load of the MCE can be obtained.

  In Step ST1782, each base station in the MBSFN area calculates the mobile terminal paging group. As a specific example of the calculation method, the same method as in the second embodiment can be applied. The paging group of the mobile terminal is calculated using the paging group number KMBMS of the own base station (own MBSFN area) and the received paging request. In the calculation, the same formula as that used on the mobile terminal side is used. As a specific example, paging group = IMSI mod KMBMS is used as in step ST1735. If the paging group of the mobile terminal is also notified in step ST1780, step ST1782 can be omitted. Thereby, the reduction effect of the control load of each base station in the MBSFN area can be obtained. On the other hand, in the method of calculating the paging group in each base station in the MBSFN area in step ST1782 without notifying the paging group of the mobile terminal in step ST1780, notification information from the MCE to each base station in the MBSFN area Can be reduced, and the effect of effective use of resources can be obtained. Each base station in the MBSFN area in Step ST1783 uses the identifier of the mobile terminal received in Step ST1781, the scheduling result of the paging signal, the paging group of the mobile terminal calculated in Step ST1782, and the like. Alternatively, transmission is performed with a padding code or the like. In ST1781, the cell that has received the transmission permission information “1” as the paging transmission permission information places the paging signal on the PMCH, maps it to the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area, and transmits it. In ST1781, a cell that has received transmission rejection information “0” as paging transmission permission information is padded with a padding code instead of a paging signal and mapped to the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area. Regarding the mapping method to the paging-related area in the PMCH, and the method of changing the mapping method between the cell that transmits the paging signal and the cell that does not transmit the paging signal when mapping the paging signal to the physical area carrying the paging signal, Details have been described in Embodiment 2 and Embodiment 10, and therefore are omitted here.

  In Step ST1784, the mobile terminal receives a paging-related information presence / absence indicator transmitted from all cells in the MBSFN area in ST1783. As in the second embodiment, each MBMS dedicated cell maps the paging-related information presence / absence indicator in the physical area corresponding to the paging group of the corresponding mobile terminal calculated in ST1782 in ST1783. Therefore, the mobile terminal only has to receive the physical area corresponding to the paging group of the own mobile terminal calculated using the same formula in step ST1735. The repetition period and physical area of the paging-related information presence / absence indicator may be notified by broadcast information of the serving cell of the unicast service, may be notified by broadcast information of the MBMS dedicated cell, or may be determined in advance. In Step ST1785, the mobile terminal determines whether there is a change in the paging-related change presence / absence indicator. When there is no change, it transfers to step ST1788. If there is a change, the process proceeds to step ST1786. In Step ST1786, the mobile terminal continues to receive and decode the physical area to which the paging related information of the own paging group is mapped. At that time, blind detection is performed by performing a correlation calculation with an identification code unique to the mobile terminal. Since the MBSFN subframe is transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN, a signal transmitted from a cell that does not transmit a paging signal at the time of reception by the mobile terminal becomes noise. However, by adopting the method as disclosed above, the mobile terminal has an interference cancellation function such as an interference canceller in the receiver, thereby canceling the padding code component transmitted from the cell that does not transmit the paging signal. Therefore, only the paging signal transmitted from the cell transmitting the paging signal can be SFN combined. When the padding code is a random value, the mobile terminal need not have an interference canceling function such as an interference canceller in the receiver. Since each cell derives a random value for each cell and performs padding, a signal transmitted from a cell that does not transmit a paging signal is canceled by the mobile terminal due to different random signals. Since the paging signal component transmitted from the cell transmitting the signal becomes relatively strong, it is possible to reduce the paging signal reception error in the correlation calculation. In step ST1787, the mobile terminal determines whether the identifier of the mobile terminal has been detected in the blind detection performed in step ST1786. When not detected, it transfers to step ST1788. If detected, the process proceeds to step ST1814.

  By adopting the method as described above, a paging signal notification method for a mobile terminal receiving an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, and a mobile communication system therefor, which are the problems of the present invention, are disclosed. As a result, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated for MBMS transmission can also receive the paging signal. Further, even if cells that transmit paging signals and cells that do not transmit are mixed, it is possible to reduce a reduction in reception error when receiving a paging signal in a mobile terminal. By providing the cells not to be transmitted, it is possible to limit the area for transmitting the paging signal to the cell in which the mobile terminal exists and the neighboring cells, and it is possible to reduce the waste of radio resources and increase the system capacity.

  In the above specific example, the case where code division multiplexing is performed as the PMCH provided for each MBSFN area has been described. The present invention is applicable not only to code division multiplexing but also to time division multiplexing for each MBSFN area.

  Not only when a tracking area (TA (MBMS)) is configured by any MBMS dedicated cell in one MBSFN area, but also for any MBMS in a plurality of MBSFN areas as shown in FIG. The method disclosed in this embodiment can also be applied when a tracking area (TA (MBMS)) is configured by cells. In this case, the MCE that has received the paging request in step ST1778 is associated with the TA (MBMS) number, or is associated with the f (MBMS) and TA (unicast) number, which is notified as a parameter in the paging request. There are a plurality of MCEs controlling the MBMS dedicated cell. Also, in this case, the mobile terminal does not receive the paging signal from all MBMS dedicated cells in TA (MBMS), and belongs to one or more MBSFN areas that the mobile terminal is receiving or is about to receive. A paging signal is received from an MBMS dedicated cell in (MBMS). In ST1728, the number K of paging groups used in each MBSFN area is mapped to the MCCH from the MBMS dedicated cell belonging to each MBSFN area being received or about to be received by the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal receives the paging group number K in ST1729.

  As shown in FIG. 82 [b], when one cell belongs to a plurality of MBSFN areas and a tracking area (TA (MBMS)) is configured by an arbitrary MBMS dedicated cell in the plurality of MBSFN areas. However, the above method is applicable. In this case, the method disclosed in the seventh embodiment can be applied as a channel configuration on which a paging signal or padding code is placed, and the paging signal or padding code is transferred to the physical area carrying the paging signal on the PMCH. As a mapping method, the method disclosed in the tenth embodiment can be applied.

  In the above specific example, the TA (MBMS) is configured by any MBMS dedicated cell in the MBSFN area so as to be a tracking area of the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer geographically corresponding to the serving cell on the unicast side of the mobile terminal. A method has been disclosed. For this reason, the paging operation shown in the present embodiment does not require transmission / reception of MBSFN area ID information that the mobile terminal is receiving or is about to receive in ST 1742 to ST 1745, ST 1776, and ST 1777. However, the MBSFN area ID may be further included in the information transmitted / received in ST 1742 to ST 1745, ST 1776, and ST 1777 in addition to the information shown in the specific example. When the MBSFN area ID is included, a tracking area (TA (MBMS)) is configured by arbitrary MBMS dedicated cells in a plurality of MBSFN areas, or one cell belongs to a plurality of MBSFN areas, When a tracking area (TA (MBMS)) is configured by arbitrary MBMS dedicated cells in a plurality of MBSFN areas, the MBMS dedicated cell for transmitting a paging signal may be further limited to the MBSFN area of the MBSFN area ID. It becomes possible.

  The MCE that has received the paging request including the MBSFN area ID information in ST1777 can determine whether to transmit the paging request to the MBMS dedicated cell based on the MBSFN area ID, and the control can be simplified. The MCE that controls the MBMS dedicated cell in the MBSFN area ID determines to transmit to the MBMS dedicated cell, and only the MCE transmits a paging request to the MBMS dedicated cell in ST1780. The MBMS dedicated cell that has received the paging request for the MBMS dedicated cell transmits the paging signal based on the paging transmission permission information, and the MBMS dedicated cell included in the TA (MBMS) number shown in FIG. A non-MBMS dedicated cell transmits a padding code instead of a paging signal. By adopting such a method, cells in the MBSFN area that the mobile terminal is not receiving and is not trying to receive do not need to transmit a paging signal, so that use of useless radio resources can be reduced, The effect of increasing the system capacity is obtained.

  In the above specific example, paging transmission availability information indicating whether or not each MBMS dedicated cell transmits a paging signal is provided, and the MCE includes the paging transmission availability information in the paging request, and the MBMS dedicated cell in the MBSFN area. Showed how to send to. However, as shown in the seventh to tenth embodiments, when the physical area to which the paging signal is mapped is determined, it is not necessary to provide the paging transmission permission / inhibition information, and the MCE is in the MBSFN area. A paging request may be transmitted to an MBMS dedicated cell that transmits a paging signal, and a paging request may not be transmitted to an MBMS dedicated cell that does not transmit a paging signal. The MBMS dedicated cell that receives the paging request from the MCE maps and transmits the paging signal to the physical area for mapping the paging signal, and the MBMS dedicated cell that does not receive the paging request from the MCE transmits the physical area for mapping the paging signal. For example, the output power may be set to 0, for example. In this way, not only the same effects as in the above specific example can be obtained, but also there is no need to transmit a paging request from the MCE to all cells in the MBSFN area, and the amount of signaling can be reduced as a system. It is done.

  In this embodiment, an arbitrary MBMS dedicated cell geographically corresponding to the serving cell on the unicast side of the mobile terminal is used as a tracking area, and a part of the MBSFN area (or MBSFN synchronization area) belonging to the tracking area is included. A method for transmitting a paging signal from a cell has been disclosed. As a specific example, a case where one tracking area is configured in the MBSFN area (or in the MBSFN synchronization area) has been shown. Here, when a plurality of tracking areas (TA (MBMS)) are configured in one MBSFN area (or in the MBSFN synchronization area), a paging signal is transmitted from each cell in the MBSFN area (or in the MBSFN synchronization area). A method is disclosed. In FIG. 98, A indicates an MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, and B indicates a unicast / mixed frequency layer. As shown in FIG. 98, for example, a case where two TAs (MBMS) (TA (MBMS) # 1, TA (MBMS) # 2) are configured in one MBSFN area is shown. Thus, when two TAs (MBMS) (TA (MBMS) # 1, TA (MBMS) # 2) are configured in one MBSFN area, the MBMS dedicated cells in the MBSFN area are different for each tracking area. A paging signal needs to be transmitted to a mobile terminal being served thereby. As described above, when a plurality of tracking areas (TA (MBMS)) are configured in one MBSFN area (or in the MBSFN synchronization area), the MBMS dedicated cells in the MBSFN area transmit different paging information for each tracking area. Therefore, the MBSFN subframe mapping the paging signal for each TA (MBMS) is time-division multiplexed (TDM) and transmitted. In order to map the paging signal to the MBSFN subframe, for example, the configuration of putting the paging signal on the PMCH, DPCH, main PMCH, etc. disclosed in the seventh to ninth embodiments can be applied. FIG. 99 shows a diagram in which the paging signal is mapped by TDM for each TA (MBMS). In FIG. 99, A is “MBSFN subframe to which the paging signal of TA (MBMS) # 1 is mapped”, B is “MBSFN subframe to which the padding code of TA (MBMS) # 2 is mapped”, and C is “TA” “MBSFN subframe to which the (MBMS) # 2 paging signal is mapped” and “D” are “MBSFN subframe to which the padding code of TA (MBMS) # 1 is mapped”. Cell # n1-1 is a cell in MBSFN area # 1 and represents a cell belonging to TA (MBMS) # 1, and cell # n1-2 is a cell in MBSFN area # 1 and a cell belonging to TA (MBMS) # 2. Represents. As shown in the figure, the MBSFN subframe to which the paging signal transmitted in the cell # n1-1 is mapped and the MBSFN subframe to which the paging signal transmitted in the cell # n1-2 is mapped are time-division multiplexed. Is done. In the figure, adjacent subframes are shown, but they do not have to be adjacent and may be divided in time. In the MBSFN subframe to which the paging signal transmitted in cell # n1-1 is mapped, a padding code is mapped and transmitted from cell # n1-2. In the MBSFN subframe to which the paging signal transmitted in cell # n1-2 is mapped, a padding code is mapped and transmitted from cell # n1-1. As a method for transmitting these padding codes, the method described in Embodiment 10 or this embodiment can be applied. In the figure, the padding code is mapped and transmitted. However, when the physical area to which the paging signal is mapped is determined in the MBSFN subframe, the paging transmitted in the cell # n1-1 is performed. In the MBSFN subframe to which the signal is mapped, the transmission power of the physical area to which the paging signal in the MBSFN subframe is mapped may be set to 0 from the cell # n1-2. Similarly, in the MBSFN subframe to which the paging signal transmitted in the cell # n1-2 is mapped, the transmission power of the physical area to which the paging signal in the MBSFN subframe is mapped from the cell # n1-1. It may be 0. The methods described in Embodiment Mode 10 can also be applied to these methods.

  In this way, it is possible to configure a plurality of tracking areas (TA (MBMS)) in one MBSFN area. For this reason, flexible tracking area management is possible as a system, so that the tracking area of the MBMS dedicated frequency layer is matched with the unicast / mixed frequency layer, and further, the tracking area of the MBSFN area and the unicast / mixed frequency layer Need not be the same. Therefore, the effect that cell arrangement can be performed flexibly in each layer is obtained. Even if a large number of MBMS dedicated frequency layer cells are arranged in the future, the mobile communication system can be constructed by using the method disclosed here.

Embodiment 18 FIG.
In the present embodiment, with reference to FIG. 83, among the processes of the mobile communication system described in Embodiments 1 and 2, “Receivable MBMS notification”, “MBMS search”, “MBMS” The “service selection” portion will be further described. In step ST3501 of FIG. 83, the serving cell notifies the mobile terminal of information regarding receivable MBMS. In addition, the serving cell notifies the mobile terminal of information related to MBMS that can be received in the own cell. A serving cell is a base station that performs scheduling to allocate uplink radio resources and downlink radio resources to the mobile terminal. Base stations that can serve as serving cells include unicast cells or mixed MBMS / unicast cells. Specific examples of information regarding receivable MBMS include frequencies of available MBMS services, that is, frequencies of receivable MBSFN synchronization areas (MBSFN Synchronization Area), that is, frequencies of receivable MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layers (f ( MBMS)) or one or more of them. A broadcast control channel (BCCH) is used when notifying information related to receivable MBMS from the serving cell to the mobile terminal. Information about receivable MBMS is first mapped to a broadcast control channel (BCCH) which is a logical channel, and further mapped to a broadcast channel (BCH) which is a transport channel and a physical broadcast channel (PBCH) which is a physical channel. The In addition, information relating to receivable MBMS is mapped to a broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is a logical channel, and then a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) that is a transport channel, and a physical downlink shared channel that is a physical channel (PDSCH) may be mapped.

  In Step ST3502, the mobile terminal receives f (MBMS) transmitted from the serving cell. Here, in step ST3501, there is a problem as to how the serving cell obtains information regarding receivable MBMS notified from the serving cell to the mobile terminal. Specifically, if the information regarding receivable MBMS is not frequently changed and is determined to be semi-static, it can be set in the serving cell every time it is changed. Further, information regarding receivable MBMS may be notified from a frequency layer control device dedicated to MBMS transmission to a unicast / mixed frequency layer control device or periodically. As a further specific example, information regarding receivable MBMS is notified from the MCE to the MME or the base station. Further, the MBMS GW may notify the MME or the base station.

  In step ST3503, the mobile terminal confirms in step ST3502 whether or not it has received one or more frequencies of a receivable frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. If it has not been received, the process ends. When having received, it transfers to step ST3504. In Step ST3504, the mobile terminal confirms whether or not the user intends to receive the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. As a specific example of the confirmation, when the user has an intention to receive the MBMS service, an instruction is sent to the mobile terminal using the user interface, and the mobile terminal stores the user's intention in the protocol processing unit 1101. In Step ST3504, the mobile terminal confirms whether or not there is an intention to receive the MBMS service stored in the protocol processing unit 1101. If there is no intention to receive the MBMS service, the processing in step ST3504 is repeated. As a method of repeating, the method in which the mobile terminal performs the determination in step ST3504 at a fixed period, or when there is a change notification of intention to receive the MBMS service input by the user through the user interface, step ST3504 or step There is a method of performing ST3503. If there is an intention to receive the MBMS service, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST3505. The order of the processing of step ST3503 and step ST3504 is arbitrary and may be simultaneous. In Step ST3505, the mobile terminal moves to the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission by changing the set frequency of the frequency conversion section 1107 and changing the center frequency to f (MBMS). Changing the set frequency of the frequency conversion unit 1107 and changing the center frequency is referred to as re-tune.

  In Step ST3506, the mobile terminal performs an MBMS search operation. Details of the MBMS search operation are described in the second embodiment, and are omitted here. The mobile terminal establishes synchronization with the MBMS dedicated cell, acquires system information of the MBMS dedicated cell, acquires MCCH scheduling, and the like by the MBMS search operation. In Step ST3507, the MBMS dedicated cell notifies the mobile terminal of the MBMS service content. Non-Patent Document 1 describes that the MCE 801 assigns radio resources to all base stations in the MBSFN area in order to perform multi-cell MBMS transmission. From this, it is considered that the same MBMS service capable of SFN combining (Combining) is provided in the MBSFN area. Therefore, notification of MBMS service contents in step ST3507 is performed for each MBSFN area using a channel for each MBSFN area. Non-Patent Document 1 describes that the MBSFN synchronization area includes one or more MBSFN areas. Thus, notification of the MBMS service content in step ST3507 is performed for each MBSFN area for all MBSFN areas included in the MBSFN synchronization area using a channel for each MBSFN synchronization area.

  Specific examples of MBMS service contents include direct service contents such as “weather forecast”, “baseball broadcast”, and “news”. Further, the service number or the MBSFN area number (ID) may be used instead of the direct service content. When the MBMS service content is notified by the service number or MBSFN area number (ID), the service number or MBSFN area number (ID) is directly associated with the service content statically or semi-statically (see FIG. 84). ) On the network side and mobile terminal side. When the correspondence between the service number and the direct service content is determined semi-statically, the correspondence between the service number and the direct service content from the network side to the mobile terminal side every time it is changed or periodically Need to be notified.

  The correspondence between the service number and the direct service content is mapped to the broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is a logical channel of the MBMS dedicated cell, and further, the broadcast channel (BCH) that is a transport channel, and the physical broadcast channel that is a physical channel Mapped to (PBCH). It may be mapped to a broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is a logical channel, and further mapped to a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) that is a transport channel and a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) that is a physical channel. Further, it may be mapped to a multicast control channel (MCCH) that is a logical channel, and may be mapped to a multicast channel (MCH) that is a transport channel and a physical multicast channel (PMCH) that is a physical channel. Further, it may be mapped to a multicast control channel (MCCH) that is a logical channel and mapped to a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) that is a transport channel and a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) that is a physical channel.

  Further, not the direct service content but the channel number or the MBSFN area number (ID) may be notified from the network side to the mobile terminal side. The channel number or MBSFN area number (ID) here is assumed to be a channel number of a television. In this case, the user needs to know the program guide for each channel (direct service contents for each time) separately. This program guide may be notified from the network side to the mobile terminal side every time it is changed, or may be posted on an existing medium such as a newspaper. A specific example of the channel used for notifying the program guide for each channel from the network side to the mobile terminal side is the same as that for notifying the correspondence between the service number and the direct service content, and thus the description thereof is omitted. In Step ST3508, the mobile terminal receives the MBMS service content transmitted from the MBMS dedicated cell.

  In step ST3509, the mobile terminal confirms the service content of the MBMS received in step ST3508 in order to know whether the service desired by the user is being performed. If the service desired by the user is being performed, the process proceeds to step ST3510. If the service desired by the user is not provided, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST3512. In Step ST3510, the mobile terminal receives the reference signal (RS) by the radio resource in the MBSFN area where the service desired by the user is performed, and measures the received power (RSRP). In Step ST3510, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the received power is equal to or higher than a threshold determined statically or semi-statically. If the threshold is equal to or greater than the threshold, it indicates that the quality is satisfactory for receiving the MBMS service, and if the threshold is less than the threshold, it indicates that the quality is not sufficient for receiving the MBMS service. If it is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the process proceeds to step ST3511. In step ST3510, as long as it is possible to determine whether or not the reception quality satisfies a quality sufficient for receiving the MBMS service, the above method of measuring the reception power of the reference signal (RS) may not be used. In Step ST3511, the mobile terminal selects the MBMS service. Specifically, the mobile terminal acquires and determines the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency f (MBMS), MBSFN area ID (number), and the like for receiving the MBMS service desired by the user. In Step ST3512, the mobile terminal receives frequencies in the MBSFN synchronization area that can be received (frequency list) received in Step ST3502, other frequencies (frequency of a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission different from the current frequency). ) Exists. If it exists, the process returns to step ST3505, the set frequency is switched to a new frequency (for example, f2 (MBMS)), and the process is repeated. If it does not exist, the process ends.

  According to the eighteenth embodiment, it is possible to obtain a method for moving a mobile terminal to a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission or a method for selecting a desired service, which is a subject of the present invention. Furthermore, since the MBMS service that can be used exists and the frequency thereof can be known at the location where the mobile terminal is geographically located, the mobile terminal intends to receive the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. If there is, there is no need to search for brute force frequencies that may have a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. This has the effect of reducing the control delay of the mobile terminal until receiving a service with a frequency other than the current frequency. Thereby, the effect of reducing the power consumption of the mobile terminal can also be obtained. Further, as compared with the nineteenth embodiment to be described later, the amount of information notified from the serving cell may be small in solving the problem. This means that the time for receiving information from the serving cell, that is, the reception time, the decoding time of received data, and the like is shorter than that in the nineteenth embodiment. As a result, there is an effect that the control delay of the mobile terminal until a service with a frequency other than the current frequency is received is shortened. Furthermore, the effect of reducing the power consumption of the mobile terminal can also be obtained.

Modification 1
Hereinafter, Modification 1 of the present embodiment will be described. When information on neighboring cells (neighboring cell information (list), neighboring cell (neighboring cell) information (list)) is notified from the serving cell to the mobile terminal, information on MBMS that can be received in the neighboring cell is notified from the serving cell. Also good. Information regarding receivable MBMS in the neighboring cell may be notified simultaneously with the neighboring cell information, or may not be notified at the same time. A specific example of information regarding receivable MBMS is the same as that in the eighteenth embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted. According to the first modification, the following effects can be obtained. Let us consider a case where the reception sensitivity of adjacent cells becomes better in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, that is, the case where the timing for executing handover has arrived. If f (MBMS) currently received by the mobile terminal does not exist in the information regarding the receivable MBMS in the base station (New Serving cell: Handover destination base station) to be newly selected as the serving cell, It can be determined that the sensitivity of the service by the currently received f (MBMS) deteriorates. The determination result can be notified to the user by displaying on the display unit, ringing, or the like. As a result, when the user gives priority to the current MBMS service reception over the movement, the movement can be stopped, and an effect that the usage can be more adapted to the needs of the user can be obtained. In addition, when the reception sensitivity of f1 (MBMS) being received has deteriorated, it does not exist in the information on MBMS that can be received by the serving cell (own cell), but f2 ( When MBMS) exists, it is possible to try operations such as MBMS search at f2 (MBMS). As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that enables usage in accordance with the needs of the user.

Embodiment 19. FIG.
In the present embodiment, with reference to FIG. 85, “Receivable MBMS notification” and “MBMS search” in the processing flow of the mobile communication system described in Embodiment 1 and Embodiment 2. The “MBMS service selection” part will be further described. In FIG. 85, the same steps as those in FIG. 83 indicate the same or equivalent processes, and thus description thereof is omitted. In Step ST3701, the serving cell notifies the mobile terminal of information regarding receivable MBMS. In addition, the serving cell notifies the mobile terminal of information related to MBMS that can be received in the own cell. Specific examples of information regarding receivable MBMS include frequencies of available MBMS services, that is, frequencies of receivable MBSFN synchronization areas (MBSFN Synchronization Area), that is, frequencies of receivable MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layers (f ( One or more). Also, the contents of service that can be received by the f (MBMS) are notified. The notification of service contents that can be received by f (MBMS) and f (MBMS) may or may not be simultaneous. A specific example of a channel used when notifying information about receivable MBMS is the same as that in the eighteenth embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted. A specific example of the service content is the same as that in the eighteenth embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted. In Step ST3702, the mobile terminal receives the service contents that can be received by f (MBMS) and f (MBMS) transmitted from the serving cell. Here, in step ST3701, there is a problem as to how the serving cell obtains information on receivable MBMS notified from the serving cell to the mobile terminal. Specifically, if the information regarding receivable MBMS is not frequently changed and is determined to be semi-static, it can be set in the serving cell every time it is changed. Further, information regarding receivable MBMS may be notified from a frequency layer control device dedicated to MBMS transmission to a unicast / mixed frequency layer control device at the time of change or periodically. As a further specific example, information regarding receivable MBMS is notified from the MCE to the MME or the base station. Further, the MBMS GW may notify the MME or the base station. In Step ST3504, the mobile terminal confirms whether or not the user intends to receive the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. If there is an intention to receive the MBMS service, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST3703. If there is no intention to receive the MBMS service, the processing in step ST3504 is repeated.

  In step ST3703, the mobile terminal confirms in step ST3702 whether or not at least one frequency of a receivable MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer performing a user-desired service has been received. If it has not been received, the process ends. If received, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST3704. For example, it is assumed that the frequency of the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission that can be received and that provides the service desired by the user is fa (MBMS). In step ST3704, the set frequency of frequency conversion section 1107 is changed, and the center frequency is changed to fa (MBMS), thereby moving to a receivable MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer that provides a user-desired service. In Step ST3506, the mobile terminal performs an MBMS search operation. In Step ST3507, the MBMS dedicated cell notifies the mobile terminal of the MBMS service content. In Step ST3508, the mobile terminal receives the MBMS service content from the MBMS dedicated cell. In Step ST3510, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the reception sensitivity of the MBSFN area where the user-desired service is performed is of sufficient quality for reception. When reception quality is favorable, it transfers to step ST3511. When reception quality is not favorable, it transfers to step ST3705. In Step ST3511, the mobile terminal selects the MBMS service. In Step ST3705, the mobile terminal receives other frequencies (different from the current frequency) that perform the service desired by the user in the receivable MBSFN synchronization area frequencies (frequency list) received in Step ST3702. It is determined whether there is a frequency layer frequency dedicated for MBMS transmission. If it exists, the process returns to step ST3704, the synthesizer is switched to a new frequency, for example, fb (MBMS), and the process is repeated. If it does not exist, the process ends.

  According to the nineteenth embodiment, it is possible to obtain a method for moving a mobile terminal to a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission or a method for selecting a desired service, which is a subject of the present invention. Compared to the eighteenth embodiment, the following effects can be obtained in solving the problem. In the eighteenth embodiment, before moving to the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission after changing the frequency, there is no means for knowing whether or not the service desired by the user is being performed in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. Therefore, in the eighteenth embodiment, when the user intends to receive the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer, the user performs a brute force retune on the receivable MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer frequency, and the user It is necessary to confirm whether a desired service is being performed. On the other hand, in the nineteenth embodiment, before the mobile terminal changes the frequency and moves to the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, the frequency of the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission that can be received, and the service contents that can be received at the frequency. Can know. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform the processing for the frequency where the service desired by the user is not performed, the processing after step ST3704 in FIG. As described above, in the nineteenth embodiment, when the mobile terminal intends to receive the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer, it is not necessary to search for all the receivable frequencies dedicated to MBMS transmission. This has the effect of shortening the control delay until the mobile terminal receives a service from a frequency other than the current frequency. Thereby, the effect of reducing the power consumption of the mobile terminal can also be obtained.

  Next, the modification 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. In step ST3701 of FIG. 85, the serving cell notifies the mobile terminal of information regarding receivable MBMS. Specific examples of information regarding receivable MBMS include frequencies of available MBMS services, that is, frequencies of receivable MBSFN synchronization areas (MBSFN Synchronization Area), that is, frequencies of receivable MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layers (f ( One or more). Also, the contents of service that can be received by the f (MBMS) are notified. At that time, not all the service contents that can be received by f (MBMS), but the service contents performed in the MBSFN area having the coverage area overlapping the coverage area of the serving cell are notified. In the nineteenth embodiment, the mobile terminal does not have a means for knowing the service content performed in the MBSFN area, which has a coverage area overlapping with the coverage area of the serving cell. Therefore, the following situation occurs. Even if the mobile terminal is not located in the coverage area of the MBSFN area where the user performs the desired service, in step ST3703 in FIG. 85, the mobile terminal performs the service desired by the user. Then, it is determined that there is a frequency layer frequency (fc (MBMS)) dedicated to MBMS transmission that can be received, and then the mobile terminal moves to fc (MBMS) in step ST3704. However, since the mobile terminal is located outside the coverage area of the MBSFN area where the service desired by the user is performed, in step ST3510, the mobile terminal is in the MBSFN area (fc (MBMS)) where the service desired by the user is performed. There is a high possibility that it is determined that the reception quality is not good.

  According to the first modification, the following further effects can be obtained as compared with the nineteenth embodiment. Compared to Embodiment 19, in the first modification, the mobile terminal receives the service content performed in the MBSFN area having the coverage area overlapping the coverage area of the serving cell, and in step ST3703, the coverage of the serving cell In the MBSFN area having the coverage area overlapping with the area, it is possible to confirm whether or not one or more frequencies of a receivable MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer performing the service desired by the user have been received. Therefore, in step ST3510, it is less likely that the reception quality of the MBSFN area where the service desired by the user is performed is not sufficiently good for reception. This has the effect of shortening the control delay until the mobile terminal receives a service from a frequency other than the current frequency. Thereby, the effect of reducing the power consumption of the mobile terminal can also be obtained.

  Next, a second modification of the present embodiment will be described. When neighboring cell (neighboring cell) information is notified from the serving cell to the mobile terminal, information regarding MBMS that can be received in the neighboring cell may be notified from the serving cell to the mobile terminal. Information regarding receivable MBMS in the neighboring cell may be notified simultaneously with the neighboring cell information, or may not be notified at the same time. A specific example of receivable MBMS information is the same as that in the nineteenth embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted. According to the modification 2, the following effects can be obtained. Let us consider a case where the reception sensitivity of adjacent cells becomes better in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, that is, the case where the timing for performing the handover process approaches. If the information on the MBMS that can be received in the base station (new serving cell: handover destination base station) that is newly selected as the serving cell does not include the service content currently being received by the mobile terminal, It can be determined that the sensitivity of the service currently being received deteriorates. The determination result can be notified to the user by displaying on the display unit, ringing, or the like. As a result, when the user gives priority to the current MBMS service reception over the movement, the movement can be stopped, and an effect that the usage can be more adapted to the needs of the user can be obtained. In addition, when the reception quality of the service at the frequency f1 (MBMS) being received is deteriorated, the frequency that is not present in the information on the receivable MBMS of the serving cell, but is different in the information on the receivable MBMS in the neighboring cell When the same service exists at f2 (MBMS), an operation such as an MBMS search can be tried at f2 (MBMS). As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that enables usage in accordance with the needs of the user. The second modification is applicable not only to the nineteenth embodiment but also to the first modification of the nineteenth embodiment.

Embodiment 20. FIG.
Non-Patent Document 3 describes an event used to notify measurement results of a serving cell and neighboring cells from the mobile terminal to the network side (base station) in the current 3GPP. The measurement within the same frequency as the serving cell will be described below. It is disclosed that a mobile terminal notifies an event A1 to a network side (base station) when a measurement result of a serving cell becomes larger than a certain threshold (threshold). When the measurement result of the serving cell becomes smaller than a certain threshold (threshold), the mobile terminal notifies the network A (base station) of event A2. When the measurement result of the neighboring cell becomes larger than the value obtained by adding the offset value (offset) in the measurement result of the serving cell, the mobile terminal notifies the network side (base station) of the event A3. Event A3 is used for handover within the same frequency. Non-Patent Document 3 does not describe the problem of the present invention. There is no description of having a plurality of threshold values and offset values. Furthermore, there is no description that uses a plurality of threshold values and offset values depending on the state of the mobile terminal.

  In the unicast / mixed frequency layer, FIG. 86 shows a specific example of a sequence diagram in the case where a mobile terminal receiving an MBMS service, which has been transmitted from a mixed unicast / MBMS cell, performs handover. In Step ST3801, the serving cell notifies the mobile terminal being served thereby of the system information of the own cell. Specific examples of the system information to be notified include a measurement cycle, an intermittent reception cycle, tracking area information (TA information), and the like. The measurement period is a period in which the network side notifies a mobile terminal being served thereby, and the mobile terminal measures the electric field strength and the like according to this period. Further, when reporting the own cell information from the serving cell to the mobile terminal, the own cell information is mapped to the broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is a logical channel, and further, the broadcast channel (BCH) that is a transport channel, It is mapped to a physical broadcast channel (PBCH) that is a channel. In addition, the own cell information is mapped to a broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is a logical channel, and further mapped to a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) that is a transport channel and a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) that is a physical channel. May be.

  In Step ST3802, the mobile terminal receives the system information of the own cell transmitted from the serving cell. In Step ST3803, the serving cell notifies the mobile terminal being served thereby of the MBMS scheduling information of the own cell. As a specific example of the MBMS scheduling information to be notified, MBSFN sub-frame allocation may be considered. Further, when MBMS scheduling information is notified from the serving cell to the mobile terminal, the MBMS scheduling information is mapped to a broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is a logical channel, and further, a broadcast channel (BCH) that is a transport channel, It is mapped to a physical broadcast channel (PBCH) that is a physical channel. The MBMS scheduling information is mapped to a broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is a logical channel, and further mapped to a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) that is a transport channel and a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) that is a physical channel. May be. In Step ST3804, the mobile terminal receives the MBMS scheduling information of the own cell transmitted from the serving cell.

  In Step ST3805, the mobile terminal confirms whether the user intends to receive the MBMS service. If the user intends to receive the MBMS service, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST3807. If the user does not intend to receive the MBMS service, the process ends. In Step ST3806, the serving cell notifies the mobile terminal of control information of the MBMS service. In Step ST3807, the mobile terminal receives MBMS service control information. As a specific example of the control information of the MBMS service, the service content of the MBMS can be considered. A specific example of the MBMS service contents is the same as that in the eighteenth embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted. In addition, when the control information of the MBMS service is notified from the serving cell to the mobile terminal, the control information of the MBMS service is mapped to the broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is a logical channel, and further, the broadcast channel that is the transport channel ( BCH) and physical broadcast channel (PBCH) which is a physical channel. Also, the control information of the MBMS service is mapped to the broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is a logical channel, and further, the downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) that is a transport channel, and the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) that is a physical channel May be mapped. Also, the control information of the MBMS service is mapped to the multicast control channel (MCCH) that is a logical channel, and further mapped to the multicast channel (MCH) that is a transport channel and the physical multicast channel (PMCH) that is a physical channel. Good. When mapped to MCCH, the mobile terminal receives data in the MBSFN subframe according to the MBMS scheduling information (MBSFN subframe allocation information) received in step ST3804. In Step ST3808, the mobile terminal determines whether a user-desired service is being performed according to the MBMS service control information received in Step ST3807. If the service desired by the user is being performed, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST3809. If the service desired by the user is not performed, the process is terminated. In Step ST3809, the mobile terminal starts receiving the MBMS service (MTCH, MCCH). When receiving the MBMS service, the mobile terminal receives the data in the MBSFN subframe according to the MBMS scheduling information (MBSFN subframe allocation information) received in step ST3804.

  In step ST3810, the mobile terminal determines whether the measurement cycle received in step ST3802 is in parallel with the reception operation of the MBMS service. When it is a measurement period, it transfers to step ST3811. If it is not the measurement cycle, the determination in step ST3810 is repeated. In step ST3811, the mobile terminal performs measurement. Values actually measured by the mobile terminal include reference symbol received power (RSRP) of the serving cell and neighboring cells, E-UTRA carrier received signal strength indicator (RSSI), etc. Can be considered. The information on neighboring cells may be broadcast from the serving cell as neighboring cell information (list) (or sometimes called neighboring cell information (list)). In Step ST3812, the mobile terminal determines whether or not a serving cell re-selection is necessary as a result of the measurement in Step ST3811. As a specific example of the determination, a case where the measurement result of the neighboring cell is larger than a value obtained by adding the offset value (offset) to the measurement result of the serving cell is considered. When reselection is not necessary, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST3810. If reselection is necessary, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST3813. In Step ST3813, the mobile terminal notifies the serving cell of an event used for notification of the measurement result. As a specific example of the event when the serving cell needs to be reselected, the mobile terminal notifies the serving cell of event A3. In Step ST3814, the serving cell receives event A3 from the mobile terminal. Thereafter, handover processing is performed as the mobile communication system, and the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST3815.

  In step ST3815, a base station (new serving cell: handover destination base station) to be newly selected as a serving cell notifies the mobile terminal being served thereby of the system information of the own cell, as in step ST3801. In Step ST3816, the mobile terminal receives the system information of the own cell from the new serving cell, similarly to Step ST3802. In step ST3817, the new serving cell notifies the mobile terminal being served thereby of the MBMS scheduling information of the own cell as in step ST3803. In Step ST3818, the mobile terminal receives MBMS scheduling information of its own cell from a new serving cell, as in Step ST3804. In Step ST3819, the new serving cell notifies the mobile terminal of the control information of the MBMS service as in Step ST3806. In Step ST3820, the mobile terminal receives the control information of the MBMS service as in Step ST3807. In step ST3821, the mobile terminal determines whether a user-desired service is being performed according to the MBMS service control information received in step ST3820, as in step ST3808. When the service desired by the user is being performed, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST3822. When the service desired by the user is not performed, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST3823. In Step ST3822, the mobile terminal starts receiving the MBMS service (MTCH, MCCH) according to the MBMS scheduling information (MBSFN subframe allocation information) of the new serving base station received in Step ST3818. In Step ST3823, the mobile terminal performs MBMS service reception stop processing.

  As shown in Step ST3821 and Step ST3823 in FIG. 86, there arises a problem that MBMS service reception is interrupted due to handover. In the twentieth embodiment, it is considered to solve the above problem by adding the service content of the MBMS service to the neighboring cell information. A detailed method will be described with reference to FIG. Since FIG. 87 is similar to FIG. 86, the description of the same part is omitted. In Step ST3901, the serving cell notifies the neighboring mobile terminal of neighboring cell information. The service content of the MBMS service of the adjacent cell is newly provided in the adjacent cell information. A specific example of the service content is the same as that in the eighteenth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted. Further, the allocation information of the MBSFN subframe of the neighboring cell may be used instead of the MBMS service content of the neighboring cell. If the allocation of the MBSFN subframe of the neighboring cell is the same as the allocation of the MBSFN subframe of the serving cell, it can be determined that the neighboring cell and the serving cell are performing multi-cell transmission of the MBMS service to support SFN combining. Therefore, it can be determined that the neighboring cell and the serving cell are performing the same MBMS service. Further, when the neighboring cell information is notified from the serving cell to the mobile terminal, the neighboring cell information is mapped to a broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is a logical channel, and further, a broadcast channel (BCH) that is a transport channel, It is mapped to a physical broadcast channel (PBCH) that is a channel. The neighboring cell information is mapped to a broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is a logical channel, and further mapped to a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) that is a transport channel and a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) that is a physical channel. May be.

  In addition, the serving cell may transmit the service content of each neighboring cell as control information of the MBMS service in Step ST3806, instead of adding the service content of the MBMS service to the neighboring cell information. In this case, it is necessary to notify the service content for each neighboring cell in a form corresponding to the neighboring cell number (ID). The information “service content of the MBMS service performed in the adjacent cell” is transmitted from the unicast / MBMS mixed cell in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, and the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service is handed over. In order to solve the problem of interruption of MBMS reception when performing the above, this is a parameter newly provided by the present embodiment 20. Therefore, this parameter is effective only for a mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service. Therefore, there is no problem even if it is added to the control information of the MBMS service received only by the mobile terminal that receives the MBMS service. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in the information amount of BCCH and to obtain an effect of preventing a control delay of the entire mobile communication system. Furthermore, in step ST3809, the mobile terminal may receive and decode the service content for each neighboring cell added to the MBMS service control information only after actually starting to receive the MBMS service. Here, the problem is how the serving cell obtains the service content of each neighboring cell. As a solution, it is conceivable to use the inter-base station communication, that is, to notify the service content from each neighboring cell to the serving cell. Another possible solution is to notify the service content from each cell to the MME, and from the MME to the serving cell, to notify the service content of the cell included in the neighboring cell. As another solution, the MCE may notify the service content of each cell to the MME, and notify the service content of the cell included in the neighboring cell from the MME to the serving cell. As another solution, a case where the service content of each neighboring cell is notified directly from the MCE to each serving cell is conceivable. In Step ST3902, the mobile terminal receives neighboring cell information.

  In Step ST3903, the mobile terminal confirms the service content of the MBMS service in the neighboring cell, and determines whether or not the service currently being received by the mobile terminal is being performed in the new serving cell. When the service is being performed, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST3813. When service is not performed, it transfers to step ST3904. In Step ST3904, the mobile terminal does not notify the event used for notifying the measurement result to the serving cell. Specifically, notification of an event when the serving cell needs to be reselected is not performed. More specifically, event A3 is not notified to the serving cell. Thereby, the handover process as the mobile communication system is not started, and the serving cell is not reselected. Therefore, the conventional serving cell in which the user-desired MBMS service is performed is not changed, and the MBMS service reception is not interrupted. Accordingly, in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, which is the subject of the present invention, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service transmitted from the MBMS dedicated cell or the multi-cell transmission from the unicast / MBMS mixed cell can perform the MBMS service by handover. The problem of interruption of reception can be solved.

  Also, in step ST3812, it is a fact that it is determined that the cell re-selection of the serving cell is necessary as a result of the measurement in step ST3811. Therefore, it is not desired to interrupt the MBMS service. For example, it is considered that the user should interrupt the movement. Therefore, even though it is determined that reselection of the serving cell is necessary, the fact that the desired MBMS service is not being performed in the new serving cell, the fact that the handover process has been stopped is displayed on the display unit, by ringing, etc. You may inform the user. As a result, when the user gives priority to the current MBMS service reception over the movement, the movement can be stopped, and an effect that the usage can be more adapted to the needs of the user can be obtained. In addition, in step ST3904, instead of not notifying the serving cell of event A3, notifying the serving cell of an event (event A3) when the serving cell needs to be reselected, and notifying the user's intention Also good. As a specific example of the user's intention, it can be considered that handover is not desired.

  According to the twentieth embodiment, in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, which is the subject of the present invention, a mobile terminal receiving an MBMS service transmitted in multicell from a unicast / MBMS mixed cell receives an MBMS service by handover. The problem of interruptions can be solved.

Embodiment 21. FIG.
FIG. 88 shows a sequence diagram of the mobile communication system used in the twenty-first embodiment. In FIG. 88, the same steps as those in FIG. 86 indicate the same or corresponding processes, and thus description thereof is omitted. In step ST4001, the serving cell notifies the mobile terminal being served thereby of the system information of the own cell. Specific examples of the system information to be notified include a measurement cycle, an intermittent reception cycle, tracking area information (TA information), and the like. The measurement cycle is a cycle notified from the network side to a mobile terminal being served by the network, and the mobile terminal measures the electric field strength and the like according to this cycle. The system information of the own cell includes measurement reporting parameters used when measuring the serving cell and the neighboring cells. As a specific example of the parameter for measurement report, “threshold”, “offset value”, etc. shown in Non-Patent Document 3 can be considered. In the present embodiment 21, in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, for a mobile terminal that has not received an MBMS service transmitted from a unicast / MBMS mixed cell in multi-cell (hereinafter, simply receiving no MBMS service) In the unicast / mixed frequency layer, the mobile terminal is receiving the MBMS service transmitted from the unicast / MBMS mixed cell in the multi-cell mode (hereinafter simply referred to as the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service). ) And to separate the parameters for measurement report. Further, consider that an offset value is separated for a mobile terminal that has not received the MBMS service and a mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service. Further, consider that the offset value for the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service is set to a value larger than the offset value for the mobile terminal not receiving the MBMS service.

  When reporting the own cell information from the serving cell to the mobile terminal, the own cell information is mapped to a broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is a logical channel, and further, a broadcast channel (BCH) that is a transport channel, a physical channel To the physical broadcast channel (PBCH). In addition, the own cell information is mapped to a broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is a logical channel, and further mapped to a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) that is a transport channel and a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) that is a physical channel. May be. The “measurement report parameter” for a mobile terminal that is receiving an MBMS service indicates that a mobile terminal that has received an MBMS service transmitted in a multicell from a unicast / MBMS mixed cell performs handover in the unicast / mixed frequency layer. This is a new parameter to solve the problem of MBMS reception interruption that may occur when performing. Therefore, this parameter is effective for the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service. Therefore, there is no problem even if it is added to the control information of the MBMS service received by the mobile terminal that receives the MBMS service separately from other system information. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in the information amount of BCCH and to obtain an effect of preventing a control delay of the entire mobile communication system. When reporting the control information of the MBMS service from the serving cell to the mobile terminal, the control information of the MBMS service is mapped to the broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is a logical channel, and further, the broadcast channel (BCH that is a transport channel) ) And mapped to a physical broadcast channel (PBCH) which is a physical channel. The control information of the MBMS service is mapped to the broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is a logical channel, and further, the downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) that is a transport channel, and the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) that is a physical channel May be mapped. Also, the control information of the MBMS service is mapped to the multicast control channel (MCCH) that is a logical channel, and further mapped to the multicast channel (MCH) that is a transport channel and the physical multicast channel (PMCH) that is a physical channel. Good. In Step ST4002, the mobile terminal receives the system information of the own cell from the serving cell.

  In step ST4003, the mobile terminal determines whether MBMS is being received. Specifically, in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, it is determined whether or not an MBMS service transmitted in multicell from a unicast / MBMS mixed cell is received. If it is receiving, it will transfer to step ST4004. If not receiving, it moves to step ST4005. In Step ST4004, the mobile terminal sets the measurement report parameter for the mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS in the measurement report parameter. Specifically, an offset value for a mobile terminal that is receiving MBMS is set as the offset value. In Step ST4005, the mobile terminal sets the measurement report parameter for the mobile terminal not receiving MBMS in the measurement report parameter. More specifically, an offset value for a mobile terminal not receiving MBMS is set as the offset value.

  According to the twenty-first embodiment, it is possible to change the measurement result of a neighboring cell (new serving cell) in which handover processing is performed for a mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service and has not received the MBMS service. Further, by setting the offset value for the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service to a value larger than the offset value for the mobile terminal not receiving the MBMS service, measurement of neighboring cells in which the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service performs the handover process is performed. The result can be made higher than when the MBMS service is not received. Thereby, in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service transmitted from the unicast / MBMS mixed cell to the multicell is transmitted from the unicast / MBMS mixed cell to the multicell in the unicast / mixed frequency layer. Compared to a mobile terminal that has not received the transmitted MBMS service, it is possible to make handover difficult when located in the same geographical location. As a result, it is possible to widen the geographical range in which the MBMS service transmitted from the unicast / MBMS mixed cell to the multi-cell can be received from the same base station in the unicast / mixed frequency layer. As a result, in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service transmitted from the unicast / MBMS mixed cell to the multicell can reduce the occurrence of interruption of the MBMS service reception due to the handover. I can do it. In the twentieth embodiment, the problem is solved by newly adding the service content of the MBMS service of the neighboring cell to the neighboring cell information. However, it is conceivable that the information content of the service content of the MBMS service for each adjacent cell increases. In the twenty-first embodiment, the problem is solved without adding the service content of the MBMS service in the adjacent cell. Therefore, the problem can be solved while reducing the amount of information notified from the serving cell to the mobile terminal as compared with the twentieth embodiment. Therefore, the effect of effective use of radio resources can be obtained as compared with the twentieth embodiment.

  Next, the modification 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. If Embodiment 21 is modified as follows, further effects can be obtained. FIG. 89 shows a sequence diagram of the mobile communication system used in the first modification of the twenty-first embodiment. In FIG. 89, steps having the same numbers as those in FIGS. 86 to 88 indicate the same or equivalent processes, and thus description thereof will be omitted. In step ST4003, the mobile terminal determines whether MBMS is being received. More specifically, in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, it is determined whether or not an MBMS service transmitted in multicell from a unicast / MBMS mixed cell is received. If it is receiving, it moves to step ST4101. If not receiving, it moves to step ST4005. In step ST4101, the mobile terminal confirms the user's intention. More specifically, it is determined whether to give priority to MBMS service reception over unicast communication. More specifically, in the unicast / mixed frequency layer over the unicast communication, it is determined whether or not to give priority to reception of the MBMS service transmitted from the unicast / MBMS mixed cell to the multicell. When giving priority, it moves to step ST4004. When priority is not given, it transfers to step ST4005.

  The following further effects can be obtained by the first modification of the twenty-first embodiment. In step ST4004, when an offset value for a mobile terminal that is receiving MBMS is set in the offset value, a mobile terminal that has not received the MBMS service has a poor reception status from the current serving cell, and is handed over to a new serving cell. Even if the process is started (even if the event A3 is notified to the serving cell), the mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service does not start the handover process even in the same reception situation (also the same geographical location). This is because even if a mobile terminal that has not received the MBMS service starts a handover process on the assumption that the reception status from the current serving cell is bad, the mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service has changed to the current serving cell. It means staying. Therefore, the MBMS service reception is not interrupted, but it may be considered that the reception quality of the unicast service is deteriorated. Therefore, if this modification is used, the user's intention is reflected whether the reception of the MBMS service is not to be interrupted as much as possible, or the reception of the MBMS service is allowed to be prevented and the deterioration of the reception quality of the unicast service is prevented. Thus, it is possible to obtain the effect of enabling the use of the mobile communication system according to the needs of the user.

  Next, a second modification of the present embodiment will be described. If Embodiment 21 is modified as follows, further effects can be obtained. FIG. 90 shows a sequence diagram of the mobile communication system used in the second modification of the twenty-first embodiment. In FIG. 90, steps having the same numbers as those in FIGS. 86 to 40 indicate the same or equivalent processes, and thus description thereof is omitted. In step ST4003, the mobile terminal determines whether MBMS is being received. If it is receiving, it will transfer to step ST4201. If not receiving, it moves to step ST4005. In Step ST4201, the mobile terminal confirms the service content of the MBMS service in the neighboring cell using the neighboring cell information received in Step ST3902 for the neighboring cell to be measured. In the neighboring cell to be measured, it is determined whether the MBMS service being received in the current serving cell is being performed. If it has been performed, the process proceeds to step ST4005. When not performed, it transfers to step ST4004.

  According to the second modification of the twenty-first embodiment, the following further effects can be obtained. When the MBMS service being received in the current serving cell is being performed in the new serving cell, the problem of interruption of MBMS service reception due to handover does not occur. Therefore, when the MBMS service being received in the current serving cell is being performed in the new serving cell, the parameter for measurement report during the reception of the MBMS service, which leads to deterioration in the reception quality of the unicast service (including the MBMS service). Can be prevented. Further, the first modification of the twenty-first embodiment and the second modification of the twenty-first embodiment can be used in combination.

Embodiment 22. FIG.
Consider that base stations belonging to all MBSFN areas in an MBSFN synchronization area use the same radio resources for multicell transmission from a unicast / MBMS mixed cell in a unicast / mixed frequency layer. More specifically, it is considered that all MBSFN areas in the MBSFN synchronization area use together MBSFN subframes used for MBMS service (MCCH, MTCH) transmission. More specifically, a radio resource (MBSFN subframe) common in the MBSFN synchronization area is multiplexed and used in each MBSFN area. A specific example of the multiplexing method is shown in FIG. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing a concept of multiplexing MBSFN subframes in an MBSFN area. In FIG. 91, A is “MBMS service data from base stations belonging to MBSFN area A”, and B is “MBMS service data from base stations belonging to MBSFN area B”. In FIG. 91A (pattern A), radio resources (MBSFN subframes) used by base stations belonging to the MBSFN area A and base stations belonging to the MBSFN area B are time-division multiplexed. During the MBSFN subframe, the base station belonging to the MBSFN area A is transmitting the MBMS service, and the MBMS service and the unicast service are not transmitted from the base station belonging to the MBSFN area B. It is a period. The time during which the base station belonging to the MBSFN area B is transmitting the MBMS service is a period in which the MBMS service and the unicast service are not transmitted from the base station belonging to the MBSFN area A, that is, the transmission is off. The pattern B is also a specific example of time division multiplexing, but the pattern B does not time-divide the MBSFN subframe but determines the MBSFN subframe to be used for each MBSFN area. However, (B) and (Pattern B) in FIG. 91 are also similar to Pattern A. In the MBSFN subframe in which the base station belonging to the MBSFN area A transmits the MBMS service, the MBMS service from the base station belonging to the MBSFN area B and the uni The cast service is not transmitted, that is, transmission is off. Further, in the MBSFN subframe in which the base station belonging to the MBSFN area B is transmitting the MBMS service, the transmission of the MBMS service and the unicast service from the base station belonging to the MBSFN area A is not performed, that is, transmission is off.

  91 (C) (pattern C), radio resources (MBSFN subframes) used by base stations belonging to the MBSFN area A and base stations belonging to the MBSFN area B are frequency division multiplexed (FDM). This is an example. In the MBSFN subframe, the base station belonging to the MBSFN area A does not transmit the MBMS service and the unicast service from the base station belonging to the MBSFN area B on the frequency at which the base station belonging to the MBSFN area A transmits the MBMS service. It is. In the MBSFN subframe, the MBMS service and the unicast service are not transmitted from the base station belonging to the MBSFN area A at the frequency at which the base station belonging to the MBSFN area B transmits the MBMS service. is there. 91 (D) (pattern D) is an example in which radio resources (MBSFN subframes) used by base stations belonging to MBSFN area A and base stations belonging to MBSFN area B are code-division multiplexed. The base station belonging to the MBSFN area A uses the common radio resource (MBSFN subframe) in the MBSFN synchronization area, and transmits the MBMS service by multiplying the data by the code A. In the MBSFN synchronization area, the base station belonging to the MBSFN area B transmits the MBMS service by multiplying the data by the code B using the common radio resource (MBSFN subframe). Further, although an example in which base stations belonging to all MBSFN areas in the MBSFN area use the same radio resource (MBSFN subframe) has been described, base stations belonging to MBSFN areas adjacent to the base station constituting the MBSFN area are the same radio. Resources may be used.

  According to the twenty-second embodiment, in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service transmitted from the unicast / MBMS mixed cell by multi-cell reduces the occurrence of MBMS service reception interruption due to the handover. Can be obtained. This is because the base station belonging to the MBSFN synchronization area provides the MBMS service using the same radio resource (MBSFN subframe) by the mobile communication system as in the twenty-second embodiment. Consider the case where the current serving cell belongs to MBSFN area A and the new serving cell belongs to MBSFN area B. The unicast service performs transmission / reception with a new serving cell having good reception quality, and the new serving cell performs scheduling. On the other hand, the MBMS service can receive the MBMS service in the MBSFN area where the service desired by the user is performed. Further, since the base station belonging to the MBSFN synchronization area is targeted, it is not necessary to newly increase the number of base stations that maintain synchronization between base stations in order to realize the present embodiment. Will not increase. The following effects can be obtained as compared with the twentieth embodiment. The service content of the MBMS service in the adjacent cell required in the twentieth embodiment is not necessary. Therefore, the problem can be solved while reducing the amount of information notified from the serving cell to the mobile terminal as compared with the twentieth embodiment. Therefore, the effect of effective use of radio resources can be obtained as compared with the twentieth embodiment.

  Compared with Embodiment 21, the following effects can be obtained. For a mobile terminal not receiving an MBMS service transmitted in multicell from a unicast / MBMS mixed cell in the unicast / mixed frequency layer required in Embodiment 21, and for unicast / MBMS mixing in the unicast / mixed frequency layer The parameter for measurement report separated for the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service transmitted in multi-cell from the cell becomes unnecessary. Therefore, the problem can be solved while reducing the amount of information notified from the serving cell to the mobile terminal as compared with the twenty-first embodiment. Therefore, an effect of effective use of radio resources can be obtained as compared with the twenty-first embodiment. Furthermore, in Embodiment 22, even if a mobile terminal is receiving an MBMS service, if the reception quality of the serving cell is as bad as that of a mobile terminal not receiving the MBMS service, the MBMS service currently being received by the new serving cell Therefore, it is possible to perform handover regardless of whether or not is performed. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that the reception quality of the unicast service does not deteriorate as compared with the twenty-first embodiment.

Embodiment 23. FIG.
A problem to be solved by the invention will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 92, A is an L1 / L2 signaling channel, and B is a unicast transmission resource. As described in Non-Patent Document 2, the assignment of MBSFN subframes in an MBMS / unicast mixed cell has been studied. As described in Non-Patent Document 1, multiplexing of channels other than MBSFN and MBSFN is performed in units of subframes. Hereinafter, the subframe for MBSFN transmission is referred to as an MBSFN sub-frame. Further, in the current 3GPP, it is determined that in the mixed cell, in the MBSFN frame (subframe), except for the first 1 to 2 OFDM symbols in subframe units, it should not be used for unicast transmission. In other words, resources other than the first 1-2 OFDM symbols are dedicated to MBMS transmission. In FIG. 92, it is described as PMCH. On the other hand, Non-Patent Document 1 discloses that PCH is mapped to PDSCH or PDCCH. Non-Patent Document 1 discloses that the paging group uses the L1 / L2 signaling channel (PDCCH), and the clear identifier (UE-ID) of the mobile terminal can be found on the PCH. Therefore, since PCH uses the L1 / L2 signaling channel, it can be mapped even in the MBSFN frame. On the other hand, in the MBSFN frame, when the downlink radio resource of the next control information is allocated in the PCH, the downlink radio resource on the same subframe is dedicated to MBMS transmission, so the control information is allocated in the same subframe. The problem of not being able to do occurs.

  Non-Patent Document 4 describes the following about paging signal transmission to mobile terminals. A PICH (Paging Indicator channel) that indicates that a paging signal addressed to any mobile terminal belonging to the paging group has been generated is transmitted using the L1 / L2 signaling channel. The mobile terminal decodes the paging signal to determine whether the paging signal is addressed to itself. The PCH can have one or more paging signals. The PICH is transmitted using the L1 / L2 signaling channel, that is, positioned in the first 1 to 3 OFDM symbols in subframe units. On the other hand, PCH is mapped to PDSCH in the same subframe as PICH. The problem to be solved by the present invention also occurs in the paging signal transmission procedure of Non-Patent Document 4. In other words, when MBSFN subframes are configured in an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, even if PICH is transmitted in the first 1-2 OFDM symbols of the MBSFN subframe, the same subframe as PICH is a resource dedicated to MBMS transmission. is there. Therefore, it is not possible to transmit a PCH that maps a paging signal for determining whether or not the paging signal is addressed to itself. Further, Non-Patent Document 4 has no suggestion about the problem to be solved by the present invention.

  Non-Patent Document 5 has the following description about an expression for obtaining a time when paging occurs (paging occasion (paging occasion)). In order to obtain the paging occasion, two parameters are necessary: a paging interval (corresponding to the intermittent reception period in the mixed frequency layer in the present invention) and the number of paging occasions in the paging interval. It is not described. Further, it is described that a subframe in a radio frame in which paging occasion occurs is a fixed value. However, Non-Patent Document 5 does not describe a method for determining a subframe in a radio frame of a paging occasion to which a paging signal is mapped. Further, Non-Patent Document 5 does not describe the relationship between subframes and MBSFN subframes in a radio frame for paging occasions, and does not suggest the problem to be solved by the present invention.

  Other than the first 1-2 OFDM symbols in the MBSFN subframe, the resources are dedicated to MBMS transmission. When the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion overlaps with the allocation of the MBSFN subframe, other than the first 1-2 OFDM symbols become resources dedicated to MBMS transmission and cannot be used for paging processing. Since the conventional paging processing method does not consider the MBSFN subframe at all, there is a problem that it cannot be applied to the paging processing in the MBMS / unicast mixed cell. In order to solve this problem, in the twenty-third embodiment, it is determined which subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion is used for paging processing (transmission of paging signal (paging message), PICH, PCH, etc.). A method is disclosed. FIG. 93 shows a specific example of a sequence diagram in the case of determining a subframe in a radio frame of a paging occasion to which a paging signal is mapped. Since the process with the same step number as in FIG. 88 is the same process, the description thereof is omitted. In step ST4001, the serving cell notifies the mobile terminal being served thereby of the system information of the own cell. Specific examples of the system information to be notified include a measurement cycle, an intermittent reception cycle, tracking area information (TA information), and the like. It is assumed that the system information of the own cell includes a parameter for intermittent reception. Specific examples of the intermittent reception parameter include an intermittent reception period (T) in the mixed frequency layer, and the number of paging occasions (N) in the paging interval (or the number of paging groups). A specific example of how to represent the intermittent reception period includes the number of radio frames. In Step ST4002, the mobile terminal receives the system information of the own cell from the serving cell. In step ST4501, the serving cell transmits MBSFN subframe allocation information. In the current 3GPP discussion on MBSFN subframe allocation, the following is spoken: The mapping positions of the reference signal in the MBSFN subframe and the reference signal of the subframe that is not the MBSFN subframe as radio resources are different. Therefore, in order to perform measurement using a more accurate reference signal, there is a discussion that even a mobile terminal that does not have the ability to receive an MBMS service needs to grasp allocation information of MBSFN subframes of a serving cell. (Non-patent document 2). As a specific example of MBSFN subframe allocation information, a subframe number (for example, subframe number # 1 in FIG. 92) of a subframe allocated as an MBSFN subframe can be considered. In Step ST4502, the mobile terminal receives MBSFN subframe allocation information from the serving cell.

  In step ST4503, the mobile terminal obtains a paging occasion. In the twenty-third embodiment, a method for determining a subframe in a radio frame of a paging occasion for solving the problem is disclosed. The method disclosed in the twenty-third embodiment can be used regardless of how to obtain the paging occasion (the paging occasion radio frame). In Step ST4504, the serving cell obtains a radio frame for paging occasion using the same method as the mobile terminal as the mobile communication system. In Step ST4505, the mobile terminal obtains a subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion. In step ST4506, the serving cell obtains a subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion using the same method as the mobile terminal as the mobile communication system.

Details of a method for obtaining a subframe in a radio frame for paging occasion in step ST4505 will be described below. Based on the allocation information of the MBSFN subframe received in step ST4502, the mobile terminal causes subframes other than the MBSFN subframe to be subframes in the radio frame of the paging occasion. More specifically, subframe renumbering is performed except for the MBSFN subframe. This will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 92, A is an MBSFN subframe. FIG. 94A shows a radio frame in which no MBSFN subframe exists. FIG. 94 (b) is an example of subframe renumbering when an MBSFN subframe is assigned to subframe number # 3, for example. Before and after renumbering, the following correspondence is taken. (Before renumbering-After renumbering), (# 0- # 0 (MBSFN)) (# 1- # 1 (MBSFN)) (# 2- # 2 (MBSFN)) (# 3-MBSFN subframe) (# 4- # 3 (MBSFN)) (# 5- # 4 (MBSFN)) (# 6- # 5 (MBSFN)) (# 7- # 6 (MBSFN)) (# 8- # 7 (MBSFN))) (# 9- # 8 (MBSFN)). Hereinafter, (MBSFN) is added to the subframe number after renumbering. FIG. 94 (c) shows a case where two MBSFN subframes are allocated in one radio frame. The details of the renumbering are the same as in the case of one MBSFN subframe, and a description thereof will be omitted. A subframe in a radio frame for paging occasion is determined in association with the number of subframes excluding the MBSFN subframe. As a specific example, FIG. 95 shows a correspondence table. FIG. 95 (a) will be described. When the number of subframes excluding the MBSFN subframe is “9” (that is, the assignment as the MBSFN subframe in the radio frame is one subframe), the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion is # 4 (MBSFN). Using FIG. 95 (a), subframes in the radio frame of the paging occasion in the case of FIG. 94 (c) will be obtained. In the case of FIG. 94 (c), the number of subframes excluding the MBSFN subframe is “8”. When the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion is determined using FIG. 95 (a), # 3 (MBSFN) is obtained. FIG. 95 (b) shows a correspondence table considering a case where a plurality of subframes are generated in a radio frame of the paging occasion in one radio frame.
For example, when the number of occurrences of subframes for paging occasions in one radio frame in FIG. 95 (b) is “2”, each mobile terminal receives paging occasions in one radio frame in FIG. 95 (b). It is not known which subframe shown in the column when the number of generated subframes is “2” should be received (monitored) by intermittent reception. This can be solved by the following method. Mobile terminal identifier mode 1 Determine the number of subframes for paging occasions in a radio frame. When the number of subframes for paging occasions in one radio frame is “2”, the solution of the above equation is 0 or 1. Therefore, as a specific example, when the solution of the above equation is “0”, it is defined as the upper subframe number of the correspondence table, and when it is “1”, it is defined as the lower subframe number of the correspondence table. Alternatively, the information is included in the correspondence table. As another solution, the mobile terminal receives (monitors) all of the subframes of a paging instance that exist in one radio frame. Furthermore, there are cases where the necessary number of subframe numbers for paging occasions cannot be defined due to the allocation of MBSFN subframes, even though a plurality of paging occasions occur in one radio frame. Specifically, this is the case where the number of paging occasion subframes generated in one radio frame in FIG. 95B is “2” and the number of subframes excluding MBSFN subframes is “1”. This problem can be solved by the following method. The number of paging groups and / or the intermittent reception period (T) in the mixed frequency layer or / and the allocation of MBSFN subframes so that the number of paging occasions present in one radio frame is equal to or less than the number of subframes excluding MBSFN subframes Determine (number of assignments). That is, paging satisfying the following formula (“number of paging groups (N) / intermittent reception period (T) in mixed frequency layer = <10 (number of subframes in one radio frame) −number of allocated MBSFN subframes”)) The number of groups (N), the intermittent reception period (T) in the mixed frequency layer, and the number of MBSFN subframes allocated may be determined.

A specific example in the case where a plurality of subframes for paging occasions occur in one radio frame described above will be described below. Consider a case where Non-Patent Document 5 is used in a method for obtaining a radio frame for paging occasion. In Non-Patent Document 5, as described above, in order to obtain the paging occasion, the paging interval (corresponding to the intermittent reception period in the mixed frequency layer in the present invention) (T) and the paging occasion in the paging interval are determined. It is described that two parameters of number (N) are necessary and no other parameters are necessary. When a plurality of paging-acquisition subframes occur in one radio frame, it can be expressed by the following equation (1 <N / T). A specific example of the method used in FIG. 95 (b) is shown below.
When 1 <N / T = <2, there are two subframes corresponding to paging occasions of different paging groups in one radio frame. Therefore, in the case of 1 <N / T = <2, the column “2” is used where the number of subframes for paging occasions in one radio frame in FIG. 95 (b).

  The correspondence table as shown in FIG. 95 needs to be recognized on the network side and the mobile terminal side in advance. The correspondence table may be statically determined as the mobile communication system. Thereby, since there is no need to notify the mobile terminal side from the network side, a further effect of effective utilization of radio resources can be obtained. On the other hand, if the correspondence table can be changed, it is mapped to the broadcast control channel (BCCH) as a logical channel, mapped to the broadcast channel (BCH) of the transport channel, and mapped to the physical broadcast channel (PBCH) of the physical channel. It can be considered. As another specific example, it is mapped to the broadcast control channel (BCCH) as a logical channel, mapped to the downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) of the transport channel, and mapped to the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) of the physical channel. It can be considered. By making the correspondence table changeable, it is possible to obtain a further effect that makes it possible to construct a more flexible mobile communication system.

  In the twenty-third embodiment, subframes are renumbered except for the MBSFN subframe, and the subframes in the radio frame of the paging occasion are determined based on the subframe numbers after the renumbering. Therefore, the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion and the MBSFN subframe do not become the same subframe. Therefore, the effect that the subject of this invention can be solved can be acquired.

The first modification shows a different method of the process in step ST4505 of the twenty-third embodiment. Based on the allocation information of the MBSFN subframe received in step ST4502, the mobile terminal causes subframes other than the MBSFN subframe to be subframes in the radio frame of the paging occasion. More specifically, subframe renumbering is performed except for the MBSFN subframe. Details thereof are the same as those in the twenty-third embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted. In the first modification, unlike Embodiment 23, it is assumed that the relationship between the number of subframes excluding the MBSFN subframe and not the correspondence table and the subframes in the radio frame of the paging occasion is kept constant. In other words, a relational expression between the number of subframes excluding the MBSFN subframe and the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion is defined. Specific examples of the relational expressions are shown below.
Mobile terminal identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) mod (number of subframes excluding MBSFN subframe) = subframe in radio frame of paging occasion (subframe number after renumbering) (Formula 1)
(Identifier of mobile terminal (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) div Number of paging groups (N)) mod Number of subframes excluding MBSFN subframe = Subframe in radio frame of paging occasion (however, renumbering Subframe number after adding) (Equation 2) is considered.

  According to the first modification, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the twenty-third embodiment. It is possible to obtain an effect that it is not necessary to store a large amount of information such as a correspondence table between the network side and the mobile terminal side. Even when the correspondence between the number of subframes excluding the MBSFN subframe and the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion is changed, it is only necessary to notify the relational expression from the network side to the mobile terminal side. The effect that it is not necessary to notify a large amount of information such as a correspondence table can be obtained.

The above relational expression can be applied regardless of how to calculate paging occasions (paging-acquisition radio frames). May occur. The formula for calculating the paging acquisition is “paging occasion = (identifier of mobile terminal mod paging group number (N)) × Int (intermittent reception period (T) / number of paging groups (N) in mixed frequency layer)”. It is possible. In this case, if Equation 1 is applied to the subframe determination formula in the radio frame of the paging acquisition, there may be a bias in the subframe to which the paging acquisition is assigned. For example, N = 3 and the number of subframes excluding MBSFN subframes = 3. Since N = 3, paging occasions occur in the # 0 radio frame, but the identifier (IMSI, etc.) of the mobile terminal assigned to this radio frame is a multiple of three. Therefore, when Equation 1 is applied, since K = 3, the subframe allocated in the radio frame becomes the subframe # 0 in all the mobile terminals. As described above, in some cases, there is a case where a subframe to which a paging occasion is actually allocated in one radio frame is biased. Here, a method for preventing a bias from occurring in subframes to which paging occasions are actually allocated in one radio frame is disclosed. For example, there is a method in which the mobile terminal identifier is not used as an equation for performing a mod operation on the number of subframes excluding N and MBSFN subframes in both the paging-acquisition radio frame and subframe. As a specific example, when the subframe determination formula is (Formula 1), the following paging occasion shown in the second embodiment is obtained.
“Paging Occasion = (IMSI div K) mod (intermittent reception period in unicast / mixed frequency layer) + n × (intermittent reception period in unicast / mixed frequency layer) n: 0, 1, 2,... Occasion ≦ maximum value of SFN ”. Here, SFN is an integer from 0 to the maximum value of SFN. K is the number of subframes excluding the MBSFN subframe. Further, when the subframe determination formula is (Formula 2), the following paging average is obtained.
Paging acknowledgment = (identifier of mobile terminal mod number of paging groups (N)) x Int (intermittent reception period (T) / number of paging groups (N) in mixed frequency layer)

As another method, when the subframe determination formula is (Formula 2), the following paging approximation is obtained.
“Paging Occasion” = (IMSI div K) mod X + n × (intermittent reception cycle in the MBMS transmission frequency layer), n: 0, 1, 2,..., Where Paging Occation ≦ SFN . SFN is an integer from 0 to the maximum value of SFN. X is the number of radio frames in which paging occurs within the intermittent reception cycle in the MBMS transmission frequency layer, and X ≦ intermittent reception cycle (the number of radio frames) in the MBMS transmission frequency layer. A value of X (residue value at X) and a radio frame number (SFN) are associated with each other. By doing this, there is an effect that a radio frame in which paging occurs can be set arbitrarily. As another method, when the subframe determination formula is (Formula 2), the following paging approximation is obtained.
“Paging Occasion” = ((IMSI div K) mod (Int (T / TX))) × TX + n × (intermittent reception cycle in MBMS transmission frequency layer), n: 0, 1, 2,. .. However, the maximum value of Paging Occlusion ≦ SFN. SFN is an integer from 0 to the maximum value of SFN. TX ≦ Intermittent reception period (number of radio frames) in the MBMS transmission frequency layer.
By making the radio frame in which paging occurs periodically, it is not necessary to relate the above-described X value (the remainder value in X) and the radio frame number (SFN), so that the calculation calculation is simplified. Can do.

  The above relational expression may be determined statically. Thereby, since there is no need to notify the mobile terminal side from the network side, a further effect of effective utilization of radio resources can be obtained. On the other hand, if the relational expression can be changed, it is mapped to the broadcast control channel (BCCH) as a logical channel, mapped to the broadcast channel (BCH) of the transport channel, and mapped to the physical broadcast channel (PBCH) of the physical channel. It can be considered. As another specific example, it is mapped to the broadcast control channel (BCCH) as a logical channel, mapped to the downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) of the transport channel, and mapped to the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) of the physical channel. It can be considered. By making the correspondence table changeable, it is possible to obtain a further effect that makes it possible to construct a more flexible mobile communication system. The following effects can be obtained in the specific examples of the above relational expressions. Even for mobile terminals belonging to the same paging group, the value of the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion changes according to the identifier of the mobile terminal. This reduces the number of mobile terminals that use the same subframe. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that radio resources used for PICH and PCH are reduced in one subframe.

In the second modification, a different method of the process in step 4505 of the twenty-third embodiment is shown. In the second modification, subframe renumbering is not performed. The mobile terminal determines the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion in association with the MBSFN subframe allocation information received in step ST4502 (so as to avoid allocation). As a specific example, FIG. 96 shows a correspondence table. FIG. 96 (a) will be described. When the assignment of the MBSFN subframe is “# 1”, the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion is “# 4”. FIG. 96 (b) shows a correspondence table considering a case where a plurality of subframes are generated in a radio frame of the paging occasion in one radio frame. For example, if the number of occurrences of subframes for paging occasions in one radio frame in FIG. 96 (b) is “2”, each mobile terminal will receive paging occasions in one radio frame in FIG. 96 (b). It is not known which subframe shown in the column when the number of generated subframes is “2” should be received (monitored) by intermittent reception. This can be solved by the following method. Mobile terminal identifier mode 1 Determine the number of subframes for paging occasions in a radio frame. When the number of subframes for paging occasions in one radio frame is “2”, the solution of the above equation is 0 or 1. Therefore, as a specific example, when the solution of the above equation is “0”, it is defined as the upper subframe number of the correspondence table, and when it is “1”, it is defined as the lower subframe number of the correspondence table. Alternatively, the information is included in the correspondence table. As another solution, the mobile terminal receives (monitors) all of the subframes of a paging instance that exist in one radio frame. Furthermore, there are cases where the necessary number of subframe numbers for paging occasions cannot be defined due to the assignment of MBSFN subframes, even though a plurality of paging occasions occur in one radio frame. This problem can be solved by the following method. The number of paging groups and / or the intermittent reception period (T) in the mixed frequency layer or / and the allocation of MBSFN subframes so that the number of paging occasions present in one radio frame is equal to or less than the number of subframes excluding MBSFN subframes Determine (number of assignments). That is, the number of paging groups (N) satisfying the following expression, the intermittent reception period (T) in the mixed frequency layer, and the number of MBSFN subframes allocated may be determined.
Number of paging groups (N) / intermittent reception period (T) in mixed frequency layer = <10 (number of subframes in one radio frame) −number of allocated MBSFN subframes

  A specific example in the case where a plurality of subframes for paging occasions occur in one radio frame described above will be described below. Consider a case where Non-Patent Document 5 is used in a method for obtaining a radio frame for paging occasion. In Non-Patent Document 5, as described above, in order to obtain the paging occasion, the paging interval (corresponding to the intermittent reception period in the mixed frequency layer in the present invention) (T) and the paging occasion in the paging interval are determined. It is described that two parameters of number (N) are necessary and no other parameters are necessary. When a plurality of paging-acquisition subframes occur in one radio frame, it can be expressed by the following equation (1 <N / T). A specific example of the method used in FIG. 96 (b) is shown below. When 1 <N / T = <2, there are two subframes corresponding to paging occasions of different paging groups in one radio frame. Therefore, in the case of 1 <N / T = <2, the column “2” in which the number of subframes for paging occasions in one radio frame in FIG. 96 (b) is used.

  The correspondence table as shown in FIG. 96 needs to be recognized on the network side and the mobile terminal side in advance. The correspondence table may be statically determined as the mobile communication system. Thereby, since there is no need to notify the mobile terminal side from the network side, a further effect of effective utilization of radio resources can be obtained. On the other hand, if the correspondence table can be changed, it is mapped to the broadcast control channel (BCCH) as a logical channel, mapped to the broadcast channel (BCH) of the transport channel, and mapped to the physical broadcast channel (PBCH) of the physical channel. It can be considered. As another specific example, it is mapped to the broadcast control channel (BCCH) as a logical channel, mapped to the downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) of the transport channel, and mapped to the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) of the physical channel. It can be considered. By making the correspondence table changeable, it is possible to obtain a further effect that makes it possible to construct a more flexible mobile communication system.

  In the second modification, subframes in the radio frame of the paging occasion are associated in accordance with the allocation of MBSFN subframes (so as to avoid the allocation). Therefore, the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion and the MBSFN subframe do not become the same subframe. Therefore, the effect that the subject of this invention can be solved can be acquired. In the second modification compared to the twenty-third embodiment and the first modification, it is possible to obtain an effect that the processing of renumbering subframes on the mobile terminal and the network side can be omitted.

In the third modification, a different method of the process in step 4505 of the twenty-third embodiment is shown. In the third modification, unlike the second modification, it is considered that the relationship between the allocation of MBSFN subframes, not the correspondence table, and the subframes in the radio frame of the paging occasion is kept constant. In other words, a relational expression between the allocation of the MBSFN subframe and the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion is defined. Specific examples of the relational expressions are shown below. The following description will be made using subframe numbers in which subframe renumbering is not performed. However, the idea of this modification can be used even when the subframe is renumbered.
Subframe in radio frame of paging occasion = MBSFN subframe allocation number + P (P: integer)
When the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion obtained by the above formula exceeds # 9,
Subframe in radio frame of paging occasion = MBSFN subframe allocation number + P− (9 × n) (P: integer, n: positive integer, n is incremented by “1” every time 9 is exceeded)
It is also conceivable that the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion obtained by the above equation further overlaps with the MBSFN subframe. This problem can be solved as follows. Subframe in radio frame for paging occasion = MBSFN subframe allocation number + P + (m × Q) − (9 × n) (P: integer, n: positive integer, m = 1, 2, 3,... 10) The value of m is advanced until the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion obtained by the above formula becomes a value that does not overlap the MBSFN subframe.
Q is an integer having no common divisor with 1 and 10. Specifically, Q = 1, 3, 7, 9,. At this time, P = Q may be set.
The above relational expression may be determined statically. Thereby, since there is no need to notify the mobile terminal side from the network side, a further effect of effective utilization of radio resources can be obtained. On the other hand, if the relational expression can be changed, it is mapped to the broadcast control channel (BCCH) as a logical channel, mapped to the broadcast channel (BCH) of the transport channel, and mapped to the physical broadcast channel (PBCH) of the physical channel. It can be considered. As another specific example, it is mapped to the broadcast control channel (BCCH) as a logical channel, mapped to the downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) of the transport channel, and mapped to the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) of the physical channel. It can be considered. By making the correspondence table changeable, it is possible to obtain a further effect that makes it possible to construct a more flexible mobile communication system.

  According to the third modification, in addition to the effects of the second modification, the following effects can be obtained. It is possible to obtain an effect that it is not necessary to store a large amount of information such as a correspondence table between the network side and the mobile terminal side. Also, even when the assignment of MBSFN subframes and the correspondence of subframes in the radio frame of the paging occasion is changed, it is only necessary to notify the relational expression from the network side to the mobile terminal side. The effect that it is not necessary to notify a large amount of information can be obtained.

  The fourth modification shows a different method of the process in step 4505 of the twenty-third embodiment. As the mobile communication system, subframes excluding the MBSFN subframe are defined as subframes in the radio frame of the paging occasion. More specifically, it is defined as # 0 and / or # 5 in which no MBSFN subframe is assigned because the SCH is mapped as a subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion. The subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion may be determined statically. Thereby, since there is no need to notify the mobile terminal side from the network side, a further effect of effective utilization of radio resources can be obtained. On the other hand, if the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion can be changed, it is mapped to the broadcast control channel (BCCH) as a logical channel, mapped to the broadcast channel (BCH) of the transport channel, and the physical channel physical It may be mapped to the broadcast channel (PBCH). As another specific example, it is mapped to the broadcast control channel (BCCH) as a logical channel, mapped to the downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) of the transport channel, and mapped to the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) of the physical channel. It can be considered. By making the correspondence table changeable, it is possible to obtain a further effect that makes it possible to construct a more flexible mobile communication system. In the fourth modification, a subframe that avoids assignment of the MBSFN subframe is defined as a subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion. Therefore, the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion and the MBSFN subframe do not become the same subframe. Therefore, the effect that the subject of this invention can be solved can be acquired. In the second modification compared to the twenty-third embodiment and the first modification, it is possible to obtain an effect that the processing of renumbering subframes on the mobile terminal and the network side can be omitted. In the fourth modification compared to the second modification and the third modification, the mobile terminal and the network side may omit the process of determining a subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion according to the MBSFN subframe allocation. The effect that it is possible can be obtained.

  The fifth modification shows a different method of the process in step ST4505 of the twenty-third embodiment. In Step ST4505, the mobile terminal obtains a subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion. In the fifth modification, the process shown in FIG. 97 is performed instead of step 4505. In step ST4901, the mobile terminal obtains a subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion. In the fifth modification, there is no particular designation as a method for obtaining a subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion in step ST4901. A method that does not consider assignment of MBSFN subframes may be used. As an example of a method for obtaining a subframe in a radio frame of a specific paging occasion, a fixed value can be used without depending on the assignment of MBSFN subframes as in the method described in Embodiment 2 and the method described in Non-Patent Document 5. Can be used. In Step ST4902, the mobile terminal uses the assignment of the MBSFN subframe received in Step ST4502 and the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion obtained in Step ST4901 to determine whether or not both are the same subframe. Judging. When it becomes the same sub-frame, it transfers to step ST4903. If the subframes are not the same, the process ends without moving to step ST4903. That is, the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion obtained in step ST4901 is used as it is. In Step ST4903, the mobile terminal changes the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion obtained in Step ST4902 to a subframe other than the next MBSFN subframe. For example, consider a case where the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion obtained in step ST4901 is # 2, and the assignment of the MBSFN subframe received in step ST4502 is # 2. In this case, it is determined in step ST4902 that both become the same subframe. Therefore, in step ST4903, the subframe in the paging-acquisition radio frame is a subframe other than the next MBSFN subframe, that is, # 3. At this time, in step ST4903, the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion may be changed to a subframe other than the previous MBSFN subframe, that is, # 1. The determination in step ST4902 may be performed for each radio frame of the paging occasion obtained in step ST4503. In addition, the determination in step ST4902 is performed once when intermittent reception is started in the serving cell, and / or once when the assignment of the MBSFN subframe is changed, for the repetition period of the set of MBSFN frames. It is also good. In this case, if any subframe in the radio frame of one paging occasion overlaps with the allocation of the MBSFN subframe, step ST4903 is processed for the subframe in the radio frame of every paging occasion. Further, step ST4903 may be processed only for the subframes in the radio frame of the corresponding paging occasion (which overlaps with the allocation of the MBSFN subframe). In this case, in the repetition cycle of the set of MBSFN frames, the corresponding (MBSFN subframe The processing of step ST4903 is performed on the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion (which overlaps with the allocation). In step 4506, the serving cell performs the processes of step ST4901 to step ST4903 similar to those of the mobile terminal.

  Further, the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion obtained by the processing in step ST4903 is the subframe in the radio frame of the original paging occasion (the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion obtained in step ST4901). The frame may not be within the same radio frame. Processing in that case will be described below. It is assumed that the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion obtained by the processing in step ST4903 may be a radio frame different from the subframe in the radio frame of the original paging occasion. Alternatively, the subframe in the radio frame of the paging case obtained in step ST4903 is the same as the subframe in the radio frame of the original paging case obtained in step ST4903. The value is a radio frame. As a specific example, the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion obtained in step ST4901 is excluded from the last subframe (# 9) of the radio frame, or the last subframe from a specified value Excluding As a specific example of a subframe number of a certain prescribed value, “subframe number of a prescribed value = last subframe−number of consecutive allocations of MBSFN subframes”.

  In the fifth modification, after obtaining the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion without considering the MBSFN subframe, when the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion and the MBSFN subframe overlap, The subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion is changed to a subframe other than the next MBSFN subframe. Therefore, the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion and the MBSFN subframe do not become the same subframe. Therefore, the effect that the subject of this invention can be solved can be acquired.

  The sixth modification shows a different method of the process in step ST4503 of the twenty-third embodiment. Consider the case where the method described in Non-Patent Document 5 is used in Step ST4503. Here, the paging occasion is obtained assuming that the paging interval and the number of paging occasions in the paging interval are equal. Thereby, the effect that the parameter for calculating | requiring a paging occasion is decreased by one can be acquired. This leads to reduction of the system information of the own cell in step ST4001. Thereby, the effect of effective utilization of radio resources can be obtained.

  The twenty-third embodiment and the first to sixth modifications can be applied to the “unicast side intermittent reception” described in the first and second embodiments.

Embodiment 24
Other than the first 1-2 OFDM symbols in the MBSFN subframe, the resources are dedicated to MBMS transmission. When the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion overlaps with the allocation of the MBSFN subframe, other than the first 1-2 OFDM symbols become resources dedicated to MBMS transmission and cannot be used for paging processing. Therefore, in order to solve the problem that the conventional paging processing method causes inconvenience, the present embodiment 24 discloses a processing method in the case where the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion and the MBSFN subframe overlap. In the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the allocation of the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion and the MBSFN subframe overlaps, radio resources other than the first 1-2 OFDM symbols dedicated to MBSFN transmission are used for unicast transmission, In particular, it is not used for paging processing. In addition, when allocation of subframes and MBSFN subframes in a radio frame for paging occasions overlaps, information on paging processing transmitted by radio resources other than the first 1-2 OFDM symbols dedicated to MBSFN transmission, It is assumed that transmission is performed in a subframe other than the next MBSFN subframe. A specific example of the processing method is shown below. The paging signal processing method is similar to the processing in which the processing in step ST4505 in FIG. 93 is changed to FIG. The description will focus on the different parts. In step ST4902, the user equipment uses the allocation of the MBSFN subframe received in step ST4502 and the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion obtained in step ST4901 to determine whether or not both are the same subframe. Judging. When it becomes the same sub-frame, it transfers to step ST4903. In Embodiment 24, the following process is performed instead of the process of step ST4903. When allocation of the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion and the MBSFN subframe does not overlap using the first or second OFDM symbol of the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion obtained in step ST4901 Information that should have been transmitted in the first 1 to 3 OFDM symbols (L1 / L2 signaling channel) is transmitted. In addition, when the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion and the MBSFN subframe allocation do not overlap, the information that should have been transmitted in other than the first 1 to 3 OFDM symbols (PDSCH) is transmitted to the next MBSFN subframe. It transmits with other than the first 1-3 OFDM symbols (PDSCH) of other subframes. In the case of the other than the first 1 to 3 OFDM symbols (PDSCH) of the subframe other than the next MBSFN subframe, the radio resources in the PDSCH are allocated by the subframe and the MBSFN subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion. If it is the same as the allocation in the case where they do not overlap, re-allocation or the like becomes unnecessary, and the effect of effective use of radio resources can be obtained. If it is determined in step ST4902 that the subframes are not the same, the process ends without moving to step ST4903. That is, the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion obtained in step ST4901 is used as it is.

  When allocation of the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion and the MBSFN subframe does not overlap using the first or second OFDM symbol of the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion obtained in step ST4901 A specific example of information that should have been transmitted in the first 1 to 3 OFDM symbols (L1 / L2 signaling channel) is shown below. Non-Patent Document 1 discloses that PCH is mapped to PDSCH or PDCCH. Non-Patent Document 1 discloses that the paging group uses the L1 / L2 signaling channel (PDCCH), and the clear identifier (UE-ID) of the mobile terminal can be found on the PCH. Therefore, PCH is transmitted using the L1 / L2 signaling channel. On the other hand, Non-Patent Document 4 describes that a PICH (Paging Indicator channel) that reports that a paging signal addressed to any mobile terminal belonging to a paging group is generated is transmitted using the L1 / L2 signaling channel. Yes.

  A specific example of information that should have been transmitted in other than the first 1 to 3 OFDM symbols (PDSCH) when the subframes in the radio frame of the paging occasion and the MBSFN subframes do not overlap is shown below. In Non-Patent Document 1, when the downlink radio resource of the next control information is assigned by PCH, the control information is mapped to PDSCH. On the other hand, Non-Patent Document 4 describes that PCH is mapped to PDSCH in the same subframe as PICH.

  In the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the allocation of the subframe in the paging-acquisition radio frame and the MBSFN subframe overlap, radio resources other than the first 1-2 OFDM symbols dedicated to MBSFN transmission are used for unicast transmission, that is, paging. It was decided not to use for processing. As a result, even if the subframes in the radio frame of the paging occasion and the MBSFN subframe allocation overlap, the information necessary for the paging process does not become impossible to transmit from the network side to the mobile terminal. Therefore, the effect that the subject of this invention can be solved can be acquired.

  Modification 1 will be described. When it is determined that both are the same subframes using the allocation of the MBSFN subframe received in step ST4502 and the subframes in the radio frame of the paging occasion obtained in step ST4901, the first modification is an embodiment of the first embodiment. The following processing is performed instead of the processing of 24. Information that should have been transmitted in the first 1 to 3 OFDM symbols (L1 / L2 signaling channel) and the radio of the paging occasion when the subframes in the paging occasion radio frame and the MBSFN subframe allocation do not overlap. In the radio frame of the paging occasion obtained in step ST4901 the information that should have been transmitted in other than the first 1 to 3 OFDM symbols (PDSCH) when the allocation of the subframe in the frame and the MBSFN subframe does not overlap Is transmitted using the first to second OFDM symbols of the subframe.

  In the first modification, when the allocation of the subframe in the radio frame of the paging occasion and the MBSFN subframe overlaps, radio resources other than the first 1-2 OFDM symbols dedicated to MBSFN transmission are used for unicast transmission, that is, paging processing. It was decided not to use it. As a result, even if the subframes in the radio frame of the paging occasion and the MBSFN subframe allocation overlap, the information necessary for the paging process does not become impossible to transmit from the network side to the mobile terminal. Therefore, the effect that the subject of this invention can be solved can be acquired.

Embodiment 25. FIG.
In the seventh embodiment, a configuration is disclosed in which an indicator indicating whether or not a paging signal is transmitted on the PMCH of the MBSFN subframe and a paging signal are carried. On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, a channel dedicated to the paging signal is provided in the MBSFN subframe, for example, paging message, 1-bit information indicating paging message allocation information and paging presence / absence information as information for notifying the presence / absence of an incoming call. A configuration in which all paging signals are mapped to a channel dedicated to paging signals (DPCH) has been disclosed. In the present embodiment, a method for mapping a paging signal to both the PMCH and the paging signal dedicated channel in order to transmit the paging signal from the MBMS dedicated cell is disclosed. Specifically, a PMCH and a paging signal dedicated channel are provided in the same MBSFN subframe, a part of the paging signal transmitted in one subframe is mapped to the PMCH, and the rest is mapped to the paging signal dedicated channel for transmission.

  FIG. 100 shows an example of a configuration in which a paging signal dedicated channel and a PMCH are provided in the same MBSFN subframe. A dedicated paging signal channel (DPCH) and PMCH are provided in the same MBSFN subframe. Information indicating the presence / absence of an incoming call is mapped to the paging signal dedicated channel (DPCH) in the MBSFN subframe, and the remaining paging signal, for example, paging message information is mapped to the PMCH. The information indicating whether or not the MBSFN subframe is received is, for example, paging message allocation information. The paging message allocation information may be paging signal allocation information mapped to the PMCH. As shown in the figure, a PCFICH on which information indicating the number of OFDM symbols (k) used for the DPCH may be provided. At this time, the method disclosed in the eighth embodiment can be applied. Further, it is not necessary to provide PCFICH. In this case, the method disclosed in the eighth embodiment, in which the physical area in the DPCH MBSFN subframe is determined, can be applied. For example, the physical area to which the paging signal is mapped is a unique physical area for each MBSFN area and is derived from an MBSFN area unique number (MBSFN area ID) or the like. By making the physical area to which the paging signal is mapped the same physical area for each MBSFN area, it is possible to obtain an effect that the paging signal can be transmitted in multicell. As a result, the SFN synthesis of the paging signal can be performed at the mobile terminal, and the effect of reducing the paging signal reception error at the mobile terminal can be obtained. This leads to effects such as prevention of control delay of the entire mobile communication system and effective utilization of radio resources.

  FIG. 101 shows an example of a method for mapping the paging information to the physical area of each physical channel. The method disclosed in the eighth embodiment can be applied to the method for mapping the paging message allocation information to the paging signal dedicated channel. The base station maps the paging message allocation information to the paging dedicated physical channel for the mobile terminal receiving the incoming call. The base station multiplies the paging message allocation information for each mobile terminal m receiving the incoming call by an identification number unique to the mobile terminal (processing 1). Next, CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is added to the multiplication result (processing 2), and encoding (coding) processing such as encoding, rate matching, and interleaving is performed (processing 3). The result of performing the series of processes is assigned to the control information element unit corresponding to the size of the physical area to be mapped, and connected to each mobile terminal receiving the incoming call (process 4). The concatenated result is subjected to spreading processing, modulation processing, etc. using a spreading code (Scrambling Code) unique to the MBSFN area (processing 5). The modulation process may be specific to the MBSFN area. The results of these processes are mapped from the beginning into the kOFDM symbol (process 6). At that time, the base station derives the required number of OFDM symbols k based on the result of connection for each mobile terminal receiving the incoming call, and performs processing such as encoding on the indicator corresponding to the k. , Map to PCFICH. These are performed by the same method in all cells in the MBSFN area, and multicell transmission is performed in the MBSFN area. In the figure, the number of OFDM symbols (k) for transmitting DPCH is set to 1. DPCH is mapped to the first OFDM symbol of the subframe together with PCFICH and reference symbols.

  In a mobile terminal receiving a signal transmitted by multicell transmission, the number of OFDM symbols used for paging is determined based on the received PCFICH decoding result, and demodulation processing, despreading processing, etc. are performed. After these processes, the image is divided into certain areas, sequentially subjected to deinter